2015 Chevy Tahoe Suburban Owners Manual PDF

2k15_ct_tahoe_sub_22953640A.
ai
(Modern Bridge - Level 2 / #23321109)
Spine = Printer Adjust
(Image set @ 60% Transparency
Color = Black
Date = 11/20/13
2015
Chevrolet 2015i (With RPO AVF) Tahoe/Suburban Owner Manual (GMNA-
Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-8431502) - 2015 - CRC - 6/15/15
2015 Chevrolet (With RPO AVF) Tahoe/Suburban

Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-4 Trademarks and License
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-47 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-55 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-19
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-31
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-44
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-58
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-89
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
2015 Chevrolet (With RPO AVF) Tahoe/Suburban

Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 OnStar Additional
Special Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-11
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on the vehicle
because of optional equipment that Propritaires Canadiens
was not purchased on the vehicle, A French language manual can be
model variants, country obtained from your dealer, at
specifications, features/applications www.helminc.com, or from:
that may not be available in your
The names, logos, emblems, region, or changes subsequent to On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and the printing of this owner manual. ce guide en franais auprs du
vehicle body designs appearing in concessionnaire ou l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited Refer to the purchase savant:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, documentation relating to your
the CHEVROLET Emblem, TAHOE, specific vehicle to confirm the Helm, Incorporated
SUBURBAN, and Z71 are features. Attention: Customer Service
trademarks and/or service marks of 47911 Halyard Drive
Keep this manual in the vehicle for Plymouth, MI 48170
General Motors LLC, its quick reference.
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name General
Motors of Canada Limited for
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 23168271 C Third Printing 2015 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ Warning
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the Warning indicates a hazard that labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an could result in injury or death. text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
{ Caution gauge, or indicator.
Danger, Warning, and Caution indicates a hazard that M : Shown when the owner
Caution could result in property or vehicle manual has additional instructions
damage. or information.
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe * : Shown when the service
hazards and what to do to avoid or manual has additional instructions
reduce them. or information.
0 : Shown when there is more
{ Danger information on another page
see page.
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result
in serious injury or death. A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means Do
Not, Do not do this, or Do not let
this happen.
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart B : Engine Coolant Temperature O : Power

Here are some additional symbols O : Exterior Lamps / : Remote Vehicle Start
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more _ : Flame/Fire Prohibited > : Safety Belt Reminders
information on the symbol, refer to # : Fog Lamps 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
the Index.
. : Fuel Gauge _ : Tow/Haul Mode
0 : Adjustable Pedals + : Fuses d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak
9 : Airbag Readiness Light 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam a : Under Pressure
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) Changer M : Windshield Washer Fluid
g : AudioSteering Wheel Controls (: Heated Steering Wheel
or OnStar (if equipped)
j: LATCH System Child
$ : Brake System Warning Light Restraints
" : Charging System * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
I : Cruise Control : : Oil Pressure
` : Do Not Puncture g : Outside Power Foldaway
^ : Do Not Service Mirrors
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Lane Departure

Steering Wheel Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . 1-23
Instrument Panel Throttle and Brake Pedal Rear Vision
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 (RCTA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-16 Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Active Emergency Braking
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Universal Remote System . . . 1-25
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Vehicle Features Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Performance and Maintenance
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Traction Control/Electronic
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-20 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-26
Heated and Cooled Front Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-21 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-27
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Head Restraint Driver Information Driving for Better Fuel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Forward Collision Alert (FCA) Roadside Assistance
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8-6. 4. Favorite Switches (Out of View). 11. Exterior Lamp Controls on
See Steering Wheel Controls on page 6-1.
2. g Traction Control/Electronic page 5-3.
Stability Control on page 9-44. Fog Lamps on page 6-5 (If
Volume Switches (Out of View). Equipped).
j Power Assist Steps on See Steering Wheel Controls on 12. Parking Brake on page 9-42.
page 2-22 (If Equipped). page 5-3.
13. Four-Wheel Drive on page 9-36
X Parking Assist Button (If 5. Instrument Cluster on page 5-12. (If Equipped).
Equipped). See Assistance 6. Hazard Warning Flashers on 14. Data Link Connector (DLC)
Systems for Parking or Backing page 6-4. (Out of View). See Malfunction
on page 9-58.
7. Shift Lever. See Automatic Indicator Lamp on page 5-22.
@ Lane Departure Warning Transmission on page 9-31. 15. Trailer Brake Control Panel (If
(LDW) on page 9-68 (If Tow/Haul Selector Button. See Equipped). See Towing
Equipped). Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-35. Equipment on page 9-82.
0 Pedal Adjust Switch (If Range Selection Mode (If 16. Cruise Control on page 9-48.
Equipped). See Adjustable Equipped). See Manual Mode on Adaptive Cruise Control on
Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 9-34. page 9-51 (If Equipped).
page 9-19. 8. Light Sensor. See Automatic Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
3. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and Headlamp System on page 6-3. System on page 9-61 (If
Lane-Change Signals on 9. Infotainment on page 7-1. Equipped).
page 6-4.
10. Instrument Panel Illumination Heated Steering Wheel on
Windshield Wiper/Washer on Control on page 6-6. page 5-4 (If Equipped).
page 5-4.
17. Hood Release. See Hood on
page 10-5.
1-4 In Brief
18. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Initial Drive

page 5-2.
19. Horn on page 5-4.
Information
20. Steering Wheel Controls on This section provides a brief
page 5-3. overview about some of the
important features that may or may
21. Heated and Cooled Front not be on your specific vehicle.
Seats on page 3-9 (If
Equipped). For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
22. Rear Climate Control Buttons. found later in this owner manual.
See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 8-1. Remote Keyless Entry Key Access RKE Transmitter with
23. Power Outlets on page 5-9. (RKE) System Remote Start
24. 110 Volt Power Outlet (If The RKE transmitter is used to
Equipped). See Power Outlets remotely lock and unlock the doors
on page 5-9. and it may work up to 60 m (197 ft)
25. Dual Automatic Climate Control away from the vehicle.
System on page 8-1.
In Brief 1-5
7 : Press and release to initiate When the vehicle starts, the parking
vehicle locate. The turn signal lamps will turn on. The doors will be
lamps flash and the horn sounds locked and the climate control
three times. system may come on.
Press 7 and hold for more than The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. After 30 seconds,
three seconds to sound the panic
repeat the steps if a 10-minute
alarm.
extension is desired. Remote start
Press 7 again to cancel the panic can be extended only once.
alarm. Canceling a Remote Start
See Keys (Key Access) on page 2-2 To cancel a remote start, do one of
Keyless Access RKE Transmitter or Keys (Keyless Access) on the following:
with Remote Start page 2-4 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System on page 2-5. . Press and hold / until the
K: Press to unlock the driver door. parking lamps turn off.
Press K again within three seconds Remote Vehicle Start . Turn on the hazard warning
to unlock all remaining doors.
If equipped, the engine can be flashers.
Q: Press to lock all doors. started from outside of the vehicle. . Turn the vehicle on and then off.
Lock and unlock feedback can be Starting the Vehicle See Remote Vehicle Start on
personalized. See Vehicle
page 2-14.
Personalization on page 5-47. 1. Press and release Q.
b: Press twice to open or close 2. Immediately, press and hold /
the liftgate. Press once to stop the for at least four seconds or until
liftgate from moving. the turn signal lamps flash.
c : Press twice to open the
liftglass.
1-6 In Brief
Door Locks Power Door Locks passenger doors and liftgate will
unlock. See Remote Keyless Entry
To lock or unlock the doors from (RKE) System Operation (Key
inside the vehicle: Access) on page 2-5 or Remote
. Press Q or K on a power door Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
lock switch.
page 2-8.
. Pushing down the manual lock
knob on the driver door will lock Liftgate
all doors. Pushing down the lock
knob on a passenger door will
lock that door only.
. Pulling the door handle once will
unlock that door. Pulling the
handle again will unlatch it.
To lock or unlock the doors from Q: Press to lock the doors.
outside the vehicle press Q or K on K: Press to unlock the doors.
the RKE transmitter. See Remote See Door Locks on page 2-16.
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Key Access) on Keyless Access
page 2-5 or Remote Keyless Entry If equipped with Keyless Access,
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless the RKE transmitter must be within
Access) on page 2-8. 1 m (3 ft) of the driver door. To open the liftgate, press K on the
Pressing the button on the driver power door lock switch or press K
door handle will unlock the driver on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
door. If the handle button is pressed transmitter twice to unlock all doors.
again within five seconds, the Press the touch pad on the
In Brief 1-7
underside of the liftgate handle and To close, press l on the bottom If equipped, the front and rear
lift up. See Remote Keyless Entry of the liftgate next to the latch. windows have an express-down
(RKE) System Operation (Key feature. The front windows have an
Access) on page 2-5 or Remote To disable the power liftgate express-up feature. See Windows
Keyless Entry (RKE) System function, select OFF on the liftgate on page 2-31 and Power Windows
Operation (Keyless Access) on switch. See Liftgate on page 2-18. on page 2-32.
page 2-8.
Use the pull cup to lower and close
Windows Seat Adjustment
the liftgate. Do not press the touch Manual Seats
pad while closing the liftgate. This
will cause the liftgate to be
unlatched.
Power Liftgate Operation
If equipped with a power liftgate, the
switch is on the overhead console.
The vehicle must be in P (Park).
Choose the power liftgate mode by
selecting MAX or 3/4. Press 8 on
the overhead console. On the RKE
transmitter press b twice quickly. The power windows work when the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
Pressing and releasing b while the ACCESSORY, or in Retained To adjust a manual seat:
liftgate is moving stops the liftgate. Accessory Power (RAP). Press the
Pressing again reverses the 1. Pull the handle at the front of
switch to open, pull the switch to the seat.
direction. close. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9-27.
1-8 In Brief
2. Slide the seat to the desired

. If equipped, raise or lower the If equipped, move the lever up or
position and release the handle. front part of the seat cushion by down repeatedly to increase or
moving the front of the control decrease lumbar support.
3. Try to move the seat back and up or down.
forth to be sure it is locked in See Lumbar Adjustment on
place.
. If equipped, raise or lower the page 3-4.
seat by moving the rear of the
See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. control up or down. Power Lumbar
Power Seats See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3-4.
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Lumbar
To adjust the power lumbar support,

if equipped:
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
. Press and hold the control
. Move the seat forward or
forward to increase or rearward
rearward by sliding the control
to decrease upper and lower
forward or rearward.
lumbar support at the same time.
In Brief 1-9
. If equipped, press and hold the
If equipped, the SET, 1, 2, and B See Second Row Seats on
control up to increase upper page 3-11.
(Exit) buttons on the driver door are
lumbar support and decrease
used to manually store and recall
lower lumbar support. Third Row Seats
memory settings for the driver seat,
Press and hold the control down outside mirrors, power tilt and If equipped, third row seatbacks can
to increase lower lumbar support telescoping steering column (if be folded.
and decrease upper lumbar equipped), and adjustable pedals (if
support. equipped). To fold the third row seatback:
See Lumbar Adjustment on Automatic Memory Recall and/or 1. Open the liftgate.
page 3-4. Easy Exit Recall features may be 2. Make sure that there is nothing
enabled in the personalization under, in front of, or on the seat.
Memory Features menus to automatically recall the
3. Make sure the second row
positions previously stored to the 1,
seatbacks are in the upright
2, and B buttons. position.
See Memory Seats on page 3-7 and 4. Fully lower the head restraints.
Vehicle Personalization on See Head Restraints on
page 5-47. page 3-2.
Second Row Seats

The second row seatbacks can be
folded for additional cargo space,
or the seats can be folded and
tumbled for easy entry/exit to the
third row seats (if equipped).
The seatbacks also recline.
1-10 In Brief
5. Disconnect the rear safety belt 7. Stow the mini-latch in the holder 8. Pull up on the lever on the back
mini-latch using a key in the slot in the headliner. of the seat to release the
on the mini-buckle, and let the seatback.
belt retract into the headliner. 9. Push the seatback forward to
lay flat.
10. Repeat the steps for the other
seatback, if desired.
See Third Row Seats on page 3-16.
In Brief 1-11
Heated and Cooled Front . Press A to cool the driver or Safety Belts
passenger seat.
Seats
See Heated and Cooled Front Seats
on page 3-9.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
Heated and Cooled Seats Shown, while keeping the seat and the head Refer to the following sections for
restraint height in the proper important information on how to use
Heated Seats Similar
position. safety belts properly:
If equipped, the buttons are on the See Head Restraints on page 3-2 . Safety Belts on page 3-20.
center stack below the climate and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.
control system. To operate, the
. How to Wear Safety Belts
engine must be running. Properly on page 3-21.
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-22.
. Press I to heat the driver or
passenger seatback only.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
. Press J to heat the driver or page 3-51.
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
1-12 In Brief
Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status Exterior Mirrors

indicator will light on the overhead
System console when the vehicle is started. Power Mirrors
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5-20.
Mirror Adjustment
Interior Mirror
United States Adjustment
Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
view of the area behind the vehicle.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Push the tab forward for daytime
Shown with Power Folding
use and pull it rearward for
nighttime use to avoid glare of the Mirrors, Manual Folding Similar
Canada and Mexico
headlamps from behind. To adjust the mirrors:
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the front outboard Automatic Dimming Rearview 1. Press (1) or (2) to select the
passenger frontal airbag under Mirror driver or passenger side mirror.
certain conditions. No other airbag If equipped, the mirror automatically 2. Press the arrows on the control
is affected by the passenger dims to reduce the glare of pad to move each mirror in the
sensing system. See Passenger headlamps from behind. The desired direction.
Sensing System on page 3-37 dimming feature comes on when the 3. Press either (1) or (2) again to
vehicle is started. deselect the mirror.
See Power Mirrors on page 2-28.
In Brief 1-13
Folding Mirrors 2. Press { again to return the To adjust the steering wheel:
The outside mirrors can be folded mirrors to the driving position. 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
inward to prevent damage when Heated Mirrors the lever.
going through an automatic car 2. Move the steering wheel up
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward If equipped, pressing 1 also heats or down.
the vehicle. See Folding Mirrors on the outside mirrors.
page 2-28. 3. Release the lever to lock the
See Rear Window Defogger under wheel in place.
Power Folding Mirrors Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8-1. Tilt and Telescoping Steering
Wheel
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
To adjust power folding mirrors,

if equipped:
1. Press { to fold the mirrors
inward.
1-14 In Brief
To adjust the tilt and telescoping To adjust the power tilt and
steering wheel, if equipped: telescoping steering wheel,
1. Push the lever (1) down to move if equipped:
the steering wheel forward or Press the control to move the
rearward. Lift the lever (1) up to steering wheel up and down or
lock the wheel in place. forward and rearward.
2. Hold the steering wheel and pull Do not adjust the steering wheel
the lever (2) toward you to move while driving.
the steering wheel up or down.
Release the lever (2) to lock the Throttle and Brake Pedal
wheel into place.
Adjustment
Power Tilt and Telescoping If equipped, the position of the The switch used to adjust the
Steering Wheel throttle and brake pedals can be pedals is to the left of the steering
changed. wheel.
Press the switch to the left to move
the pedals closer to your body.
Press the switch to the right to move
the pedals away.
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake
Pedal on page 9-19.
The vehicle may have a memory
function, which lets pedal settings
be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seats on page 3-7.
In Brief 1-15
Interior Lighting ON: Turns all dome lamps on.
Dome Lamps Reading Lamps
Press m or n next to each reading

lamp to turn it on or off.
For more information about interior
lighting, see Instrument Panel
Illumination Control on page 6-6.
There are dome lamps in the There are reading lamps in the
overhead console and the headliner, overhead console and the headliner,
if equipped. if equipped. To operate, the ignition
must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY
To change the dome lamp settings, or ON/RUN position or using
press the following: Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
OFF: Turns the lamps off, even
when a door is open.
DOOR: The lamps come on
automatically when a door is
opened.
1-16 In Brief
Exterior Lighting AUTO: Automatically turns on the The windshield wipers are controlled
headlamps, parking lamps, by turning the band with z
taillamps, instrument panel lights, FRONT on it.
roof marker lamps (if equipped), and
license plate lamps. 1: Fast wipes.
; : Turns on the parking lamps w: Slow wipes.
including all lamps, except the
headlamps.
5 : Turns on the headlamps with
the parking lamps and instrument
panel lights.
See:
. Exterior Lamp Controls on 3 INT: Use this setting for
The exterior lamp control is on the page 6-1 intermittent wipes or Rainsense.
instrument panel to the left of the . Fog Lamps on page 6-5 For intermittent wipes, turn the z
steering wheel. FRONT band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
There are four positions. Windshield Wiper/Washer wipes.
O : Turns off the automatic
headlamps and Daytime Running To turn on Rainsense, press z
Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp AUTO on the lever, then turn the
control to the off position again to z FRONT band on the wiper
turn the automatic headlamps or lever to adjust the sensitivity.
DRL back on. . Turn the band up to a higher INT
setting for more sensitivity to
The windshield wiper control is on moisture.
the turn signal lever.
In Brief 1-17
. Turn the band down to the lower
INT setting for less sensitivity to
Climate Controls 9. Rear Climate Control Power
Button
moisture. This system controls the heating,
cooling, and ventilation. 10. Rear AUTO (Automatic
Move the band out of the 3 INT Operation)
position to deactivate Rainsense. 11. Front Climate Control Power
OFF: Turns the windshield Button
wipers off. 12. Rear Fan Control
8: For a single wipe, turn to 8, 13. Rear Air Delivery Mode Control
then release. For several wipes,
hold the band on 8 longer. 14. Rear Temperature Control
15. RCTRL (Rear Climate Control
Lm: Push the paddle at the top of
Lockout)
the lever to spray washer fluid on
the windshield. 16. Rear Window Defogger
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on 17. SYNC (Synchronized
page 5-4. Temperature)
1. Driver Temperature Control
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
2. A/C (Air Conditioning) System on page 8-1 and Rear
3. Air Delivery Mode Controls Climate Control System on page 8-5
(if equipped).
4. Fan Control
5. Defrost
6. Passenger Temperature Control
7. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
8. Air Recirculation
1-18 In Brief
Transmission 2. Press the plus/minus buttons on Automatic Transfer Case

the shift lever to select the
Range Selection Mode desired range of gears for
current driving conditions. See
Manual Mode on page 9-34.
While using Range Selection Mode,
cruise control and the Tow/Haul
Mode can be used.
Grade Braking is not available when
Range Selection Mode is active.
The Range Selection Mode switch, See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-35.
if equipped, is on the shift lever.
1. To enable the Range Selection Four-Wheel Drive
feature, move the shift lever to Two Speed Transfer Case
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,
the M (Manual) position. The you can send the engine's driving
current range will appear next to power to all four wheels for extra
the M. This is the highest traction.
attainable range with all lower
gears accessible. As an
example, when 5 (Fifth) gear is
selected, 1 (First) through
5 (Fifth) gears are available.
Single Speed Transfer Case

In Brief 1-19
The transfer case knob is to the left N (Neutral): Vehicles with a two Vehicle Features
of the steering wheel. Use this knob speed automatic transfer case have
to shift into and out of the different a N (Neutral) position. Shift the
four-wheel drive modes. transfer case to N (Neutral) only Infotainment System
when towing the vehicle. See The base radio information is
2 m : This setting is used for driving Recreational Vehicle Towing on included in this manual. See the
in most street and highway page 10-83 or Towing the Vehicle infotainment manual for information
situations. on page 10-83. on the uplevel radios, audio players,
AUTO: This setting is ideal for use See Four-Wheel Drive on phone, navigation system, Rear
when road surface traction page 9-36. Seat Entertainment (RSE), and
conditions are variable. voice or speech recognition,
if equipped.
4 m : Use the Four-Wheel Drive
High position when extra traction is Radio(s)
needed, such as on snowy or icy
roads or in most off-road situations. O : Press to turn the system on.
Press and hold to turn it off. When
4 n : Vehicles with a two speed on, press to mute; press again to
automatic transfer case have a unmute. Turn to increase or
Four-Wheel Drive Low position. This decrease the volume.
setting sends maximum power to all
RADIO: Press to choose between
four wheels. You might choose 4 n if FM, AM, and SiriusXM,
you are driving off-road in deep if equipped.
sand, mud, or snow, and while
climbing or descending steep hills. MEDIA: Press to change the audio
source between CD, USB, SD card,
and AUX.
{: Press to go to the Home Page.
1-20 In Brief
MENU: Press to select a menu. Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices

g: Press to seek the previous Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite This vehicle may have a 3.5 mm
station or track. radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack, SD card
l : Press to seek the next station satellite radio subscription can reader, and two USB ports in the
or track. receive SiriusXM programming. center stack or inside the front seat
armrest. External devices such as
See Overview on page 7-3 about SiriusXM Satellite Radio iPods, laptop computers, MP3
these and other radio features. Service players, CD changers, and USB
Storing Radio Station Presets SiriusXM is a satellite radio service storage devices may be connected,
based in the 48 contiguous United depending on the audio system.
Up to 25 preset stations from all
bands can be stored in the favorite States and 10 Canadian provinces. See USB Port on page 7-14, SD
lists in any order. Up to five stations SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide Card Reader on page 7-17,
can be stored in each favorite page variety of programming and Auxiliary Jack on page 7-17.
and the number of favorite pages commercial-free music, coast to
can be set. coast, and in digital-quality sound. Bluetooth
A fee is required to receive the
To store the station to a position in SiriusXM service. The Bluetooth system allows users
the list, while on the active source with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
For more information refer to:
main page, such as AM, FM, to make and receive hands-free
or SiriusXM (if equipped), press and . www.siriusxm.com or call calls using the vehicle audio system
hold a favorites/soft key button on 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.). and controls.
the faceplate. . www.xmradio.ca or call The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
See Storing Radio Station Presets 1-877-209-0079 (Canada). must be paired with the in-vehicle
under AM-FM Radio on page 7-8. See Satellite Radio on page 7-9. Bluetooth system before it can be
used in the vehicle. Not all phones
Setting the Clock will support all functions.
See Clock on page 5-8.
In Brief 1-21
See Bluetooth (Overview) on Overview on page 7-21, Bluetooth

page 7-19 or Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-19 or
(Infotainment Controls - Base Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
Radio) on page 7-21 or Bluetooth Base Radio) on page 7-21 or
(Voice Recognition - Base Radio) on Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base
page 7-25. Radio) on page 7-25, or Bluetooth
(Overview) in the infotainment
Steering Wheel Controls manual.
i : Press to reject an incoming
call, or end a current call. Press to
mute or unmute the infotainment
system when not on a call.
o or p : Press to go to the The favorite and volume switches
previous or next menu option. are on the back of the steering
wheel.
w or x : Press to go to the next
or previous selection. 1. Favorite: When on a radio
source, press to select the next
V : Press to select a highlighted or previous favorite. When on a
menu option. media source, press to select
the next or previous track.
If equipped, some audio controls 2. Volume: Press to increase or

can be adjusted at the steering decrease the volume.
wheel. See Steering Wheel Controls on
g:
If equipped with OnStar or a page 5-3.
Bluetooth system, press to interact
with those systems. See OnStar
1-22 In Brief
Cruise Control accelerate. If cruise control is

already active, use to increase
vehicle speed.
*: Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
See Cruise Control on page 9-48 or
Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 9-51 (if equipped).
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC display is in the instrument
w or x : Press to move up or
down in a list.
cluster. It shows the status of many
5 : Press to turn the system on or vehicle systems. o or p : Press to move between
off. The indicator light is white when the interactive display zones in the
cruise control is on and turns off If the vehicle has the base level
cluster.
when cruise control is off. instrument cluster, the trip odometer
reset stem is used to operate V : Press to open a menu or select
SET : Press briefly to set the the DIC. a menu item. Press and hold to
speed and activate cruise control. reset values on certain screens.
If cruise control is already active, If the vehicle has the uplevel
instrument cluster, the right steering See Driver Information Center (DIC)
use to decrease vehicle speed.
wheel controls are used to operate (Base Level) on page 5-29 or Driver
+RES: If there is a set speed in the DIC. Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
memory, press to resume that on page 5-31.
speed or press and hold to
In Brief 1-23
Forward Collision Alert change to amber and flash. In Rear Vision

addition, beeps will sound or the
(FCA) System driver seat will pulse.
Camera (RVC)
If equipped, FCA may help avoid or See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) If equipped, RVC displays a view of
reduce the harm caused by on page 9-68. the area behind the vehicle on the
front-end crashes. FCA provides a center stack display when the
green indicator, V, when a vehicle vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) to
Lane Change Alert (LCA) aid with parking and low-speed
is detected ahead. This indicator
displays amber if you follow a If equipped, the LCA system is a backing maneuvers.
vehicle much too closely. When lane-changing aid that assists See Assistance Systems for Parking
approaching a vehicle ahead too drivers with avoiding lane change or Backing on page 9-58.
quickly, FCA provides a flashing red crashes that occur with moving
alert on the windshield and rapidly vehicles in the side blind zone (or
spot) areas or with vehicles rapidly
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
beeps or pulses the driver seat.
approaching these areas from (RCTA) System
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) behind. The LCA warning display
System on page 9-61. If equipped, the RCTA system uses
will light up in the corresponding a triangle with an arrow displayed
outside side mirror and will flash if on the RVC screen to warn of traffic
Lane Departure the turn signal is on. The Side Blind behind your vehicle that may cross
Warning (LDW) Zone Alert (SBZA) system is your vehicle's path while in
included as part of the LCA system. R (Reverse). In addition, beeps will
If equipped, LDW may help avoid
unintentional lane departures at See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) sound, or the driver seat will pulse.
speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or on page 9-65 and Lane Change See Assistance Systems for Parking
greater. LDW uses a camera sensor Alert (LCA) on page 9-66. or Backing on page 9-58.
to detect the lane markings. The
LDW light, @, is green if a lane
marking is detected. If the vehicle
departs the lane, the light will
1-24 In Brief
. One on the rear of the center
Parking Assist Collision Preparation (ACP) System.
storage console.
These systems can provide a boost
If equipped, Rear Parking Assist to braking or automatically brake the . One in the third row seat on the
(RPA) uses sensors on the rear vehicle to help avoid or lessen the driver side.
bumper to assist with parking and severity of crashes when driving in a
avoiding objects while in forward gear.
. One in the rear cargo area on
R (Reverse). It operates at speeds the passenger side.
less than 8 km/h (5 mph). RPA may See Active Emergency Braking
System on page 9-63. Vehicles with Bench Seats
display a warning triangle on the
Rear Vision Camera screen and a . One on the center stack below
graphic on the instrument cluster to Power Outlets the climate control system.
provide the object distance. In . One in the storage area on the
addition, multiple beeps or seat Power Outlets 12 Volt Direct
Current bench seat.
pulses may occur if very close to an
object. Accessory power outlets can be
. One on the rear of the center
used to plug in electrical equipment, armrest storage.
The vehicle may also have the Front
Parking Assist system. such as a cell phone, MP3 . One in the third row seat area on
player, etc. the driver side.
See Assistance Systems for Parking
or Backing on page 9-58. The vehicle may have up to five . One in the rear cargo area on
accessory power outlets: the passenger side.
Active Emergency Vehicles with a Center Console Lift the cover to access and replace
Braking System when not in use.
. One in front of the cupholders on
If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise the center console. See Power Outlets on page 5-9.
Control (ACC) it also has the Active . One inside the center storage
Emergency Braking System, which console.
includes Intelligent Brake
Assist (IBA) and the Automatic
In Brief 1-25
Universal Remote System Sunroof Vent: From the closed position,

press the rear of switch (2) to vent
the sunroof.
Open/Close: To open the sunroof,
press and hold switch (1) until the
sunroof reaches the desired
position. Press and hold the front of
switch (1) to close it.
If equipped with the Universal Express-Open/Express-Close:
Remote system, these buttons will To express-open the sunroof, fully
be in the front overhead console. press and release the rear of
switch (1) until the sunroof reaches
This system provides a way to
the desired position. To
replace up to three remote control
express-close the sunroof, fully
transmitters used to activate
1. Open or Close press and release the front of
devices such as garage door
2. Vent switch (1). Press the switch again to
openers, security systems, and
stop it.
home automation devices. On vehicles with a sunroof, the
sunroof only operates when the When the sunroof is opened, an air
See Universal Remote System on
ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or deflector will automatically raise.
page 5-55.
ON/RUN, or when Retained The air deflector will retract when
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. the sunroof is closed.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9-27.
1-26 In Brief
The sunroof also has a sunshade

. To turn off both traction control
which can be pulled forward to block
Performance and and StabiliTrak, press and hold
sun rays. The sunshade must be Maintenance g until i and g illuminate in the
opened and closed manually. instrument cluster and the
Traction Control/ appropriate DIC message
If an object is in the path of the displays. See Ride Control
sunroof while it is closing, the Electronic Stability System Messages on page 5-42.
anti-pinch feature will detect the Control
object and stop the sunroof. . Press and release g again to
The vehicle has a traction control turn on both systems.
See Sunroof on page 2-34.
system that limits wheel spin and
the StabiliTrak system that assists StabiliTrak will automatically turn on
with directional control of the vehicle if the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h
in difficult driving conditions. Both (35 mph). Traction control will
systems come on automatically remain off.
when the vehicle is started and See Traction Control/Electronic
begins to move. Stability Control on page 9-44.
. To turn off traction control, press
and release g on the instrument
Tire Pressure Monitor
panel to the left of the steering This vehicle may have a Tire
wheel. The traction off light i Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
displays in the instrument
cluster. The appropriate DIC
message displays. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5-42.
In Brief 1-27
The low tire pressure warning light Engine Oil Life System The oil life system can also be reset
alerts to a significant loss in as follows:
pressure of one of the vehicle's The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
tires. If the warning light comes on, the engine off.
stop as soon as possible and inflate and, on most vehicles, displays a
the tires to the recommended DIC message when it is necessary 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal
pressure shown on the Tire and to change the engine oil and filter. slowly three times within
Loading Information label. See The oil life system should be reset five seconds.
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-14. to 100% only following an oil
3. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
The warning light will remain on until change.
on the DIC. If the display shows
the tire pressure is corrected. Resetting the Oil Life System 100%, the system is reset.
The low tire pressure warning light To reset the engine oil life system: See Engine Oil Life System on
may come on in cool weather when page 10-10.
the vehicle is first started, and then 1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This on the DIC. See Driver
may be an early indicator that the Information Center (DIC) (Base E85 or FlexFuel
tire pressures are getting low and Level) on page 5-29 or Driver Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can
the tires need to be inflated to the Information Center (DIC) use either unleaded gasoline or
proper pressure. (Uplevel) on page 5-31. If the ethanol fuel containing up to 85%
vehicle does not have DIC ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuel
The TPMS does not replace normal buttons, the vehicle must be in on page 9-71. For all other vehicles,
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain P (Park) to access this display. use only the unleaded gasoline
the correct tire pressures.
2. Press and hold the V button on described under Fuel on page 9-69.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10-55. the DIC, or the trip odometer
reset stem if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, for
several seconds. The oil life will
change to 100%.
1-28 In Brief
Replace the vehicle's tires with

OnStar
.
Driving for Better Fuel the same TPC Spec number
Economy molded into the tire's sidewall This vehicle may be equipped with a
Driving habits can affect fuel near the size. comprehensive, in-vehicle system
mileage. Here are some driving tips that can connect to a live OnStar
. Follow recommended scheduled
to get the best fuel economy Advisor for Emergency, Security,
maintenance.
possible. Navigation, Connection, and
Diagnostic Services. OnStar
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate Roadside Assistance services may require a paid
smoothly. Program subscription. See OnStar Overview
. Brake gradually and avoid U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 on page 14-1.
abrupt stops.
TTY Users (U.S. Only):
. Avoid idling the engine for long 1-888-889-2438
periods of time.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
. When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use New Chevrolet owners are
cruise control. automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance Program.
. Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when See Roadside Assistance Program
conditions require. on page 13-5.
. Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-17 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Windows Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Doors
Keys and Locks Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Interior Mirrors
Keys (Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-30
Keys (Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . 2-4 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Vehicle Security Automatic Dimming Rearview
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-23 Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
System Operation (Key Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Immobilizer Operation (Key Windows
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
System Operation (Keyless Immobilizer Operation Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 (Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . 2-14 Exterior Mirrors Roof
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks Warning (Continued)

Keys (Key Access) the engine will shut off, braking
and steering power assist may be
{ Warning impacted, and airbags may not
deploy. To reduce the risk of
Leaving children in a vehicle with unintentional rotation of the
an ignition key or Remote ignition key, do not change the
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is way the ignition key and Remote
dangerous and children or others Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
could be seriously injured or if equipped, are connected to the
killed. They could operate the provided key rings.
power window or other controls or { Warning
make the vehicle move. The The ignition key and key rings, and
windows will function with the key If the key is unintentionally
RKE transmitter, if equipped, are
in the ignition or with the RKE rotated while the vehicle is
designed to work together as a
transmitter in the vehicle, and running, the ignition could be
system to reduce the risk of
children or others could be caught moved out of the RUN position. unintentionally moving the key out
in the path of a closing window. This could be caused by heavy of the RUN position. The ignition
Do not leave children in a vehicle items hanging from the key ring, key has a small hole to allow
with the ignition key or an RKE or by large or long items attached attachment of the provided key ring.
transmitter. to the key ring that could be It is important that any replacement
contacted by the driver or ignition keys have a small hole. See
steering wheel. If the ignition your dealer if a replacement key is
moves out of the RUN position, required.
(Continued)
The combination and size of the The key is used for the driver door, If a key is lost or damaged, see your
rings that came with your keys were ignition, and glove box. dealer to have a new key made.
specifically selected for your
vehicle. The rings are connected to Programming Keys Programming without a
the key like two links of a chain to Recognized Key (Key
Follow these procedures to program Vehicles Only)
reduce the risk of unintentionally up to eight keys to the vehicle.
moving the key out of the RUN Program a new key to the vehicle
position. Do not add any additional Programming with a Recognized when a recognized key is not
items to the ring attached to the Key (Key Vehicles Only) available. Canadian regulations
ignition key. Attach additional items To program a new key: require that Canadian owners see
only to the second ring, and limit their dealer.
1. Insert the original, already
added items to a few essential keys If there are no currently recognized
programmed key in the ignition
or small, light items no larger than keys available, follow this procedure
and turn the key to the ON/RUN
an RKE transmitter. to program the first key.
position.
2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and This procedure will take
remove the key. approximately 30 minutes to
complete for the first key. The
3. Insert the new key to be
vehicle must be off and all of the
programmed and turn it to the
keys must be with you.
ON/RUN position within
five seconds. 1. Insert the new vehicle key into
the ignition.
The security light will turn off
once the key has been 2. Turn to ON/RUN. The security
programmed. light will come on.
4. Repeat Steps 13 if additional 3. Wait 10 minutes until the
keys are to be programmed. security light turns off.
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
5. Repeat Steps 24 two more Keys (Keyless Access)

times. After the third time, turn to
ON/RUN; the key is learned and
all previously known keys will no { Warning
longer work with the vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle with
Remaining keys can be learned by an ignition key or Remote
following the procedure in Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
Programming with a Recognized dangerous and children or others
Key (Key Vehicles Only). could be seriously injured or
The key has a bar-coded key tag killed. They could operate the
that the dealer or qualified locksmith power window or other controls or
can use to make new keys. Store make the vehicle move. The
this information in a safe place, not windows will function with the key
in the vehicle. in the ignition or with the RKE
See your dealer if a replacement transmitter in the vehicle, and
key or additional key is needed. children or others could be caught
in the path of a closing window.
If it becomes difficult to turn a key, Do not leave children in a vehicle
inspect the key blade for debris. with the ignition key or an RKE
Periodically clean with a brush transmitter.
or pick.
With an active OnStar subscription,
an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
Overview on page 14-1. If the vehicle has the Keyless
Access system, there is a key in the
transmitter.
This key is used for the driver door With an active OnStar subscription, Remote Keyless Entry
and glove box. an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
(RKE) System Operation
Overview on page 14-1. (Key Access)
The RKE transmitter functions may
Remote Keyless Entry work up to 60 m (197 ft) away from
(RKE) System the vehicle.
See Radio Frequency Statement on Other conditions can affect the
page 13-12. performance of the transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
If there is a decrease in the RKE System on page 2-5.
operating range:
. Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
If the vehicle has the Keyless
Access system, the transmitter has
. Check the location. Other
a button on the side of the vehicles or objects may be
transmitter used to remove the key. blocking the signal.
Do not pull the key out without . Check the transmitter's battery.
pressing the button. See Battery Replacement later
See your dealer if a replacement in this section.
key or additional key is needed. . If the transmitter is still not
If it becomes difficult to turn a key, working correctly, see your
inspect the key blade for debris. dealer or a qualified technician
Periodically clean with a brush for service.
or pick.
when Q is pressed again within If enabled through the DIC, the

three seconds. See Vehicle exterior lamps may turn on. See
Personalization on page 5-47. Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
Pressing Q arms the alarm system.
See Vehicle Alarm System on Pressing K on the RKE transmitter
page 2-23. disarms the alarm system. See
Vehicle Alarm System on
If equipped with auto mirror folding, page 2-23.
pressing and holding Q for
If equipped with auto mirror folding,
one second will fold the mirrors. The
auto mirror folding feature will not pressing and holding K for
operate unless it is enabled. See one second will unfold the mirrors.
With Remote Start (without Vehicle Personalization on The auto mirror folding feature will
Remote Start Similar) page 5-47. not operate unless it is enabled.
/ : If equipped, press and release See Vehicle Personalization on
K : Press once to unlock only the page 5-47.
Q, then immediately press and hold driver door. If K is pressed again
/ until the turn signal flash or for at within three seconds, all remaining
b : Press twice to open or close
least four seconds. The engine may the liftgate. Press once to stop the
be started from outside the vehicle doors unlock. The interior lamps liftgate from moving.
using the RKE transmitter. See may come on and stay on for
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-14. 20 seconds or until the ignition is c : Press twice to open the
turned on. liftglass.
Q: Press to lock all doors.
If enabled through the DIC, the turn 7 : Press and release to initiate
If enabled through the Driver signal lamps flash twice to indicate vehicle locate. The turn signal
Information Center (DIC), the turn unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle lamps flash and the horn sounds
signal lamps flash once to indicate Personalization on page 5-47. three times.
locking has occurred. If enabled
through the DIC, the horn chirps
Press and hold 7 for more than

three seconds to activate the panic
{ Caution
alarm. The turn signal lamps flash When replacing the battery, do
and the horn sounds repeatedly for not touch any of the circuitry on
30 seconds. The alarm turns off the transmitter. Static from your
when the ignition is moved to ON/
body could damage the
RUN or 7 is pressed again. The transmitter.
ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
the panic alarm to work.
To replace the battery:
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed 2. Press and slide the battery down
to this vehicle will work. If a toward the pocket of the
transmitter is lost or stolen, a transmitter in the direction of the
replacement can be purchased and key ring. Do not use a metal
programmed through your dealer. object
Each vehicle can have up to 3. Remove the battery.
eight transmitters programmed to it.
See your dealer for transmitter 4. Insert the new battery, positive
programming. side facing up. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Battery Replacement 5. Push together the transmitter
Replace the battery in the 1. Separate and remove the back back cover top side first, and
transmitter soon if the REPLACE cover of the transmitter with a then the bottom toward the
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY flat, thin object, such as a coin. key ring.
message displays in the DIC.
Remote Keyless Entry when Q is pressed again within

(RKE) System Operation three seconds. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5-47.
(Keyless Access)
The Keyless Access system allows Pressing Q arms the alarm system.
for vehicle entry when the See Vehicle Alarm System on
transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft). See page 2-23.
Keyless Access Operation later in If equipped with auto mirror folding,
this section. pressing and holding Q for
The RKE transmitter functions may one second will fold the mirrors. The
work up to 60 m (197 ft) away from auto mirror folding feature will not
the vehicle. operate unless it is enabled. See
With Remote Start (without Vehicle Personalization on
Other conditions can affect the Remote Start Similar) page 5-47.
performance of the transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) / : If equipped, press and release K : Press once to unlock only the
System on page 2-5. Q, then immediately press and hold driver door. If K is pressed again
/ until the turn signal flash or for at within three seconds, all remaining
least four seconds. The engine may
be started from outside the vehicle doors unlock. The interior lamps
using the RKE transmitter. See may come on and stay on for
Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-14. 20 seconds or until the ignition is
turned on.
Q: Press to lock all doors.
If enabled through the DIC, the turn
If enabled through the Driver signal lamps flash twice to indicate
Information Center (DIC), the turn unlocking has occurred. If enabled
signal lamps flash once to indicate through the DIC, the exterior lamps
locking has occurred. If enabled may turn on. See Vehicle
through the DIC, the horn chirps Personalization on page 5-47.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter RUN or 7 is pressed again. The again within five seconds, all
disarms the alarm system. See ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for passenger doors and the liftgate will
Vehicle Alarm System on the panic alarm to work. unlock.
page 2-23.
Keyless Access Operation
If equipped with auto mirror folding,
The Keyless Access system allows
pressing and holding K for for doors and the liftgate to be
one second will unfold the mirrors. accessed without pressing the RKE
The auto mirror folding feature will transmitter button. The RKE
not operate unless it is enabled. transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft)
See Vehicle Personalization on of the door being opened. If the
page 5-47. vehicle has this feature, there will be
b : Press twice to open or close a button on the outside door
the liftgate. Press once to stop the handles.
liftgate from moving. Keyless Access can be
c: Press twice to open the programmed to unlock all doors on Driver Side Shown, Passenger
liftglass. the first lock/unlock press from the Side Similar
driver door. See Vehicle
7 : Press and release to initiate Personalization on page 5-47.
Pressing the lock/unlock button will
vehicle locate. The turn signal cause all doors to lock if any of the
lamps flash and the horn sounds Keyless Unlocking/Locking from following occur:
three times. the Driver Door . It has been more than
Press and hold 7 for more than When the doors are locked and the five seconds since the first lock/
three seconds to activate the panic RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) unlock button press.
alarm. The turn signal lamps flash of the door handle, pressing the . Two lock/unlock button presses
and the horn sounds repeatedly for lock/unlock button on the driver door were used to unlock all doors.
30 seconds. The alarm turns off handle will unlock the driver door.
when the ignition is moved to ON/ If the lock/unlock button is pressed

. Any vehicle door has been If other electronic devices interfere Keyless Liftgate Opening
opened and all doors are now with the RKE transmitter signal, the
closed. Press the touch pad on the
vehicle may not detect the RKE underside of the liftgate handle to
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from transmitter inside the vehicle. open the liftgate when all doors are
the Passenger Doors If passive locking is enabled, the unlocked, or when all doors are
doors may lock with the RKE locked and the transmitter is within
When the doors are locked and the transmitter inside the vehicle. Do
RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) 1 m (3 ft).
not leave the RKE transmitter in an
of the door handle, pressing the unattended vehicle. Keyless Liftglass Opening
lock/unlock button on a passenger
door handle will unlock all doors. Temporary Disable of Passive Press the exterior liftglass button to
Pressing the lock/unlock button will Locking Feature open the liftglass when all doors are
cause all doors to lock if any of the unlocked, or when all doors are
Temporarily disable passive locking locked and the transmitter is within
following occur:
by pressing and holding K on the 1 m (3 ft).
. The lock/unlock button was used interior door switch with a door open
to unlock all doors. for at least four seconds, or until See Liftgate on page 2-18.
. Any vehicle door has been three chimes are heard. Passive Keyed Access
opened and all doors are now locking will then remain disabled
To access a vehicle with a dead
closed. until Q on the interior door is transmitter battery, see Door Locks
pressed, or until the vehicle is on page 2-16.
Passive Locking turned on.
If equipped with Keyless Access, Programming Transmitters to
To customize the doors to
this feature will lock the vehicle automatically lock when exiting the the Vehicle
several seconds after all doors are vehicle, see Remote Lock, Unlock, Only RKE transmitters programmed
closed, if the vehicle is off and at Start under Vehicle Personalization to the vehicle will work. If a
least one RKE transmitter has been on page 5-47. transmitter is lost or stolen, a
removed from the interior, or none replacement can be purchased and
remain in the interior. programmed through your dealer.
The vehicle can be reprogrammed 3. Insert the vehicle key into the front of the storage area next to
so that lost or stolen transmitters no key lock cylinder on the driver the center console storage area
longer work. Each vehicle can have door handle. Then turn the key between the driver and front
up to eight transmitters matched counterclockwise, to the unlock passenger seats.
to it. position, five times within 5. Press the ENGINE START/
10 seconds. STOP button. When the
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter (Keyless Access The Driver Information Center transmitter is learned, the DIC
Vehicles Only) (DIC) displays READY FOR display will show that it is ready
REMOTE#2, 3, 4, ETC. to program the next transmitter.
A new transmitter can be
programmed to the vehicle when 6. Remove the transmitter from the
there is one recognized transmitter. transmitter pocket and press K
To program, the vehicle must be off or Q on the transmitter.
and all transmitters, both currently
To program additional
recognized and new, must be
transmitters, repeat Steps 46.
with you.
When all additional transmitters
1. Remove the key from the
are programmed, press and hold
recognized transmitter.
the ENGINE START/STOP
2. Place the recognized button for approximately
transmitter(s) in the cupholder or 12 seconds to exit
on the passenger seat. programming mode.
4. Place the new transmitter in the 7. Return the key back into the
transmitter pocket/insert. transmitter.
Open the center console storage
area and the storage tray. The
transmitter pocket/insert is in
Programming without a 3. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC

Recognized Transmitter (Keyless displays PRESS ENGINE
Access Vehicles Only) START BUTTON TO LEARN,
If there are no currently recognized then press the ENGINE START/
transmitters available, follow this STOP button.
procedure to program up to eight The DIC display will again show
transmitters. This feature is not REMOTE LEARN PENDING,
available in Canada. This procedure PLEASE WAIT.
will take approximately 30 minutes
4. Repeat Step 3 two additional
to complete. The vehicle must be off
times. After the third time all
and all transmitters to be
previously known transmitters
programmed must be with you.
will no longer work with the
1. Remove the vehicle key from the vehicle. Remaining transmitters 5. Place the new transmitter in the
transmitter. can be relearned during the next transmitter pocket/insert.
2. Insert the vehicle key into the steps. Open the center console storage
key lock cylinder on the driver The DIC display should now area and the storage tray. The
door handle; then turn the key show READY FOR REMOTE transmitter pocket/insert is in
counterclockwise, to the unlock # 1. front of the storage area next to
position, five times within the center console storage area
10 seconds. between the driver and front
passenger seats.
The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN 6. Press the ENGINE START/
PENDING, PLEASE WAIT. STOP button. When the
transmitter is learned, the DIC
display will show that it is ready
to program the next transmitter.
7. Remove the transmitter from the To start the vehicle: Battery Replacement
transmitter pocket/insert and 1. Open the center console storage Replace the battery in the
press K or Q on the transmitter. area and the storage tray. transmitter soon if the REPLACE
To program additional BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
transmitters, repeat Steps 57. message displays in the DIC.
When all additional transmitters
are programmed, press and hold { Caution
the ENGINE START/STOP
When replacing the battery, do
button for approximately
not touch any of the circuitry on
12 seconds to exit
programming mode. the transmitter. Static from your
body could damage the
8. Return the key back into the transmitter.
transmitter.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
2. Place the transmitter in the
If the transmitter battery is weak or if transmitter pocket/insert.
there is interference with the signal,
the DIC may display NO REMOTE 3. With the vehicle in P (Park) or
DETECTED or NO REMOTE KEY N (Neutral) press the brake
WAS DETECTED PLACE KEY IN pedal and the ENGINE START/
TRANSMITTER POCKET THEN STOP button.
START YOUR VEHICLE when Replace the transmitter battery
starting the vehicle. See Key and as soon as possible.
Lock Messages on page 5-39.
To replace the battery: Remote Vehicle Start

If equipped with the remote start
feature, the climate control system
will come on when the vehicle is
started remotely depending on the
outside temperature.
The rear defog and heated and
cooled seats, if equipped, may also
come on. See Heated and Cooled
Front Seats on page 3-9 and
Vehicle Personalization on
2. Lift the battery with a flat object. page 5-47.
3. Remove the battery. Laws in some communities may

1. With the key removed, insert a restrict the use of remote starters.
flat, thin object in the center of 4. Insert the new battery, positive Check local regulations for any
the transmitter to separate and side toward the back cover. requirements on remote starting of
remove the back cover. Replace with a CR2032 or vehicles.
equivalent battery.
Do not use remote start if the
5. Push together the transmitter. vehicle is low on fuel.
The vehicle cannot be remote Starting the Engine Using Remote running. An extension can be
started if: Start requested, 30 seconds after
starting.
. The key is in the ignition (Key 1. Press and release Q.
Access) or the transmitter is in A maximum of two remote starts,
the vehicle (Keyless Access). 2. Immediately press and hold / or a single start with an extension,
. The hood is not closed. until the turn signal lamps flash is allowed between ignition cycles.
or for at least four seconds. The vehicle's ignition must be
. There is an emission control
system malfunction and the When the vehicle starts, the turned on and then back off to use
malfunction indicator lamp is on. parking lamps will turn on. The remote start again.
doors will be locked and the
The engine will turn off during a Canceling a Remote Start
climate control system may
remote vehicle start if: come on. To cancel a remote start, do one of
. The coolant temperature gets the following:
The engine will continue to run
too high. for 10 minutes. Repeat . Press and hold / until the
. The oil pressure gets low. Steps 1 and 2 for a 10-minute parking lamps turn off.
time extension.
The RKE transmitter range may be . Turn on the hazard warning
reduced while the vehicle is running. Place the ignition in ON/RUN/ flashers.
START to operate the vehicle.
Other conditions can affect the . Turn the ignition on and then off.
performance of the transmitter. See Extending Engine Run Time
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The engine run time can be
System on page 2-5 or Vehicle extended by 10 minutes, for a total
Personalization on page 5-47. of 20 minutes, if during the first
10 minutes Steps 1 and 2 are
repeated while the engine is still
Door Locks Warning (Continued)

manual lock knob on a
passenger door will lock only
that door.
{ Warning injuries or even death from
. Pulling an interior door handle
heat stroke. Always lock the
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it. will unlock the door. Pulling the
dangerous. door handle again unlatches it.
. Outsiders can easily enter
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door Keyless Access
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop If equipped, the RKE transmitter
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the door
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from being opened. Press the button on
locked, the handle will not happening. the door handle to open. See
open it. The chance of being
Keyless Access Operation in
thrown out of the vehicle in a
To lock or unlock the doors from Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
crash is increased if the
outside the vehicle: System Operation (Key Access) on
doors are not locked. So, all
page 2-5 or Remote Keyless Entry
passengers should wear . Press Q or K on the Remote (RKE) System Operation (Keyless
safety belts properly and the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Access) on page 2-8.
doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
. Use the key in the driver door.
driven. To lock or unlock the doors from
Power Door Locks
. Young children who get into inside the vehicle: Press Q or K on the Remote
unlocked vehicles may be . Press Q or K on the power door Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
unable to get out. A child can See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
lock switch.
be overcome by extreme heat System Operation (Key Access) on
and can suffer permanent . Pushing down the manual lock page 2-5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(Continued) knob on the driver door will lock (RKE) System Operation (Keyless
all doors. Pushing down the Access) on page 2-8.
Pressing the power lock switch manually overridden by pressing

twice will override the delayed and holding Q on the power door
locking feature and immediately lock lock switch.
all the doors.
Pushbutton Start: When locking
This feature will not operate if the is requested with the driver door
key is in the ignition. open and the vehicle is in ACC/
This feature can be programmed ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START,
using the Driver Information all the doors will lock and then the
Center (DIC). See Delayed Door driver door will unlock. This can be
Lock under Vehicle Personalization manually overridden by pressing
on page 5-47. and holding Q on the power door
lock switch.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. Automatic Door Locks If Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout is
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the The vehicle may have an automatic turned on, the vehicle is off with the
doors. lock/unlock feature. This feature can driver door open, and door locking
be programmed using the Driver is requested, all the doors will lock
Delayed Locking Information Center (DIC). See and only the driver door will unlock.
Vehicle Personalization on The Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout
When locking the doors with the page 5-47. feature can be turned on or off using
power lock switch and a door or the the vehicle personalization menus.
liftgate is open, the doors will lock Lockout Protection See Vehicle Personalization on
five seconds after the last door is page 5-47.
closed. You will hear three chimes Keyed Ignition: When locking is
to signal that the delayed locking requested with the driver door open
feature is in use. and the key in the ignition, all the
doors will lock and then the driver
door will unlock. This can be
Safety Locks Doors Warning (Continued)

The rear door safety locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear Liftgate . Adjust the climate control
doors from inside the vehicle. system to a setting that
{ Warning brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See Climate
vehicle if it is driven with the Control Systems in the
liftgate or trunk/hatch open, Index.
or with any objects that pass . If the vehicle is equipped with
through the seal between the a power liftgate, disable the
body and the trunk/hatch or power liftgate function.
liftgate. Engine exhaust contains See Engine Exhaust on
carbon monoxide (CO) which page 9-30.
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
Press { to activate the safety locks If the vehicle must be driven with
{ Caution
on the rear doors. The indicator light the liftgate or trunk/hatch open: To avoid damage to the liftgate or
comes on when activated. . Close all of the windows. liftgate glass, make sure the area
Press { again to deactivate the . Fully open the air outlets on
above and behind the liftgate is
safety locks. clear before opening it.
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
Manual Liftgate There will be a delay in the release Power Liftgate Operation
of the liftglass if there is an attempt
to open it while the rear wipers are
in motion.
{ Warning
Use the pull cup to lower and close You, or others, could be injured if
the liftgate. Do not press the touch caught in the path of the power
pad while closing the liftgate. This liftgate. Make sure there is no one
will cause the liftgate to be in the way of the liftgate as it is
unlatched. opening and closing.
If equipped with Keyless Access,
the RKE transmitter must be within
1 m (3 ft) of the liftgate to
automatically unlock it. See Remote
To open the liftgate, press K on the Operation (Key Access) on
power door lock switch or press K page 2-5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
on the RKE transmitter twice to
Access) on page 2-8.
unlock all doors. Press the touch
pad (1) on the underside of the The liftgate has an electric latch.
liftgate handle and lift up. If the battery is disconnected or has
low voltage, the liftgate will not
Press the button (2) above the
open. The liftgate will resume
license plate to open the liftglass,
operation when the battery is
or press c twice quickly on the reconnected and charged. If equipped, the switch is on the
RKE transmitter. Do not leave the overhead console. The vehicle must
liftglass open when raising the be in P (Park).
liftgate.
The modes are: The power liftgate may be

MAX: Opens to maximum height. temporarily disabled in extremely
low temperatures, or after repeated
3/4: Opens to a reduced height power cycling over a short period of
that can be set from 3/4 to fully time. If this occurs, the liftgate can
open. Use to prevent the liftgate still be operated manually. Select
from opening into overhead objects OFF on the liftgate switch.
such as a garage door or
roof-mounted cargo. The liftgate can If the vehicle is shifted out of
be opened all the way manually. P (Park) while the power function is
in progress, the liftgate will continue
OFF: Opens manually only. to completion. If the vehicle is
To open or close the liftgate, select accelerated before the liftgate has
MAX or 3/4 mode and then: . Press l on the bottom edge of completed moving, the liftgate may
the liftgate next to the latch to stop or reverse direction. Make sure
. Press b twice quickly on the close. the liftgate is closed and latched
RKE transmitter until the liftgate before driving.
moves. Press any liftgate button, the touch
pad, or b on the RKE transmitter If the power liftgate support strut
. Press 8 on the overhead has lost pressure, the turn signals
while the liftgate is moving to stop it.
console. The driver door must will flash and a chime will sound
Pressing again restarts the
be unlocked. while the liftgate automatically
operation in the reverse direction.
closes. See your dealer for service
. Press the touch pad on the The touch pad on the liftgate handle
before using the power liftgate.
outside liftgate handle after cannot be used to close the liftgate.
unlocking all doors. If equipped Do not manually force the liftgate to
with Keyless Access, a locked open or close during a power cycle.
vehicle can be opened if the
RKE transmitter is within 1 m
(3 ft) of the touch pad.
Obstacle Detection Features direction and open fully. The liftgate Manual Operation
will remain open until it is activated
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle Select OFF to manually operate the
again or closed manually.
during a power open or close cycle, liftgate. See Manual Liftgate at the
a warning chime will sound and the Setting the 3/4 Mode beginning of this section.
liftgate will automatically reverse
To change the position the liftgate
direction and move a short distance
away from the obstacle. After stops at when opening: { Caution
removing the obstruction, the power 1. Select MAX or 3/4 mode and Do not use too much force when
liftgate operation can be used again. open the liftgate. closing the liftgate to avoid
If the liftgate encounters multiple 2. Stop the liftgate movement at damage.
obstacles on the same power cycle, the desired height by pressing
the power function will deactivate. any liftgate button. Manually
After removing the obstructions, Hands-Free Operation
adjust the liftgate position if
manually close the liftgate. This will needed. If equipped with Hands-Free Vehicle
allow normal power operation Access, the liftgate may be
functions to resume. 3. Press and hold l next to the operated with a kicking motion
If the vehicle is locked while the latch on the outside of the under the rear bumper.
liftgate is closing, and an obstacle liftgate until the turn signals flash
The liftgate will not operate if the
prevents the liftgate from completely and a beep sounds. This
RKE transmitter is not within
closing, the horn will sound as an indicates the setting has been
1 m (3 ft).
alert that the liftgate did not close. recorded.
The hands-free feature will not work
Pinch sensors are on the side The liftgate cannot be set below a
while the liftgate is moving. To stop
edges of the liftgate. If an object is minimum programmable height.
the liftgate while in motion use one
caught between the liftgate and the If there is no light flash or sound,
of the liftgate switches.
vehicle and presses against a then the height adjustment may be
sensor, the liftgate will reverse too low.
To operate, kick your foot straight up liftgate by another method or

in one swift motion under the center start the vehicle. The feature will
of the rear bumper, then pull it back. be re-enabled.
When closing the liftgate using this
{ Caution feature, there will be a short delay.
The rear lights will flash and a
Splashing water may cause the chime will sound. Step away from
liftgate to open. Keep the RKE the gate before it starts moving.
transmitter away from the rear
bumper detection area or turn the Power Assist Steps
liftgate mode to OFF when
cleaning or working near the rear If equipped, the power assist steps
Length of Kick Zone bumper to avoid accidental will deploy when the door is opened
opening. and automatically retract
three seconds after the door is
closed. The power assist steps will
. Do not sweep your foot side retract immediately if the vehicle
to side. starts moving.
. Do not keep your foot under the Keep hands, children, pets, objects,
bumper; the liftgate will not and clothing clear of the power
activate. assist steps when in motion. The
. Do not touch the liftgate until it steps will reverse direction if they
has stopped moving. encounter an obstruction when
opening or closing. Remove the
. This feature may be temporarily obstruction, then open and close the
disabled under some conditions. door on the same side to complete
If the liftgate does not respond to
the kick, open or close the
the motion of the assist steps. If the Enable/Disable Vehicle Security

obstruction is not cleared, the assist
steps remain extended while driving. Press and hold j for four seconds This vehicle has theft-deterrent
to lock and disable the power assist features; however, they do not make
steps. Press and hold j for the vehicle impossible to steal.
four seconds again to enable them.
The DIC will display a message. Vehicle Alarm System
To extend both power assist steps

The indicator light, on the
for cleaning, press j while the
instrument panel near the
vehicle is in P (Park) or N (Neutral). windshield, indicates the status of
Press j again to retract them. the system.
The DIC will display a message.
Off: Alarm system is disarmed.
On Solid: Vehicle is secured
during the delay to arm the system.
Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.
A door, liftgate or the hood is open.
Slow Flash: Alarm system is If the driver door is opened without

. Start the vehicle.
armed. first unlocking with the RKE To avoid setting off the alarm by
transmitter, the horn will chirp and accident:
Arming the Alarm System the lights will flash to indicate
pre-alarm. If the vehicle is not
. Lock the vehicle after all
1. Turn off the vehicle.
started, or the door is not unlocked occupants have exited.
2. Lock the vehicle with one of
three ways: by pressing K on the RKE . Always unlock a door with the
transmitter during the 10-second RKE transmitter, or use the
. Use the RKE transmitter. pre-alarm, the alarm will be Keyless Access system.
. Use the Keyless Access activated. Unlocking the driver door with
system. The alarm will also be activated if a the key will not disarm the
passenger door, the liftgate, or the system or turn off the alarm.
. With a door open, press Q
on the interior of the door. hood is opened without first How to Detect a Tamper
disarming the system. When the
3. After 30 seconds the alarm Condition
alarm is activated, the turn signals
system will arm, and the flash and the horn sounds for about If K is pressed on the RKE
indicator light will begin to slowly 30 seconds. The alarm system will transmitter and the horn chirps three
flash. Pressing Q on the RKE then re-arm to monitor for the next times, an alarm occurred previously
transmitter a second time will unauthorized event. while the alarm system was armed.
bypass the 30-second delay and
immediately arm the alarm
Disarming the Alarm System If the alarm has been activated, a
system. To disarm the alarm system or turn message will appear on the DIC.
off the alarm if it has been activated: See Security Messages on
The vehicle alarm system will not page 5-43.
arm if the doors are locked with . Press K on the RKE transmitter.
the key.
. Unlock the vehicle using the
Keyless Access system.

. Make sure there are no
Intrusion Sensor and With the vehicle off, press o in
Inclination Sensor obstructions blocking the
the front overhead console to turn
sensors in the front overhead
In addition to the standard off the feature.
console.
theft-deterrent system features, this The indicator light will come on
system may also have an inclination
. Close DVD screens before
momentarily, indicating that these
sensor and intrusion sensor. leaving the vehicle.
sensors have been disabled until
The inclination sensor can set off Intrusion and Inclination the next time the alarm system is
the alarm if it senses movement of Sensors Disable Switch armed.
the vehicle, such as a change in
vehicle orientation. Immobilizer
The intrusion sensor monitors the See Radio Frequency Statement on
vehicle interior, and can activate the page 13-12.
alarm if it senses unauthorized entry
into the vehicles interior. Do not Immobilizer Operation
allow passengers or pets to remain (Key Access)
in the vehicle when the intrusion
sensor is activated.
Before arming the theft-deterrent
system and activating the intrusion
sensor:
. Make sure all doors and It is recommended that the intrusion
windows are completely closed. and inclination sensors be
deactivated if pets are left in the This vehicle has a passive
. Secure any loose items such as
vehicle or the vehicle is being theft-deterrent system.
a sunshades.
transported. The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically the vehicle needs service. If the Immobilizer Operation
immobilized when the vehicle is vehicle does start, the first key may
turned off. be faulty. See your dealer.
(Keyless Access)
The system is automatically It is possible for the immobilizer This vehicle has a passive
disarmed when the key is turned to system to learn new or replacement theft-deterrent system.
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, keys. Up to eight keys can be The system does not have to be
or START from the LOCK/OFF programmed for the vehicle. To manually armed or disarmed.
position. program additional keys, see Keys
The vehicle is automatically
The security light, in the instrument (Key Access) on page 2-2 or Keys
immobilized when the transmitter
cluster, comes on if there is a (Keyless Access) on page 2-4. To
leaves the vehicle.
problem with arming or disarming program additional transmitters, see
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The immobilization system is
the theft-deterrent system.
System Operation (Key Access) on disarmed when the ignition button is
When trying to start the vehicle, the page 2-5 or Remote Keyless Entry pressed in and a valid transmitter is
security light comes on briefly when (RKE) System Operation (Keyless found in the vehicle.
the ignition is turned on. Access) on page 2-8.
If the engine does not start and the Do not leave the key or device that
security light stays on, there is a disarms or deactivates the vehicle
problem with the system. Turn the theft system in the vehicle.
ignition off and try again.
See your dealer to get a new key
If the engine still does not start, and blank cut exactly as the ignition key
the key appears to be undamaged, that operates the system.
try another ignition key. It may be The security light in the instrument
necessary to check the fuse. See cluster comes on if there is a
Fuses on page 10-36. If the engine problem with arming or disarming
still does not start with the other key, the theft-deterrent system.
The system has one or more page 2-5 or Remote Keyless Entry Exterior Mirrors
transmitters matched to an (RKE) System Operation (Keyless
immobilizer control unit in the Access) on page 2-8.
vehicle. Only a correctly matched Convex Mirrors
If the engine does not start with the
transmitter will start the vehicle. other transmitter or when the
If the transmitter is ever damaged, transmitter is in the pocket in the { Warning
you may not be able to start the center console, the vehicle needs
vehicle. A convex mirror can make things,
service. See your dealer who can like other vehicles, look farther
When trying to start the vehicle, the service the theft-deterrent system
away than they really are. If you
security light comes on briefly when and have a new transmitter
cut too sharply into the right lane,
the ignition is turned on. programmed to the vehicle.
you could hit a vehicle on the
If the engine does not start and the Do not leave the transmitter or right. Check the inside mirror or
security light stays on, there is a device that disarms or deactivates glance over your shoulder before
problem with the system. Turn the the theft-deterrent system in the changing lanes.
vehicle off and try again. vehicle.
If the RKE transmitter appears to be The passenger side mirror is convex
undamaged, try another transmitter shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
or place the transmitter in the curved so more can be seen from
transmitter pocket/insert next to the the driver seat.
center console storage area
between the driver and front
passenger seats. See Starting the
Vehicle with a Low Transmitter
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
Power Mirrors 4. Press either (1) or (2) again to Folding Mirrors

deselect the mirror. The indicator
light goes off. Power Folding
Exterior Automatic Dimming
Mirror
If equipped, the driver outside mirror
automatically adjusts for the glare of
headlamps behind. This feature
comes on when the vehicle is
started. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror on page 2-31.
Turn Signal Indicator
Shown with Power Folding The vehicle may also have a turn
Mirrors, Manual Folding Similar signal indicator on the mirror. An
To adjust the mirrors: arrow on the mirror flashes in the To adjust power folding mirrors,
direction of the turn or lane change. if equipped:
1. Press (1) or (2) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror. 1. Press { to fold the mirrors
The indicator light comes on. inward.
2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move the mirror up, 2. Press { again to return the
down, right, or left. mirrors to the driving position.
3. Adjust the outside mirror so that
the side of the vehicle and the
area behind are seen.
Resetting the Power Folding Heated Mirrors Driving with the Blind Spot
Mirrors Mirror
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
Reset the power folding mirrors if:
.
1 (Rear Window Defogger):
The mirrors are accidentally Press to heat the mirrors.
obstructed while folding.
See Rear Window Defogger under
. They are accidentally manually Dual Automatic Climate Control
folded/unfolded. System on page 8-1.
. The mirrors will not stay in the
unfolded position. Blind Spot Mirrors
. The mirrors vibrate at normal If equipped, there is a small convex
driving speeds. mirror built into the upper and outer
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time corner of the driver outside rearview
using the mirror controls to reset mirror. It can show objects that may
them to their normal position. be in the vehicle's blind zone.
A popping noise may be heard
during the resetting of the power
folding mirrors. This sound is normal
after a manual folding operation.
Manual Folding
Fold the mirrors inward to prevent
damage when going through an
automatic car wash. To fold, pull the
mirror toward the vehicle. Push the
mirror outward, to return to its Actual Mirror View
original position.
1. When the approaching vehicle is vehicle. Check the blind spot Interior Mirrors
a long distance away, the image mirror for a vehicle in the blind
in the main mirror is small and zone. Then, glance over your
near the inboard edge of the shoulder to double check before Interior Rearview Mirrors
mirror. moving slowly into the Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
2. As the vehicle gets closer, the adjacent lane. view of the area behind your
image in the main mirror gets vehicle.
larger and moves outboard. Reverse Tilt Mirrors If equipped with OnStar, there are
3. As the vehicle enters the blind If equipped with memory seats, the three buttons at the bottom of the
zone, the image transitions from passenger and/or driver mirror tilts mirror. See your dealer for more
the main mirror to the blind spot to a preselected position when the information on the system and how
mirror. vehicle is in R (Reverse). This to subscribe to OnStar. See OnStar
allows the curb to be seen when Overview on page 14-1.
4. When the vehicle is in the blind parallel parking.
zone, the image only appears in To avoid accidental OnStar calls,
the blind spot mirror. The mirror(s) return to the original clean the mirror with the ignition off.
position when: Do not spray glass cleaner directly
Using the Outside Mirror with on the mirror. Use a soft towel
. The vehicle is shifted out of
the Blind Spot Mirror R (Reverse), or remains in
dampened with water.
1. Set the main mirror so that the R (Reverse) for about
side of the vehicle can just be 30 seconds. Manual Rearview Mirror
seen and the blind spot mirror . The ignition is turned off. Push the tab forward for daytime
has an unobstructed view. use and pull it rearward for
. The vehicle is driven in nighttime use to avoid glare of the
2. When checking for traffic or R (Reverse) above a set speed.
before changing a lane, look at headlamps from behind.
the main driver/passenger side To turn this feature on or off, see
mirror to observe traffic in the Vehicle Personalization on
adjacent lane, behind your page 5-47.
Automatic Dimming Child-View Mirror Windows

Rearview Mirror
If equipped, automatic dimming { Warning
reduces the glare of headlamps
from behind. The dimming feature Never leave a child, a helpless
comes on when the vehicle is adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
started. especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke.
If equipped, push up on the

sunglasses bin and release. Push
the bin back in halfway to secure
the mirror in position.
Push the mirror back up when not
in use.
The vehicle aerodynamics are Express-Down Windows

designed to improve fuel economy
Windows that have the
performance. This may result in a
express-down feature allow the
pulsing sound when either rear
windows to be lowered without
window is down and the front
holding the switch. Press the
windows are up. To reduce the
window switch fully and release it to
sound, open either a front window
activate the express-down feature.
or the sunroof, if equipped.
The express mode can be canceled
at any time by briefly pressing or
Power Windows pulling the switch.
{ Warning Express-Up Window

The driver door has switches that If equipped, the driver window
Children could be seriously control all windows. Each express-up feature allows the
injured or killed if caught in the passenger door switch only controls window to be raised without holding
path of a closing window. Never that window. The power windows the switch. Pull the window switch
leave keys in a vehicle with work when the ignition is in ON/ up fully and release it to activate the
children. When there are children RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in express-up feature. The express-up
in the rear seat, use the window Retained Accessory Power (RAP). feature can be canceled at any time
lockout button to prevent See Retained Accessory Power by briefly pressing or pulling the
operation of the windows. See (RAP) on page 9-27. switch.
Keys (Key Access) on page 2-2 Press the switch to lower the
or Keys (Keyless Access) on
Programming the Power
window. Pull the switch up to Windows
page 2-4. raise it.
If the battery on the vehicle has
been recharged or disconnected,
or is not working, the driver power
window will need to be window returns to normal operation In this mode, the window can still
reprogrammed for the express-up once the obstacle or condition is close on an object in its path. Use
feature to work. removed. care when using the override mode.
To reprogram the power windows: Express Window Anti-Pinch Window Lockout
1. Close all doors. Override This feature prevents the rear
2. Place the ignition in ACC/ passenger windows from operating,
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/ { Warning except from the driver position.
START.
If express override is activated,
3. From any open position, pull the the window will not reverse
power window switch up until the automatically. You or others could
window is fully closed. be injured and the window could
4. Hold the switch up for be damaged. Before you use
approximately two seconds after express override, make sure that
the window is fully closed. all people and obstructions are
The window is now reprogrammed. clear of the window path.
Express Window Anti-Pinch

The anti-pinch feature can be
Feature overridden in a supervised mode.
If any object is in the path of the Hold the window switch in the
window when express-up is active, partially or fully pulled up position. . Press Z to activate the rear
the window stops at the obstacle The window rises for as long as the window locks. An indicator light
and auto-reverses to a preset switch is held. Once the switch is will illuminate when the feature
factory position. Weather conditions released, the express mode is is on.
such as severe icing also cause the reactivated.
window to auto-reverse. The
. Press Z again to deactivate the
rear window locks.
Sun Visors Roof Vent: From the closed position,

press the rear of switch (2) to vent
the sunroof.
Sunroof
Open/Close: To open the sunroof,
press and hold switch (1) until the
sunroof reaches the desired
position. Press and hold the front of
switch (1) to close it.
Express-Open/Express-Close:
To express-open the sunroof, fully
press and release the rear of
Pull the sun visor down to block switch (1) until the sunroof reaches
glare. Detach the sun visor from the the desired position. To
center mount to pivot to the side express-close the sunroof, fully
window or, if equipped, extend press and release the front of
along the rod. switch (1). Press the switch again to
stop it.
1. Open or Close
2. Vent When the sunroof is opened, an air
deflector will automatically raise.
On vehicles with a sunroof, the The air deflector will retract when
sunroof only operates when the the sunroof is closed.
ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN, or when Retained The sunroof also has a sunshade
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. which can be pulled forward to block
See Retained Accessory Power sun rays. The sunshade must be
(RAP) on page 9-27. opened and closed manually.
If an object is in the path of the

sunroof while it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof.
Dirt and debris may collect on the

sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation or noise. It could also plug
the water drainage system.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
If water is seen dripping into the
water drainage system, this is
normal.
2 NOTES
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Adding Equipment to the

Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-42
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-43
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Head Restraints Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Child Restraints
Replacing Safety Belt System Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Front Seats Infants and Young
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-48
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-50
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-32 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 When Should an Airbag for Children (LATCH
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Heated and Cooled Front What Makes an Airbag Replacing LATCH System
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-60
How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 (Center Front Seat) . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
What Will You See after an Securing Child Restraints
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Passenger Sensing Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-63
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
How to Wear Safety Belts Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
Front Seats
The vehicles front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/ Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
spinal injury in a crash. Do not top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
drive until the head restraints for height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
all occupants are installed and head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
adjusted properly.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not removable.
Second Row Seats To lower the head restraint, press Front Seats
the button located on the top of the
The vehicle's second row seats
seatback and push the head
have head restraints in the outboard
restraint down. Seat Adjustment
seating positions that cannot be
adjusted. Return the lowered head restraint to
the upright position until it locks into { Warning
The second row seat outboard head
place. Push and pull on the head You can lose control of the
restraints are not removable.
restraint to make sure it is locked. vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
Third Row Seats If you are installing a child restraint seat while the vehicle is moving.
in the third row seat, see Securing Adjust the driver seat only when
a Child Restraint Designed for the the vehicle is not moving.
LATCH System under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3-51.
The third row seat head restraint

can be lowered for better visibility
when the rear seat is unoccupied.
To adjust a manual seat: Power Seat Adjustment To adjust the seatback, see
1. Pull the handle at the front of Reclining Seatbacks on page 3-5.
the seat. To adjust the lumbar support, see
2. Slide the seat to the desired Lumbar Adjustment on page 3-4.
position and release the handle. Some vehicles are equipped with a
3. Try to move the seat back and feature that activates a vibrating
forth to be sure it is locked in pulse alert in the driver seat to help
place. the driver avoid crashes. See Driver
Assistance Systems on page 9-58.
To adjust the seatback, see
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3-5. Lumbar Adjustment
To adjust the lumbar support, see
Lumbar Adjustment on page 3-4. Manual Lumbar
Center Seat To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
If equipped, the center front

. Move the seat forward or
seatback doubles as an armrest and rearward by sliding the control
cupholder/storage area for the driver forward or rearward.
and passenger when the center . If equipped, raise or lower the
front seat is not used. Do not use it front part of the seat cushion by
as a seating position when the moving the front of the control
seatback is folded down. up or down.
. If equipped, raise or lower the
seat by moving the rear of the
control up or down.
If equipped, move the lever up or

. If equipped, press and hold the
down repeatedly to increase or control up to increase upper Warning (Continued)
decrease lumbar support. lumbar support and decrease
lower lumbar support. The lap belt could go up over
Power Lumbar your abdomen. The belt forces
Press and hold the control down
would be there, not at your pelvic
to increase lower lumbar support
and decrease upper lumbar bones. This could cause serious
support. internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
Reclining Seatbacks vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
{ Warning back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
To adjust the power lumbar support,
if equipped: The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
. Press and hold the control
forward to increase or rearward be in front of you. In a crash, you
to decrease upper and lower could go into it, receiving neck or
lumbar support at the same time. other injuries.
(Continued)
Do not have a seatback reclined if To adjust a manual seatback: Power Reclining Seatbacks
the vehicle is moving. 1. Lift the lever.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks The seatback will automatically
fold forward.
{ Warning 2. To recline, move the seatback
rearward to the desired position,
If either seatback is not locked, it
then release the lever to lock the
could move forward in a sudden
seatback in place.
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
Always push and pull on the make sure it is locked.
seatbacks to be sure they are To return the seatback to the upright
locked. position:
1. Lift the lever fully without To recline a power seatback,
applying pressure to the if equipped:
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
. Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
. Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
Memory Seats Storing Memory Positions 2. Press and release SET. A beep
To store positions to the 1 and 2 will sound.
buttons: 3. Immediately press and hold B
1. Adjust the driver seat, outside until two beeps sound.
mirrors, power tilt and Manually Recalling Memory
telescoping steering column (if Positions
equipped), and adjustable
pedals (if equipped) to the If the vehicle is off or not in P (Park),
desired driving positions. press and hold 1, 2, or B (Exit) to
2. Press and release SET. A beep manually recall the previously
will sound. stored memory positions. Releasing
1, 2, or B before the stored
3. Immediately press and hold 1
until two beeps sound. positions are reached stops the
recall.
If equipped, the SET, 1, 2, and B 4. Repeat Steps 13 for a second
driver using 2. If the vehicle is on and in P (Park),
(Exit) buttons on the driver door are
used to manually store and recall press and release 1, 2, or B to
memory settings for the driver seat, To store positions to the B (Exit) manually recall the previously
outside mirrors, power tilt and button and easy exit features: stored memory positions. Placing
telescoping steering column (if 1. Adjust the driver seat, power tilt the ignition in OFF/LOCK before the
equipped), and adjustable pedals (if and telescoping steering column stored positions are reached stops
equipped). (if equipped), adjustable pedals the recall.
(if equipped), and outside Automatically Recalling Memory
mirrors on some vehicles to the Positions (Auto Memory Recall)
desired positions for getting out
of the vehicle. Auto Memory Recall must be
enabled in the personalization menu
for the automatic recall feature to
work. This selection may be found To stop recall movement, press one If programmed on in the vehicle
under Settings, Comfort and of the memory, power mirror, personalization menu, the easy exit
Convenience, Auto Memory Recall. or power seat controls; press the feature automatically moves the
The Auto (Automatic) Memory power tilt and telescoping steering driver seat, power tilt and
Recall feature automatically recalls column control (if equipped); or telescoping steering column (if
the current drivers previously stored press the adjustable pedal control (if equipped), adjustable pedals (if
1 or 2 position when entering the equipped). equipped), and outside mirrors on
vehicle. RKE transmitters are not labeled some vehicles to the memory
with a number. If your memory seat positions stored to the B (Exit)
If the Auto Memory Recall feature is button. See Storing Memory
enabled in the vehicle position is stored to 1 or 2 but this
position is not automatically Positions listed previously. See
personalization menu, memory 1 or also Vehicle Personalization on
2 positions are recalled in the recalling, then store your positions
to the other button or switch RKE page 5-47.
following ways:
transmitters with the other driver. Easy exit recall automatically
. Press K on the RKE transmitter activates when one of the following
Easy Exit Recall
and open the driver door. occurs:
Easy Exit Recall must be enabled in
. Press K on the RKE transmitter the personalization menu for this
. The vehicle is turned off and the
when the driver door is open. automatic recall feature to work. driver door is opened within a
This selection may be found under short time.
. If equipped with Keyless Access,
press the lock/unlock button on Settings, Comfort and Convenience, . The vehicle is turned off with the
the outside driver door handle Easy Exit Recalls. driver door open.
and open the driver door. The
RKE transmitter must be present
for the recall to activate.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
Obstructions Heated and Cooled Front

If something has blocked the driver Seats
seat, power tilt and telescoping
steering column, and/or the If equipped, the vehicle may have
adjustable pedals while recalling a heated or heated and cooled seats.
memory position, the recall may
stop. Remove the obstruction. { Warning
Then do one of the following:
If you cannot feel temperature
. If automatically or manually change or pain to the skin, the
recalling the stored memory seat heater may cause burns. To
position, press and hold the reduce the risk of burns, people
appropriate manual control for
with such a condition should use Heated and Cooled Seats Shown,
two seconds. Try recalling again
care when using the seat heater, Heated Similar
by pressing the appropriate
memory button. especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on The buttons are on the center stack
. If recalling the exit position, the seat that insulates against below the climate control system.
press and hold the appropriate heat, such as a blanket, cushion, To operate, the engine must be
manual control for the exit running.
cover, or similar item. This may
feature not recalling for cause the seat heater to . Press I to heat the driver or
two seconds. Then try recalling
overheat. An overheated seat passenger seatback only.
the exit position again.
heater may cause a burn or may
If the memory position is still not damage the seat.
. Press J to heat the driver or
recalling, see your dealer for passenger seat cushion and
service. seatback.
. Press A to cool the driver or
passenger seat.
The indicator light on the button The heated or cooled seat indicator Rear Seats
comes on when this feature is on. lights do not turn on during a remote
start.
Press the button once for the Heated Rear Seats
highest setting. With each press of The temperature performance of an
the button, the seat will change to unoccupied seat may be reduced.
the next lower setting, and then to This is normal. { Warning
the off setting. The indicator lights The heated or cooled seats will not If you cannot feel temperature
next to the buttons indicate three for turn on during a remote start unless change or pain to the skin, the
the highest setting and one for the they are enabled in the vehicle seat heater may cause burns.
lowest. If the heated seats are on personalization menu. See Remote See the Warning under Heated
high for an extended time, their level Vehicle Start on page 2-14 and
may automatically be lowered. and Cooled Front Seats on
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-9.
The passenger seat may take page 5-47.
longer to heat up.
Remote Start Auto Heated and
Cooled Seats
During a remote start, the heated or
cooled seats can be turned on
automatically. When it is cold
outside, the heated seats turn on,
and when it is hot outside the
cooled seats turn on. The heated or
cooled seats are canceled when the
ignition is turned on. Press the
heated or cooled seat button to use
the heated or cooled seats after the
vehicle is started.
If equipped, the buttons are on the Second Row Seats To return the seatback to the upright
rear of the center console. position:
Reclining Seatbacks
Press M or L to heat the left
outboard or right outboard seat To recline the seatback: { Warning
cushion. If either seatback is not locked, it
Press the button once for the could move forward in a sudden
highest setting. With each press of stop or crash. That could cause
the button, the heated seat changes injury to the person sitting there.
to the next lower setting, and then Always push and pull on the
the off setting. Indicator lights on the seatbacks to be sure they are
button show the setting: three for locked.
high, two for medium, and one
for low.
1. Lift the lever fully while applying
If heated seats are on high for an pressure to the seatback, and
extended time, their level may the seatback will return to the
automatically be lowered. upright position.
1. Lift the lever on the outboard If the lever is lifted without
side of the seat. applying pressure, the seat will
2. Move the seatback to the release to a folded position.
desired position, and then 2. Push and pull on the seatback to
release the lever to lock the make sure it is locked.
seatback in place.
The second row seats can be folded
3. Push and pull on the seatback to for additional cargo space or folded
make sure it is locked. and tumbled for easy entry and exit
to the third row seat, if equipped.
Manual Fold and Tumble 2. Lift the lever, on the outboard

Feature Caution (Continued) side of the seat, to release the
seatback.
belts and return them to their
{ Warning normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
Do not leave the second row seat
in a tumbled position while the
vehicle is in motion. A tumbled Folding and Tumbling the Seat
seat is not locked. It can move To fold and tumble the seat:
when the vehicle is in motion.
1. Make sure that there is nothing
People in the vehicle could be
under, in front of, or on the seat.
injured in a sudden stop or crash.
Be sure to return the seat to the
passenger seating position before
driving the vehicle. Push and pull
on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place. The seatback will fold forward to
create a flat load floor.
If the seatback cannot fold flat,
try moving the front seat forward
{ Caution and/or put the front seatback in
Folding a rear seat with the safety the upright position.
belts still fastened may cause
damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety
(Continued)
Folding and Tumbling the Seat

from the Third Row Seat
{ Warning
Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return
the seat to the passenger seating
position. Push and pull on the
3. Lift the lever again to release the seat to make sure it is locked into 2. Pull the strap on the bottom rear
rear of the seat from the floor. place. of the second row seat to
The seat will tumble forward. release the seatback. The
4. The rear pull strap can also be To fold and tumble the seat from the seatback will fold forward.
used to fold or fold and tumble third row seat, if equipped:
the seat. It is easier to tumble 1. Make sure that there is nothing
the seat from the rear pull strap under, in front of, or on the seat.
once the seat is already
folded flat.
Warning (Continued) { Caution

when the vehicle is in motion. Folding a rear seat with the safety
People in the vehicle could be belts still fastened may cause
injured in a sudden stop or crash. damage to the seat or the safety
Be sure to return the seat to the belts. Always unbuckle the safety
passenger seating position before belts and return them to their
driving the vehicle. Push and pull normal stowed position before
on the seat to make sure it is folding a rear seat.
locked into place.
The transmission must be in
3. Pull the strap again to release P (Park) for this feature to work.
the rear of the seat from the { Warning Fold the seat to load cargo. Fold
floor. The seat will tumble and tumble the seat to gain entry to
forward. Automatically folding and the third row.
tumbling the seat when someone
Automatic Fold and Tumble is sitting in the seat, could cause Folding and Tumbling the Seat
Feature injury to the person sitting there. To fold and tumble the seat:
Always make sure there is no one
{ Warning sitting in the seat before pressing
under, in front of, or on the seat.
the automatic seat release button.
Do not leave the second row seat
in a tumbled position while the
vehicle is in motion. A tumbled
seat is not locked. It can move
(Continued)
Folding and Tumbling the Seat 2. Press the button (1) on the side
from the Cargo Area trim of the cargo area to fold the
seatback.
The left button folds the left
seatback, and the right button
folds the right seatback.
3. Press the button again to
release the rear of the seat from
the floor. The seat will tumble
forward.
The buttons (2) can be used to fold
Driver Side Rear Panel Button or fold and unfold the third row
Shown seatbacks from the cargo area. See
Third Row Seats on page 3-16.
2. Press the automatic seat release
button on the panel behind the 1. Second Row Power Seat Returning the Seat to the
rear doors. The seatback Buttons Sitting Position
automatically folds flat. 2. Third Row Power Seat
Buttons
3. Press the button again to { Warning
release the rear of the seat from To fold and tumble the seat from the
the floor. The seat will tumble cargo area: If either seatback is not locked, it
forward. could move forward in a sudden
under, in front of, or on the seat. stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
To return the seat to the sitting

position from the tumbled position: Caution (Continued)
1. Pull the seat down until both belts and return them to their
sides of the seat are latched to normal stowed position before
the floor. Make sure the seat is folding a rear seat.
securely latched to the floor
before raising the seatback.
If both sides are not latched to On third row seats (if equipped), the
the floor, the seatback will not seatbacks can be folded to increase
raise. cargo space.
2. Lift the seatback and push it Manual Operation
rearward. Push and pull on the To fold the seatback (if equipped):
seatback to make sure it is 5. Disconnect the rear safety belt
locked. 1. Open the liftgate. mini-latch using a key in the slot
2. Make sure that there is nothing on the mini-buckle, and let the
Third Row Seats under, in front of, or on the seat. belt retract into the headliner.
Folding the Seatback 3. Make sure the second row

seatbacks are in the upright
position.
{ Caution
4. Fully lower the head restraints.
Folding a rear seat with the safety See Head Restraints on
belts still fastened may cause page 3-2.
damage to the seat or the safety
belts. Always unbuckle the safety
(Continued)
8. Pull up on the lever on the back 2. Third Row Power Seat

of the seat to release the Buttons
seatback. To fold the seatback (if equipped):
9. Push the seatback forward to 1. Open the liftgate to access the
lay flat. controls for the seat.
10. Repeat the steps for the other 2. Make sure that there is nothing
seatback, if desired. under, in front of, or on the seat.
Automatic Operation 3. Fully lower the head restraints.
The transmission must be in See Head Restraints on
P (Park) for this feature to work. page 3-2. Put the second row
seatbacks in the upright position.
7. Stow the mini-latch in the holder See Second Row Seats on
in the headliner. page 3-11.
1. Second Row Power Seat

Buttons
4. Disconnect the rear safety belt The switches (1) can be used to fold To return the seatback to the upright
mini-latch, using a key in the slot or fold and tumble the second row position:
on the mini-buckle, and let the seats from the cargo area. See
belt retract into the headliner. Second Row Seats on page 3-11.
Stow the mini-latch in the holder
in the headliner. Returning the Seatback to the
Upright Position
Manual Operation
{ Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the 1. From the rear of the vehicle,
seatbacks to be sure they are raise the seatback using the
locked. strap on the back of the seat,
or lift the seatback and push it
5. Press and hold the switch (2) on into place from inside the
the side trim of the cargo area to vehicle.
fold the seatback. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to
The left switch folds the left make sure it is locked.
seatback, and the right switch
folds the right seatback.
Automatic Operation To return the seatback to the upright

{ Warning position:
A safety belt that is improperly 1. Open the liftgate to access the
routed, not properly attached, controls for the seat.
or twisted will not provide the 2. Press and hold the switch (2) on
protection needed in a crash. The the side trim of the cargo area to
person wearing the belt could be raise the seatback.
seriously injured. After raising the The left switch raises the left
rear seatback, always check to be seatback, and the right switch
sure that the safety belts are raises the right seatback.
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
{ Warning
3. Reconnect the center safety belt 1. Second Row Power Seat A safety belt that is improperly
mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do Buttons routed, not properly attached,
not let it twist. 2. Third Row Power Seat or twisted will not provide the
Buttons protection needed in a crash. The
4. Pull on the safety belt to be sure
the mini-latch is secure. person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) Safety Belts Warning (Continued)

This section of the manual
After raising the rear seatback, describes how to use safety belts are more likely to be seriously
always check to be sure that the properly. It also describes some injured or killed. Do not allow
safety belts are properly routed things not to do with safety belts. passengers to ride in any area of
and attached, and are not twisted. the vehicle that is not equipped
{ Warning with seats and safety belts.
3. Reconnect the center safety belt Always wear a safety belt, and
Do not let anyone ride where a check that all passenger(s) are
mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do
safety belt cannot be worn restrained properly too.
not let it twist.
properly. In a crash, if you or your
4. Pull on the safety belt to be sure passenger(s) are not wearing
the mini-latch is secure. safety belts, injuries can be much This vehicle has indicators as a
worse than if you are wearing reminder to buckle the safety belts.
safety belts. You can be seriously See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5-19.
injured or killed by hitting things
inside the vehicle harder or by
being ejected from the vehicle.
In addition, anyone who is not
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts makes such good all Canadian provinces, the law
sense. requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a This section is only for people of
safety belt? adult size.
A: You could be whether you are There are special things to know
wearing a safety belt or not. about safety belts and children. And
Your chance of being conscious there are different rules for smaller
during and after a crash, so you children and infants. If a child will be
can unbuckle and get out, is riding in the vehicle, see Older
When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted. Children on page 3-44 or Infants
as fast as the vehicle does. If the and Young Children on page 3-46.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Follow those rules for everyone's
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. protection.
belts?
It could be the windshield, the It is very important for all occupants
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental to buckle up. Statistics show that
systems only; so they work with unbelted people are hurt more often
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. in crashes than those who are
them. Whether or not an airbag wearing safety belts.
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the There are important things to know
when worn properly, your strongest most protection. about wearing a safety belt properly.
bones take the forces from the

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
These parts of the body are best All seating positions in the vehicle
able to take belt restraining have a lap-shoulder belt except for
forces. The shoulder belt locks if the center front passenger position,
there is a sudden stop or crash. if equipped, which has a lap belt.
See Lap Belt on page 3-28.
{ Warning If you are using a rear seating
position with a detachable safety
You can be seriously injured, belt, and the safety belt is not
or even killed, by not wearing attached, see Third Row Seats on
your safety belt properly. page 3-16 for instruction on
. Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or reconnecting the safety belt to the
your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become mini-buckle.
of you. loose or twisted.
. Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt
for your seating position. under both arms or behind
. Wear the lap part of the belt low your back.
and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or
touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an
this applies force to the strong armrest.
pelvic bones and you would be
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The following instructions explain 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt the belt across you. Do not let it
properly. get twisted.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
adjustable, so you can sit up you pull the belt across you very
straight. To see how, see Seats quickly. If this happens, let the
in the Index. belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. For front seating positions, if the
If this happens, let the belt go webbing locks in the latch plate
back all the way and start again. before it reaches the buckle, tilt
the latch plate flat to unlock.
Engaging the child restraint
locking feature in the front
outboard seating position may
affect the passenger sensing
system. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3-37.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt

height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
in this section for instructions on
use and important safety
information.
3. Push the latch plate into the To unlatch the belt, push the button
buckle until it clicks. If you find on the buckle. The belt should
that the latch plate will not go return to its stowed position.
fully into the buckle, see if you For third row seats, slide the latch
are using the correct buckle. plate up the safety webbing when
Pull up on the latch plate to the safety belt is not in use. The
make sure it is secure. If the belt latch plate should rest on the
is not long enough, see Safety stitching on the safety belt.
Belt Extender on page 3-29. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt. Before a door is closed, be sure the
Position the release button on safety belt is out of the way. If a
the buckle so that the safety belt For third row seats, it may be door is slammed against a safety
could be quickly unbuckled if necessary to pull stitching on the belt, damage can occur to both the
necessary. safety belt through the latch belt and the vehicle.
plate to fully tighten the lap belt
on smaller occupants.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Push down on the release button to Pretensioners work only once. If the
move the height adjuster to the pretensioners activate in a crash,
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
desired position. the pretensioners and probably
height adjuster for the driver and
Move the adjuster up by pushing up other parts of the vehicle's safety
front outboard passenger positions.
on the shoulder belt guide. belt system will need to be replaced.
Adjust the height so the shoulder See Replacing Safety Belt System
portion of the belt is on the shoulder After the adjuster is set to the Parts after a Crash on page 3-29.
and not falling off of it. The belt desired position, try to move it down
should be close to, but not without pushing the release button Rear Safety Belt Comfort
contacting, the neck. Improper to make sure it has locked into Guides
shoulder belt height adjustment position.
could reduce the effectiveness of
Safety Belt Pretensioners { Warning
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on This vehicle has safety belt A safety belt that is not properly
page 3-21. pretensioners for front outboard worn may not provide the
occupants. Although the safety belt protection needed in a crash. The
pretensioners cannot be seen, they person wearing the belt could be
are part of the safety belt assembly. seriously injured. The shoulder
They can help tighten the safety belt should go over the shoulder
belts during the early stages of a and across the chest. These parts
moderate to severe frontal, near of the body are best able to take
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold belt restraining forces.
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. Safety belt
pretensioners can also help tighten Rear safety belt comfort guides may
the safety belts in a side crash or a provide added safety belt comfort
rollover event. for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide 1. Remove the guide from its
positions the shoulder belt away storage clip on the interior trim
from the neck and head. next to the outboard seatback.
Rear Outboard Seating Positions
There are comfort guides for the
rear outboard seating positions for
the second row and the third row
outboard seating positions. The
comfort guides are stored on a clip
on the interior trim next to the
outboard seatback.
To install: 3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be behind the
belt with the plastic guide on the
2. Place the guide over the belt, front.
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
Third Row Center Seating Position Safety Belt Use During

Comfort guides for the third row Pregnancy
center seating position are available
from your dealer. Instructions are Safety belts work for everyone,
included with the guide. including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release the

safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the An adjustable comfort guide is used
belt is on the shoulder and not for the center seating position in the
falling off of it. The belt should third row seat. The adjustable
be close to, but not contacting, comfort guide attaches to the head
the neck. restraint post on the inboard side of
To remove and store the comfort the left rear outboard seat.
guide, squeeze the belt edges A pregnant woman should wear a
together so that the safety belt can lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
be removed from the guide. Slide portion should be worn as low as
the guide onto its storage clip. possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is

to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Lap Belt
This section is only for the lap belt.
To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder
belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on To make the belt longer, tilt the latch To make the belt shorter, pull its free
page 3-22. plate and pull it along the belt. end as shown until the belt is snug.
The vehicle may have a center Buckle, position, and release it the If the belt is not long enough, see
seating position with a lap safety same way as the lap part of a Safety Belt Extender on page 3-29.
belt. The lap safety belt does not lap-shoulder belt. Make sure the release button on the
have a retractor. buckle is positioned so you would
be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will
not go fully into the buckle, see if
you are using the correct buckle. Be
sure that the latch plate clicks when
inserted into the buckle.
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer Replacing Safety Belt
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
System Parts after a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under Crash
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away. { Warning
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt A crash can damage the safety
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5-19. belt system in the vehicle.
long enough for you. To help avoid A damaged safety belt system
personal injury, do not let someone Keep safety belts clean and dry. may not properly protect the
else use it, and use it only for the See Safety Belt Care on page 3-29. person using it, resulting in
seat it is made to fit. The extender serious injury or even death in a
has been designed for adults. Never Safety Belt Care crash. To help make sure the
use it for securing child seats. To Keep belts clean and dry. safety belt systems are working
wear it, attach it to the regular safety properly after a crash, have them
belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with { Warning inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
the extender. Do not bleach or dye safety belts. possible.
It may severely weaken them. In
Safety System Check a crash, they might not be able to After a minor crash, replacement of
Now and then, check that the safety provide adequate protection. safety belts may not be necessary.
belt reminder light, safety belts, Clean safety belts only with mild But the safety belt assemblies that
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and soap and lukewarm water. were used during any crash may
anchorages are all working properly. have been stressed or damaged.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
See your dealer to have the safety Airbag System The vehicle may have the following
belt assemblies inspected or airbag:
replaced. The vehicle has the following . A front center airbag for the
airbags:
New parts and repairs may be driver and front outboard
necessary even if the safety belt . A frontal airbag for the driver. passenger.
system was not being used at the . A frontal airbag for the front All vehicle airbags have the word
time of the crash. outboard passenger. AIRBAG on the trim or on an
Have the safety belt pretensioners . A seat-mounted side impact attached label near the deployment
checked if the vehicle has been in a airbag for the driver. opening.
crash, or if the airbag readiness light For frontal airbags, the word
stays on after you start the vehicle . A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the front outboard AIRBAG is on the center of the
or while you are driving. See Airbag steering wheel for the driver and on
Readiness Light on page 5-20. passenger.
the instrument panel for the front
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver outboard passenger.
and for the second and third row
passengers seated directly For the front center airbag, the word
behind the driver. AIRBAG is on the inboard side of
the driver seatback.
. A roof-rail airbag for the front
outboard passenger and the For seat-mounted side impact
second and third row airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the
passengers seated directly side of the seatback closest to
behind the front outboard the door.
passenger. For roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce

the risk of injury from the force of an Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job. safety belts. Everyone in the the vehicle. The safety belts and
vehicle should wear a safety belt the front outboard passenger
Here are the most important things properly, whether or not there is airbags are most effective when
to know about the airbag system: an airbag for that person. you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat with both feet
{ Warning on the floor.
You can be severely injured or { Warning Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the front center
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt, even Because airbags inflate with great armrest or console in vehicles
with airbags. Airbags are force and faster than the blink of with a front center airbag.
designed to work with safety an eye, anyone who is up
Occupants should not lean on or
belts, not replace them. Also, against, or very close to any
sleep against the door or side
airbags are not designed to inflate airbag when it inflates can be
windows in seating positions with
in every crash. In some crashes seriously injured or killed. Do not
seat-mounted side impact airbags
safety belts are the only restraint. sit unnecessarily close to any
and/or roof-rail airbags.
See When Should an Airbag airbag, as you would be if sitting
Inflate? on page 3-34. on the edge of the seat or leaning
forward. Safety belts help keep
Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce the chance of
you in position before and during { Warning
a crash. Always wear a safety
hitting things inside the vehicle or belt, even with airbags. The driver Children who are up against,
being ejected from it. Airbags are should sit as far back as possible or very close to, any airbag when
supplemental restraints to the while still maintaining control of it inflates can be seriously injured
(Continued) (Continued) (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Where Are the Airbags?
or killed. Always secure children
properly in the vehicle. To read
how, see Older Children on
page 3-44 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3-46.
The front outboard passenger

frontal airbag is in the passenger
The driver frontal airbag is in the side instrument panel.
There is an airbag readiness light center of the steering wheel.
on the instrument cluster, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5-20.
If the vehicle has a front center Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger
airbag, it is in the inboard side of the Side Similar Side Similar
driver seatback. The driver and front outboard The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
passenger seat-mounted side front outboard passenger, and
impact airbags are in the side of the second and third row outboard
seatbacks closest to the door. seating positions are in the ceiling
above the side windows.
{ Warning
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
When Should an Airbag It depends on what is hit, the
direction of the impact, and how
Inflate? quickly the vehicle slows down.
that person causing severe injury This vehicle is equipped with
or even death. The path of an Frontal airbags may inflate at
airbags. See Airbag System on different crash speeds depending on
inflating airbag must be kept page 3-30. Airbags are designed to
clear. Do not put anything whether the vehicle hits an object
inflate if the impact exceeds the straight on or at an angle, and
between an occupant and an specific airbag system's deployment
airbag, and do not attach or put whether the object is fixed or
threshold. Deployment thresholds moving, rigid or deformable, narrow
anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a or wide.
hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the
airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain Frontal airbags are not intended to
the occupants. The vehicle has inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
Do not use seat or console impacts, or many side impacts.
electronic sensors that help the
accessories that block the
airbag system determine the In addition, the vehicle has
inflation path of a seat-mounted
severity of the impact. Deployment advanced technology frontal
side impact airbag or the front thresholds can vary with specific
center airbag, if equipped. airbags. Advanced technology
vehicle design. frontal airbags adjust the restraint
Never secure anything to the roof Frontal airbags are designed to according to crash severity.
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags inflate in moderate to severe frontal The vehicle also has a seat position
by routing a rope or tie-down or near frontal crashes to help sensor that enables the sensing
through any door or window reduce the potential for severe system to monitor the position of the
opening. If you do, the path of an injuries, mainly to the driver's or driver seat. The seat position sensor
inflating roof-rail airbag will be front outboard passenger's head provides information that is used to
blocked. and chest. adjust the deployment of the driver
Whether the frontal airbags will or frontal airbag.
should inflate is not based primarily
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
The front center airbag, if equipped, roof-rail airbags are designed to How Does an Airbag
is designed to inflate in moderate to inflate during a rollover or in a
severe side crashes depending severe frontal impact. Roof-rail
Restrain?
upon the location of the impact, airbags are not designed to inflate in In moderate to severe frontal or
when either side of the vehicle is rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags near frontal collisions, even belted
struck. In addition, the front center will inflate when either side of the occupants can contact the steering
airbag is designed to inflate when vehicle is struck, if the sensing wheel or the instrument panel. In
the sensing system predicts that the system predicts that the vehicle is moderate to severe side collisions,
vehicle is about to roll over on its about to roll over on its side, or in a even belted occupants can contact
side. The front center airbag is not severe frontal impact. the inside of the vehicle.
designed to inflate in frontal In any particular crash, no one can Airbags supplement the protection
impacts, near frontal impacts, say whether an airbag should have provided by safety belts by
or rear impacts. inflated simply because of the distributing the force of the impact
Seat-mounted side impact airbags vehicle damage or the repair costs. more evenly over the
are designed to inflate in moderate occupant's body.
to severe side crashes depending What Makes an Airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
on the location of the impact.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags
Inflate? are also designed to help contain
the head and chest of occupants in
are not designed to inflate in frontal In a deployment event, the sensing
the outboard seating positions in the
impacts, near frontal impacts, system sends an electrical signal
first, second, and third rows. The
rollovers, or rear impacts. triggering a release of gas from the
rollover capable roof-rail airbags are
A seat-mounted side impact airbag inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
designed to help reduce the risk of
is designed to inflate on the side of airbag causing the bag to break out
full or partial ejection in rollover
the vehicle that is struck. of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
events, although no system can
and related hardware are all part of
Roof-rail airbags are designed to prevent all such ejections.
the airbag module.
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes depending on the location For airbag locations, see Where Are
of the impact. In addition, these the Airbags? on page 3-32.
But airbags would not help in many The parts of the airbag that come
types of collisions, primarily into contact with you may be warm, Warning (Continued)
because the occupant's motion is but not too hot to touch. There may
not toward those airbags. See When be some smoke and dust coming problems following an airbag
Should an Airbag Inflate? on from the vents in the deflated deployment, you should seek
page 3-34 for more information. airbags. Airbag inflation does not medical attention.
Airbags should never be regarded prevent the driver from seeing out of
as anything more than a supplement the windshield or being able to steer The vehicle has a feature that may
to safety belts. the vehicle, nor does it prevent automatically unlock the doors, turn
people from leaving the vehicle. on the interior lamps and hazard
What Will You See after warning flashers, and shut off the
an Airbag Inflates? { Warning fuel system after the airbags inflate.
The feature may also activate,
After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates, there without airbag inflation, after an
seat-mounted side impact airbags may be dust in the air. This dust event that exceeds a predetermined
inflate, they quickly deflate, so could cause breathing problems threshold. You can lock the doors,
quickly that some people may not for people with a history of and turn off the interior lamps and
even realize an airbag inflated. The asthma or other breathing trouble. hazard warning flashers by using
front center airbag, if equipped, and To avoid this, everyone in the the controls for those features.
the roof-rail airbags may still be at vehicle should get out as soon as
least partially inflated for some time it is safe to do so. If you have { Warning
after they inflate. Some components breathing problems but cannot
of the airbag module may be hot for get out of the vehicle after an A crash severe enough to inflate
several minutes. For location of the airbag inflates, then get fresh air the airbags may have also
airbags, see Where Are the by opening a window or a door. damaged important functions in
Airbags? on page 3-32. If you experience breathing the vehicle, such as the fuel
(Continued) (Continued)
crash. A new system will include

Warning (Continued) airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
system, brake and steering for the vehicle covers the need
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to replace other parts.
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
. The vehicle has a crash sensing
concealed damage that could and diagnostic module which United States
make it difficult to safely operate records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
the vehicle.
Recording and Privacy on
Use caution if you should attempt page 13-14 and Event Data
to restart the engine after a crash Recorders on page 13-14.
has occurred. . Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems. Canada and Mexico
In many crashes severe enough to Improper service can mean that
inflate the airbag, windshields are an airbag system will not work The words ON and OFF, or the
broken by vehicle deformation. properly. See your dealer for symbols for on and off, will be
Additional windshield breakage may service. visible during the system check.
also occur from the front outboard When the system check is
passenger airbag. Passenger Sensing complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
. Airbags are designed to inflate System be visible. See Passenger Airbag
only once. After an airbag The vehicle has a passenger Status Indicator on page 5-20.
inflates, you will need some new sensing system for the front
parts for the airbag system. The passenger sensing system
outboard passenger position. The turns off the front outboard
If you do not get them, the passenger airbag status indicator
airbag system will not be there passenger frontal airbag under
will light on the overhead console
to help protect you in another when the vehicle is started.
certain conditions. No other airbag

is affected by the passenger { Warning Warning (Continued)
sensing system.
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints
The passenger sensing system restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
works with sensors that are part of or killed if the passenger frontal is off. If you secure a
the front outboard passenger seat airbag inflates. This is because forward-facing child restraint in
and safety belt. The sensors are the back of the rear-facing child the front outboard passenger
designed to detect the presence of restraint would be very close to seat, always move the seat as far
a properly seated occupant and
the inflating airbag. A child in a back as it will go. It is better to
determine if the front outboard
forward-facing child restraint can secure the child restraint in a
passenger frontal airbag should be
allowed to inflate or not. be seriously injured or killed if the rear seat.
passenger frontal airbag inflates
According to accident statistics, and the passenger seat is in a
children are safer when properly The passenger sensing system is
forward position. designed to turn off the front
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight Even if the passenger sensing outboard passenger frontal airbag if:
and size. system has turned off the . The front outboard passenger
passenger frontal airbag, no seat is unoccupied.
Whenever possible, children aged
system is fail-safe. No one can
12 and under should be secured in . The system determines an infant
a rear seating position. guarantee that an airbag will not
is present in a child restraint.
inflate under some unusual
Never put a rear-facing child seat in circumstance, even though the . A front outboard passenger
the front. This is because the risk to airbag is off. takes his/her weight off of the
the rear-facing child is so great, seat for a period of time.
if the airbag inflates. (Continued)
. There is a critical problem with
the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing frontal airbag, depending upon the If the On Indicator is Lit for a
system has turned off the front person's seating posture and body Child Restraint
outboard passenger frontal airbag, build. Everyone in the vehicle who
the off indicator will light and stay lit has outgrown child restraints should The passenger sensing system is
as a reminder that the airbag is off. wear a safety belt designed to turn off the front
See Passenger Airbag Status properly whether or not there is outboard passenger frontal airbag if
Indicator on page 5-20. an airbag for that person. the system determines that an infant
is present in a child restraint. If a
The passenger sensing system is child restraint has been installed
designed to turn on the front { Warning and the on indicator is lit:
outboard passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a If the airbag readiness light ever 1. Turn the vehicle off.
person of adult size is sitting comes on and stays on, it means 2. Remove the child restraint from
properly in the front outboard that something may be wrong the vehicle.
passenger seat. with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, 3. Remove any additional items
When the passenger sensing from the seat such as blankets,
have the vehicle serviced right
system has allowed the airbag to be cushions, seat covers, seat
away. See Airbag Readiness
enabled, the on indicator will light heaters, or seat massagers.
and stay lit as a reminder that the Light on page 5-20 for more
information, including important 4. Reinstall the child restraint
airbag is active.
safety information. following the directions provided
For some children, including by the child restraint
children in child restraints, and for manufacturer and refer to
very small adults, the passenger Securing Child Restraints
sensing system may or may not turn (Center Front Seat) on
off the front outboard passenger page 3-60 or Securing Child
Restraints (Rear Seat) on
page 3-60 or Securing Child
Restraints (Front Passenger
Seat) on page 3-63. Even if the 6. Restart the vehicle. If a person of adult size is sitting in
child restraint is equipped with a The passenger sensing system may the front outboard passenger seat,
safety belt lock-off, make sure or may not turn off the airbag for a but the off indicator is lit, it could be
the safety belt retractor is locked child in a child restraint depending because that person is not sitting
by pulling the shoulder belt all upon the childs size. It is better to properly in the seat or that the child
the way out of the retractor secure the child restraint in a restraint locking feature is engaged.
before tightening the safety belt. rear seat. If this happens, use the following
When the retractor lock is set, steps to allow the system to detect
the belt can be tightened but not If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an that person and enable the front
pulled out of the retractor. Adult-Sized Occupant outboard passenger frontal airbag:
5. If, after reinstalling the child 1. Turn the vehicle off.
restraint and restarting the 2. Remove any additional material
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, from the seat, such as blankets,
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly cushions, seat covers, seat
recline the vehicle seatback and heaters, or seat massagers.
adjust the seat cushion,
if adjustable, to make sure that 3. Place the seatback in the fully
the vehicle seatback is not upright position.
pushing the child restraint into 4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat cushion. the seat, centered on the seat
Also make sure the child cushion, with legs comfortably
restraint is not trapped under the extended.
vehicle head restraint. If this 5. If the shoulder portion of the belt
happens, adjust the head is pulled out all the way, the
restraint. See Head Restraints child restraint locking feature will
on page 3-2. be engaged. This may
unintentionally cause the
passenger sensing system to Additional Factors Affecting The on indicator may be lit if an
turn the airbag off for some System Operation object, such as a briefcase,
adult-sized occupants. If this handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
happens, unbuckle the belt, let Safety belts help keep the or other electronic device, is put on
the belt go back all the way, and passenger in position on the seat an unoccupied seat. If this is not
then buckle the belt again during vehicle maneuvers and desired, remove the object from
without pulling the belt out all braking, which helps the passenger the seat.
the way. sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See
6. Restart the vehicle and have the Safety Belts and Child Restraints { Warning
person remain in this position for in the Index for additional
two to three minutes after the on Stowing of articles under the
information about the importance of
indicator is lit. passenger seat or between the
proper restraint use.
passenger seat cushion and
A thick layer of additional material,
{ Warning such as a blanket or cushion,
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
or aftermarket equipment such as sensing system.
If the front outboard passenger
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
airbag is turned off for an
massagers can affect how well the
adult-sized occupant, the airbag
will not be able to inflate and help
passenger sensing system Servicing the
operates. We recommend that you Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
protect that person in a crash, not use seat covers or other
resulting in an increased risk of aftermarket equipment except when Airbags affect how the vehicle
serious injury or even death. An approved by GM for your specific should be serviced. There are parts
adult-sized occupant should not vehicle. See Adding Equipment to of the airbag system in several
ride in the front outboard the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on places around the vehicle. Your
passenger seat, if the passenger page 3-42 for more information dealer and the service manual have
airbag off indicator is lit. about modifications that can affect information about servicing the
how the system operates. vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see The operation of the airbag system of the seat fabric, could also
Service Publications Ordering can also be affected by changing interfere with the operation of the
Information on page 13-11. any parts of the front seats, safety passenger sensing system. This
belts, airbag sensing and diagnostic could either prevent proper
{ Warning module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, any airbag module, ceiling or
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
For up to 10 seconds after the pillar garnish trim, overhead sensing system from properly
vehicle is turned off and the console, front sensors, side impact turning off the passenger airbag(s).
battery is disconnected, an airbag sensors, airbag wiring, or front See Passenger Sensing System on
can still inflate during improper center console. page 3-37.
service. You can be injured if you Your dealer and the service manual If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail
are close to an airbag when it have information about the location airbags, see Different Size Tires
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. of the airbag sensors, sensing and and Wheels on page 10-64 for
They are probably part of the diagnostic module, and airbag additional important information.
airbag system. Be sure to follow wiring. If you have to modify your vehicle
proper service procedures, and In addition, the vehicle has a because you have a disability and
make sure the person performing passenger sensing system that you have questions about whether
work for you is qualified to do so. includes sensors as part of the front the modifications will affect the
outboard passenger seat. The vehicle's airbag system, or if you
passenger sensing system may not have questions about whether the
Adding Equipment to the operate properly if the original seat airbag system will be affected if the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle trim is replaced with non-GM vehicle is modified for any other
Adding accessories that change the covers, upholstery, or trim; or with reason, call Customer Assistance.
vehicle's frame, bumper system, GM covers, upholstery, or trim See Customer Assistance Offices
height, front end, or side sheet designed for a different vehicle. Any on page 13-3.
metal may keep the airbag system object, such as an aftermarket seat
from working properly. heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
or device, installed under or on top
Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
regularly scheduled maintenance or
If the airbag readiness light stays on
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ Warning after the vehicle is started or comes
Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag on when you are driving, the airbag
page 5-20. systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system may the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
{ Caution not work properly and may not
page 5-20.
protect you and your
If an airbag covering is damaged, passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
opened, or broken, the airbag in serious injury or even death.
may not work properly. Do not To help make sure the airbag
open or break the airbag systems are working properly
coverings. If there are any after a crash, have them
opened or broken airbag inspected and any necessary
coverings, have the airbag replacements made as soon as
covering and/or airbag module possible.
replaced. For the location of the
airbags, see Where Are the
Airbags? on page 3-32. See your
dealer for service.

. Can proper safety belt fit be
Child Restraints The manufacturer instructions that
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
lap-shoulder belt until the child If you have the choice, a child
passes the fit test below: should sit in a position with a
. Sit all the way back on the seat. lap-shoulder belt and get the
Do the knees bend at the seat additional restraint a shoulder
edge? If yes, continue. If no, belt can provide.
return to the booster seat. Q: What is the proper way to
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. wear safety belts?
Does the shoulder belt rest on A: An older child should wear a
the shoulder? If yes, continue. lap-shoulder belt and get the
If no, try using the rear safety additional restraint a shoulder
belt comfort guide, if available. belt can provide. The shoulder
See Rear Safety Belt Comfort belt should not cross the face or
Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt neck. The lap belt should fit
Older children who have outgrown
on page 3-22. If a comfort guide snugly below the hips, just
booster seats should wear the
is not available, or if the touching the top of the thighs.
vehicle safety belts.
shoulder belt still does not rest This applies belt force to the
on the shoulder, then return to child's pelvic bones in a crash.
the booster seat. It should never be worn over the
. Does the lap belt fit low and abdomen, which could cause
snug on the hips, touching the severe or even fatal internal
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, injuries in a crash.
return to the booster seat.
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort

Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt on Warning (Continued)
page 3-22.
belt. The belt force would then be
According to accident statistics, applied right on the abdomen.
children are safer when properly That could cause serious or fatal
restrained in a rear seating position. injuries. The shoulder belt should
In a crash, children who are not go over the shoulder and across
buckled up can strike other people the chest.
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ Warning
{ Warning Never allow a child to wear the
Never allow more than one child safety belt with the shoulder belt
to wear the same safety belt. The behind their back. A child can be
safety belt cannot properly spread seriously injured by not wearing
the impact forces. In a crash, they the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
can be crushed together and crash, the child would not be
seriously injured. A safety belt restrained by the shoulder belt.
must be used by only one person The child could move too far
at a time. forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)
Infants and Young

Children
Warning (Continued) { Warning
Everyone in a vehicle needs the way back into the retractor, Never hold an infant or a child
protection! This includes infants and but it cannot do this if it is while riding in a vehicle. Due to
all other children. Neither the wrapped around a childs neck. crash forces, an infant or a child
distance traveled nor the age and If the shoulder belt is locked and will become so heavy it is not
size of the traveler changes the tightened around a childs neck, possible to hold it during a crash.
need, for everyone, to use safety the only way to loosen the belt is For example, in a crash at only
restraints. In fact, the law in every to cut it. 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
state in the United States and in Never leave children unattended infant will suddenly become a
every Canadian province says in a vehicle and never allow 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
children up to some age must be children to play with the safety arms. An infant should be
restrained while in a vehicle. secured in an appropriate
belts.
restraint.
{ Warning Every time infants and young
Children can be seriously injured children ride in vehicles, they should
or strangled if a shoulder belt is have the protection provided by
wrapped around their neck. The appropriate child restraints. Neither
shoulder belt can tighten but the vehicle's safety belt system nor
cannot be loosened if it is locked. its airbag system is designed
The shoulder belt locks when it is for them.
pulled all the way out of the Children who are not restrained
retractor. It unlocks when the properly can strike other people,
shoulder belt is allowed to go all or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
(Continued)
weight, height, and age but also

Warning (Continued) whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
the front outboard seat, always vehicle in which it will be used.
move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
{ Warning The restraint manufacturer
Children who are up against, instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
or very close to, any airbag when
height limitations for a particular
it inflates can be seriously injured
child restraint. In addition, there
or killed. Never put a rear-facing are many kinds of restraints
child restraint in the front available for children with
outboard seat. Secure a Q: What are the different types of
special needs.
rear-facing child restraint in a rear add-on child restraints?
seat. It is also better to secure a A: Add-on child restraints, which
forward-facing child restraint in a are purchased by the vehicle
rear seat. If you must secure a owner, are available in four basic
forward-facing child restraint in types. Selection of a particular
(Continued) restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
Child Restraint Systems

{ Warning { Warning
To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. In a safety belt may not remain low on
crash, if an infant is in a the hip bones, as it should.
rear-facing child restraint, the Instead, it may settle up around
crash forces can be distributed the child's abdomen. In a crash,
across the strongest part of an the belt would apply force on a
infant's body, the back and body area that is unprotected by
shoulders. Infants should always any bony structure. This alone
be secured in rear-facing child could cause serious or fatal
restraints. injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a Rear-Facing Infant Seat
crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat provides
always be secured in appropriate restraint with the seating surface
child restraints. against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury,
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3-51.
Children can be endangered in a Administration (NHTSA) website to Whenever possible, children age
crash if the child restraint is not locate the nearest child safety seat 12 and under should be secured in
properly secured in the vehicle. inspection station. For CPST a rear seating position.
When securing an add-on child availability in Canada, check with The vehicle may be equipped with a
restraint, refer to the instructions Transport Canada or the Provincial front center airbag in the inboard
that come with the restraint which Ministry of Transportation office. side of the driver seat. Even with a
may be on the restraint itself or in a Securing the Child Within the front center airbag, a child restraint
booklet, or both, and to this manual. Child Restraint can be installed in any second row
The child restraint instructions are seating position.
important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement { Warning Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
copy from the manufacturer. A child can be seriously injured or the rear-facing child is so great if the
Keep in mind that an unsecured killed in a crash if the child is not airbag deploys.
child restraint can move around in a properly secured in the child
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
restraint. Secure the child { Warning
properly following the instructions
properly secure any child restraint in that came with that child restraint. A child in a rear-facing child
the vehicle even when no child is restraint can be seriously injured
in it. or killed if the front passenger
In some areas of the United States Where to Put the airbag inflates. This is because
and Canada, Certified Child Restraint the back of the rear-facing child
Passenger Safety Technicians restraint would be very close to
According to accident statistics,
(CPSTs) are available to inspect children and infants are safer when the inflating airbag. A child in a
and demonstrate how to correctly properly restrained in a child forward-facing child restraint can
use and install child restraints. In restraint system or infant restraint be seriously injured or killed if the
the U.S., refer to the National system secured in a rear seating (Continued)
Highway Traffic Safety position.
assemblies or LATCH anchors for

Warning (Continued) { Warning additional passengers or child
restraints. Adjacent seating
front passenger airbag inflates A child in a child restraint in the positions should not be used if the
and the passenger seat is in a center front seat can be badly child restraint prevents access to or
forward position. injured or killed by the frontal interferes with the routing of the
Even if the passenger sensing airbags if they inflate. Never safety belt.
system has turned off the front secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always Wherever a child restraint is
passenger frontal airbag, no installed, be sure to secure the child
system is fail-safe. No one can better to secure a child restraint in
restraint properly.
guarantee that an airbag will not a rear seat.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
deploy under some unusual child restraint can move around in a
circumstance, even though it is Do not use child restraints in the collision or sudden stop and injure
turned off. center front seat position. people in the vehicle. Be sure to
Secure rear-facing child restraints When securing a child restraint in a properly secure any child restraint in
in a rear seat, even if the airbag rear seating position, study the the vehicle even when no child is
is off. If you secure a instructions that came with the child in it.
forward-facing child restraint in restraint to make sure it is
the front seat, always move the compatible with this vehicle. Lower Anchors and
front passenger seat as far back Child restraints and booster seats Tethers for Children
as it will go. It is better to secure vary considerably in size, and some (LATCH System)
the child restraint in a rear seat. may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. The LATCH system secures a child
See Passenger Sensing System restraint during driving or in a crash.
on page 3-37 for additional Depending on where you place the LATCH attachments on the child
information. child restraint and the size of the restraint are used to attach the child
child restraint, you may not be able restraint to the anchors in the
to access adjacent safety belt
vehicle. The LATCH system is Make sure to follow the instructions (with top tether where available) to
designed to make installation of a that came with the child restraint, secure the child restraint. See
child restraint easier. and also the instructions in this Securing Child Restraints (Center
In order to use the LATCH system in manual. Front Seat) on page 3-60 or
your vehicle, you need a child When installing a child restraint with Securing Child Restraints (Rear
restraint that has LATCH a top tether, you must also use Seat) on page 3-60 or Securing
attachments. LATCH-compatible either the lower anchors or the Child Restraints (Front Passenger
rear-facing and forward-facing child safety belts to properly secure the Seat) on page 3-63.
seats can be properly installed child restraint. A child restraint must Lower Anchors
using either the LATCH anchors or never be attached using only the
the vehicles safety belts. Do not top tether.
use both the safety belts and the The LATCH anchorage system can
LATCH anchorage system to secure be used until the combined weight
a rear-facing or forward-facing of the child plus the child restraint is
child seat. 29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt
Booster seats use the vehicles alone instead of the LATCH
safety belts to secure the child in anchorage system once the
the booster seat. If the manufacturer combined weight is more than
recommends that the booster seat 29.5 kg (65 lbs).
be secured with the LATCH system, The following explains how to attach
this can be done as long as the a child restraint with these
booster seat can be positioned attachments in the vehicle.
properly and there is no interference Lower anchors (1) are metal bars
with the proper positioning of the Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors built into the vehicle. There are two
lap-shoulder belt on the child. lower anchors for each LATCH
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments. In this
case, the safety belt must be used
seating position that will The child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
accommodate a child restraint with single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Anchor Locations
lower attachments (2). Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
Top Tether Anchor tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child
Second Row 60/40
restraint.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of
the child restraint to the vehicle.
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether
attachment (2) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
To assist in locating the top tether

anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is near the top tether
anchors for second row seats. For
third row seats (if equipped), the top
tether anchor symbol is on the
Second Row Bucket Third Row Seat flipper panel.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors. positions with top tether anchors.
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
To assist in locating the lower

anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
Second Row Seat Bucket Second Row Seat 60/40 Third Row Seat
For models with bucket second row For models with 60/40 second row For models with a third row seat, the
seating, the top tether anchors are seating, the top tether anchors are top tether anchors are on the back
at the bottom rear of the seat at the bottom rear of the seat of the seatback. Move the flipper
cushion for each seating position in cushion for each seating position in panel rearward to access the
the second row. Be sure to use an the second row. Be sure to use a anchors. Be sure to use a top tether
anchor on the same side of the top tether anchor directly behind the anchor directly behind the seating
vehicle as the seating position seating position where the child position where the child restraint will
where the child restraint will be restraint will be placed. be placed.
placed. Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the

child restraint say that the top tether Warning (Continued) { Warning
must be attached.
anchors, or use the vehicle safety Children can be seriously injured
According to accident statistics, belts to secure the restraint, or strangled if a shoulder belt is
children and infants are safer when following the instructions that wrapped around their neck. The
properly restrained in a child came with the child restraint and shoulder belt can tighten but
restraint system or infant restraint the instructions in this manual. cannot be loosened if it is locked.
system secured in a rear seating The shoulder belt locks when it is
position. See Where to Put the
pulled all the way out of the
Restraint on page 3-50 for
retractor. It unlocks when the
additional information. { Warning shoulder belt is allowed to go all
Securing a Child Restraint To reduce the risk of serious or the way back into the retractor,
Designed for the LATCH fatal injuries during a crash, do but it cannot do this if it is
System not attach more than one child wrapped around a childs neck.
restraint to a single anchor. If the shoulder belt is locked and
{ Warning Attaching more than one child tightened around a childs neck,
the only way to loosen the belt is
restraint to a single anchor could
If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment to cut it.
not attached to anchors or with to come loose or even break Buckle any unused safety belts
the safety belt, the child restraint during a crash. A child or others behind the child restraint so
will not be able to protect the child could be injured. children cannot reach them. Pull
correctly. In a crash, the child the shoulder belt all the way out
could be seriously injured or of the retractor to set the lock,
killed. Install a LATCH-type child and tighten the belt behind the
restraint properly using the child restraint after the child
(Continued) restraint has been installed.
This system is designed to make Restraint Removal and

{ Caution installation of child restraints easier. Reinstallation under Lower
When using lower anchors, do not Anchors and Tethers for
Do not let the LATCH use the vehicle's safety belts. Children (LATCH System) on
attachments rub against the Instead use the vehicle's anchors page 3-51.
vehicles safety belts. This may and child restraint attachments to
damage these parts. If necessary, 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
secure the restraints. Some the desired seating
move buckled safety belts to restraints also use another vehicle
avoid rubbing the LATCH position.
anchor to secure a top tether.
attachments. 1.2. Put the child restraint on
1. Attach and tighten the lower the seat.
Do not fold the empty rear seat attachments to the lower
with a safety belt buckled. This anchors. If the child restraint 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
could damage the safety belt or does not have lower attachments on the child
the seat. Unbuckle and return the attachments or the desired restraint to the lower
safety belt to its stowed position, seating position does not have anchors.
before folding the seat. lower anchors, secure the child 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
restraint with the the safety belts recommends that the top tether
and top tether when be attached, attach and tighten
The vehicle may be equipped with a recommended by the child
front center airbag in the inboard the top tether to the top tether
restraint manufacturer. Refer to anchor. Refer to the child
side of the driver seat. Even with a your child restraint manufacturer
front center airbag, a child restraint restraint instructions and the
instructions and the instructions following steps:
can be installed in any second row in this manual. For the third row
seating position. outboard seating positions, if the 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
If you need to secure more than one head restraint interferes with the For models with a third row
child restraint in the rear seat, see proper installation of the child seat, move the flipper panel
Where to Put the Restraint on restraint, then the head restraint rearward to access the top
page 3-50. may be removed. See Head tether anchors.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten are using a single

the top tether according to tether, raise the head
your child restraint restraint and route the
instructions and the tether under the head
following instructions: restraint and in between
the head restraint posts.
. If the position you are

using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
using does not have a
are using a single
tether, route the tether . If the position you are
over the seatback. using has a fixed head
restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether around
the inboard or outboard
. If the position you are side of the head
using has an adjustable restraint.
Head Restraint Removal and

Reinstallation
1. Partially fold the seatback
forward. See Third Row Seats
on page 3-16 for additional
information.

using has a fixed or an
adjustable head
restraint and you are 4. With the head restraint facing
using a dual tether, rearward, insert the head
route the tether around restraint posts into the holes in
the head restraint. the top of the seatback.
3. Before placing a child in the 5. Push the head restraint down.
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check, 6. Try to move the head restraint to
grasp the child restraint at the make sure that it is locked in
LATCH path and attempt to 2. Press the buttons on the head place.
move it side to side and back restraint posts, and pull up on
the head restraint. 7. When the child restraint is
and forth. There should be no removed, reinstall the head
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of 3. Route the tether of the child restraint before the seating
movement, for proper restraint under the head position is used.
installation. restraint.
{ Warning Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

With head restraints that are not see your dealer to have the airbags if they inflate. Never
installed and adjusted properly, system inspected and any secure a child restraint in the
there is a greater chance that necessary replacements made as center front seat. It is always
occupants will suffer a neck/ soon as possible. better to secure a child restraint in
spinal injury in a crash. Do not a rear seat.
drive until the head restraints for If the vehicle has the LATCH system
all occupants are installed and and it was being used during a Do not use child restraints in the
adjusted properly. crash, new LATCH system parts center front seat position.
may be needed.
Replacing LATCH System New parts and repairs may be Securing Child Restraints
Parts After a Crash necessary even if the LATCH (Rear Seat)
system was not being used at the
time of the crash. When securing a child restraint in a
{ Warning rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
A crash can damage the LATCH Securing Child Restraints restraint to make sure it is
system in the vehicle. A damaged (Center Front Seat) compatible with this vehicle.
LATCH system may not properly If the child restraint has the LATCH
secure the child restraint, { Warning system, see Lower Anchors and
resulting in serious injury or even Tethers for Children (LATCH
death in a crash. To help make A child in a child restraint in the System) on page 3-51 for how and
sure the LATCH system is center front seat can be badly where to install the child restraint
working properly after a crash, injured or killed by the frontal using LATCH. If a child restraint is
(Continued) (Continued) secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for If more than one child restraint
Children (LATCH System) on needs to be installed in the rear
page 3-51 for top tether anchor seat, be sure to read Where to Put
locations. the Restraint on page 3-50.
Do not secure a child seat in a 1. Put the child restraint on
position without a top tether anchor the seat.
if a national or local law requires For the third row outboard
that the top tether be anchored, or if seating positions, if the head
the instructions that come with the restraint interferes with the
child restraint say that the top strap proper installation of the child
must be anchored. restraint, the head restraint may
In Canada, the law requires that be removed. See Head
forward-facing child restraints have Restraint Removal and 3. Push the latch plate into the
a top tether, and that the tether be Reinstallation under Lower buckle until it clicks.
attached. Anchors and Tethers for If the latch plate will not go fully
If the child restraint or vehicle seat Children (LATCH System) on into the buckle, check to see if
position does not have the LATCH page 3-51. the correct buckle is being used.
system, you will be using the safety 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run Position the release button on
belt to secure the child restraint in the lap and shoulder portions of the buckle so that the safety belt
this position. Be sure to follow the the vehicle's safety belt through could be quickly unbuckled if
instructions that came with the child or around the restraint. The child necessary.
restraint. Secure the child in the restraint instructions will show
child restraint when and as the you how.
instructions say.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturers instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint
and see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-51.
7. Before placing a child in the
securely held in place. To check,
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down grasp the child restraint at the
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the safety belt path and attempt to
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt and forth. When the child
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed,
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than
a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
may be helpful to use your knee To remove the child restraint,
to push down on the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
restraint as you tighten the belt. let it return to the stowed position.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the top tether is attached to a top
retractor to make sure the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor is locked. If the If the head restraint was removed
retractor is not locked, repeat for a third row outboard seating
Steps 4 and 5. position, reinstall it before the
seating position is used. See Head Never put a rear-facing child seat in
Restraint Removal and the front. This is because the risk to Warning (Continued)
Reinstallation under Lower Anchors the rear-facing child is so great if the
and Tethers for Children (LATCH airbag deploys. will not deploy under some
System) on page 3-51 for additional unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off.
information on reinstalling the head
restraint properly.
{ Warning
Secure rear-facing child restraints
A child in a rear-facing child in a rear seat, even if the airbag
Securing Child Restraints restraint can be seriously injured is off. If you secure a
(Front Passenger Seat) or killed if the front outboard forward-facing child restraint in
passenger frontal airbag inflates. the front seat, always move the
This vehicle has airbags. A rear This is because the back of the front passenger seat as far back
seat is a safer place to secure a rear-facing child restraint would as it will go. It is better to secure
forward-facing child restraint. See be very close to the inflating
Where to Put the Restraint on the child restraint in a rear seat.
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
page 3-50. See Passenger Sensing System
child restraint can be seriously
In addition, the vehicle has a on page 3-37 for additional
injured or killed if the front
passenger sensing system which is information.
outboard passenger frontal airbag
designed to turn off the front inflates and the passenger seat is
outboard passenger frontal airbag in a forward position. If the child restraint uses a top
under certain conditions. See tether, see Lower Anchors and
Passenger Sensing System on Even if the passenger sensing Tethers for Children (LATCH
page 3-37 and Passenger Airbag system has turned off the front System) on page 3-51 for top tether
Status Indicator on page 5-20 for outboard passenger frontal anchor locations.
more information, including airbag, no system is fail-safe. No
important safety information. one can guarantee that an airbag Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
(Continued) if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
child restraint say that the top strap the lap and shoulder portions of
must be anchored. the vehicle's safety belt through
In Canada, the law requires that or around the restraint. The child
forward-facing child restraints have restraint instructions will show
a top tether, and that the tether be you how.
attached.
When using the lap-shoulder belt to
secure the child restraint in this
position, follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the
following instructions:
4. Push the latch plate into the
1. Move the seat as far back as it buckle until it clicks.
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint. Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
When the passenger sensing could be quickly unbuckled if
system has turned off the front necessary.
outboard passenger frontal
airbag, the off indicator on the Tilt the latch plate to adjust the
passenger airbag status belt, if needed.
indicator should light and stay lit
when you start the vehicle. See
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5-20.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
7. Before placing a child in the

securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in
the passenger airbag status
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down indicator will come on and stay on
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the when the vehicle is started.
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see If the
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back On Indicator is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint under Passenger Sensing
a forward-facing child restraint, it System on page 3-37.
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child To remove the child restraint,
restraint as you tighten the belt. unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Additional Storage Features

Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Storage
Compartments
Roof Rack System
Storage Compartments Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1 { Warning
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Do not store heavy or sharp
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 objects in storage compartments.
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 In a crash, these objects may
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 cause the cover to open and
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3 could result in injury.
4-2 Storage
Instrument Panel Storage The storage area cannot be If equipped, sunglasses storage is
operated with P when valet mode on the overhead console. Press the
is enabled. See Valet Mode in fixed button on the cover and
Home Page on page 7-5. release to access. There may be a
child-view mirror located within the
The storage area can be operated sunglasses bin. Release the bin and
manually. then push up halfway to secure in
position.
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to Armrest Storage
open it. For vehicles with a rear seat
armrest, pull the loop at the top of
Sunglasses Storage the armrest down to access the
cupholders.
If equipped with storage behind the
radio, press and hold P to open.
There is a USB port inside. See the
infotainment manual.
Press and hold P again to close.
Keep the storage area closed when
not in use.
Storage 4-3
Rear Storage Center Console Storage See Power Outlets on page 5-9, SD
Card Reader on page 7-17, USB
Port on page 7-14, and Auxiliary
Jack on page 7-17. If equipped with
an uplevel radio, see the
infotainment manual.
There is storage in the floor of the Pull the handle and lift to access the
rear cargo area. Lift the handle to console. There are auxiliary jacks,
access. There is a removable USB ports, an accessory power
divider to help organize. outlet, tote compartment, device
holder, and SD card reader inside.
On the rear of the console, there is
a High Voltage Power Outlet
(HVPO), auxiliary jacks, and an
open storage area.
4-4 Storage
Additional Storage To return the cover to the retracted

position:
3. Move the other end of the cover
forward and hold it next to the
Features 1. Pull up on the cover handle to driver side trim panel slot.
release the cover posts from the 4. Press the end caps in, to allow
Cargo Cover retaining sockets. the cover to fit into the trim slot.
2. Let the cover move forward to 5. Pull lightly on the cover holder to
{ Warning the full retracted position. make sure it is secure.
An unsecured cargo cover could To remove the cover: On long wheelbase models there
strike people in a sudden stop or 1. Let the cover go all the way into are two cover positions. The slots
turn, or in a crash. Store the the holder. furthest forward allow the cover to
cargo cover securely or remove it be used if the third seat is removed
from the vehicle. 2. Grasping the driver side cover or folded down. The cover can be
end cap, push the cover end cap installed and removed from
toward the passenger side of the either side.
To use the cargo cover, if equipped: vehicle.
1. Pull the cover handle toward the 3. Swing the cover rearward and
rear of the vehicle. take it out of the vehicle.
2. Latch the cover posts into the To put the cover in the vehicle:
retaining sockets on the cargo
1. Make sure the cover slot in the
area trim panels.
holder faces rearward with the
round surface facing down.
2. Hold the cover at an angle and
place the cover end cap into the
slot in the passenger side trim
panel.
Storage 4-5
Roof Rack System { Caution

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle
capacity when loading the vehicle.
For more information on vehicle
{ Warning Loading cargo on the roof rack capacity and loading, see Vehicle
that weighs more than 100 kg Load Limits on page 9-14.
If something is carried on top of (220 lb) or hangs over the rear or
the vehicle that is longer or wider sides of the vehicle may damage A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
than the roof rack like paneling, the vehicle. Load cargo so that it (CHMSL) is located above the rear
plywood, or a mattress the rests evenly between the window glass. Make sure items
wind can catch it while the vehicle loaded on the roof of the vehicle do
crossrails, making sure to fasten
is being driven. The item being not block or damage the CHMSL.
cargo securely.
carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
and damage the vehicle. Never when driving, check to make sure
carry something longer or wider crossrails and cargo are securely
than the roof rack on top of the fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
vehicle unless using a GM rack will make the vehicles center
certified accessory carrier. of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
If equipped, the roof rack can be braking, or abrupt maneuvers,
used to load items. For roof racks otherwise it may result in loss of
that do not have crossrails included, control. If driving for a long distance,
GM Certified crossrails can be on rough roads, or at high speeds,
purchased as an accessory. occasionally stop the vehicle to
See your dealer for additional make sure the cargo remains in its
information. place.
4-6 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Information Displays
Driver Information Center
Controls Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-19
(DIC) (Base Level) . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Driver Information Center
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-20 (DIC) (Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Controls Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Vehicle Messages
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-21
Malfunction Battery Voltage and Charging
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Brake System Warning Brake System Messages . . . . 5-35
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Rear Window Wiper/ Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-36
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-26 Engine Cooling System
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-38
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-26 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-38
Indicators Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-39
Warning Lights, Gauges, and StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-27 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-39
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Traction Control System Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . 5-27 Object Detection System
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-28 Ride Control System
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-43
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-28 Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Engine Oil Pressure Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Steering System
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 Controls Tilt and Telescoping Steering

Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-44 Wheel
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Steering Wheel
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-47 Adjustment
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-47
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-55
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
To adjust the tilt and telescoping

steering wheel, if equipped:
1. Push the lever (1) down to move
To adjust the steering wheel: the steering wheel forward or
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull rearward. Lift the lever (1) up to
the lever. lock the wheel in place.
2. Move the steering wheel up 2. Hold the steering wheel and pull
or down. the lever (2) toward you to move
the steering wheel up or down.
3. Release the lever to lock the
Release the lever (2) to lock the
wheel in place.
wheel into place.
Power Tilt and Telescoping Steering Wheel Controls Radio) on page 7-25, or Bluetooth
Steering Wheel (Overview) in the infotainment
manual.
i (Phone/Mute): Press to reject
an incoming call or end a current
call. Press to mute or unmute the
infotainment system when not on
a call.
o or p (Previous/Next Menu):
Press to go to the previous or next
menu option.
w or x (Next/Previous
Selection): Press to go to the next
or previous selection.
If equipped, some audio controls
To adjust the power tilt and can be adjusted at the steering @ (Select): Press to select a
telescoping steering wheel, wheel. highlighted menu option.
if equipped:
g (Talk): For vehicles with OnStar
Press the control to move the or a Bluetooth system, press to
steering wheel up and down or interact with those systems. See
forward and rearward. OnStar Overview on page 14-1,
Do not adjust the steering wheel Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-19
while driving. or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
Base Radio) on page 7-21 or
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - Base
Heated Steering Wheel Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper control is on

the turn signal lever.
The windshield wipers are controlled
The favorite and volume switches by turning the band with z
are on the back of the steering FRONT on it.
wheel.
( (Heated Steering Wheel, If 1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.
1. Favorite: When on a radio
source, press to select the next Equipped): Press to turn it on or w (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
or previous favorite. When on a off. A light next to the button 3 INT (Intermittent Wipes): Turn
displays when the feature is
media source, press to select
turned on. the z FRONT band up for more
the next or previous track. frequent wipes or down for less
2. Volume: Press to increase or The steering wheel takes about frequent wipes.
decrease the volume. three minutes to start heating.
OFF: Turns the windshield
wipers off.
Horn
8 (Mist): For a single wipe, turn
To sound the horn, press a on the to 8, then release. For several
steering wheel.
wipes, hold the band on 8 longer.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper Rainsense

. Turn the band down to the lower
blades before using them. If frozen INT setting for less sensitivity to
With Rainsense, a sensor near the moisture.
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
top center of the windshield detects
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades Move the band out of the 3 INT
the amount of water on the
should be replaced. See Wiper
windshield and controls the position to deactivate Rainsense.
Blade Replacement on page 10-29.
frequency of the windshield wiper.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
Keep this area of the windshield
wiper motor. An internal circuit
clear of debris to allow for best
breaker to the motor will stop the
system performance.
motor until it cools down.
3 INT (Rainsense Wipe
Wiper Parking
Sensitivity): Turn the z FRONT
If the ignition is put in OFF while the band on the wiper lever to adjust the
wipers are on w, 1, or 3 INT, sensitivity when Rainsense is z AUTO (Rainsense On/Off):
they will immediately stop. turned on. Press to turn Rainsense on or off.
If z FRONT is then moved to When turned on and z FRONT is
OFF before the driver door is in one of the Rainsense wipe
opened or within 10 minutes, the sensitivity positions, the wipers can
wipers will restart and move to the be adjusted for more or less
base of the windshield. sensitivity to moisture by adjusting
the INT position. When turned off,
If the ignition is put in OFF while the the wipers operate as timed
wipers are performing wipes due to . Turn the band up to a higher INT intermittent wipers and can be
windshield washing or Rainsense, setting for more sensitivity to adjusted for more or less frequent
the wipers continue to run until they moisture. wipes.
reach the base of the windshield.
If z AUTO is on when the ignition The wiper operations return to page 10-21 for information on filling
is turned on, or if the ignition is in normal when the transmission is no the windshield washer fluid
longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle reservoir.
ON/RUN and the z FRONT band
speed has increased.
is in one of the sensitivity settings
Windshield Washer
Rear Window Wiper/
when z AUTO is turned on or off,
a message may display indicating if Washer
Rainsense was turned on or off. { Warning
If the ignition is in ON/RUN and z In freezing weather, do not use
FRONT is not in one of the the washer until the windshield is
sensitivity settings when z AUTO warmed. Otherwise the washer
is turned on, a message may fluid can form ice on the
display indicating that the wiper windshield, blocking your vision.
band must be in one of the The rear wiper control is on the turn
sensitivity settings for Rainsense to signal lever.
operate.
L m (Washer Fluid): Push the
paddle marked with the windshield To turn the rear wiper on, slide the
Wiper Arm Assembly Protection washer symbol at the top of the turn lever to a wiper position.
When using an automatic car wash, signal lever to spray washer fluid
and activate the wipers. The wipers OFF: Turns the wiper off.
move the windshield wiper lever to
will continue until the paddle is INT (Intermittent Wipes): Turns on
OFF. This disables the automatic
Rainsense windshield wipers. released or the maximum wash time the rear wiper with a delay between
is reached. When the paddle is wipes.
With Rainsense, if the transmission released, additional wipes may
is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle ON (Rear Wipes): Turns on the
occur depending on how long the rear wiper.
speed is very slow, the wipers may windshield washer had been
automatically stop at the base of the activated. See Washer Fluid on
windshield.
= REAR (Rear Wiper Wash): The wiper operations return to Compass

Press this button on the end of the normal when the transmission is no
longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle The vehicle may have a compass
lever to spray washer fluid on the
speed has increased. display on the Driver Information
rear window. The wipers will clear
Center (DIC). The compass receives
the rear window and either stop or Reverse Gear Wipes its heading and other information
return to your preset speed. For
If the rear wiper control is off, the from the Global Positioning
more washer cycles, press and hold
rear wiper will automatically operate System (GPS) antenna,
the button.
continuously when the shift lever is StabiliTrak, and vehicle speed
The rear window wiper/washer will in R (Reverse), and the front information.
not operate if the liftgate or liftglass windshield wiper is performing low The compass system is designed to
is open or ajar. If the liftgate or or high speed wipes. If the rear operate for a certain number of
liftglass is opened while the rear wiper control is off, the shift lever is miles or degrees of turn before
wiper is on, the wiper returns to the in R (Reverse), and the front needing a signal from the GPS
parked position and stops. windshield wiper is performing satellites. When the compass
Rear Wiper Arm Assembly interval wipes, then the rear wiper display shows CAL, drive the
Protection automatically performs interval vehicle for a short distance in an
wipes. open area where it can receive a
When using an automatic car wash,
This feature can be turned on or off. GPS signal. The compass system
move the rear wiper control to OFF
See Vehicle Personalization on will automatically determine when a
to disable the rear wiper. In some
page 5-47. GPS signal is restored and provide
vehicles, if the transmission is in
a heading again. See Compass
N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed is The windshield washer reservoir is Messages on page 5-36 for the
very slow, the rear wiper will used for the windshield and the rear messages that may be displayed for
automatically park under the rear window. Check the fluid level in the the compass.
spoiler. reservoir if either washer is not
working. See Washer Fluid on
page 10-21.
Clock To set the clock display: Auto Set requires an active

1. Select SETTINGS from the connection to OnStar.
Setting the Time and Date with Home Page, then select Time If auto timing is set, the time
Faceplate Controls and Date. displayed on the clock may not
To set the time or date: 2. Select Clock Display. update immediately when driving
into a new time zone.
1. Select SETTINGS from the 3. Turn the MENU knob to Off
Home Page, then select Time or On. To set the date:
and Date. 1. Touch SETTINGS on the Home
4. Press the MENU knob to select.
2. Select the desired function. Page, then touch Time
3. Turn the MENU knob to increase Press o BACK to go to the last and Date.
menu and save the changes.
or decrease the value. 2. Touch Set Date, then touch
4. Press the MENU knob to go to Setting the Time and Date with or to increase or decrease
the next value. After the last Touchscreen Controls month, day, or year.
value is selected, the system will To set the time:
update and return to the Settings 3. Touch } to go back to the
menu. Press o BACK to go to 1. Touch SETTINGS on the Home previous menu.
the last menu and save the Page, then touch Time To set the clock display:
and Date.
changes. 1. Touch SETTINGS on the Home
Auto Set requires an active 2. Touch Set Time, then touch Page, then touch Time
connection to OnStar. or to increase or decrease and Date.
If auto timing is set, the time hours, minutes, and AM or PM. 2. Touch Clock Display, then touch
displayed on the clock may not Touch 1224 Hr for 12 or OFF or ON to turn the clock
update immediately when driving 24 hour clock. display off or on.
into a new time zone. 3. Touch } to go back to the 3. Touch } to go back to the
previous menu. previous menu.

. One in the storage area on the
Power Outlets bench seat.
start. See Ignition Positions (Key
Access) on page 9-20 or Ignition
Power Outlets 12 Volt Direct . One on the rear of the center Positions (Keyless Access) on
Current armrest storage. page 9-22.
Accessory power outlets can be . One in the third row seat area on . The power outlets in the third
used to plug in electrical equipment, the driver side. row seat area or in the rear
such as a cell phone, MP3 cargo area are powered at all
player, etc.
. One in the rear cargo area on times. The power outlets inside
the passenger side. the storage area, on the rear of
The vehicle may have up to five
accessory power outlets: Lift the cover to access and replace the console, or on the bench
when not in use. seat are only powered when the
Vehicles with a Center Console ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
The accessory power outlets are
. One in front of the cupholders on ACCESSORY, or when RAP is
powered as follows:
the center console. active.
. The power outlet near the
. One inside the center storage
console.
cupholders for vehicles with a
center console or on the center
{ Warning
. One on the rear of the center stack for vehicles with bench Power is always supplied to the
storage console. seats, can be configured to outlet, if configured accordingly.
.
operate using Retained Do not leave electrical equipment
One in the third row seat on the Accessory Power (RAP) or
driver side. plugged in when the vehicle is not
battery power modes. If these in use because the vehicle could
. One in the rear cargo area on power outlets are used while in catch fire and cause injury or
the passenger side. the battery power mode, this
death.
could cause interference
Vehicles with Bench Seats between the Remote Keyless
. One on the center stack below Entry (RKE) transmitter and the
the climate control system. vehicle, and the vehicle may not
An indicator light on the outlet turns

{ Caution { Caution on to show it is in use. The light
comes on when the ignition is in
Leaving electrical equipment Hanging heavy equipment from ON/RUN, equipment requiring less
plugged in for an extended period the power outlet can cause than 150 watts is plugged into the
of time while the ignition is in damage not covered by the outlet, and no system fault is
LOCK/OFF will drain the battery. vehicle warranty. The power detected.
Always unplug electrical outlets are designed for
equipment when not in use and accessory power plugs only, such The indicator light does not come on
when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or
do not plug in equipment that as cell phone charge cords.
if the equipment is not fully seated
exceeds the maximum 15 ampere
into the outlet.
rating.
Power Outlet 110/120 Volt If equipment is connected using
Alternating Current more than 150 watts or a system
Certain power accessory plugs may fault is detected, a protection circuit
If equipped with this power outlet, it
not be compatible with the shuts off the power supply and the
can be used to plug in electrical
accessory power outlet and could indicator light turns off. To reset the
equipment that uses a maximum
overload vehicle or adapter fuses. circuit, unplug the item and plug it
limit of 150 watts.
If a problem is experienced, see back in or turn the ignition off and
your dealer. For vehicles with a center console, then back to ON/RUN. The power
the 110/120 volt power outlet is on restarts when equipment using 150
When adding electrical equipment,
the rear of the center console. watts or less is plugged into the
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included with For vehicles with bench seats, the outlet and a system fault is not
the equipment. See Add-On 110/120 volt power outlet is on the detected.
Electrical Equipment on page 9-89. center stack below the climate
controls.
The power outlet is not designed for Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
the following, and may not work could be a problem with a vehicle
properly if they are plugged in: Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
. Equipment with high initial peak Indicators problem with the vehicle.
wattage, such as
compressor-driven refrigerators Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
and electric power tools. signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
. Other equipment requiring an to cause an expensive repair or
extremely stable power supply, shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
such as warning lights and gauges could
microcomputer-controlled to do. Waiting to do repairs can be
prevent injury. costly and even dangerous.
electric blankets and touch
sensor lamps. Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
. Medical equipment. function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Instrument Cluster
Base Cluster (English Shown, Metric Similar)

Uplevel Cluster (English Shown, Metric Similar)

Cluster Menu (Uplevel Cluster)

. Info App. This is where the calls, scroll through contacts, select
selected Driver Information from the favorites, or change the
There is an interactive display area Center (DIC) displays can be phone source. If there is an active
in the center of the instrument viewed. See Driver Information call, mute the phone or switch to
cluster. Center (DIC) (Uplevel) in the handset operation.
Index.
Navigation
. Audio
. Phone Press V to select the Navigation
app, then press p to enter the
. Navigation
Navigation menu. If there is no
. Settings active route, you can resume the
Audio last route and turn the voice
prompts on/off. If there is an active
Press V to select the Audio app, route, you can cancel the route.
then press p to enter the Audio Settings
menu. In the Audio menu browse for
music, select from the favorites, Press V to select the Settings app.
Use the right steering wheel control or change the audio source. In the Use w or x to scroll through items
to open and scroll through the main application view, use w or x in the Settings menu.
different items and displays. to change the station or go to the
Units: Press p while Units is
Press o to access the cluster next or previous track.
displayed to enter the Units menu.
applications. Use w or x to scroll Phone Choose English or metric units by
through the list of available Press V to select the Phone app, pressing V while the desired item is
applications. Not all applications will highlighted. A checkmark will be
be available on all vehicles. then press p to enter the Phone displayed next to the selected item.
menu. In the Phone menu, if there is
no active phone call, view recent
Info Pages: Press p while Info Speedometer Tachometer

Pages is displayed to enter the Info The speedometer shows the The tachometer displays the engine
Pages menu and select the items to vehicle's speed in either kilometers speed in revolutions per
be displayed in the Info app. See per hour (km/h) or miles per minute (rpm).
Driver Information Center (DIC) hour (mph).
(Uplevel) in the Index.
Speed Warning: The Speed Odometer
Warning display allows the driver to
set a speed that they do not want to The odometer shows how far the
exceed. To set the Speed Warning, vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
press p when Speed Warning is
displayed, or press V on the main Trip Odometer
view to set the speed value. Press
w or x to adjust the value. Press The trip odometer shows how far
V to set the speed. Once the speed the vehicle has been driven since
is set, this feature can be turned off the trip odometer was last reset.
by pressing V while viewing this The trip odometer is accessed and
page. If the selected speed limit is reset through the Driver Information
exceeded, a pop-up warning is Center (DIC). See Driver
displayed with a chime. Information Center (DIC) (Base
Level) on page 5-29 or Driver
Software Information: Press p Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
while Software Information is on page 5-31.
highlighted to display open source
software information.

. The gauge moves a little while
Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuel
turning a corner or speeding up.
gauge indicates about how much
fuel is left in the tank. . The gauge takes a few seconds
There is an arrow near the fuel to stabilize after the ignition is
gauge pointing to the side of the turned on, and goes back to
vehicle the fuel door is on. empty when the ignition is
turned off.
When the indicator nears empty, the
low fuel light comes on. There still is
a little fuel left, but the vehicle
should be refueled soon.
Here are four things that some
owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
Metric
. At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
English
Engine Oil Pressure PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE

under Engine Oil Messages on
Gauge page 5-38 and Engine Oil on
page 10-7.
{ Caution
Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. Driving with the engine oil
low can also damage the engine.
The repairs would not be covered
English by the vehicle warranty. Check
The engine oil pressure gauge the oil level as soon as possible.
shows the engine oil pressure Add oil if required, but if the oil
Metric level is within the operating range
in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (pounds
per square inch) when the engine is and the oil pressure is still low,
running. have the vehicle serviced. Always
follow the maintenance schedule
Oil pressure can vary with engine
for changing engine oil.
speed, outside temperature and oil
viscosity.
A reading outside the normal
operating range can be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or some
other problem causing low oil
pressure. Check the vehicle's oil as
soon as possible. See OIL
Engine Coolant Voltmeter Gauge

Temperature Gauge
English
This gauge measures the
temperature of the vehicle's engine When the ignition is on, this gauge
Metric
coolant. indicates the battery voltage.
While driving under normal When the engine is running, this
operating conditions, if the needle gauge shows the condition of the
moves into the red warning area, charging system. The gauge can
the engine is too hot. Pull off the transition from a higher to lower or a
road, stop the vehicle, and turn off lower to higher reading. This is
the engine as soon as possible. normal. If the vehicle is operating
outside the normal operating range,
the charging system light comes on.
See Charging System Light on
page 5-21 for more information.
The voltmeter gauge may also read Readings outside the normal times if the driver remains or
lower when in fuel economy mode. operating range indicate a possible becomes unbuckled while the
This is normal. problem in the electrical system. vehicle is moving.
Readings outside the normal Have the vehicle serviced as soon If the driver safety belt is buckled,
operating range can also occur as possible. neither the light nor the chime
when a large number of electrical comes on.
accessories are operating in the Safety Belt Reminders
vehicle and the engine is left idling Passenger Safety Belt
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Reminder Light
for an extended period. This
condition is normal since the
Light
There may be a passenger safety
charging system is not able to There is a driver safety belt belt reminder light near the
provide full power at engine idle. As reminder light on the instrument passenger airbag status indicator.
engine speeds are increased, this cluster. See Passenger Sensing System on
condition should correct itself as page 3-37.
higher engine speeds allow the
charging system to create maximum
power.
The vehicle can only be driven for a
short time with the readings outside
the normal operating range. If the
vehicle must be driven, turn off all When the vehicle is started, this
accessories, such as the radio and light flashes and a chime may come For vehicles equipped with the
air conditioner. on to remind the driver to fasten passenger safety belt reminder light,
their safety belt. Then the light stays when the vehicle is started this light
on solid until the belt is buckled. flashes and a chime may come on
This cycle may continue several to remind passengers to fasten their
safety belt. Then the light stays on
solid until the belt is buckled. This
cycle continues several times if the and diagnostic module. For more
passenger remains or becomes information on the airbag system, Warning (Continued)
unbuckled while the vehicle is see Airbag System on page 3-30.
moving. without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
If the passenger safety belt is right away.
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
If there is a problem with the airbag
The front passenger safety belt system, a Driver Information Center
reminder light and chime may turn (DIC) message may also come on.
on if an object is put on the seat See Airbag System Messages on
The airbag readiness light comes on
such as a briefcase, handbag, page 5-43.
for several seconds when the
grocery bag, laptop, or other
vehicle is started. If the light does
electronic device. To turn off the
reminder light and/or chime, remove
not come on then, have it fixed Passenger Airbag Status
immediately. Indicator
the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt. The vehicle has a passenger
{ Warning sensing system. See Passenger
Airbag Readiness Light If the airbag readiness light stays Sensing System on page 3-37 for
This light shows if there is an on after the vehicle is started or important safety information. The
electrical problem with the airbag comes on while driving, it means passenger airbag status indicator is
system. The system check includes the airbag system might not be in the overhead console.
the airbag sensor(s), passenger working properly. The airbags in
sensing system (if equipped), the the vehicle might not inflate in a
pretensioners, the airbag modules, crash, or they could even inflate
the wiring, and the crash sensing
(Continued)
If the word ON or the on symbol is

lit on the passenger airbag status Warning (Continued)
indicator, it means that the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag is Light on page 5-20 for more
allowed to inflate. information, including important
safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is
United States lit on the airbag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensing Charging System Light
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
Canada and Mexico problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
When the vehicle is started, the your dealer for service. The charging system light comes on
passenger airbag status indicator briefly when the ignition is turned
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds { Warning on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
as a system check. Then, after If the airbag readiness light ever It should go out when the engine is
several more seconds, the status comes on and stays on, it means started.
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
that something may be wrong If the light stays on, or comes on
or the on or off symbol, to let you
with the airbag system. To help while driving, there may be a
know the status of the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag. avoid injury to yourself or others, problem with the electrical charging
have the vehicle serviced right system. Have it checked by your
away. See Airbag Readiness dealer. Driving while this light is on
(Continued) could drain the battery.
When this light comes on, or is

flashing, the Driver Information Caution (Continued)
Center (DIC) also displays a
message. the vehicle fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
See Battery Voltage and Charging might not run as smoothly. This
Messages on page 5-35. could lead to costly repairs that
If the malfunction indicator lamp
If a short distance must be driven might not be covered by the
comes on while the engine is
with the light on, be sure to turn off vehicle warranty.
running, this indicates that the OBD
all accessories, such as the radio
II system has detected a problem
and air conditioner.
and diagnosis and service might be
Malfunction
required. { Caution
Malfunctions often are indicated by
Indicator Lamp the system before any problem is Modifications made to the engine,
A computer system called OBD II apparent. Being aware of the light transmission, exhaust, intake,
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second can prevent more serious damage or fuel system of the vehicle or
Generation) monitors the operation to the vehicle. This system also the replacement of the original
of the vehicle to ensure emissions assists the service technician in tires with other than those of the
are at acceptable levels, helping to correctly diagnosing any same Tire Performance Criteria
maintain a clean environment. The malfunction. (TPC) can affect the vehicle's
malfunction indicator lamp comes emission controls and can cause
on when the vehicle is placed in
ON/RUN, as a check to show it is
{ Caution this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems
working. If it does not, have the If the vehicle is continually driven could lead to costly repairs not
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See with this light on, the emission covered by the vehicle warranty.
Ignition Positions (Key Access) on controls might not work as well, This could also result in a failure
page 9-20 or Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) on page 9-22.
If the light continues to flash, find a

. Check that good quality fuel is
Caution (Continued) safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at the engine not to run as
to pass a required Emission least 10 seconds, and restart the efficiently as designed and may
Inspection/Maintenance test. See engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up,
Accessories and Modifications on follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is
page 10-3. your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring,
possible. hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
This light comes on during a Light On Steady: An emission These conditions might go away
malfunction in one of two ways: control system malfunction has once the engine is warmed up.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
has been detected. A misfire
required. occurs, change the fuel brand used.
increases vehicle emissions and
It may require at least one full tank
could damage the emission control The following may correct an of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis emission control system
and service might be required. malfunction: See Fuel on page 9-69.
To prevent more serious damage to . Check that the fuel cap is fully If none of the above have made the
the vehicle: installed. See Filling the Tank on light turn off, your dealer can check
. page 9-72. The diagnostic the vehicle. The dealer has the
Reduce vehicle speed.
system can determine if the fuel proper test equipment and
. Avoid hard accelerations. cap has been left off or diagnostic tools to fix any
. Avoid steep uphill grades. improperly installed. A loose or mechanical or electrical problems
missing fuel cap allows fuel to that might have developed.
. If towing a trailer, reduce the
evaporate into the atmosphere.
amount of cargo being hauled as
A few driving trips with the cap
soon as it is possible.
properly installed should turn the
light off.
Emissions Inspection and the ignition is turned to ON/RUN Brake System Warning
Maintenance Programs while the engine is off. See your
dealer for assistance in verifying
Light
Depending on where you live, your proper operation of the The vehicle brake system consists
vehicle may be required to malfunction indicator lamp. of two hydraulic circuits. If one
participate in an emission control circuit is not working, the remaining
system inspection and maintenance . The OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics) system determines circuit can still work to stop the
program. For the inspection, the vehicle. For normal braking
emission system test equipment will that critical emission control
systems have not been performance, both circuits need to
likely connect to the vehicle's Data be working.
Link Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not If the warning light comes on, there
ready for inspection. This can is a brake problem. Have the brake
happen if the 12-volt battery has system inspected right away.
recently been replaced or run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
The DLC is under the instrument several days of routine driving.
panel to the left of the steering If this has been done and the Metric English
wheel. See your dealer if assistance vehicle still does not pass the
is needed. inspection for lack of OBD II This light should come on briefly
The vehicle may not pass system readiness, your dealer when the engine is started. If it does
inspection if: can prepare the vehicle for not come on then, have it fixed so it
inspection. will be ready to warn if there is a
. The malfunction indicator lamp is problem.
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
When the ignition is on, the brake If the light comes on while driving,
system warning light also comes on Warning (Continued) stop as soon as it is safely possible
when the parking brake is set. The and turn off the vehicle. Then start
light stays on if the parking brake the road and carefully stopped, the engine again to reset the
does not fully release. If it stays on have the vehicle towed for system. If the ABS light stays on,
after the parking brake is fully service. or comes on again while driving, the
released, it means the vehicle has a vehicle needs service. A chime may
brake problem. Antilock Brake System also sound when the light comes on
If the light comes on while driving, steady.
(ABS) Warning Light
pull off the road and stop carefully. If the ABS light is the only light on,
The pedal might be harder to push, the vehicle has regular brakes, but
or the pedal can go closer to the the antilock brakes are not
floor. It may take longer to stop. functioning.
If the light is still on, have the If both the ABS and the brake
vehicle towed for service. See system warning light are on, the
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-83. vehicle's antilock brakes are not
This light comes on briefly when the functioning and there is a problem
{ Warning engine is started. with the regular brakes. See your
dealer for service.
The brake system might not be If the light does not come on, have it
working properly if the brake fixed so it will be ready to warn if See Brake System Warning Light on
system warning light is on. there is a problem. page 5-24 and Brake System
Driving with the brake system Messages on page 5-35.
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
(Continued)
Tow/Haul Mode Light This light is green if LDW is on and Traction Off Light
ready to operate.
This light changes to amber and
flashes to indicate that the lane
marking has been crossed without
using a turn signal in that direction.
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
on page 9-68.
For vehicles with the Tow/Haul This light comes on briefly while
Mode feature, this light comes on Vehicle Ahead Indicator starting the engine. If it does not,
when the Tow/Haul Mode has been have the vehicle serviced by your
activated. dealer. If the system is working
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-35. normally, the indicator light then
turns off.
Lane Departure Warning The traction off light comes on when
the Traction Control System (TCS)
(LDW) Light has been turned off by pressing and
If equipped, this indicator will releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak
display green when a vehicle is button.
detected ahead and amber when This light and the StabiliTrak OFF
you are following a vehicle ahead light come on when StabiliTrak is
much too closely. turned off.
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not
If equipped, this light comes on System on page 9-61. limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
briefly while starting the vehicle. If it See Traction Control/Electronic
does not come on, have the vehicle Stability Control on page 9-44.
serviced.
StabiliTrak OFF Light Traction Control System See Traction Control/Electronic

Stability Control on page 9-44.
(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly while

starting the engine. If it does not, This light comes on briefly when the
have the vehicle serviced by your engine is started.
dealer. For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
If the light does not come on, have Monitor System (TPMS), this light
This light comes on when the the vehicle serviced by your dealer. comes on briefly when the engine is
StabiliTrak system is turned off. If the system is working normally, started. It provides information
If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction the indicator light turns off. about tire pressures and the TPMS.
Control System (TCS) is also off.
If the light is on and not flashing, the When the Light Is On Steady
If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off, TCS and potentially the StabiliTrak
the system does not assist in system have been disabled. A DIC This indicates that one or more of
controlling the vehicle. Turn on the message may display. Check the the tires are significantly
TCS and the StabiliTrak systems DIC messages to determine which underinflated.
and the warning light turns off. feature(s) is no longer functioning A Driver Information Center (DIC)
See Traction Control/Electronic and whether the vehicle requires tire pressure message may also
Stability Control on page 9-44. service. display. See Tire Messages on
If the light is on and flashing, the page 5-44. Stop as soon as
TCS and/or the StabiliTrak system possible, and inflate the tires to the
is actively working.
pressure value shown on the Tire It also comes on when the fuel tank High-Beam On Light
and Loading Information label. See is low on fuel. The light turns off
Tire Pressure on page 10-53. when fuel is added. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then Is On Steady
Security Light
If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light This light comes on when the
will come on at every ignition cycle. high-beam headlamps are in use.
See Tire Pressure Monitor See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Operation on page 10-56. Changer on page 6-2.
The security light should come on
Low Fuel Warning Light briefly as the engine is started. If it Front Fog Lamp Light
does not come on, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally, the
indicator light turns off.
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
This light is near the fuel gauge and system. See Immobilizer Operation For vehicles with fog lamps, this
comes on briefly when the ignition is (Keyless Access) on page 2-26 or light comes on when the fog lamps
turned on as a check to show it is are on.
Immobilizer Operation (Key Access)
working. on page 2-25.
The light goes out when the fog The cruise control light is white Information Displays
lamps are turned off. See Fog when the cruise control is on and
Lamps on page 6-5 for more ready, and turns green when the
information. cruise control is set and active. Driver Information Center
See Cruise Control on page 9-48.
(DIC) (Base Level)
Lamps On Reminder The DIC displays are shown in the
Adaptive Cruise Control Light center of the instrument cluster. The
displays show the status of many
vehicle systems. The trip odometer
reset stem in the instrument cluster
is used to access the DIC menu
items.
This light comes on when the

DIC Menu Items
exterior lamps are in use. See This light is white when the Adaptive Turn the trip odometer reset stem to
Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1. Cruise Control (ACC, if equipped) is scroll through the following menu
on and ready, and turns green when items:
Cruise Control Light the ACC is set and active. See . Digital Speedometer
Adaptive Cruise Control on
page 9-51. . Trip
. Fuel Range
. Average Fuel Economy
. Tire Pressure
. Remaining Oil Life
. Transmission Fluid Temperature
. Trailer Brake

. Hourmeter recent driving history and the See Tire Pressure Monitor System
. Unit amount of fuel remaining in the fuel on page 10-55 and Tire Pressure
tank. Fuel range cannot be reset. Monitor Operation on page 10-56.
Digital Speedometer
Average Fuel Economy Remaining Oil Life
The speedometer shows how fast
the vehicle is moving in either The Average Fuel Economy display Turn the trip odometer reset stem
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles shows the approximate average until REMAINING OIL LIFE
per hour (mph). The speedometer liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) displays. An estimate of the oil's
cannot be reset. or miles per gallon (mpg). This remaining useful life is shown.
number reflects only the REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% means
Trip approximate average fuel economy 99% of the current oil life remains.
Turn the trip odometer reset stem that the vehicle has right now, and When the remaining oil life is low,
until TRIP displays. The current will change as driving conditions the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
distance traveled, in either change. This number is based on message will appear on the display.
kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since the number of L/100 km (mpg) See Engine Oil Messages on
the last reset for the trip odometer is recorded since the last time this page 5-38. The oil should be
shown. The trip odometer can be menu item was reset. Reset this changed as soon as possible. See
reset to zero by pressing and display by pressing the trip Engine Oil on page 10-7. In addition
holding the trip odometer reset stem odometer reset stem. to the engine oil life system
while the trip odometer is displayed. Tire Pressure monitoring the oil life, additional
Fuel Range maintenance is recommended in the
Turn the trip odometer reset stem Maintenance Schedule. See
This display shows the approximate until a vehicle with the approximate Maintenance Schedule on
distance the vehicle can be driven pressures of all four tires displays. page 11-3.
without refueling. The fuel range Tire pressure is displayed in either
estimate is based on an average of kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per The Oil Life display must be reset
the vehicle's fuel economy over square inch (psi). after each oil change. It will not
reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life
display at any time other than when
the oil has just been changed. bar graph. Dashes may appear in Driver Information Center
It cannot be reset accurately until the TRAILER OUTPUT display if a
the next oil change. To reset the trailer is not connected.
(DIC) (Uplevel)
engine oil life system, see Engine The DIC displays are shown in the
Oil Life System on page 10-10. Hourmeter
center of the instrument cluster in
This display shows the total number the Info app. See Instrument Cluster
Transmission Fluid Temperature of hours the engine has run. on page 5-12. The displays show
The temperature of the automatic the status of many vehicle systems.
transmission fluid displays in either Unit
The controls for the DIC are on the
degrees Celsius (C) or degrees This will change the displays on the right steering wheel control.
Fahrenheit (F). instrument cluster and DIC to either
metric or English (US)
Trailer Brake measurements. To change the units,
On vehicles with the Integrated press the trip odometer reset stem
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, when UNITS is displayed to enter
turn the trip odometer reset stem the Unit menu. Turn the trip
until TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER odometer reset stem to switch
OUTPUT displays. between English and metric. Press
TRAILER GAIN shows the Trailer the trip odometer reset stem when
Gain setting. This setting can be the desired setting is displayed.
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either Compass
a trailer connected or disconnected.
The vehicle may have a compass in
TRAILER OUTPUT shows the the Driver Information Center (DIC).
power output to the trailer anytime a See Compass on page 5-7.
trailer with electric brakes is w or x : Press to move up or
connected. Output is displayed as a down in a list. In the main view, you
can press up and down to move
between different info app pages.
o or p : Press to move between 6. Press V while an item is L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
the interactive display zones in the highlighted to select or deselect last time this menu item was reset.
cluster. that item. When an item is This number reflects only the
selected, a checkmark will approximate average fuel economy
V (Set/Reset): Press to open a that the vehicle has right now, and
menu or select a menu item. Press appear next to it.
will change as driving conditions
and hold to reset values on certain DIC Info Pages change.
screens.
The following is the list of all Press and hold V while this display
DIC Info Page Options possible DIC info page displays. is active to reset the trip odometer
The info pages on the DIC can be Some may not be available for your and the average fuel economy. Trip
turned on or off through the particular vehicle. Some items may A and Trip B can also be reset by
not be turned on by default but can
Settings menu.
be turned on through the Settings pressing p and choosing reset.
1. Press o to access the cluster app. See DIC Info Page Options Fuel Range: Shows the
applications. earlier in this section. approximate distance the vehicle
Speed: Shows the vehicle speed in can be driven without refueling.
2. Press w or x to scroll to the LOW will be displayed when the
Settings application. either kilometers per hour (km/h) or
miles per hour (mph). vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel
3. Press V to enter the range estimate is based on an
Trip A or Trip B: Shows the average of the vehicle's fuel
Settings menu. current distance traveled, in either economy over recent driving history
4. Scroll to Info Pages and kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since and the amount of fuel remaining in
press p. the trip odometer was last reset. the fuel tank.
This also shows the approximate Oil Life: Shows an estimate of
5. Press w or x to move through average liters per 100 kilometers the oil's remaining useful life.
the list of possible information (L/100 km) or miles per If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is
displays. gallon (mpg). This number is displayed, that means 99% of the
calculated based on the number of current oil life remains.
When the remaining oil life is low, Tire Pressure: Shows the Press p to select the distance or
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON approximate pressures of all four
reset best value. Use w and x to
message will appear on the display. tires. Tire pressure is displayed in
See Engine Oil Messages on either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds choose the distance and press V.
page 5-38. The oil should be per square inch (psi). If the pressure Press w and x to select Reset
changed as soon as possible. See is low, the value for that tire is Best Score. Press V to reset the
Engine Oil on page 10-7. In addition shown in amber. See Tire Pressure
best average fuel economy. After
to the engine oil life system Monitor System on page 10-55 and
reset, the momentary average fuel
monitoring the oil life, additional Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
economy will display.
maintenance is recommended in the page 10-56.
Maintenance Schedule. See The display provides information on
Fuel Economy: The center
Maintenance Schedule on how current driving behavior affects
displays the approximate
page 11-3. the running average and how well
instantaneous fuel economy as a
recent driving compares to the best
The Oil Life display must be reset number and bar graph. Displayed
that has been achieved for the
after each oil change. It will not above the bar graph is a running
selected distance.
reset itself. Do not reset the Oil Life average of fuel economy for the
display at any time other than when most recently traveled selected Timer: This display can be used as
the oil has just been changed. distance. Displayed below the bar a timer. To start the timer, press V
It cannot be reset accurately until graph is the best average fuel while this display is active. The
the next oil change. To reset the economy that has been achieved for display will show the amount of time
engine oil life system, press and the selected distance. The selected that has passed since the timer was
hold V for several seconds while distance is displayed at the top of last reset. To stop the timer, press V
the Oil Life display is active. See the page as last xxx mi/km. Next
briefly while this display is active
Engine Oil Life System on to the odometer, the Active Fuel
and the timer is running. To reset
page 10-10. Management displays the number of
cylinders the vehicle is running on. the timer to zero, press and hold V
See Active Fuel Management on while this display is active, or press
page 9-29. p and select reset.
Speed Limit (If Equipped): Shows OUTPUT shows the power output to Vehicle Messages
sign information, which comes from the trailer anytime a trailer with
a roadway database in the onboard electric brakes is connected. Output Messages displayed on the DIC
navigation. is displayed as a bar graph. Dashes indicate the status of the vehicle or
may appear in the OUTPUT display some action that may be needed to
Engine Hours: Shows the total
if a trailer is not connected. correct a condition. Multiple
number of hours the engine has run.
messages may appear one after
Transmission Fluid Off Road: Displays vehicle pitch
another.
Temperature: Shows the and roll information, road wheel
angle, and four-wheel drive (4WD) The messages that do not require
temperature of the automatic
status. immediate action can be
transmission fluid in either degrees
acknowledged and cleared by
Celsius (C) or degrees Blank Page: Shows no
Fahrenheit (F). information. pressing V or the trip odometer
reset stem on the base cluster.
Trailer Brake (If Equipped): On
vehicles with the Integrated Trailer The messages that require
Brake Control (ITBC) system, the immediate action cannot be cleared
trailer brake display appears in until that action is performed.
the DIC. All messages should be taken
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer seriously and clearing the message
gain setting. This setting can be does not correct the problem.
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either The following are the possible
a trailer connected or disconnected. messages and some information
about them.
Battery Voltage and SERVICE BATTERY Brake System Messages

Charging Messages CHARGING SYSTEM
BRAKE FLUID LOW
On some vehicles, this message
BATTERY LOW START displays if there is a problem with This message is displayed when the
VEHICLE the battery charging system. Under brake fluid level is low. See Brake
When the vehicles battery is certain conditions, the charging Fluid on page 10-23.
severely discharged, this message system light may also turn on in the SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
will display and four chimes will instrument cluster. See Charging
sound. Start the vehicle System Light on page 5-21. Driving This message may be displayed
immediately. If the vehicle is not with this problem could drain the when there is a problem with the
started and the battery continues to battery. Turn off all unnecessary brake boost assist system. When
discharge, the climate controls, accessories. Have the electrical this message is displayed, the brake
heated seats, and audio systems system checked as soon as boost assist motor might be heard
will shut off and the vehicle may possible. See your dealer. operating and you might notice
require a jump start. These systems pulsation in the brake pedal. This is
TRANSPORT MODE ON normal under these conditions. Take
will function again after the vehicle
is started. This message is displayed when the the vehicle to your dealer for
vehicle is in transport mode. Some service.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE features can be disabled while in SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE
This message displays when the this mode, including Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE), remote start,
SYSTEM
battery voltage drops below
expected levels and features are and the vehicle alarm system. Take On vehicles with the Integrated
disabled. Turn off all unnecessary the vehicle to your dealer for service Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
accessory features. to turn transport mode off. this message displays and a chime
may sound when there is a problem
with the ITBC system.
When this message displays, power Cruise Control Messages FRONT RADAR BLOCKED
is no longer available to the trailer SEE OWNERS MANUAL
brakes. ADAPTIVE CRUISE SET
TO XXX This message can display when:
As soon as it is safe to do so,
carefully pull your vehicle over to This message displays when the
. The radar is not clean. Keep the
the side of the road and turn the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) radar sensors free of mud, dirt,
ignition off. Check the wiring speed is set. See Adaptive Cruise snow, ice, and slush. Clean the
connection to the trailer and turn the Control on page 9-51. entire front and/or rear of the
ignition back on. If this message still vehicle. For cleaning
displays, either your vehicle or the ADAPTIVE CRUISE instructions, see Exterior Care
trailer needs service. See your TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE on page 10-88.
dealer. This message displays when . Heavy rain or snow is interfering
See Integrated Trailer Brake attempting to activate Adaptive with the radar object detection or
Control System under Towing Cruise Control (ACC) when it is camera performance.
Equipment on page 9-82 for more temporarily unavailable. The ACC CRUISE SET TO XXX
information. system does not need service.
This message displays when the
This can occur under the following cruise control speed is set. See
Compass Messages conditions:
Cruise Control on page 9-48.
Dashes may be displayed if the . Cruise is turned on when the
vehicle temporarily loses vehicle is stopped. NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS
communication with the Global PEDAL APPLIED
. The radar cannot see objects
Positioning System (GPS). This message displays when
well. See the next message.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
active and the driver is pressing the
gas pedal. When this occurs, ACC
will not brake. See Adaptive Cruise
Control on page 9-51.
SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE obstructions, and close the door added strain on a hot engine, the air
CONTROL again. Check to see if the message conditioning compressor
still appears on the DIC. automatically turns off. When the
If this message displays, take the coolant temperature returns to
vehicle to your dealer to repair the HOOD OPEN normal, the air conditioning
system. Adaptive Cruise Control compressor turns back on. You can
This message displays and a chime
(ACC), Forward Collision Alert continue to drive your vehicle.
may sound if the hood is not fully
(FCA), and/or the Active Emergency
closed. Stop and turn off the If this message continues to appear,
Braking System may not work. Do
vehicle, check the hood for have the system repaired by your
not use these systems until the
obstructions, and close the hood dealer as soon as possible to avoid
vehicle has been repaired.
again. Check to see if the message damage to the engine.
SHIFT TO PARK BEFORE still appears on the DIC.
EXITING ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
REAR ACCESS OPEN ENGINE
This message may display if This message will display when the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is This message displays when the
liftgate is open. Close the liftgate engine coolant temperature is too
engaged holding the vehicle at a completely.
stop, and the driver attempts to exit hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
the vehicle. Put the vehicle in idle until it cools down. See Engine
P (Park) before exiting.
Engine Cooling System Coolant Temperature Gauge on
Messages page 5-18.
Door Ajar Messages A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH When towing, use Tow/Haul Mode
ENGINE TEMP to prevent damage to the engine or
DOOR OPEN transmission. See Tow/Haul Mode
This message displays and a chime This message displays when the on page 9-35.
may sound if a door is not fully engine coolant becomes hotter than
closed. Stop and turn off the the normal operating temperature.
vehicle, check the door for See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge on page 5-18. To avoid
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL possible and have the vehicle
ENGINE serviced by your dealer. See Engine
On some vehicles, this message
Oil on page 10-7.
This message displays and a chime displays when the engine oil level
may sound if the engine cooling may be too low. Check the oil level
system reaches unsafe before filling to the recommended Engine Power Messages
temperatures for operation. Stop level. If the oil is not low and this ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
and turn off the vehicle as soon as it message remains on, take the
is safe to do so to avoid severe vehicle to your dealer for service. This message displays and a chime
damage. This message clears when See Engine Oil on page 10-7. may sound when the cooling system
the engine has cooled to a safe temperature gets too hot and the
operating temperature.
ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE engine further enters the engine
ENGINE coolant protection mode. See
Engine Overheating on page 10-19
Engine Oil Messages This message displays when the
for more information.
engine oil becomes hotter than the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON normal operating temperature. Stop This message also displays when
This message displays when the and allow the vehicle to idle until it the vehicle's engine power is
engine oil needs to be changed. cools down. See Engine Coolant reduced. Reduced engine power
When you change the engine oil, be Temperature Gauge on page 5-18. can affect the vehicle's ability to
sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE accelerate. If this message is on,
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP but there is no reduction in
OIL SOON message. See Engine
Oil Life System on page 10-10 for
ENGINE performance, proceed to your
information on how to reset the This message displays if low oil destination. The performance may
message. See Engine Oil on pressure levels occur. Stop the be reduced the next time the vehicle
page 10-7 and Maintenance vehicle as soon as safely possible is driven. The vehicle may be driven
Schedule on page 11-3. and do not operate it until the cause at a reduced speed while this
of the low oil pressure has been message is on, but acceleration and
corrected. Check the oil as soon as speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle atmosphere. A few driving trips with System Operation (Key Access) on
should be taken to your dealer for the cap properly installed should page 2-8 or Remote Keyless Entry
service as soon as possible. turn this light and message off. (RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2-8.
Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages NO REMOTE DETECTED
FUEL LEVEL LOW NO REMOTE KEY WAS PRESS BRAKE TO RESTART
This message displays and a chime DETECTED PLACE KEY IN This message displays when
may sound if the fuel level is low. TRANSMITTER POCKET THEN attempting to turn off the vehicle
Refuel as soon as possible. See START YOUR VEHICLE and the RKE transmitter is no longer
Fuel Gauge on page 5-16 and Fuel This message displays when trying detected. Restarting is allowed
on page 9-69. to start the vehicle if an RKE without the RKE transmitter for
transmitter is not detected. The five minutes. Press the brake pedal
TIGHTEN GAS CAP to restart the vehicle.
transmitter battery may be weak.
This message may display along See Starting the Vehicle with a Low NUMBER OF KEYS
with the malfunction indicator lamp Transmitter Battery under Remote
on the instrument cluster if the
PROGRAMMED
vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened Operation (Key Access) on This message displays when
properly. See Malfunction Indicator page 2-5 or Remote Keyless Entry programming new keys to the
Lamp on page 5-22. Reinstall the (RKE) System Operation (Keyless vehicle.
fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank Access) on page 2-8.
on page 9-72. The diagnostic REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE
system can determine if the fuel cap NO REMOTE DETECTED This message displays when
has been left off or improperly This message displays when the leaving the vehicle with the RKE
installed. A loose or missing fuel transmitter battery may be weak. transmitter still inside.
cap allows fuel to evaporate into the See Starting the Vehicle with a
Low Transmitter Battery under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
REPLACE BATTERY IN AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP entire front and/or rear of the
REMOTE KEY REDUCED vehicle. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
This message displays when the This message displays when the on page 10-88.
battery in the RKE transmitter needs Active Emergency Braking System
. Heavy rain or snow is interfering
to be replaced. has been set to the Alert setting.
This setting disables most automatic with the radar object detection or
Lamp Messages braking functions of the Auto camera performance.
Collision Preparation feature. Some This message may also be
TURN SIGNAL ON last-second automatic braking displayed if there is a problem with
This message displays and a chime capability is still provided with the the StabiliTrak system.
sounds if a turn signal is left on for Alert setting, but braking is less
1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turn likely to occur. See Active FORWARD COLLISION
signal lever to the off position. Emergency Braking System on ALERT OFF
page 9-63. This message displays when the
Object Detection System AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP Forward Collision Alert has been
Messages UNAVAILABLE turned off.
AUTOMATIC COLLISION This message displays when the FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED
PREP OFF Active Emergency Braking System CLEAN WINDSHIELD
has been unavailable for some time. This message displays when the
This message displays when the The Active Emergency Braking
Active Emergency Braking System camera is blocked. Cleaning the
System does not need service. outside of the windshield behind the
has been turned off. See Active
Emergency Braking System on This can occur under the following rearview mirror may correct the
page 9-63. conditions: issue. The Lane Departure Warning
. The radar is not clean. Keep the system will not operate. Adaptive
radar sensors free of mud, dirt, Cruise Control (ACC), Forward
snow, ice, and slush. Clean the
Collision Alert (FCA), and the Active SERVICE AUTOMATIC SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF
Emergency Braking System may not COLLISION PREP This message indicates that the
work or may not work as well.
If this message displays, take the driver has turned the Lane Change
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING vehicle to your dealer to repair the Alert and Side Blind Zone Alert
UNAVAILABLE system. (SBZA) systems off.
This message displays when Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), SERVICE SIDE DETECTION
attempting to activate the Lane Forward Collision Alert (FCA), and SYSTEM
Departure Warning (LDW) system Active Emergency Braking System
may not work. Do not use these If this message remains on after
when it is temporarily unavailable.
systems until the vehicle has been continued driving, the vehicle needs
The LDW system does not need
repaired. service. Lane Change Alert, Side
service.
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) and Rear
This message could be due to the SERVICE FRONT CAMERA Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) features
camera being blocked. Cleaning the will not work. Take the vehicle to
If this message remains on after
outside of the windshield behind the your dealer.
continued driving, the vehicle needs
rearview mirror may correct the
service. Do not use the Lane SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM
issue.
Departure Warning (LDW) and UNAVAILABLE
PARK ASSIST OFF Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
features. Take the vehicle to your This message indicates that Lane
This message displays when the dealer. Change Alert, Side Blind Zone Alert
Parking Assist system has been (SBZA) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert
turned off or when there is a SERVICE PARK ASSIST (RCTA) are disabled either because
temporary condition causing the the sensor is blocked and cannot
This message displays if there is a
system to be disabled. detect vehicles in the blind zone,
problem with the Parking Assist
system. Do not use this system to or the vehicle is passing through an
help you park. See your dealer for open area, such as the desert,
service. where there is insufficient data for
operation. This message may also
activate during heavy rain or due to The vehicle is safe to drive; STABILITRAK INITIALIZING
road spray. The vehicle does not however, you do not have the
This message may come on if the
need service. For cleaning, see benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
StabiliTrak system has not fully
"Washing the Vehicle" under your speed and drive accordingly.
initialized because of road
Exterior Care on page 10-88.
SERVICE SUSPENSION conditions or the incorrect tire size.
SYSTEM When the StabiliTrak system is fully
Ride Control System initialized, the message will turn off.
Messages If the vehicle has the Magnetic Ride See Traction Control/Electronic
Control suspension system, this Stability Control on page 9-44. If this
SERVICE LEVELING SYSTEM message displays when the message continues to be displayed
If the vehicle has the Magnetic Ride suspension system is not operating for multiple ignition cycles and on
Control suspension system or properly. Have the vehicle serviced different road surfaces, see your
Automatic Level Control, this by your dealer. dealer for service.
message displays when the leveling SERVICE TRACTION
system is not operating properly.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
CONTROL
Have the vehicle serviced by your This message displays when the
dealer. This message displays when there traction control has been turned off.
is a problem with the Traction See Traction Control/Electronic
SERVICE STABILITRAK Control System (TCS). When this Stability Control on page 9-44.
If this message displays, it means message displays, the system will
there may be a problem with the not limit wheel spin. Adjust your TRACTION CONTROL ON
StabiliTrak system. If you see this driving accordingly. See your dealer This message displays when the
message, try to reset the system. for service. See Traction Control/ traction control is active. See
Stop; turn off the engine for at least Electronic Stability Control on Traction Control/Electronic Stability
15 seconds; then start the engine page 9-44. Control on page 9-44.
again. If this message still comes
on, it means there is a problem. You
should see your dealer for service.
STABILITRAK OFF
. If an engine or vehicle-related vehicle to your dealer before turning
problem has been detected and off the engine. See Immobilizer
This message displays when the the vehicle needs service. See Operation (Keyless Access) on
StabiliTrak system has been turned your dealer. page 2-26 or Immobilizer Operation
off. Adjust your driving accordingly. . If the transfer case is in (Key Access) on page 2-25.
To limit wheel spin and realize the
full benefits of the stability Four-Wheel Drive Low.
enhancement system, you should The message turns off as soon as
Steering System
normally leave StabiliTrak on. See the conditions that caused the Messages
Traction Control/Electronic Stability message to be displayed are no
Control on page 9-44. longer present. STEERING ASSIST IS
REDUCED DRIVE WITH CARE
STABILITRAK OFF may also
display when the stability control Airbag System Messages This message may display if a
has been automatically disabled. problem occurs with the electric
Several conditions can cause this
SERVICE AIRBAG power steering system. If this
message to appear: This message displays if there is a message appears, steering effort
problem with the airbag system. may be slightly higher than normal.
. If the system is overheating, The vehicle is still safe to drive. Use
which could occur if StabiliTrak Take the vehicle to your dealer for
service. caution while in reduced assist
activates continuously for an mode. If this message is persistent
extended period of time. or appears repeatedly, take the
Security Messages
. If the brake system warning light vehicle to your dealer for service.
is on. See Brake System SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT See Steering on page 9-4.
Warning Light on page 5-24. SYSTEM SERVICE POWER STEERING
. If the stability system takes This message displays when there
longer than usual to complete its This message displays when there
is a problem with the theft-deterrent
diagnostic checks due to driving is a problem with electric power
system. The vehicle may or may not
conditions. steering. If this message displays
restart, so you may want to take the
and a reduction in steering
performance or loss of power is relearning the tire positions on Loading Information label. See Tires
steering assistance is noticed, see your vehicle. The tire positions must on page 10-46, Vehicle Load Limits
your dealer. See Steering on be relearned after rotating the tires on page 9-14, and Tire Pressure on
page 9-4. or after replacing a tire or sensor. page 10-53. The DIC also shows
See Tire Inspection on page 10-60, the tire pressure values. See Driver
Tire Messages Tire Rotation on page 10-60, Tire Information Center (DIC) (Base
Pressure Monitor System on Level) on page 5-29 or Driver
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR page 10-55, and Tire Pressure on Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
SYSTEM page 10-53. on page 5-31.
If equipped with the Tire Pressure TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD
Monitor System (TPMS), this Transmission Messages
AIR TO TIRE
message displays if a part on the 4WD OFF
system is not working properly. The If equipped with the Tire Pressure
tire pressure light also flashes and Monitor System (TPMS), this If equipped with four-wheel drive,
then remains on during the same message displays when the this message displays when the
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure pressure in one or more of the four-wheel-drive system is
Light on page 5-27. Several vehicle's tires is low. This message temporarily disabled due to an
conditions may cause this message also displays with a vehicle picture overheated condition. The vehicle
to appear. See Tire Pressure to indicate the location of the low will run in two-wheel drive when this
Monitor Operation on page 10-56. tire. The low tire pressure warning message is present. Once the
If the warning comes on and stays light will also come on. See Tire four-wheel-drive system cools down,
on, there may be a problem with the Pressure Light on page 5-27. You the message turns off and the
TPMS. See your dealer. can receive more than one tire four-wheel-drive system returns to
pressure message at a time. If a tire normal operation.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have 4WD SHIFT IN PROGRESS
If equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this the tire pressures checked and set This message will display while the
message displays when the system to those shown on the Tire and four-wheel-drive system is shifting.
FOR 4WD LOW SHIFT TO GRADE BRAKING OFF and check for the message on the
NEUTRAL DIC display. If the message is still
This message displays when grade
displayed or appears again when
If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n is braking has been disabled with the
you begin driving, the
requested, and the vehicle speed is Tow/Haul Mode button on the end of
four-wheel-drive system needs
correct, but the transmission is not the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode
service. See your dealer.
in N (Neutral), this message will on page 9-35, Automatic
display until the transmission is Transmission on page 9-31, and SHIFT DENIED
shifted to N (Neutral). Cruise Control on page 9-48.
This message displays when the
FOR 4WD LOW SLOW TO XXX GRADE BRAKING ON shift lever is in M (Manual Mode)
and a transmission range has been
This message displays when grade
If a four-wheel drive shift into 4 n is braking has been enabled with the
selected that is unavailable at the
requested, but the vehicle speed is current vehicle speed.
Tow/Haul Mode button on the end of
too high, this message will display the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode TO EXIT 4WD LOW SHIFT TO
until the correct vehicle speed is on page 9-35, Automatic
reached.
NEUTRAL
Transmission on page 9-31, and
GRADE BRAKING ACTIVE Cruise Control on page 9-48. If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n is
requested, and the vehicle speed is
This message displays when grade SERVICE 4WD correct, but the transmission is not
braking has been activated while If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, in N (Neutral), this message will
driving on downhill grades. This this message may display if a display until the transmission is
message will only appear the first problem occurs with the shifted to N (Neutral).
time the feature is activated in an four-wheel-drive system. If this
ignition cycle. See Tow/Haul Mode message appears, stop as soon as
on page 9-35, Automatic possible and turn off the vehicle.
Transmission on page 9-31, and Make sure the key is in the LOCK/
Cruise Control on page 9-48. OFF position for at least
one minute, then restart the vehicle
TO EXIT 4WD LOW SLOW VEHICLE IN 4WD LOW

. There is a short in the wiring to
TO XXX the electric trailer brakes.
This message will display if the
When this message displays, power
If a four-wheel drive shift out of 4 n is vehicle is driven in 4 n for about is no longer available to the trailer
requested, but the vehicle speed is 10 minutes above 72 km/h (45 mph). brakes.
too high, this message will display
until the correct vehicle speed is Vehicle Reminder As soon as it is safe to do so,
reached. carefully pull the vehicle over to the
Messages side of the road and turn the ignition
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE CHECK TRAILER WIRING off. Check the wiring connection to
ENGINE the trailer and turn the ignition back
On vehicles with the Integrated on. This message clears if the trailer
This message displays and a chime Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, is reconnected. This message also
may sound if the transmission fluid this message may display and a clears if you acknowledge it. If this
in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with chime may sound when one of the message still displays, either the
the transmission fluid temperature following conditions exists: vehicle or the trailer needs service.
high can cause damage to the
. A trailer with electric brakes See your dealer.
vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it
idle to allow the transmission to becomes disconnected from the See Integrated Trailer Brake
cool. This message clears and the vehicle. Control System under Towing
chime stops when the fluid If the disconnect occurs while Equipment on page 9-82.
temperature reaches a safe level. the vehicle is stopped, this ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
When towing, use Tow/Haul Mode message clears itself after a
WITH CARE
to prevent damage to the engine or short time.
transmission. See Tow/Haul Mode This message displays when ice
If the disconnect occurs while
on page 9-35. conditions are possible.
the vehicle is moving, this
message stays on until the
ignition is turned off.
TRAILER CONNECTED Washer Fluid Messages Vehicle

On vehicles with the Integrated WASHER FLUID LOW ADD Personalization
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
this message displays briefly when
FLUID Use the audio system controls to
a trailer with electric or electric over This message displays when the access the personalization menus
hydraulic brakes is first connected windshield washer fluid is low. Fill for customizing vehicle features.
to the vehicle. the windshield washer fluid reservoir The following are all possible
as soon as possible. See Engine personalization features. Depending
This message clears itself after
Compartment Overview on on the vehicle, some may not be
several seconds. This message also
page 10-6 for the location of the available.
clears if you acknowledge it. After
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
this message clears, the TRAILER
Also, see Washer Fluid on Base Radio Audio System
GAIN and OUTPUT displays appear
page 10-21 for more information. Controls
in the DIC.
MENU: Press the center of the
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
knob to enter menus and select
(Base Level) on page 5-29 or Driver
menu items. Turn the knob to scroll
Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
through the menus.
on page 5-31 and Integrated Trailer
Brake Control System under o BACK: Press to return to the
Towing Equipment on page 9-82. previous menu or exit.
Uplevel Radio Audio System
Controls
1. Press the desired feature to
display a list of available
options.
2. Press to select the desired
feature setting.

. Return to Factory Settings
3. Press o BACK on the faceplate 2. Press Enter to go to the
. Software Information confirmation screen.
or the 0 screen button to return
to the previous menu or exit. Detailed information for each menu 3. Re-enter the four-digit code.
Turn the vehicle to ON/RUN to follows. Press LOCK or UNLOCK to lock or
access the Settings menu, then Time and Date unlock the system. Press Back to go
select SETTINGS from the Home back to the previous menu.
Page on the infotainment system Manually set the time and date. See
Clock on page 5-8. Teen Driver (If Equipped)
display.
Language (Language) Press and the following may
Personalization Menus display:
The following list of menu items may Select Language, then select from
the available language(s).
. View Report Card
be available:
The selected language will display
. Manage Settings
. Time and Date
on the system, and voice . Change PIN
. Language (Language) recognition will reflect the selected . Key Registration
. Valet Mode language.
.
. Clear All Teen Keys/PIN
Teen Driver Valet Mode (If Equipped)
View Report Card
. Radio This will lock the infotainment
system and steering wheel controls. This allows the drivers driving
. Vehicle
It may also limit top speed, power, habits to be viewed. See Teen
. Bluetooth and access to vehicle storage Driver on page 7-31.
. Voice locations (if equipped). Manage Settings
. Display To enable valet mode: Press and the following may
. Rear Camera 1. Enter a four-digit code on the display:
keypad. . Audio Volume Limit

. Teen Driver Speed Limiter Key Registration page 7-5 or Manage Favorites in
. Teen Driver Speed Warning This allows the key to be registered. Settings under Radio in the
See Register or Unregister a Key infotainment manual.
Audio Volume Limit
in Teen Driver on page 7-31. Number of Favorites Shown
This allows a maximum radio
volume to be set. Clear All Teen Keys/PIN Press to set the number of favorites
This allows all Teen Driver keys and to display.
Select Off or On.
the PIN to be cleared. Select the desired number or select
Teen Driver Speed Limiter Auto and the infotainment system
Select Continue or Cancel.
If equipped, this allows the will automatically adjust the number
maximum speed limit of the vehicle Radio of favorites shown.
to be set. Press to display the Radio menu Audible Touch Feedback
Select Off or On. and the following may display:
This allows Audible Touch
Teen Driver Speed Warning . Manage Favorites Feedback to be turned on or off.
This allows a warning to be set . Number of Favorites Shown Select Off or On.
when a certain speed is exceeded. . Audible Touch Feedback Auto Volume
Select Off or On. . Auto Volume This feature adjusts the volume
Change PIN . Maximum Startup Volume based on vehicle speed and
ambient noise.
This allows the Personal . Audio Cue Volume
Identification Number (PIN) to be Select Off, Low, Medium-Low,
changed. See Teen Driver on Manage Favorites Medium, Medium-High, or High.
page 7-31. This allows favorites to be edited.
See Manage Favorites in Radio
Setup under Home Page on
Maximum Startup Volume

. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start Select Off or On.
This feature sets the maximum Climate and Air Quality Collision/Detection Systems
startup volume. If the vehicle is Select the Climate and Air Quality
started and the volume is greater Select the Collision/Detection
menu and the following may display: Systems menu and the following
than this level, the volume is
adjusted to this level. To set the . Auto Fan Max Speed may display:
maximum startup volume, turn the . Auto Compartment Zone Temp . Alert Type
MENU knob or press + or to .
. Auto Defog Auto Collision Preparation
increase or decrease.
Auto Fan Max Speed
. Parking Assist
Audio Cue Volume
This feature will set the maximum
. Side Blind Zone Alert
This feature sets the volume of
audio files played at system startup auto fan speed. . Rear Cross Traffic Alert
and shutdown. Select Low, Medium, or High. Alert Type
Select On, then press + or to Auto Compartment Zone Temp This feature will set crash alerts to
increase or decrease the volume. beeps or seat vibrations. This
This feature allows for selection of
Vehicle the compartment zone temperature setting affects all crash alerts
setting when the vehicle is including Forward Collision, Lane
Select and the following may Departure Warning, and Parking
display: restarted.
Assist alerts.
. Climate and Air Quality Select Single Zone, Dual Zone,
or Last Setting. Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.
. Collision/Detection Systems Auto Collision Preparation
Auto Defog
. Comfort and Convenience
When set to on, the front defog will This feature will turn on or off the
. Lighting automatically come on when the Forward Collision Alert feature as
. Power Door Locks vehicle is started. well as the Automatic Braking
capability of the Auto Collision
Preparation feature. With the Alert & Side Blind Zone Alert Auto Memory Recall
Brake setting, both Forward This allows the feature to be turned This allows the feature to be turned
Collision Alert as well as the on or off. See Side Blind Zone Alert on or off. See Memory Seats on
Automatic Braking capability of the (SBZA) on page 9-65. page 3-7.
Auto Collision Preparation feature
are available. The Alert setting Select Off or On. Select On, Off.
disables most automatic braking Rear Cross Traffic Alert Easy Exit Options
functions of the Auto Collision
Preparation feature. Some This allows the feature to be turned This allows the feature to be turned
last-second automatic braking on or off. See Assistance Systems on or off. See Memory Seats on
capability is still provided with the for Parking or Backing on page 3-7.
Alert setting, but it is much less page 9-58. Select On or Off.
likely to be triggered by most driving Select On or Off.
conditions. Off disables all Forward Chime Volume
Collision Alert and Automatic Comfort and Convenience This allows the selection of the
Braking capabilities of the Auto Select the Comfort and chime volume level.
Collision Preparation feature. Convenience menu and the Press + or to adjust the volume.
Select Off, Alert & Brake, or Alert. following may display:
See Auto Collision Preparation in Reverse Tilt Mirror
. Auto Memory Recall
Object Detection System Messages When on, the driver and/or
on page 5-40. . Easy Exit Options passenger mirrors will tilt downward
Parking Assist
. Chime Volume when the vehicle is shifted to
. Reverse Tilt Mirror R (Reverse) to improve visibility of
If equipped, this allows the feature the ground near the rear wheels.
to be turned on or off. See . Auto Mirror Folding
Assistance Systems for Parking or Select Off, On - Driver and
. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
Backing on page 9-58. Passenger, On - Driver, or On -
Passenger.
Select Off, On, or On with Towbar.
Auto Mirror Folding K on the Remote Keyless Entry ignition. If Off is selected, the
When on, the outside rearview (RKE) transmitter is pressed to Delayed Door Lock menu will be
mirrors will automatically fold or locate the vehicle. available.
unfold when the Remote Keyless Select On or Off. Select On or Off.
Entry (RKE) lock or unlock button is
pressed and held. Exit Lighting Auto Door Unlock
Select Off or On. This allows the selection of how This allows selection of which of the
long the exterior lamps stay on doors will automatically unlock when
Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear when leaving the vehicle when it is the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
When on, the rear wiper will dark outside. Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.
automatically activate when the Select Off, 30 Seconds,
vehicle is shifted to R (Reverse). Delayed Door Lock
60 Seconds, or 120 Seconds.
Select Off or On. When on, this feature will delay the
Power Door Locks locking of the doors. To override the
Lighting Select Power Door Locks and the delay, press the power door lock
following displays: switch on the door.
Select the Lighting menu and the
following may display: . Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout Select On or Off.
. Vehicle Locator Lights . Auto Door Unlock Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
. Exit Lighting . Delayed Door Lock Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
Vehicle Locator Lights and the following may display:
Unlocked Door Anti-Lockout
This feature will flash the exterior
. Remote Unlock Light Feedback
When on, this feature will keep the
lights and allows some of the driver door from locking when the
. Remote Lock Feedback
exterior lamps and most of the door is open and the key is in the . Remote Door Unlock
interior lamps to turn on briefly when
. Remote Start Auto Cooled Seats

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats Remote Start Auto Cooled Seats Keyless Entry (RKE) System
. Passive Door Unlock If equipped and turned on, this Operation (Keyless Access) on
. feature will turn the cooled seats on page 2-8.
Passive Door Lock
when using remote start on Select Off, On with Horn
. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert warm days. Chirp, or On.
Remote Unlock Light Feedback Select Off or On. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert
When on, the exterior lamps will Remote Start Auto Heat Seats This feature sounds an alert when
flash when unlocking the vehicle the RKE transmitter is left in the
with the RKE transmitter. If equipped and turned on, this
feature will turn the heated seats on vehicle.
Select Off or Flash Lights. when using remote start on Select Off or On.
Remote Lock Feedback cold days.
Bluetooth
This allows selection of what type of Select Off or On.
Select and the following may
feedback is given when locking the Passive Door Unlock display:
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
This allows the selection of what . Pair New Device
Select Off, Lights and Horn, Lights doors will unlock when using the
Only, or Horn Only. . Device Management
button on the driver door to unlock
Remote Door Unlock the vehicle. . Ringtones
This allows selection of which doors Select All Doors or Driver Door. . Voice Mail Numbers
will unlock when pressing K on the Passive Door Lock Pair New Device
RKE transmitter.
This allows passive locking to be Select to pair a new device. See
Select All Doors or Driver turned on or off and selects Pairing in Infotainment Controls
Door Only. feedback. See Remote Keyless under Bluetooth (Overview) on
Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key page 7-19 or Bluetooth
Access) on page 2-5 or Remote (Infotainment Controls - Base
Radio) on page 7-25 or Bluetooth Voice Calibrate Touchscreen

(Voice Recognition - Base Radio) on Select to calibrate the touchscreen,
Select and the following may
page 7-25 or Pairing in then follow the prompts.
display:
Infotainment Controls under
Bluetooth in the infotainment . Prompt Length Turn Display Off
manual. . Audio Feedback Speed Select to turn the display off. Press
Device Management anywhere on the display area or any
Prompt Length
faceplate button to turn the
Select to connect to a different This feature adjusts the voice display on.
phone source, disconnect a phone, prompt length.
or delete a phone. Rear Camera
Select Short or Long.
Ringtones Select and the following may
Audio Feedback Speed display:
Press to change the ring tone for
the specific phone. The phone does This feature adjusts the audio . Guidance Lines
not need to be connected to change feedback speed. . Rear Park Assist Symbols
the ring tones. Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.
Guidance Lines
Voice Mail Numbers Display Select to turn Off or On. See
This feature displays the voice mail Select and the following may Assistance Systems for Parking or
number for all connected phones. display: Backing on page 9-58.
To change the voice mail number,
select EDIT or press the EDIT
. Calibrate Touchscreen Rear Park Assist Symbols
button. Type a new number, then . Turn Display Off Select to turn Off or On. See
select SAVE or press the SAVE Assistance Systems for Parking or
button. Backing on page 9-58.
Return to Factory Settings Universal Remote Do not use the Universal Remote
system with any garage door opener
Select and the following may System that does not have the stop and
display:
reverse feature. This includes any
See Radio Frequency Statement on
. Restore Vehicle Settings garage door opener model
page 13-12.
. Clear All Private Data manufactured before April 1, 1982.
. Restore Radio Settings Universal Remote System Read the instructions completely
before programming the Universal
Restore Vehicle Settings Programming Remote system. It may help to have
This allows selection of restoring another person assist with the
vehicle settings. programming process.
Select Restore or Cancel. Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
Clear All Private Data as well as for future programming.
This allows selection to clear all Erase the programming when
private information from the vehicle. vehicle ownership is terminated.
If equipped, these buttons are in the See Erasing Universal Remote
Select Delete or Cancel. overhead console. System Buttons later in this
Restore Radio Settings This system can replace up to three section.
remote control transmitters used to To program a garage door opener,
This allows selection to restore
activate devices such as garage park outside directly in line with and
radio settings.
door openers, security systems, and facing the garage door opener
Select Restore or Cancel. home automation devices. These receiver. Clear all people and
instructions refer to a garage door objects near the garage door.
Software Information opener, but can be used for other
Select to view the infotainment devices.
system current software information.
Make sure the hand-held transmitter 2. At the same time, press and programming is complete.
has a new battery for quick and hold both the hand-held There is no need to complete
accurate transmission of the transmitter button and one of the Steps 46.
radio-frequency signal. three Universal Remote system . If the indicator light does not
buttons to be used to operate come on or the garage door
Programming the Universal the garage door. Do not release
Remote System does not move, a second
either button until the indicator button press may be
For questions or help programming light goes from a slow to a rapid required. For a second time,
the Universal Remote system, call flashing light. Then release both press and hold the newly
1-800-355-3515 or see buttons. programmed button for
www.homelink.com. Some garage door openers may five seconds. If the light
Programming involves require substitution of Step 2 stays on or the garage door
time-sensitive actions, and may time with the procedure under Radio moves, programming is
out causing the procedure to be Signals for Canada and Some complete.
repeated. Gate Operators later in this . If the indicator light blinks
section. rapidly for two seconds, then
To program up to three devices:
3. Press and hold the newly changes to a solid light and
1. Hold the end of the hand-held programmed Universal Remote the garage door does not
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to system button for five seconds move, continue with
3 in) away from the Universal while watching the indicator light programming Steps 46.
Remote system buttons with the and garage door activation.
indicator light in view. The
hand-held transmitter was . If the indicator light stays on
supplied by the manufacturer of continuously or the garage
the garage door opener receiver. door moves when the button
is pressed, then
does not flash, press and hold enough for the Universal Remote
the same button a second time system to pick up the signal during
for two seconds, then release it. programming.
Again, if the door does not move If the programming did not work,
or the garage door lamp does replace Step 2 under Programming
not flash, press and hold the the Universal Remote System with
same button a third time for the following:
two seconds, then release it.
Press and hold the Universal
The Universal Remote system Remote system button while
Learn or Smart Button
should now activate the pressing and releasing the
4. After completing Steps 13, garage door. hand-held transmitter button every
locate the Learn or Smart button
Repeat the process for two seconds until the signal has
inside the garage on the garage
programming the two remaining been successfully accepted by the
door opener receiver. The name
buttons. Universal Remote system. The
and color of the button may vary
Universal Remote system indicator
by manufacturer. Radio Signals for Canada and light will flash slowly at first and then
5. Press and release the Learn or Some Gate Operators rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
Smart button. Step 6 must be For questions or programming help, Programming the Universal Remote
completed within 30 seconds of call 1-800-355-3515 or see System to complete.
pressing this button. www.homelink.com.
6. Inside the vehicle, press and Canadian radio-frequency laws and
hold the newly programmed some U.S. gate operators require
Universal Remote system button transmitter signals to time out or
for two seconds and then quit after several seconds of
release it. If the garage door transmission. This may not be long
does not move or the lamp on
the garage door opener receiver
Universal Remote System Reprogramming a Single

Operation Universal Remote System
Button
Using the Universal Remote To reprogram any of the system
System buttons:
Press and hold the appropriate 1. Press and hold any one of the
Universal Remote system button for buttons. Do not release the
at least one-half second. The button.
indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted. 2. The indicator light will begin to
flash after 20 seconds. Without
Erasing Universal Remote releasing the button, proceed
System Buttons with Step 1 under Programming
Erase all programmed buttons when the Universal Remote System.
vehicle ownership is terminated.
To erase:
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons until the indicator light
begins to flash. This should take
about 10 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Lighting Features
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 The exterior lamp control is on the
instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
There are four positions:
O (Off): Turns off the automatic
headlamps and Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to
turn the automatic headlamps or
DRL back on.
6-2 Lighting
For vehicles first sold in Canada, 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the Exterior Lamps Off
the off position will only work when headlamps with the parking lamps
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Reminder
and instrument panel lights.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically A reminder chime sounds when the
When the headlamps are turned on headlamps or parking lamps are
turns on the headlamps, parking while the vehicle is on, the
lamps, taillamps, instrument panel manually turned on, the ignition is
headlamps turn off automatically off, and a door is open. To disable
lights, roof marker lamps (if 10 minutes after the ignition is
equipped), and license plate lamps. the chime, turn the lamps off.
turned off. When the headlamps are
When the vehicle is turned off and turned on while the vehicle is off,
the headlamps will stay on for
Headlamp High/
the headlamps are in AUTO, the
headlamps turn off. When the key is 10 minutes before turning off to Low-Beam Changer
removed, the headlamps prevent the battery from being $ (Headlamp High/Low-Beam
automatically come on for a set drained. Turn the headlamp control Changer): Push the turn signal
time. The time of the delay can be off and then back to the headlamp lever toward the instrument panel to
changed using the DIC. See Driver on position to make the headlamps change the headlamps from low to
Information Center (DIC) (Base stay on for an additional 10 minutes. high beam.
Level) on page 5-29 or Driver To keep the lamps on for more than
Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) Pull the turn signal lever toward you
10 minutes, the ignition must be in and release it to return to low-beam
on page 5-31. the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN headlamps.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the position.
parking lamps including all lamps,
except the headlamps.
Lighting 6-3
When the high-beam headlamps are Daytime Running To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior
on, this indicator light on the lamp control to the off position and
instrument cluster will also be on.
Lamps (DRL) then release. For vehicles first sold
DRL can make it easier for others to in Canada, off will only work when
Flash-to-Pass see the front of the vehicle during the vehicle is in P (Park).
the day. Fully functional DRL are
This feature lets you use the
high-beam headlamps to signal a
required on all vehicles first sold in Automatic Headlamp
Canada. System
driver in front of you that you want
to pass. It works even if the The DRL system comes on when
When the exterior lamp control is
headlamps are in the automatic the following conditions are met:
set to AUTO and it is dark enough
position. . The ignition is on. outside, the headlamps come on
To use it, pull the turn signal lever . The exterior lamp control is automatically.
toward you, then release it. in AUTO.
If the headlamps are in the . The transmission is not in
automatic position or on low beam, P (Park).
the high-beam headlamps will turn
on. They will stay on as long as you
. The light sensor determines it is
hold the lever toward you. The daytime.
high-beam indicator on the When the DRL system is on, only
instrument cluster will come on. the DRL are on. The taillamps,
Release the lever to return to sidemarker lamps, instrument panel
normal operation. lights, and other lamps will not
be on. There is a light sensor on top of the
instrument panel. Do not cover the
When it begins to get dark, the sensor, otherwise the headlamps
automatic headlamp system will come on when they are not
switches from DRL to the needed.
headlamps.
6-4 Lighting
The system may also turn on the Lights On with Wipers | (Hazard Warning Flashers):
headlamps when driving through a Press this button to make the front
If the windshield wipers are
parking garage or tunnel. and rear turn signal lamps flash on
activated in daylight with the engine
If the vehicle is started in a dark on, and the exterior lamp control is and off. Press again to turn the
garage, the automatic headlamp in AUTO, the headlamps, parking flashers off.
system comes on immediately. If it lamps, and other exterior lamps When the hazard warning flashers
is light outside when the vehicle come on. The transition time for the are on, the vehicle's turn signals will
leaves the garage, there is a slight lamps coming on varies based on not work.
delay before the automatic wiper speed. When the wipers are
headlamp system changes to the not operating, these lamps turn off. Turn and Lane-Change
DRL. During that delay, the Move the exterior lamp control to O
instrument cluster may not be as Signals
bright as usual. Make sure the or ; to disable this feature.
instrument panel brightness control
is in the full bright position. See Hazard Warning Flashers
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6-6.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will turn off or may
change to Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
The automatic headlamp system An arrow on the instrument cluster
turns off when the exterior lamp flashes in the direction of the turn or
control is turned to O or the ignition lane change.
is off. Move the turn signal lever all the
way up or down to signal a turn.
Lighting 6-5
Raise or lower the lever for less Driver Information Center (DIC). To # (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the
than one second until the arrow turn the chime and message off, fog lamps on or off. A light will come
starts to flash to signal a lane move the turn signal lever to the off on in the instrument cluster.
change. This causes the turn position.
signals to automatically flash three When the fog lamps are turned on,
the parking lamps automatically
times. It will flash six times if Tow/ Fog Lamps turn on.
Haul Mode is active. Holding the
turn signal lever for more than When the headlamps are changed
one second will cause the turn to high beam, the fog lamps also go
signals to flash until the lever is off. When the high-beam headlamps
released. are turned off, the fog lamps will
The lever returns to its starting come on again.
position whenever it is released. Some localities have laws that
If after signaling a turn or a lane require the headlamps to be on with
change the arrows flash rapidly or the fog lamps.
do not come on, a signal bulb could
be burned out.
Replace any burned out bulbs. If a
bulb is not burned out, check the
fuse. See Fuses on page 10-36. If equipped with fog lamps, the
button is on the exterior lamp
Turn Signal On Chime control, to the left of the steering
If the turn signal is left on for more column.
than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
sounds at each flash of the turn position for the fog lamps to
signal. The message TURN come on.
SIGNAL ON will also appear in the
6-6 Lighting
Interior Lighting Dome Lamps Reading Lamps
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
There are dome lamps in the There are reading lamps in the
overhead console and the headliner, overhead console and the headliner,
if equipped. if equipped. To operate, the ignition
To change the dome lamp settings, must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY
This feature controls the brightness or ON/RUN position, or using
of the instrument panel lights and is press the following:
Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
next to the exterior lamp control. OFF: Turns the lamps off, even
D (Instrument Panel when a door is open.
Illumination): Move the DOOR: The lamps come on
thumbwheel up or down to brighten automatically when a door is
or dim the lights. opened.
ON: Turns all dome lamps on.
Lighting 6-7
Lighting Features Exit Lighting

Some exterior lamps and interior
Entry Lighting lamps come on when the key is
Some exterior lamps and the interior removed from the ignition. The
lamps turn on briefly at night, or in exterior and interior lamps remain
on for a set amount of time, then
areas with limited lighting, when K automatically turn off.
is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a If equipped with Keyless Access,
Press m or n next to each reading door is opened, the interior lamps the exterior lamps automatically turn
lamp to turn it on or off. come on if the dome lamp control is on when the drivers door is opened
in the DOOR position. After about after the ignition is turned to OFF.
30 seconds the exterior lamps turn The interior lights turn on when the
off. Entry lighting can be disabled ignition is turned to OFF.
manually by changing the ignition The exterior lamps turn off
out of the OFF position, or by immediately by turning the exterior
pressing the RKE transmitter Q lamp control off.
button. This feature can be changed. See
This feature can be changed. See Vehicle Personalization on
Vehicle Locator Lights under page 5-47.
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5-47.
6-8 Lighting
Battery Load enough at idle to produce all the that the driver reduce the electrical
power that is needed for very high loads as much as possible. See
Management electrical loads. Battery Voltage and Charging
The vehicle has Electric Power A high electrical load occurs when Messages on page 5-35.
Management (EPM), which several of the following are on, such
estimates the battery's temperature as: headlamps, high beams, fog Battery Power Protection
and state of charge. It then adjusts lamps, rear window defogger,
the voltage for best performance This feature shuts off the dome and
climate control fan at high speed, reading lamps if they are left on for
and extended life of the battery. heated seats, engine cooling fans, more than 10 minutes when the
When the battery's state of charge trailer loads, and loads plugged into ignition is off. This will keep the
is low, the voltage is raised slightly accessory power outlets. battery from running down.
to quickly bring the charge back up. EPM works to prevent excessive
When the state of charge is high, discharge of the battery. It does this
the voltage is lowered slightly to by balancing the generator's output
prevent overcharging. The voltmeter and the vehicle's electrical needs.
gauge or the voltage display on the It can increase engine idle speed to
Driver Information Center (DIC), generate more power, whenever
if equipped, may show the voltage needed. It can temporarily reduce
moving up or down. This is normal. the power demands of some
If there is a problem, an alert will be accessories.
displayed.
Normally, these actions occur in
The battery can be discharged at steps or levels, without being
idle if the electrical loads are very noticeable. In rare cases at the
high. This is true for all vehicles. highest levels of corrective action,
This is because the generator this action may be noticeable to the
(alternator) may not be spinning fast driver. If so, a DIC message might
be displayed and it is recommended
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Navigation
OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Introduction
System Phone Infotainment
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-19 Base radio information is included in
Bluetooth (Infotainment this manual. See the infotainment
Introduction Controls - Base Radio) . . . . . 7-21
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 manual for information on other
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition - available infotainment systems.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Base Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Read the following pages to
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Settings become familiar with these features.
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Teen Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Radio Trademarks and License { Warning
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Agreements
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Taking your eyes off the road for
Trademarks and License
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 too long or too often while using
Rear Side Window any infotainment feature can
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 cause a crash. You or others
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 could be injured or killed. Do not
give extended attention to
Audio Players infotainment tasks while driving.
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Limit your glances at the vehicle
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 displays and focus your attention
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 on driving. Use voice commands
whenever possible.
7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up phone numbers in
The infotainment system has built-in
advance so they can be called
Theft-Deterrent Feature
features intended to help avoid
distraction by disabling some easily by pressing a single TheftLock is designed to
functions when driving. These button or by using a single voice discourage theft of the vehicle's
functions may gray out when they command if equipped with radio by learning a portion of the
are unavailable. Many infotainment Bluetooth phone capability. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
features are also available through The radio does not operate if it is
See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
the instrument cluster and steering stolen or moved to a different
wheel controls. To play the infotainment system with vehicle.
the ignition off, see Retained
Before driving: Accessory Power (RAP) on
. Become familiar with the page 9-27.
operation, faceplate buttons, and
screen buttons.
. Set up the audio by presetting
favorite stations, setting the
tone, and adjusting the
speakers.
Overview
Infotainment System Overview
The infotainment system is
controlled by using the buttons on
the faceplate and steering wheel
controls, if equipped. See Steering
Wheel Controls on page 5-3.
Radio with CD

. Turn to increase or decrease
the volume.
5. MEDIA
. Press to change the audio
source between CD, USB,
SD card, and AUX.
6. RADIO
. Press to change the audio
source between AM, FM,
or SiriusXM, if equipped.
Radio with TONE 7. g or l (Seek)

. CD (If Equipped): Press g
1. q (Favorite Pages) 3. r (Favorite Pages) to seek the beginning of the
. Press to scroll down through . Press to scroll up through the current or previous track.
the favorite pages for each favorite pages for each If the track has played for
source. source. less than five seconds, it
seeks the previous track.
2. Favorites/Soft Keys 4. O (Power/Volume) If longer than five seconds,
. Press to select favorite the current track will start
. Press to turn the audio on.
stations. from the beginning. Press l
. Press and hold to turn it off. to seek the next track.
. Press and hold to save
favorite stations.
. When on, press to mute the . AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If
system. Press again to
. Press to select a screen Equipped): Press g or l
unmute.
button when displayed. to seek to the previous or
next strong station.

. CD (If Equipped): Press and 12. MENU reader. See AM-FM Radio on
hold g to quickly reverse . Press to access the menu page 7-8, Satellite Radio on
through a track. Release the for the current audio page 7-9, CD Player on page 7-11,
button to return to playing source. and Auxiliary Jack on page 7-17.
speed. Press and hold l to . PHONE: Select the PHONE screen
Press to select the
fast forward through a track. icon to display the Phone main
highlighted menu option.
Release the button to return page. See Bluetooth Overview in
to playing speed. . Turn to scroll through a list. Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7-19
. Turn to manually select a or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
8. X (Eject) (If Equipped) or Base Radio) on page 7-21 or
TONE (If Equipped) station.
. Press X to eject the CD (if Home Page Radio) on page 7-25.
equipped). NAV (Navigation, If Equipped):
Home Page Features Select the NAV screen icon to
. Press TONE to open the
Tone Settings menu (if The infotainment system displays a display the OnStar Turn-by-Turn
equipped). Home Page that makes it easy to Navigation. See OnStar Overview
access all of the applications. Turn in OnStar, if equipped.
9. { (Home Page) the MENU knob to highlight feature SETTINGS: Select the SETTINGS
. Press to go to the Home icons. Press the MENU knob to screen icon to display the Settings
Page from any point in the access the features options. main page. See Setting Radio
system. See Home Page Various functions are disabled when Preferences following.
following. the vehicle is moving.
Setting Radio Preferences
10. o BACK AUDIO: Select the AUDIO screen
Select the SETTINGS screen icon
icon to display the active source
. Press to return to the to display the Settings menu and
page. The sources available are
previous screen in a menu. the following may display:
AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped),
11. CD Slot (If Equipped) CD, USB/iPod, AUX, and SD card Time: See Clock on page 5-8.
Language (Current Language): Vehicle: See Vehicle new location, then press the
This will set the display language in Personalization on page 5-47. DROP screen button to
the radio and instrument cluster. Display: Press the MENU knob to select the new location.
Select to display a list of languages.
Select BACK to go back to the
turn the display on or off. . Select o BACK to go back to
previous menu. Return to Factory Settings: See the previous menu.
Return to Factory Settings later in Number of Favorites Shown:
Valet Mode: this section. To set the number of favorites for
Using the circular numeric keypad, Software Information: Press the display, select Auto to automatically
enter a four-digit code: MENU knob to select Save Vehicle adjust the number of Favorites
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Info to USB. Press the MENU knob pages shown as Favorites are
a number. again to start downloading the added and removed. Another way to
vehicle information to the USB. adjust is to select a number from 5
2. Press the MENU knob to select 25 to show that selection of
it. Do this for each one of the Radio Setup favorites.
four digits. Select Enter to go to
the confirmation screen. From the RADIO/BAND screen icon, Audible Touch Feedback: Select
the following may be displayed: to turn feedback off or on.
3. Re-enter the four-digit code.
Select LOCK to lock the system. Manage Favorites: Auto Volume (If Equipped): This
This will also lock access to the . Turn the MENU knob and press feature adjusts the volume based on
storage behind the radio, to select a favorite. vehicle speed. The options are Off,
if equipped. See Instrument Low, Medium-Low, Medium,
. To delete a favorite, press
Panel Storage on page 4-2. Medium-High, or High. Select the
the button just below the
desired volume.
4. Enter the four-digit code to DELETE screen button.
unlock the system. Maximum Startup Volume: This
. To move a favorite, press the
feature sets the maximum startup
Radio: See Radio Setup later in MOVE screen button. Turn
volume. If the vehicle is started and
this section. the MENU knob to select a
the volume is greater than this level,
the volume is adjusted to this level. Return to Factory Settings Software Updates
To set the maximum startup volume, Select and the following may
Turn the MENU knob to increase or See the website for more
display: information.
decrease startup volume.
Restore Vehicle Settings: This
Rear Camera option will restore factory vehicle
Website Information
From the Rear Camera screen personalization settings. Select In the U.S., see www.chevrolet.com
button, the following may display: Cancel or Confirm. In Canada, see
Guidance Lines (If Equipped): Clear All Private Data: This option www.chevrolet.gm.ca
This feature will display guidance clears all private information from In Mexico, see
lines on the screen when in the vehicle. Select Cancel or www.chevrolet.com.mx
R (Reverse). Select Off or On. Confirm.
See Assistance Systems for Parking Restore Radio Settings: This
or Backing on page 9-58. option will restore factory radio
settings. Select Cancel or Continue.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (If
Equipped): This feature will display English and Metric Unit
an alert icon when cross traffic is Conversion
detected.
To change the display units between
Select Off or On. English and metric units, see Driver
See Assistance Systems for Parking Information Center (DIC) (Base
or Backing on page 9-58. Level) on page 5-29 or Driver
Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
on page 5-31.
Radio Press the RADIO faceplate button

to display the active radio source.
position balances the sound
between the front and rear
Press the MENU knob and the speakers.
AM-FM Radio following radio settings may display: . EQ (Equalizer): Turn the MENU
Playing the Radio Tone Settings: knob to highlight. Turn the
While on the audio main page, . Bass, Midrange, and Treble: MENU knob to scroll through the
press the RADIO or MEDIA button Turn the MENU knob and options. Press the MENU knob
repeatedly through the available highlight. Press the MENU knob to select. Press the o BACK
sources (AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if to select. Turn the MENU knob button to go to the
equipped), CD, USB, SD, and AUX). to adjust. previous menu.
The steering wheel controls can . Balance: Turn the MENU knob Station List: Select to display a list
also be used to adjust the volume. to highlight. Press the MENU of AM or FM stations. Press o
See Steering Wheel Controls on knob to select. Turn the MENU BACK to go to the previous menu.
page 5-3. knob left for more sound from
the left speakers or right for Auto Volume: If equipped, this
AM, FM, SiriusXM (If Equipped) feature adjusts the volume based on
more sound from the right
To select AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if speakers. The middle position the vehicle speed. Select the level
equipped), press the RADIO button balances the sound between the between off, low, medium-low,
to toggle to the desired broadcast left and right speakers. medium, medium-high, and high.
source. Press o BACK to go to the
. Fade: Turn the MENU knob to
previous menu.
highlight. Press the MENU knob
to select. Turn the MENU knob EQ (Equalizer) Settings: In certain
to the left for more sound from configurations the available choices
the front speakers and to the are Manual and Talk.
right for more sound from the
rear speakers. The middle
Options for SiriusXM Only (If Storing Radio Station Presets Satellite Radio
Equipped)
Up to 25 preset stations from all SiriusXM Satellite Radio
XM View: XM view allows the bands can be stored in the favorite
channel list to be viewed by channel lists in any order. Up to five stations
Service
name, artist playing on channel, can be stored in each favorite page Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite
or song playing on channel. Turn and the number of favorites can radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM
the MENU knob to highlight and be set. satellite radio subscription can
press the MENU knob to select. receive SiriusXM programming.
AM, FM, or SiriusXM (If
Press o BACK to go to the Equipped): While on the active SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
previous menu. source main page, such as AM, FM, based in the 48 contiguous United
Channel List: Select to display a or SiriusXM (if equipped), press and States and 10 Canadian provinces.
list of SiriusXM stations. Turn the hold a favorites/soft-key button on SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
MENU knob to highlight and press the faceplate. variety of programming and
the MENU knob to select. Press o commercial-free music, coast to
Mixed-Audio Favorites coast, and in digital-quality sound.
BACK to go to the previous menu.
Media and Broadcast favorites can A service fee is required to receive
Also see the radio settings common be stored. the SiriusXM service. See
for all sources earlier in this section. www.siriusxmradio.com or call
To display the favorites page, press
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.); or see
Finding a Station q or r button on the radio www.xmradio.ca or call
faceplate. 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
Seeking a Station
From the Settings menu press the When SiriusXM is active, the
Press g or l to search for the MENU knob to select Manage
channel name and number,
previous or next strongest station. Favorites. The Manage Favorites category name, song title, and artist
feature has the option of moving or display on the screen.
Tuning a Station
deleting a favorite. See Manage
Turn the MENU knob to manually Favorites under Overview on
find a station. page 7-3.
Browsing SiriusXM Channels especially around tall buildings or Cell Phone Usage
hills, causing the sound to fade in
To browse the SiriusXM channels: Cell phone usage, such as making
and out.
1. Press the MENU knob. or receiving phone calls, charging,
AM or just having the phone on may
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight cause static interference in the
XM Channel List. The range for most AM stations is radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off
greater than for FM, especially at if this happens.
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight night. The longer range can cause
the desired XM Channels. station frequencies to interfere with
each other. Static can also occur Rear Side Window
Radio Reception when things like storms and power Antenna
Frequency interference and static lines interfere with radio reception. The AM-FM antenna is in the
can occur during normal radio When this happens, try reducing the passenger right rear side window.
reception if items such as phone treble on the radio. Make sure the inside surfaces of the
chargers, vehicle convenience SiriusXM Satellite Radio rear side windows are not scratched
accessories, and external electronic Service and that the lines on the glass are
devices are plugged into the not damaged. If the inside surfaces
accessory power outlet. If there is If equipped, SiriusXM Satellite are damaged, they could interfere
interference or static, unplug the Radio Service provides digital radio with radio reception.
item from the accessory power reception. Tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, For proper radio reception, the
outlet.
causing the sound to fade in and antenna connector must be properly
FM out. In addition, traveling or standing attached to the post on the glass.
FM signals only reach about 16 to under heavy foliage, bridges, The connector attachment to the
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the garages, or tunnels may cause loss glass is exposed. Tampering with or
radio has a built-in electronic circuit of the SiriusXM signal for a period disconnecting the connector will
that automatically works to reduce of time. interfere with radio reception.
interference, some static can occur,
If a cellular telephone antenna Audio Players

needs to be attached to the glass, { Caution
make sure that the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna are not damaged. Do not apply aftermarket glass CD Player
There is enough space between the tinting with metallic film. The
If equipped, the CD player can be
grid lines to attach a cellular metallic film in some tinting used for CD and MP3 audio.
telephone antenna without materials will interfere with or
interfering with radio reception. distort the incoming radio With the vehicle on, insert a disc
reception. Any damage caused to into the slot, label side up. Press the
MEDIA button to select CD as a
{ Caution the backglass antenna due to
metallic tinting materials will not source.
Using a razor blade or sharp be covered by the vehicle The system is capable of
object to clear the inside of the warranty. playing most:
rear side windows may affect . Audio CDs
radio reception or damage the
rear side window antenna.
Multi-Band Antenna . CD-R

Repairs would not be covered by The roof antenna is for OnStar , . CD-RW
the warranty. Do not clear the SiriusXM Satellite Radio, and GPS . MP3 or unprotected WMA
inside of the rear side windows (Global Positioning System). Keep formats
with sharp objects. clear of obstructions for clear
reception. If the vehicle has a When playing any compatible
sunroof, and it is open, reception recordable disc, the sound quality
can also be affected. can be reduced due to disc quality,
the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been
recorded, or the way the disc has
been handled.
There can be increased skipping, damaged or improperly loaded,

. Press and hold to fast reverse
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or there is an error and the disc through a track. Release the
difficulty in loading and ejecting. ejects. button to return to playing
If these problems occur, check the speed. Elapsed time displays.
Playing an Audio CD
disc for damage or try a known u (Seek Next/Fast Forward):
good disc. Press the MEDIA button on the While on the CD main page:
To avoid damage to the CD player: faceplate until CD is selected. . Press to seek to the next track.
. Do not use scratched or On the CD main page, either a track . Press and hold to fast forward
damaged discs. number displays at the beginning of
through a track. Release the
each track, or Song, Artist, and
. Do not apply labels to discs. The button to return to playing
Album information displays when
labels could get caught in the speed. Elapsed time displays.
available.
player.
Use the following screen controls to
j /r (Pause/Play): While on the CD
. Insert only one disc at a time. main page, press to pause. Press
play the disc:
again to resume.
. Keep the loading slot free of t (Seek Previous/Fast Reverse):
foreign materials, liquids, and While on the CD main page:
Z (Shuffle): Press Z to play the
debris. songs in random order. Press again
. Press to seek to the beginning of to turn off.
. Use a marking pen to label the the current or previous track.
top of the disc. If a Blu-ray Disc or DVD disc is
If the track has been playing for
loaded into the disc player and the
Loading and Ejecting Discs less than five seconds, it seeks
CD screen button is selected, a
to the previous track. If longer
To load a disc: message comes on the screen to
than five seconds, the current
use the Video application. The
1. Turn the vehicle on. track starts from the beginning.
Video application is only available
2. Insert a disc into the slot, label on vehicles with Rear Seat
side up. The player pulls it in the Entertainment (RSE).
rest of the way. If the disc is
CD Menu Error Messages

. There are load or eject errors.
While on the CD main page, press If Disc Error displays and/or the disc If the CD is not playing correctly for
the MENU knob to display the CD comes out, it could be for one of the any other reason, try a known
menu and the following may display: following reasons: good CD.
Browse: Select to display the files . The disc has an invalid or If any error continues, contact your
or songs on the CD. unknown format. dealer.
Tone Settings: Select to adjust . The disc is very hot. Try the disc Playing an MP3 CD
Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, again when the temperature To play an MP3 CD, follow the same
Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See returns to normal. instructions as Playing an Audio
Tone Settings under AM-FM Radio CD previously in this section.
. The road is very rough. Try the
on page 7-8.
disc again when the road is The following guidelines must be
Auto Volume: If equipped, this smoother. met when creating an MP3 disc,
feature adjusts the volume based on otherwise the CD might not play:
. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
the vehicle speed. Select the level
or upside down. . Sampling rate: 16 kHz,
between Off, Low, Medium-Low,
Medium, Medium-High, and High. . The air is very humid. Try the 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
Press BACK to go to the disc again later. 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
previous menu. . There was a problem while . Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,
EQ (Equalizer): If equipped, this burning the disc. 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,
feature adjusts the equalizer 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
. The label is caught in the CD
settings. See EQ (Equalizer) in and 320 kbps.
player.
AM-FM Radio on page 7-8. . Maximum number of folders:
If Disc Player Error displays, it could
eight folders with 255 files per
be for one of the following reasons:
folder.
. The player temperature is
too high.

. Maximum of 1,000 files on
a disc.
USB Port While the USB source is active, use
the corresponding faceplate buttons
. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW. Playing from a USB to operate USB function:
Root Directory A USB mass storage device or . t (Seek Previous/Fast
Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) Reverse)
The root directory is treated as a device can be connected to the
folder. All files contained directly USB port. . u (Seek Next/Fast Forward)
under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory The USB ports are in the center . j /r (Play/Pause)
folders. stack or inside the front seat
armrest. . Z (Shuffle)
Empty Folders
USB MP3 Player and USB Drives For information on how to use the
If a root directory or folder is empty screen icons, see Playing an Audio
or contains only folders, the player
. The USB MP3 players and USB
CD previously in this section.
advances to the next folder in the drives connected must comply
file structure that contains a with the USB Mass Storage USB Menu
compressed audio file. The empty Class specification (USB MSC).
Press the MENU knob to display the
folder(s) are not displayed or . Hard disk drives are not USB menu and the following may
numbered. supported. display:
No Folder To play a USB device: Browse: Select to display the files
When the CD only contains . Connect the USB. and folders on the USB device.
compressed audio files without any . Press the MEDIA button on the Tone Settings: Select to adjust
folders, all files are under the root faceplate until the connected Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
folder. device is shown. Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
Tone Settings under AM-FM Radio
on page 7-8.
Auto Volume: If equipped, see There may be problems with The device battery recharges
Playing an Audio CD previously in operation and function in the automatically while the vehicle is on.
this section. following situations: When the vehicle is off while a
EQ (Equalizer) Settings: . When connecting a device with device is connected using the USB
If equipped, this feature adjusts the a more recent version of the cable, the device battery stops
equalizer settings. See EQ firmware installed than is charging and the device will
(Equalizer) Settings in AM-FM supported by the infotainment automatically turn off.
Radio on page 7-8. system. If the device is an unsupported
. When connecting a device on model, it can still be listened to in
Playing from an iPod /iPad / the vehicle by connecting to the
iPhone which firmware from other
providers is installed. auxiliary input jack using a standard
This feature supports the following 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.
devices: To connect and control a device:
Menu
.
iPod nano (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 1. Connect one end of the standard
USB cable to the device's dock Press the MENU knob to display the
4th generation) device Menu and the following may
connector.
. iPod with video (5.0 and 5.5 display:
generation). 2. Connect the other end to a USB
port in the center console. See Browse: Select to display the files

. iPod classic (6th generation) Center Console Storage on or songs on the device. See
page 4-3. Browse Device Media later in this
. iPod touch (1st and 2nd
section.
generation) 3. Press the MEDIA button to
select the source. Tone Settings: Select to adjust
. iPad
Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
. iPhone 3G, iPhone 3GS, The music information displays on Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
iPhone 4 the radios display and begins Tone Settings under AM-FM Radio
playing through the vehicles audio on page 7-8.
system.
Auto Volume: If equipped, see 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Genres:
Playing an Audio CD previously in and press to select an artist 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
this section. name to view a list of all albums and press to view the genres
EQ (Equalizer) Settings: by the artist. stored on the device.
If equipped, this feature adjusts the 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
equalizer settings. See EQ and press to select an album and press to select a genre
(Equalizer) Settings in AM-FM name to view a list of all songs name to view a list of artists of
Radio on page 7-8. on the album. that genre.
Browse Device Media 4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
and press to select the song and press to select to view
Use the following to browse: from the list to begin playback. albums by that artist.
Playlists: Albums: 4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select an album to
and press to view the playlists and press to view the albums view songs.
stored on the device. stored on the device. 5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select the song
and press to select a playlist and press to select an album from the list to begin playback.
name to view a list of all songs name to view a list of all songs
in the playlist. Songs:
on the album.
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to view a list of all
and press to select the song and press to select the song
from the list to begin playback. songs stored on the device.
from the list to begin playback.
Artists: 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
and press to select the song
1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight from the list to begin playback.
and press to view the artists
stored on the device.
SD Card Reader Possible auxiliary audio sources AUX Menu

include: Press the MENU knob to display the
This vehicle may have an SD card
reader in the center stack or inside
. Laptop computer AUX menu and the following may
the front seat armrest. See Center . Audio music player display:
Console Storage on page 4-3. Tone Settings: Select to adjust
This jack is not an audio output.
1. Plug the SD card into the reader. Do not plug headphones into the Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance,
auxiliary input jack. Auxiliary Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See
2. Press the MEDIA button to Tone Settings under AM-FM Radio
select the SD device. devices should be set up while the
vehicle is in P (Park). on page 7-8.
If an SD card has already been Auto Volume: If equipped, see
connected, but a different source is Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable
from the auxiliary device to the Playing an Audio CD previously in
currently active, press the MEDIA this section.
screen button repeatedly to cycle auxiliary input jack.
through all of the available audio If an auxiliary device has already EQ (Equalizer): If equipped, this
source screens, until the SD card been connected, but a different feature adjusts the pre-defined
screen is shown. source is currently active, press the equalizer settings. See EQ
MEDIA faceplate button repeatedly (Equalizer) in AM-FM Radio on
Playing Music from the SD Card page 7-8.
to scroll through all of the available
An SD card is played the same way audio source screens, until the AUX
a USB device is played. See USB source screen is shown.
Port on page 7-14.
Playing from the AUX Jack
Auxiliary Jack An auxiliary device is played
through the audio system and
The AUX jack is in the center stack
controlled through the device itself.
or inside the front seat armrest.
See Center Console Storage on
page 4-3.

. Route Review
Navigation Press the button below the MUTE
screen button to mute the . Repeat
navigation directions. The previous
OnStar System audio selection will play. The MUTE When the system is downloading a
route, the only option available is
An OnStar Subscriber has the screen button will change to
UNMUTE. Press the button below Cancel Route. Once the route is
ability to connect to the OnStar
UNMUTE to enable the navigation downloaded, the additional list items
system (if equipped) and ask an
directions again. display.
OnStar Advisor to download a
destination into the vehicle. OnStar OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation My Destination
will send address information and If My Destination is selected, a
location coordinates of the Press the MENU knob to go to the
Turn-by-Turn menu. special version of the Maneuver
destination into the vehicle. View displays. The Destination
To access from the Home Page, Address is shown in the Street
turn the MENU knob to highlight the Name field and the total distance to
OnStar icon. Press the MENU knob the destination is shown in the
to access. Distance to Maneuver View. Press
the button below the DONE screen
button to return to the
Maneuver View.
The following options are available:

. Update Route: only shows if the
vehicle is off the route
. Cancel Route
. My Destination
Route Review
. Press the button below the
PREV screen button to display Phone
the previous maneuver
information, including distance Bluetooth (Overview)
between it and the previous Instructions for using the cell phone
maneuver. may differ between infotainment
While on the current maneuver, systems. The base radio and base
the PREV screen button is radio with connectivity instructions
hidden. If on the last maneuver, are included in this manual. See the
the NEXT screen button is infotainment manual for instructions
hidden. on the uplevel radios.
. If Route Rreview is selected, a
special version of the Maneuver
. Press the button below the Bluetooth-capable systems can
View displays. DONE screen button to return to interact with many cell phones,
the Maneuver View. allowing:
. Press the button below the
NEXT screen button to display Repeat . Placement and receipt of calls in
the next maneuver information, a hands-free mode.
Press the button below the REPEAT
including distance between it screen button to go back to the . Sharing of the cell phones
and the previous maneuver. Maneuver View. The audible address book or contact list with
maneuver prompt is repeated. the vehicle.
Canceling a Turn-by-Turn Route To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
Select Cancel Route, then select parked:
Yes. A screen displays to confirm
. Become familiar with the
the cancellation.
features of the cell phone.
Organize the phone book and
contact lists clearly and delete
duplicate or rarely used entries. Bluetooth Controls

If possible, program speed dial Warning (Continued)
Use the buttons on the instrument
or other shortcuts.
Taking your eyes off the road too panel, faceplate, and the steering
. Review the controls and long or too often could cause a wheel to operate the Bluetooth
operation of the infotainment crash resulting in injury or death. system.
system. Focus your attention on driving. Steering Wheel Controls
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
The system may not work with g (Press to Talk): Press to answer
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system incoming calls, confirm system
all cell phones. See Pairing in can use a Bluetooth-capable cell
this section. information, and start voice
phone with a Hands-Free Profile to recognition.
. If the cell phone has voice make and receive phone calls. The
dialing capability, learn to use infotainment system and voice i (Phone/Mute): Press to end a
that feature to access the recognition are used to control the call, reject a call, or cancel an
address book or contact list. system. The system can be used operation. Press to mute or unmute
See Voice Pass-Thru in this while in ON/RUN or ACC/ the infotainment system.
section. ACCESSORY. The range of the Infotainment System Controls
. See Storing and Deleting Phone Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
(30 ft). Not all phones support all For information about how to
Numbers in this section. navigate the menu system using the
functions and not all phones work
with the Bluetooth system. See infotainment controls, see Overview
{ Warning www.gm.com/bluetooth for more on page 7-3.
information about compatible MENU: Turn to scroll through a list.
When using a cell phone, it can phones. Press to select the highlighted list
be distracting to look too long or
option.
too often at the screen of the
phone or the infotainment system. { (Home Page): Press to go to the
Home Page. See Home Page on
(Continued)
page 7-5.
PHONE: Select to enter the phone Audio System Switching to Handset or

main menu. See Bluetooth Hands-Free Mode
When using the Bluetooth system,
(Overview) on page 7-19 or
sound comes through the vehicle's To switch between handset mode
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls -
front audio system speakers and and hands-free mode, use the
Base Radio) on page 7-21 or
overrides the audio system. Use the OnStar command, transfer call.
Radio) on page 7-25.
O knob during a call to change the
volume level. The system maintains Pairing
Voice Recognition a minimum volume level. A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth
The voice recognition system uses Bluetooth Audio Quality
commands to control the system system and then connected to the
Turn off the Echo and Noise vehicle before it can be used. See
and dial phone numbers.
cancellation feature on your phone, your cell phone manufacturer's user
Noise: The system may not if supported, for the best hands-free guide for Bluetooth functions before
recognize voice commands if there performance. pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
is too much background noise, such phone is not connected, calls can
See www.gm.com/bluetooth.
as noise from open windows or loud be made using OnStar Hands-Free
talking inside the vehicle. Calling, if available. See OnStar
Bluetooth (Infotainment Overview on page 14-1, if equipped.
When to Speak: A tone sounds to
indicate that the system is ready for Controls - Base Radio)
Pairing Information
a voice command. Wait for the tone For information about how to
and then speak. navigate the menu system using the
. Up to five cell phones can be
infotainment controls, see Overview paired to the Bluetooth system.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice. on page 7-3. . The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
. Pairing only needs to be
completed once per phone,
unless the pairing information on
the cell phone changes or the 2. Turn the MENU knob and press 6. If the phone prompts to accept
cell phone is deleted from the to select Manage Phones. connection or allow phone book
system. 3. Press the button just below the download, select Always Accept
. Only one paired cell phone can PAIR screen button. A four-digit and Allow. The phone book may
be connected to the Bluetooth Personal Identification Number not be available if not accepted.
system at a time. (PIN) appears on the display. 7. Repeat Steps 16 to pair
. If multiple paired cell phones are The PIN is used in Step 5. additional phones or devices.
within range of the system, the 4. Start the pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected
system connects to the first cell phone to be paired to the Phones
available paired cell phone in the vehicle. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for 1. To list all paired devices, from
order that they were newly
the Home Page turn the MENU
paired to the system. To connect information on this process.
knob, then press to select the
to a different paired phone, see 5. Locate the device named Your PHONE screen button.
Connecting to a Different Vehicle in the list on the cell
Phone later in this section. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
phone. Follow the instructions
to select Manage Phones.
Pairing a Phone or Device on the cell phone to enter the
PIN provided in Step 3. If a six Deleting a Paired Phone
1. From the Home Page, turn the digit code is shown on the phone
MENU knob to access the 1. From the Home Page, turn the
and the vehicle screen, confirm
PHONE screen button, then MENU knob, then press to
the codes are the same. The
press the MENU knob to select select the PHONE screen
system recognizes the new
the PHONE screen button. If a button.
connected phone after the
device has been previously pairing process is complete. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press
paired, the main Phone menu to select Manage Phones.
will be shown. If no devices
have been paired, Step 2 can be 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
skipped. the phone to be deleted.
4. Press the button below the Phone Menu to make calls. See your cell phone
DELETE screen button to delete manufacturers user guide or
Once a phone is connected and
the highlighted device. contact your wireless provider to
selected, the following may display:
5. A confirmation screen is find out if this feature is supported
Recent Calls: Turn the MENU by your phone.
displayed. Press the button just
knob to highlight Recent Calls and
below the DELETE screen If the phone prompts to allow phone
press to select.
button to confirm deletion. book download during the pairing
Contacts: Turn the MENU knob to process, select Always Accept and
Connecting to a Different Phone highlight Contacts and press to Allow. The phone book may not be
1. From the Home Page, turn the select. available if not accepted.
MENU knob, then press to Keypad: Turn the MENU knob to When a cell phone supports the
select the PHONE screen highlight Keypad and press to phone book feature, the Contacts
button. select. and Recent Calls menus are
2. Turn the MENU knob and press Active Call: Turn the MENU knob automatically available.
to select Manage Phones. to highlight Active Call and press to The Contacts menu allows you to
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight select and display the active call access the phone book stored in the
the phone to be connected. screen. cell phone to make a call.
4. Press the button just below the Manage Phones: Turn the MENU The Recent Calls menu allows you
CONNECT screen button to knob to highlight Manage Phones to access the phone numbers from
connect to the highlighted and press to select. the Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls,
device. and Missed Calls menus on the cell
Making a Call Using Contacts phone to make a call.
and Recent Calls
For cell phones that support the
Contacts and Recent Calls feature,
the Bluetooth system can use the
contacts stored on your cell phone
To make a call using the 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the number. To call, press the
Contacts menu: Recent Calls and press to button just below the CALL
1. From the Home Page, turn the select. screen button.
MENU knob, then press to If necessary, select between Accepting or Declining a Call
select the PHONE screen Missed, Recent, and Sent calls
button. by pressing the button below the When an incoming call is received,
appropriate screen button. the infotainment system mutes and
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Contacts and press to select. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
the contact or the phone Accepting a Call
3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
the letter group and press to number. To accept a call, do one of the
select. 4. Press the MENU knob to call the following:
4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight contact. . Press the button just below the
the contact and press to select. Making a Call Using the ANSWER screen button.
5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Keypad . Press g on the steering wheel
the desired number, then press To make a call: controls.
the MENU knob to call the
contact. 1. From the Home Page, turn the Declining a Call
MENU knob, then press to To decline a call, do one of the
To make a call using the Recent select the PHONE screen
Calls menu: following:
button.
1. From the Home Page, turn the
. Press the button just below the
2. Turn the MENU knob and press IGNORE screen button.
MENU knob, then press to to select Keypad.
select the PHONE screen . Press i on the steering wheel
button. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
the first digit and press to select. controls.
Continue this process through . Do nothing.
Call Waiting Ending a Call From the PHONE main menu, turn
the MENU knob to highlight Active
Call waiting must be supported on To end a call, do one of the
Call and press to select.
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by following:
the wireless service carrier to work. . Press the button just below the Bluetooth (Voice
Accepting a Call Waiting Call END screen button.
Recognition - Base
To accept a call waiting call, do one . Press i on the steering wheel Radio)
of the following: controls.
. Press the button just below the Using Voice Recognition
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
SWITCH screen button. To use voice recognition, press g
(DTMF) Tones
. Press g on the steering wheel on the steering wheel. Use the
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can commands below for the various
controls. send numbers during a call. This is voice features. For additional
Declining a Call Waiting Call used when calling a menu-driven information, say Help while you
phone system. are in a voice recognition menu.
To decline a call waiting call, do one
of the following: 1. When a call is active, press the
button just below the KEYPAD Pairing
. Press the button just below the screen button. Pairing a Phone
IGNORE screen button.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight 1. Press g. The system responds
. Press i on the steering wheel the first digit and press to select.
Ready, followed by a tone.
controls. If not initially in the phone
2. Say Bluetooth.
. Do nothing. application, from the Home Page,
turn the MENU knob, then press to 3. Say Pair. The system responds
select the PHONE screen button. with instructions and a four-digit
Personal Identification Number
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
4. Start the pairing process on the 6. Repeat Steps 15 to pair 4. Say the name of the phone to
cell phone that you want to pair. additional phones. delete.
For help with this process, see
your cell phone manufacturer's Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone
user guide. Phones To connect to a different cell phone,
5. Locate the device named Your The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the
Vehicle in the list on the cell
also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all available cell
phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the system responds with is connected phones were paired. This may need
after that phone name. to be repeated depending on how
PIN provided in Step 3. The
many cell phones have been
system may respond with a six 1. Press g. The system responds connected.
digit code to be confirmed on the Ready, followed by a tone.
cell phone (instead of entering a 1. Press g. The system responds
four digit code), check that the 2. Say Bluetooth.
same digits are shown on the 3. Say List.
cell phone and say "Yes" to 2. Say Bluetooth.
confirm. Select Confirm on the Deleting a Paired Phone
3. Say Change phone.
cell phone as well. After the PIN If the phone name to delete is .
is successfully entered, the If another cell phone is
unknown, see Listing All Paired found, the response will be
system prompts you to provide a and Connected Phones.
name for the paired cell phone. <Phone name> is now
This name will be used to 1. Press g. The system responds connected.
indicate which phones are Ready, followed by a tone. This can be repeated to
paired and connected to the 2. Say Bluetooth. connect any of the up to five
vehicle. The system responds paired phones.
with <Phone name> has been 3. Say Delete. The system asks
for which phone to delete.
. If another cell phone is not
successfully paired after the found, the original phone
pairing process is complete. remains connected.
Storing and Deleting Phone 3. Say the entire phone number or Using the Delete Command
Numbers a group of digits all at once with
no pauses, then follow the 1. Press g. The system responds
The following commands are used directions given by the system to Ready, followed by a tone.
to delete and store phone numbers. save a name tag for this number. 2. Say Delete.
Store: This command will store a
Using the Digit Store Command 3. Say the name tag you want to
phone number, or a group of
If an unwanted number is delete.
numbers as a name tag.
recognized by the system, say Using the Delete All Name Tags
Digit Store: This command allows
Correction at any time to clear the Command
a phone number to be stored as a
last number.
name tag by entering the digits one This command deletes all stored
at a time. To hear all of the digits recognized name tags in the Hands-Free
by the system, say Verify at Calling Directory and the
Delete: This command is used to
any time. Destinations Directory.
delete individual name tags.
Delete All Name Tags: This 1. Press g. The system responds To delete all name tags:
command deletes all stored name Ready, followed by a tone.
1. Press g. The system responds
tags in the Hands-Free Calling 2. Say Digit Store. Ready, followed by a tone.
Directory and the Destinations
Directory. 3. Say each digit, one at a time. 2. Say Delete all name tags.
After each digit is entered, the
Using the Store Command system repeats back the digit it Listing Stored Numbers
heard followed by a tone. After The list command will list all the
1. Press g. The system responds the last digit has been entered,
Ready, followed by a tone. stored numbers and name tags.
say Store, and then follow the
2. Say Store. directions given by the system to Using the List Command
save a name tag for this number. 1. Press g. The system responds
2. Say Directory. Once connected, the person called After each digit is entered, the
3. Say Hands-Free Calling. will be heard through the audio system repeats back the digit it
speakers. heard followed by a tone.
4. Say List.
Calling 911 Emergency (U.S. and If an unwanted number is
Making a Call Canada) recognized by the system, say
Correction at any time to clear the
Calls can be made using the 1. Press g. The system responds last number.
following commands. Ready, followed by a tone.
To hear all of the numbers
Dial or Call: The dial or call 2. Say Dial or Call. recognized by the system, say
command can be used
3. Say 911. Verify at any time.
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag. 4. Say Dial or Call. 1. Press g. The system responds
Digit Dial: This command allows a Ready, followed by a tone.
Calling 066 Emergency (Mexico)
phone number to be dialed by 2. Say Digit Dial.
entering the digits one at a time. 1. Press g. The system responds
Ready, followed by a tone. 3. Say each digit, one at a time.
Re-dial: This command is used to After each digit is entered, the
dial the last number used on the cell 2. Say Dial or Call. system repeats back the digit it
phone. heard followed by a tone. After
3. Say 066.
Using the Dial or Call the last digit has been entered,
4. Say Dial or Call. say Dial.
Command
Using the Digit Dial Command Once connected, the person called
1. Press g. The system responds will be heard through the audio
Ready, followed by a tone. The digit dial command allows a
phone number to be dialed by speakers.
2. Say Dial or Call. entering the digits one at a time.
3. Say the entire number without
pausing or say the name tag.
Using the Re-dial Command . Press g to answer an incoming 4. Once the call is connected,
call when another call is active. press g to link all callers
The original call is placed together.
Ready, followed by a tone. on hold.
2. After the tone, say Re-dial. The Ending a Call
system dials the last number
. Press g again to return to the
called from the connected cell original call. Press i to end a call.
phone. . To ignore the incoming call, no Transferring a Call
Once connected, the person called action is required.
Audio can be transferred between
will be heard through the audio . Press i to disconnect the the Bluetooth system and the cell
speakers. current call and switch to the call phone.
Receiving a Call on hold. The cell phone must be paired and
Three-Way Calling connected with the Bluetooth
When an incoming call is received,
system before a call can be
the audio system mutes and a ring Three-way calling must be transferred. The connection process
tone is heard in the vehicle. supported on the cell phone and can take up to two minutes after the
. Press g to answer the call. enabled by the wireless service ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
carrier.
. Press i to ignore a call. To Transfer Audio from the
1. While on a call, press g. Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Call Waiting 2. Say Three-way call. During a call with the audio in the
Call waiting must be supported on 3. Use the Dial or Call command vehicle:
the cell phone and enabled by the to dial the number of the third
wireless service carrier. 1. Press g.
party to be called.
2. Say Transfer Call.
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth The cell phone's normal prompt Clearing the System
System from a Cell Phone messages will go through their cycle
Unless information is deleted out of
During a call with the audio on the according to the phone's operating
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
instructions.
cell phone, press g. The audio will be retained indefinitely. This
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio Dual Tone Multi-Frequency includes all phone pairing
does not transfer to the vehicle, use (DTMF) Tones information. For information on how
the audio transfer feature on the cell to delete this information, see
The Bluetooth system can send Deleting a Paired Phone.
phone. See your cell phone
numbers and the numbers stored as
manufacturer's user guide for more
name tags during a call. You can
information.
use this feature when calling a
Voice Pass-Thru menu-driven phone system.
Account numbers can also be
Voice pass-thru allows access to the stored for use.
voice recognition commands on the
cell phone. See your cell phone Sending a Number or Name Tag
manufacturer's user guide to see if During a Call
the cell phone supports this feature.
To access contacts stored in the cell Ready, followed by a tone.
phone:
2. Say Dial.
1. Press g. The system responds 3. Say the number or name tag
Ready, followed by a tone. to send.
2. Say Bluetooth.
3. Say Voice. The system
responds OK, accessing
<phone name>.

. Access or delete Report Card For Ignition Keyed System:
Settings data or Teen Driver settings. . If the key is not registered,
Teen Driver Register or Unregister a Key select Register and follow the
Any of the vehicle keys can be instructions. A message displays
If equipped, Teen Driver allows keys to confirm successful
to be programmed with registered as a Teen Driver key.
Label the key to tell it apart from the registration.
customizable vehicle settings.
It limits some vehicle features and other keys. A maximum of eight . If the key is already registered,
prevents some systems, such as keys can be registered. There is the option to unregister displays.
Park Assist, if equipped, from being one Report Card per vehicle. If Unregister is selected, the key
turned off. It also displays a report After creating the PIN, to register or is no longer registered and a
card of the driving behavior when a unregister the key(s): confirmation displays.
Teen Driver key is used. 1. Have the vehicle running. For Pushbutton Start System:
To activate or change the settings, 2. For automatic transmissions, the Once Key Registration is selected,
select Teen Driver from the Settings vehicle must be in P (Park). For the system detects whether there is
menu. See Vehicle Personalization a transmitter key in the transmitter
manual transmissions, the
on page 5-47. If no keys are vehicle must be stopped with the pocket, which is in the center
activated, the Teen Driver feature parking brake set. console storage area or on the side
will not record any Report of the steering wheel column. See
Card data. 3. Select Teen Driver from the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Settings menu. System Operation (Key Access) on
A Personal Identification Number
(PIN) must be created using the 4. Enter the PIN. page 2-5 or Remote Keyless Entry
keypad. The PIN is required to: (RKE) System Operation (Keyless
5. Select Key Registration. Access) on page 2-8.
. Register Keys. The system will display instructions
. Change settings. for registering or unregistering
a key.

. If no transmitter key is detected, start up, the vehicle will recognize
. Other vehicle features, such as
a message displays indicating to the non-Teen Driver transmitter key Park Assist, if equipped, cannot
place the transmitter key in the to start the vehicle. The Teen Driver be turned off when the Teen
transmitter pocket. settings will not be active. Driver setting is in use.
. If the transmitter key is in the Manage Settings Delete Report Card Data
transmitter pocket, it will identify
whether the transmitter key is The PIN can be used to change The Report Card continues to save
registered or unregistered. these settings: data for all trips until the data is
deleted using the PIN.
. If the transmitter key is not Audio Volume Limit: Allows a
registered, a message maximum radio volume to be set. To delete Report Card data:
displays requesting Teen Driver Speed Warning:
. Select Reset from the Report
confirmation to register. Allows a warning to be set when a Card screen.
Select Register and follow selected speed is exceeded. . Select Clear All Teen Keys/PIN
the instructions. A message from the Teen Driver menu.
displays to confirm Teen Driver Speed Limiter:
successful registration. If equipped, this allows the Forgotten PIN
maximum speed limit of the vehicle
. If the transmitter key is to be set. See your dealer to reset the PIN.
already registered, the option
to unregister displays. The following cannot be changed:
If Unregister is selected, the . The radio will mute when the
transmitter key is no longer driver safety belt is not fastened,
registered and a confirmation and in some vehicles, when the
displays. safety belt of a front outboard
In vehicles with a Pushbutton start passenger is not fastened.
system, if a Teen Driver transmitter
key and a non-Teen Driver
transmitter key are both present at
Trademarks and Explicit Language Notice: Channels

with frequent explicit language are
License Agreements indicated with an XL preceding the
channel name. Channel blocking is
FCC Information available for SiriusXM Satellite
See Radio Frequency Statement on Radio receivers by notifying
page 13-12. SiriusXM:
Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee,
taxes, one time activation fee, and . USA Customers Visit
other fees may apply. Subscription www.siriusxm.com or call
fee is consumer only. All fees and 1-866-635-2349.
programming subject to change. . Canadian Customers Visit
Subscriptions subject to Customer www.xmradio.ca or call
Agreement available at 1-877-209-0079.
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM
Made for iPod and Made for service only available in the It is prohibited to copy, decompile,
iPhone mean that an electronic 48 contiguous United States and disassemble, reverse engineer,
accessory has been designed to Canada. hack, manipulate, or otherwise
connect specifically to iPod or make available any technology or
In Canada: Some deterioration of software incorporated in receivers
iPhone and has been certified by service may occur in extreme
the developer to meet Apple compatible with the SiriusXM
northern latitudes. This is beyond Satellite Radio System or that
performance standards. the control of SiriusXM Satellite support the SiriusXM website, the
iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Radio. Online Service or any of its content.
Apple Computer, Inc., registered in Furthermore, the AMBER voice
the U.S. and other countries. compression software included in
this product is protected by
intellectual property rights including
patent rights, copyrights, and trade Bluetooth

secrets of Digital Voice
The Bluetooth word mark and logos
Systems, Inc.
are owned by the Bluetooth SIG,
General Requirements: Inc. and andy use of such marks by
1. A License Agreement from General Motors is under license.
SiriusXM is required for any Other trademarks and trade names
product that incorporates are those of their respective owners.
SiriusXM Technology and/or for
use of any of the SiriusXM
marks to be manufactured,
distributed, or marketed in the
SiriusXM service Area.
2. For products to be distributed,
marketed, and/or sold in
Canada, a separate agreement
is required with Canadian
Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as
SiriusXM Canada).
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control 2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls
Systems
4. Fan Control
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control Dual Automatic Climate 5. Defrost
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Control System 6. Passenger Temperature Control
Rear Climate Control
With this system the heating, 7. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
cooling, and ventilation in the
vehicle can be controlled. Some 8. Air Recirculation
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 climate control settings can be 9. Rear Climate Control Power
changed. See Climate and Air Button
Maintenance Quality under Vehicle
Passenger Compartment Air 10. Rear AUTO (Automatic
Personalization on page 5-47. Operation)
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 11. Front Climate Control Power
Button
12. Rear Fan Control
13. Rear Air Delivery Mode Control
14. Rear Temperature Control
15. RCTRL (Rear Climate Control
Lockout)
16. Rear Window Defogger
17. SYNC (Synchronized
Temperature)
1. Driver Temperature Control
8-2 Climate Controls
Front Climate Controls To improve fuel efficiency and to Press AUTO to return to automatic
cool the vehicle faster, recirculation operation.
Automatic Operation may be automatically selected in Driver and Passenger
The system automatically controls warm weather. Temperature Control: The
the fan speed, air delivery, air The recirculation light will not come temperature can be adjusted
conditioning, and recirculation in on when automatically controlled. separately for the driver and
order to heat or cool the vehicle to passenger.
the desired temperature. Press @ to manually select
recirculation; press it again to select Turn the knob clockwise or
When the indicator light is on, the outside air. counterclockwise to increase or
system is in full automatic operation. decrease the driver or passenger
If the air delivery mode or fan Do not cover the solar sensor on the
top of the instrument panel near the temperature setting.
setting is manually adjusted, the
auto indicator turns off and the windshield. This sensor regulates SYNC (Synchronized
selected settings are displayed. air temperature based on sun load. Temperature): Press to link the
See Sensors later in this section. passenger and rear climate
To place the system in temperature settings to the driver
automatic mode: Manual Operation setting. The SYNC indicator light will
1. Press AUTO. O (On/Off): Press to turn the turn on. When the passenger or rear
climate control system on or off. climate settings are adjusted, the
2. Set the driver and passenger
Outside air still enters the vehicle, SYNC indicator light turns off.
temperature.
and is directed to the floor. This
Air Delivery Mode Control:
To find your comfort setting, start direction can be changed by
with 22C (72F) and allow the pressing the air delivery mode. Press Y, \, [ , or - to change
system time to stabilize. Then the direction of the airflow. An
adjust the temperature as
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise indicator light comes on in the
or counterclockwise to increase or selected mode button.
needed for best comfort.
decrease the fan speed.
Changing the mode cancels the and the air conditioning compressor inside the vehicle. When high
automatic operation and the system will run, unless the outside humidity is detected, the climate
goes into manual mode. Press temperature is close to freezing. control system may adjust to
AUTO to return to automatic Do not drive the vehicle until all outside air supply and turn on the
operation. windows are clear. air conditioner. If the climate control
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the system does not detect possible
See Air Vents on page 8-6. window fogging, it returns to normal
instrument panel outlets.
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided turn the air conditioning system on on, see Climate and Air Quality
between the instrument panel and or off. An indicator light comes on to under Vehicle Personalization on
floor outlets. show that the air conditioning is page 5-47.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the enabled. If the fan is turned off, the Rear Window Defogger
floor outlets, with some to the air conditioner will not run. The A/C
windshield, side window outlets, and light will stay on even if the outside The rear window defogger uses a
second row floor outlets. temperatures are below freezing. warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
- (Defog): This mode clears the @ (Recirculation): Press to turn
windows of fog or moisture. Air is on recirculation. An indicator light K (Rear Window Defogger):
directed to the windshield, floor comes on. Air is recirculated to Press to turn the rear window
outlets, and side window vents. quickly cool the inside of the defogger on or off. An indicator light
vehicle. It can also be used to help on the button comes on to show that
0 (Defrost): Press to clear the reduce outside air and odors that the rear window defogger is on.
windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the enter the vehicle. The air The rear window defogger only
windshield and the side window conditioning compressor also comes works when the ignition is in ON/
vents. The system automatically on when this mode is activated. RUN. The defogger turns off if the
forces outside air into the vehicle Auto Defog: The climate control ignition is turned to ACC/
system may have a sensor to ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
automatically detect high humidity
except rear temperature are Remote Start Climate Control

{ Caution manually adjusted, this cancels full Operation
automatic operation. If equipped with the remote start
Using a razor blade or sharp
object to clear the inside rear Fan Control: Press up or down to feature, the climate control system
window can damage the rear increase or decrease the rear will come on when the vehicle is
window defogger. Repairs would passenger area fan speed. started remotely, depending on the
not be covered by the vehicle Air Delivery Mode Control: Press outside temperature. The rear
warranty. Do not clear the inside up or down to change the direction window defogger and heated seats,
of the rear passenger airflow. if equipped, may also come on. See
rear window with sharp objects.
Repeatedly press the switch until Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-14
the desired mode appears on the and Heated and Cooled Front Seats
Heated Mirror: If equipped with display. Multiple presses will cycle on page 3-9.
heated outside rearview mirrors, the through the delivery selections.
mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost Sensors
from the surface of the mirror when Temperature Control: Press up or
the rear window defog button is down to increase or decrease the
pressed. See Heated Mirrors on airflow temperature into the rear
page 2-29. passenger area.
Rear Climate Controls RCTRL (Rear Climate Control
Lockout): Press to lock or unlock
O (On/Off): Press to turn the rear control of the rear climate control
climate control system on or off. system from the rear seat
AUTO: Press AUTO to control the passengers. When locked, the rear
rear passenger temperature, air climate control can only be adjusted
The solar sensor monitors the solar
delivery, and fan speed. AUTO from the front seat.
heat. Do not cover the solar sensor
appears in the display when or the system will not work properly.
automatic operation is active. If any
of the climate control settings
There is also an exterior Automatic Operation

temperature sensor behind the front
AUTO: Press AUTO to control the
grille. This sensor reads the outside
inside temperature, air delivery, and
air temperature and helps maintain
fan speed. A is indicated in the
the temperature inside the vehicle.
display when automatic operation is
Any cover on the front of the
active. If any of the climate control
vehicle, including a snowplow, could
settings are manually adjusted, this
cause a false reading in the
cancels full automatic operation.
displayed temperature.
The display only indicates climate
The climate control system uses the
control functions when the system is
information from these sensors to
in rear independent mode.
maintain comfort settings by
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan 1. Fan Control Manual Operation
speed, and air delivery mode. The 2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
system may also supply cooler air to 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
the side of the vehicle facing the 3. MODE (Air Delivery Mode or counterclockwise to increase or
sun. The recirculation mode will also Control) decrease the fan speed. Turn
be used as needed to maintain cool completely counterclockwise to turn
4. TEMP (Temperature Control)
outlet temperatures. the fan/power off.
5. Heated Rear Seats (If Equipped)
TEMP (Temperature Control):
Rear Climate Control If the dual automatic climate control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
System system rear climate control lockout to increase or decrease the airflow
feature is locked, the rear climate temperature into the passenger
The rear climate control system is control settings can only be area. If the SYNC button is pressed
located on the rear of the center adjusted from the front seat. on the front climate controls, the
console storage. The rear climate rear climate temperature is linked to
settings can be adjusted with this the driver temperature setting.
system.
MODE (Air Delivery Mode Air Vents Operation Tips

Control): Press to change the . Clear away any ice, snow,
direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Adjustable air vents are in the
or leaves from the air inlets at
Repeatedly press the button until center and on the side of the
the base of the windshield that
the desired mode appears on the instrument panel.
could block the flow of air into
display. Multiple presses will cycle the vehicle.
through the delivery selections.
. When you enter a vehicle in cold
M or L (Heated Rear Seats, If weather, press the fan up button
Equipped): Press M or L to heat to the maximum fan level before
the left or right outboard seat driving. This helps clear the
cushion. See Heated Rear Seats on intake ducts of snow and
page 3-10. moisture, and reduces the
chance of fogging the inside of
the window.
. Keep the air path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
1. Slider Knob vehicle more effectively.
2. Thumbwheel . Use of non-GM approved hood
Move the slider knobs (1) to change deflectors can adversely affect
the direction of the airflow. the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
Use the thumbwheels (2) near the adding equipment to the outside
air vents to open or close off the of the vehicle.
airflow.
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter reduces the dust, pollen,
and other airborne irritants from
outside air that is pulled into the
vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
See Maintenance Schedule on 1. Open the glove box completely.
page 11-3. To find out what type of 3. Remove the six screws and
filter to use, see Maintenance 2. Disconnect the glove box door remove the access plate.
Replacement Parts on page 11-13. damper string from the glove box
door assembly. A pen or pencil
may be inserted through the end
of the damper string to prevent
the string from slipping inside
the door assembly.
Service
All vehicles have a label underhood
that identifies the refrigerant used in
the vehicle. The refrigerant system
should only be serviced by trained
and certified technicians. The air
conditioning evaporator should
never be repaired or replaced by
one from a salvage vehicle.
It should only be replaced by a new
evaporator to ensure proper and
safe operation.
4. Release the two tabs holding the
service door. Open the service During service, all refrigerants
door and remove the old filter. should be reclaimed with proper
equipment. Venting refrigerants
5. Install the new air filter. directly to the atmosphere is harmful
6. Close the service door and to the environment and may also
secure the tabs. create unsafe conditions based on
inhalation, combustion, frostbite,
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the or other health-based concerns.
glove box.
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-24
9-26
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/Electronic
Operating Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Descent
9-44
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Driving Information Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-46
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Parking over Things Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Automatic Level Control . . . . . 9-47
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Active Fuel Management . . . 9-29
Cruise Control
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . 9-51
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Running the Vehicle While
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Driver Assistance Systems
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Driver Assistance
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Transmission Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-10 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-31 Assistance Systems for
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-11 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Assistance Systems for
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-13 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Drive Systems Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Starting and Operating Active Emergency Braking
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-19 Brakes
Antilock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Side Blind Zone
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65
Ignition Positions (Key Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . 9-66
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-43 Lane Departure
Ignition Positions (Keyless Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
9-2 Driving and Operating
Fuel
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
California Fuel distractions.
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70 Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-71 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71 and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72 judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Filling a Portable Fuel activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74 from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
governments have enacted laws driving.
Trailer Towing
regarding driver distraction. Become
General Towing . Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74 to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
Driving Characteristics and to the floor.
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74 To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77 keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82 on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
Trailer Sway . Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88 carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Conversions and Add-Ons Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
Add-On Electrical place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89 phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.

. Allow enough following distance
Control of a Vehicle
{ Warning between you and the driver in
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating
Taking your eyes off the road too are important factors in helping to
. Focus on the task of driving.
long or too often could cause a control a vehicle while driving.
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving. Drunk Driving Braking
Death and injury associated with
Braking action involves perception
Refer to the infotainment section for drinking and driving is a global
time and reaction time. Deciding to
more information on using that tragedy.
push the brake pedal is perception
system and the navigation system, time. Actually doing it is
if equipped, including pairing and { Warning reaction time.
using a cell phone.
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second.
Defensive Driving In that time, a vehicle moving at
perceptions, attentiveness, and
Defensive driving means always judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
expect the unexpected. The first a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
step in driving defensively is to wear can have a serious or even distance in an emergency.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on fatal collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
page 3-20. drinking. include:
. Assume that other road users Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and you and the vehicle in front
a driver who has been drinking.
other drivers) are going to be of you.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking.
and be ready. who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.
If the engine ever stops while the If the steering assist is used for an Steering in Emergencies
vehicle is being driven, brake extended period of time, power . There are some situations when
normally but do not pump the assist may be reduced.
steering around a problem may
brakes. Doing so could make the If the steering wheel is turned until it be more effective than braking.
pedal harder to push down. If the reaches the end of its travel, and is
engine stops, there will be some . Holding both sides of the
held in that position for an extended
power brake assist but it will be steering wheel allows you to turn
period of time, power steering assist
used when the brake is applied. 180 degrees without removing
may be reduced.
Once the power assist is used up, it a hand.
can take longer to stop and the Normal use of the power steering . Antilock Brake System (ABS)
brake pedal will be harder to push. assist should return when the
allows steering while braking.
system cools down.
Steering See specific vehicle steering Off-Road Recovery
messages under Steering System
Electric Power Steering Messages on page 5-43. See your
This vehicle has electric power dealer if there is a problem.
steering. It does not have power
steering fluid. Regular maintenance Curve Tips
is not required. . Take curves at a reasonable
If power steering assist is lost due speed.
to a system malfunction, the vehicle . Reduce speed before entering a
can be steered, but may require curve.
increased effort. . Maintain a reasonable steady
See your dealer if there is a speed through the curve.
problem. . Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
gently into the straightaway.
The vehicle's right wheels can drop

. Steering or Cornering Skid material on the road. Learn to
off the edge of a road onto the too much speed or steering in a recognize warning clues such
shoulder while driving. Follow curve causes tires to slip and as enough water, ice, or packed
these tips: lose cornering force. snow on the road to make a
1. Ease off the accelerator and
. Acceleration Skid too much mirrored surface and slow
then, if there is nothing in the throttle causes the driving down when you have any doubt.
way, steer the vehicle so that it wheels to spin. . Try to avoid sudden steering,
straddles the edge of the Defensive drivers avoid most skids acceleration, or braking,
pavement. by taking reasonable care suited to including reducing vehicle speed
2. Turn the steering wheel about existing conditions, and by not by shifting to a lower gear. Any
one-eighth of a turn, until the overdriving those conditions. But sudden changes could cause
right front tire contacts the skids are always possible. the tires to slide.
pavement edge. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help
3. Turn the steering wheel to go these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid.
straight down the roadway. . Ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and steer the
Off-Road Driving
Loss of Control way you want the vehicle to go. Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be
The vehicle may straighten out. used for off-road driving. Vehicles
Skidding Be ready for a second skid if it without four-wheel drive and
There are three types of skids that occurs. vehicles not equipped with All
correspond to the vehicle's three . Slow down and adjust your Terrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)
control systems: driving according to weather tires must not be driven off-road
. conditions. Stopping distance except on a level, solid surface. For
Braking Skid wheels are not
can be longer and vehicle more contact information about the
rolling.
control can be affected when original equipment tires, see the
traction is reduced by water, Limited Warranty and Owner
snow, ice, gravel, or other Assistance Information manual.
One of the best ways for successful To gain more ground clearance if
off-road driving is to control the needed, it may be necessary to Warning (Continued)
speed. remove the front fascia lower air
dam. However, driving without the passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the
{ Warning air dam reduces fuel economy.
cargo properly.
When driving off-road, bouncing { Caution . Keep cargo in the cargo area
as far forward and as low as
and quick changes in direction
can easily throw you out of Operating the vehicle for possible. The heaviest things
position. This could cause you to extended periods without the front should be on the floor,
lose control and crash. You and fascia lower air dam installed can forward of the rear axle.
your passengers should always cause improper air flow to the . Heavy loads on the roof raise
wear safety belts. engine. Re-attach the front fascia the vehicle's center of gravity,
air dam after off-road driving. making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or
Before Driving Off-Road fatally injured if the vehicle
Loading the Vehicle for rolls over. Put heavy loads
. Have all necessary maintenance
and service work completed. Off-Road Driving inside the cargo area, not on
. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels, the roof.
and check inflation pressure in
{ Warning
all tires, including the spare, . Unsecured cargo on the load For more information about loading
if equipped. floor can be tossed about the vehicle, see If the Vehicle Is
. Read all the information about when driving over rough Stuck on page 9-13 and Tires on
four-wheel-drive vehicles in this terrain. You or your page 10-46.
manual. (Continued)
. Know the local laws that apply to
off-road driving.
Environmental Concerns
. Always use established trails,
Warning (Continued) { Warning
roads, and areas that have been cause a rollover. You could be Driving to the top of a hill at high
set aside for public off-road injured or killed. Do not drive on speed can cause an accident.
recreational driving and obey all steep hills. There could be a drop-off,
posted regulations. embankment, cliff, or even
. Do not damage shrubs, flowers, Before driving on a hill, assess the another vehicle. You could be
trees, or grasses or disturb steepness, traction, and seriously injured or killed. As you
wildlife. obstructions. If the terrain ahead near the top of a hill, slow down
. Do not park over things that cannot be seen, get out of the and stay alert.
burn. See Parking over Things vehicle and walk the hill before
That Burn on page 9-29. driving further. . Never go downhill forward or
When driving on hills: backward with either the
Driving on Hills transmission or transfer case in
Driving safely on hills requires good
. Use a low gear and keep a firm N (Neutral). The brakes could
judgment and an understanding of grip on the steering wheel. overheat and you could lose
what the vehicle can and cannot do. . Maintain a slow speed. control.
. When possible, drive straight up
{ Warning or down the hill. { Warning
Many hills are simply too steep
. Slow down when approaching If the vehicle has the twospeed
for any vehicle. Driving up hills the top of the hill. automatic transfer case, shifting
can cause the vehicle to stall. . Use headlamps even during the the transfer case to N (Neutral)
Driving down hills can cause loss day to make the vehicle more can cause your vehicle to roll
of control. Driving across hills can visible. even if the transmission is in

. If you cannot make it up the
Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued) hill, back straight down
the hill.
P (Park). This is because the cause loss of control and you or . Never back down a hill in
N (Neutral) position on the others could be injured or killed.
N (Neutral) using only the
transfer case overrides the Apply the brakes lightly when
brake.
transmission. You or someone descending a hill and use a low
else could be injured. If leaving gear to keep vehicle speed under The vehicle can roll
the vehicle, set the parking brake control. backward quickly and you
and shift the transmission to could lose control.
P (Park). Shift the transfer case to If the vehicle stalls on a hill:
. If driving downhill when the
any position but N (Neutral). vehicle stalls, shift to a lower
1. Apply the brakes to stop the gear, release the parking
vehicle, and then apply the brake, and drive straight
. When driving down a hill, keep parking brake. down the hill.
the vehicle headed straight
down. Use a low gear because 2. Shift into P (Park) and then 3. If the vehicle cannot be restarted
the engine will work with the restart the engine. after stalling, set the parking
brakes to slow the vehicle and . If driving uphill when the brake, shift into P (Park), and
help keep the vehicle under vehicle stalls, shift to turn the vehicle off.
control. R (Reverse), release the 3.1. Leave the vehicle and
parking brake, and back seek help.
{ Warning straight down.
3.2. Stay clear of the path the
. Never try to turn the vehicle vehicle would take if it
Heavy braking when going down
around. If the hill is steep rolled downhill.
a hill can cause your brakes to enough to stall the vehicle, it
overheat and fade. This could is steep enough to cause it to
. Avoid turns that take the vehicle
(Continued) roll over. across the incline of the hill.
A hill that can be driven straight
up or down might be too steep to Traction is reduced on hard packed

drive across. Driving across an { Warning snow and ice and it is easy to lose
incline puts more weight on the control. Reduce vehicle speed when
downhill wheels, which could Getting out of the vehicle on the driving on hard packed snow
cause a downhill slide or a downhill side when stopped and ice.
rollover. across an incline is dangerous.
If the vehicle rolls over, you could
. Surface conditions can be a be crushed or killed. Always get
{ Warning
problem. Loose gravel, muddy out on the uphill side of the
spots, or even wet grass can Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,
vehicle and stay well clear of the or rivers can be dangerous. Ice
cause the tires to slip sideways,
rollover path. conditions vary greatly and the
downhill. If the vehicle slips
sideways, it can hit something vehicle could fall through the ice;
that will trip it a rock, a rut, Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, you and your passengers could
etc. and roll over. or Ice drown. Drive your vehicle on safe
surfaces only.
. Hidden obstacles can make the Use a low gear when driving in
steepness of the incline more mud the deeper the mud, the
severe. If a rock is driven across lower the gear. Keep the vehicle Driving in Water
with the uphill wheels, or if the moving to avoid getting stuck.
downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, the vehicle can tilt Traction changes when driving on { Warning
even more. sand. On loose sand, such as on
beaches or sand dunes, the tires Driving through rushing water can
. If an incline must be driven tend to sink into the sand. This be dangerous. Deep water can
across, and the vehicle starts to affects steering, accelerating, and sweep your vehicle downstream
slide, turn downhill. This should braking. Drive at a reduced speed and you and your passengers
help straighten out the vehicle and avoid sharp turns or abrupt could drown. If it is only shallow
and prevent the side slipping. maneuvers. water, it can still wash away the
(Continued)
After Off-Road Driving

Warning (Continued)
Remove any brush or debris that
{ Warning
ground from under your tires. has collected on the underbody or Wet brakes can cause crashes.
Traction could be lost, and the chassis, or under the hood. These They might not work as well in a
vehicle could roll over. Do not accumulations can be a fire hazard. quick stop and could cause
drive through rushing water. After operation in mud or sand, pulling to one side. You could
have the brake linings cleaned and lose control of the vehicle.
checked. These substances can After driving through a large
cause glazing and uneven braking.
{ Caution Check the body structure, steering,
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
Do not drive through standing suspension, wheels, tires, and
pedal until the brakes work
water if it is deep enough to cover exhaust system for damage and
normally.
check the fuel lines and cooling
the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
system for any leakage. Flowing or rushing water creates
pipe. Deep water can damage the
More frequent maintenance service strong forces. Driving through
axle and other vehicle parts.
is required. See the Maintenance flowing water could cause the
Schedule on page 11-3. vehicle to be carried away. If this
If the standing water is not too deep, happens, you and other vehicle
drive slowly through it. At faster occupants could drown. Do not
speeds, water splashes and the
Driving on Wet Roads
ignore police warnings and be
vehicle can stall. When going Rain and wet roads can reduce very cautious about trying to drive
through water, the brakes get wet vehicle traction and affect your through flowing water.
and it may take longer to stop. See ability to stop and accelerate.
Driving on Wet Roads later in this Always drive slower in these types
section. of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
Hydroplaning
. Turn off cruise control.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
{ Warning
Hill and Mountain Roads
can build up under the vehicle's Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
tires so they actually ride on the Driving on steep hills or through or with the ignition off is
water. This can happen if the road is mountains is different than driving dangerous. This can cause
wet enough and you are going fast on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for overheating of the brakes and
enough. When the vehicle is driving in these conditions include: loss of steering. Always have the
hydroplaning, it has little or no . Keep the vehicle serviced and in engine running and the vehicle
contact with the road. good shape. in gear.
There is no hard and fast rule about . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
hydroplaning. The best advice is to tires, cooling system, and . Stay in your own lane. Do not
slow down when the road is wet. transmission. swing wide or cut across the
Other Rainy Weather Tips . Shift to a lower gear when going center of the road. Drive at
down steep or long hills. speeds that let you stay in your
Besides slowing down, other wet own lane.
weather driving tips include:
. Allow extra following distance.
{ Warning . Be alert on top of hills;
something could be in your lane
. Pass with caution. Using the brakes to slow the (stalled car, accident).
vehicle on a long downhill slope . Pay attention to special road
. Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. can cause brake overheating, can signs (falling rocks area, winding
reduce brake performance, and roads, long grades, passing or
. Keep the windshield washer fluid could result in a loss of braking. no-passing zones) and take
reservoir filled. Shift the transmission to a lower appropriate action.
. Have good tires with proper gear to let the engine assist the
tread depth. See Tires on brakes on a steep downhill slope.
page 10-46.

. Tie a red cloth to an outside
Winter Driving apply the brakes sooner than when
mirror.
on dry pavement. See Antilock
Driving on Snow or Ice Brake System (ABS) on page 9-41.
Drive carefully when there is snow Allow greater following distance on { Warning
or ice between the tires and the any slippery road and watch for Snow can trap engine exhaust
road, creating less traction or grip. slippery spots. Icy patches can
under the vehicle. This may
Wet ice can occur at about 0C occur on otherwise clear roads in
(32F) when freezing rain begins to cause exhaust gases to get
shaded areas. The surface of a
fall, resulting in even less traction. curve or an overpass can remain icy inside. Engine exhaust contains
Avoid driving on wet ice or in when the surrounding roads are carbon monoxide (CO) which
freezing rain until roads can be clear. Avoid sudden steering cannot be seen or smelled. It can
treated with salt or sand. maneuvers and braking while cause unconsciousness and even
on ice. death.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so Turn off cruise control on slippery If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
traction is not lost. Accelerating too surfaces. . Clear away snow from around
quickly causes the wheels to spin the base of your vehicle,
and makes the surface under the Blizzard Conditions
especially any that is blocking
tires slick, so there is even less Being stuck in snow can be a the exhaust pipe.
traction. serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
. Check again from time to
Traction Control should be turned time to be sure snow does
on. See Traction Control/Electronic If possible, use Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside not collect there.
Stability Control on page 9-44.
Assistance Program on page 13-5. . Open a window about 5 cm
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) To get help and keep everyone in (2 in) on the side of the
improves vehicle stability during the vehicle safe: vehicle that is away from the
hard stops on slippery roads, but wind to bring in fresh air.
. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers. (Continued)
If it takes some time for help to

Warning (Continued) arrive, now and then when you run { Warning
the engine, push the accelerator
. Fully open the air outlets on pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high
or under the instrument faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and you
panel. keeps the battery charged to restart or others could be injured. The
. Adjust the climate control the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle can overheat, causing an
system to a setting that with the headlamps. Do this as little engine compartment fire or other
circulates the air inside the as possible to save fuel. damage. Spin the wheels as little
vehicle and set the fan speed as possible and avoid going
to the highest setting. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck above 56 km/h (35 mph).
Climate Control Systems.
Slowly and cautiously spin the
For more information about wheels to free the vehicle when For information about using tire
carbon monoxide, see Engine stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Exhaust on page 9-30. See Rocking the Vehicle to Get It Chains on page 10-67.
Out later in this section.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
To save fuel, run the engine for only The Traction Control System (TCS) It Out
short periods as needed to warm can often help to free a stuck
the vehicle and then shut the engine vehicle. See Traction Control/ Turn the steering wheel left and
off and close the window most of Electronic Stability Control on right to clear the area around the
the way to save heat. Repeat this page 9-44. If TCS cannot free the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
until help arrives but only when you vehicle, see Rocking the Vehicle to vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel Drive
feel really uncomfortable from the Get it Out following. High. Turn the TCS off. Shift back
cold. Moving about to keep warm and forth between R (Reverse) and
also helps. a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Slowly spinning the wheels in Vehicle Load Limits

the forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could It is very important to know how
free the vehicle. If that does not get much weight the vehicle can
the vehicle out after a few tries, it carry. This weight is called the
might need to be towed out. See vehicle capacity weight and
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-83. includes the weight of all
Recovery hooks can be used, occupants, cargo, and all
if equipped. nonfactory-installed options.
Recovery Hooks Two labels on the vehicle may
show how much weight it was
{ Warning designed to carry, the Tire and
Never pull on recovery hooks

{ Caution Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
from the side. The hooks could Do not drive through standing
break and you and others could
be injured. When using recovery
water if it is deep enough to cover { Warning
the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
hooks, always pull the vehicle pipe. Deep water can damage the Do not load the vehicle any
from the front. axle and other vehicle parts. heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
If the vehicle has recovery hooks at (GVWR), or either the
the front of the vehicle, use them if maximum front or rear Gross
the vehicle is stuck off-road and Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
needs to be pulled some place to (Continued)
continue driving.
Tire and Loading Information The Tire and Loading

Warning (Continued) Label Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment
This can cause systems to tires (3) and the recommended
break and change the way the cold tire inflation pressures (4).
vehicle handles. This could For more information on tires
cause loss of control and a and inflation see Tires on
crash. Overloading can also page 10-46 and Tire Pressure
reduce stopping distance, on page 10-53.
damage the tires, and shorten
the life of the vehicle. There is also important loading
information on the vehicle
Certification/Tire label. It may
show the Gross Vehicle Weight
Label Example Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
A vehicle specific Tire and
the front and rear axles. See
Loading Information label is
Certification/Tire Label later in
attached to the center pillar
this section.
(B-pillar). The tire and loading
information label shows the
number of occupant seating
positions (1), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (2) in
kilograms and pounds.
Steps for Determining Correct the amount of available cargo

Load Limit and luggage load capacity is
1. Locate the statement "The 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
combined weight of = 650 lbs.)
occupants and cargo should 5. Determine the combined
never exceed XXX kg or weight of luggage and cargo
XXX lbs." on your vehicles being loaded on the vehicle.
placard. That weight may not safely
2. Determine the combined exceed the available cargo
weight of the driver and and luggage load capacity
passengers that will be riding calculated in Step 4.
Example 1
in your vehicle. 6. If your vehicle will be towing
3. Subtract the combined a trailer, load from your trailer 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
weight of the driver and will be transferred to your Example 1 = 453 kg
vehicle. Consult this manual (1,000 lbs)
passengers from XXX kg or 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
XXX lbs. to determine how this
reduces the available cargo 68 kg (150 lbs) 2 = 136 kg
4. The resulting figure equals and luggage load capacity of (300 lbs)
the available amount of cargo your vehicle. 3. Available Occupant and
and luggage load capacity. Cargo Weight = 317 kg
See Trailer Towing on page 9-77 for (700 lbs)
For example, if the "XXX" important information on towing a
amount equals 1400 lbs. and trailer, towing safety rules, and
there will be five 150 lb trailering tips.
passengers in your vehicle,
weight of the driver, passengers,

and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 2 Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for

Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs) (1,000 lbs)
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) 5 = 136 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) 5 = 453 kg A vehicle specific Certification/
(750 lbs) (1,000 lbs) Tire label is attached to the
3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight = center pillar (B-pillar). The label
113 kg (250 lbs) 0 kg (0 lbs) may shows the size of the
Refer to the vehicle's tire and vehicle's original tires and the
loading information label for inflation pressures needed to
specific information about the obtain the gross weight capacity
vehicle's capacity weight and of the vehicle. This is called
seating positions. The combined Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes The label will help decide how
the weight of the vehicle, all Warning (Continued) much cargo and installed
occupants, fuel, and cargo. (GVWR), or either the equipment the truck can carry.
The Certification/Tire label also maximum front or rear Gross Using heavier suspension
may show the maximum weights Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). components to get added
for the front and rear axles, This can cause systems to durability might not change the
called Gross Axle Weight Rating break and change the way the weight ratings. Ask your dealer
(GAWR). To find out the actual vehicle handles. This could to help load the vehicle the
loads on the front and rear cause loss of control and a right way.
axles, weigh the vehicle at a crash. Overloading can also
weigh station. Your dealer can reduce stopping distance, { Warning
help with this. Be sure to spread damage the tires, and shorten
your load equally on both sides the life of the vehicle. Things you put inside the
of the centerline. vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
The Certification/Tire label may turn, or in a crash.
also include information about { Caution
the Front Axle Reserve . Put things in the cargo
Capacity. Overloading the vehicle may area of the vehicle. Try to
cause damage. Repairs would not spread the weight evenly.
be covered by the vehicle
{ Warning warranty. Do not overload the
(Continued)
Do not load the vehicle any vehicle.

heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) Starting and Caution (Continued)

Operating
. Never stack heavier broken in. Hard stops with
things, like suitcases, new linings can mean
New Vehicle Break-In premature wear and earlier
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above replacement. Follow this
the tops of the seats. { Caution breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
. Do not leave an The vehicle does not need an linings.
unsecured child restraint elaborate break-in. But it will . Do not tow a trailer during
in the vehicle. perform better in the long run if
break-in. See Trailer Towing
you follow these guidelines:
. When you carry something on page 9-77 for the trailer
. Keep the vehicle speed at towing capabilities of the
inside the vehicle, secure 88 km/h (55 mph) or less for vehicle and more information.
it whenever you can. the first 805 km (500 mi).
Following break-in, engine speed
. Do not leave a seat folded . Do not drive at any one and load can be gradually
down unless you need to. constant speed, fast or slow, increased.
for the first 805 km (500 mi).
There is also important loading Do not make full-throttle
starts. Avoid downshifting to Adjustable Throttle and
information for off-road driving in brake or slow the vehicle.
this manual. See Loading Your Brake Pedal
. Avoid making hard stops for
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving If equipped, the position of the
under Off-Road Driving on the first 322 km (200 mi) or throttle and brake pedals can be
so. During this time the new changed.
page 9-5.
brake linings are not yet
(Continued)
No adjustment to the pedals can be Before you start driving, fully press Vehicles with Key Access have an
made when the vehicle is in the brake pedal to confirm the ignition switch with four different
R (Reverse) or while using cruise adjustment is right for you. While positions.
control. driving, make only small To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
adjustments. must be in ON/RUN or ACC/
The vehicle may have a memory ACCESSORY and the regular brake
function, which lets pedal settings pedal must be applied.
be saved and recalled. See Memory 1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/
Seats on page 3-7. OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK/
Ignition Positions (Key OFF to turn the engine off. Retained
Access) Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
active. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9-27.
This position locks the ignition and
steering wheel. It also locks the
The switch used to adjust the transmission on automatic
pedals is to the left of the steering transmission vehicles. The key can
wheel. be removed in LOCK/OFF.
Press the switch to the left to move The steering can bind with the
the pedals closer to your body. wheels turned off center. If this
Press the switch to the right to move happens, move the steering wheel
the pedals away. from right to left while turning the
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
does not work, then the vehicle
needs service.
Do not turn the engine off when the 4. Set the parking brake. See 2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
vehicle is moving. This will cause a Parking Brake on page 9-42. position lets things like the radio
loss of power assist in the brake and the windshield wipers operate
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
{ Warning while the engine is off. It also
unlocks the steering wheel. Use this
If the vehicle must be shut off in an Turning off the vehicle while position if the vehicle must be
emergency: moving may cause loss of power pushed or towed.
assist in the brake and steering 3 (ON/RUN): This position can be
1. Brake using a firm and steady systems and disable the airbags.
pressure. Do not pump the used to operate the electrical
While driving, only shut the accessories and to display some
brakes repeatedly. This may
vehicle off in an emergency. instrument cluster warning and
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force. indicator lights. This position can
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, also be used for service and
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). diagnostics, and to verify the proper
This can be done while the and must be shut off while driving,
turn the ignition to ACC/ operation of the malfunction
vehicle is moving. After shifting indicator lamp as may be required
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the ACCESSORY.
for emission inspection purposes.
brakes and steer the vehicle to a The switch stays in this position
safe location. { Caution when the engine is running. The
3. Come to a complete stop, shift transmission is also unlocked in this
Using a tool to force the key to
to P (Park), and turn the ignition position on automatic transmission
turn in the ignition could cause vehicles.
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with damage to the switch or break the
an automatic transmission, the key. Use the correct key, make If the key is left in the ACC/
shift lever must be in P (Park) to sure it is all the way in, and turn it ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
turn the ignition switch to the with the engine off, the battery could
only with your hand. If the key
LOCK/OFF position. be drained. The vehicle may not
cannot be turned by hand, see
your dealer. start if the battery is allowed to drain
for an extended period of time.
4 (START): This is the position that Vehicles with Keyless Access have If the vehicle is in P (Park), the
starts the engine. When the engine pushbutton starting. ignition will turn off, and Retained
starts, release the key. The ignition Pressing the button cycles it through Accessory Power (RAP) will remain
switch returns to ON/RUN for three modes: ACC/ACCESSORY, active. See Retained Accessory
driving. ON/RUN/START, and Stopping the Power (RAP) on page 9-27.
A warning tone will sound when the Engine/OFF. If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the
driver door is opened and the The transmitter must be in the ignition will return to ACC/
ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or vehicle for the system to operate. ACCESSORY and display the
LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the If the pushbutton start is not message SHIFT TO PARK in the
ignition. working, the vehicle may be near a Driver Information Center (DIC).
strong radio antenna signal causing See Transmission Messages on
Ignition Positions interference to the Keyless Access page 5-44. When the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park), the ignition
(Keyless Access) system. See Remote Keyless Entry
system will switch to OFF.
(RKE) System Operation (Key
Access) on page 2-5 or Remote Do not turn the engine off when the
Keyless Entry (RKE) System vehicle is moving. This will cause a
Operation (Keyless Access) on loss of power assist in the brake
page 2-8. and steering systems and disable
To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle the airbags.
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or The vehicle may have an electric
ON/RUN and the brake pedal must steering column lock. The lock is
be applied. activated when the vehicle is
Stopping the Engine/LOCK/ switched to OFF and either front
OFF (No Indicator Lights): When door is opened. A sound may be
the vehicle is stopped, press the heard as the lock actuates or
ENGINE START/STOP button once releases. The steering column lock
to turn the engine off. may not release with the wheels
turned off center. If this happens, 4. Set the parking brake. See The ignition will switch from ACC/
the vehicle may not start. Move the Parking Brake on page 9-42. ACCESSORY to OFF after
steering wheel from left to right five minutes to prevent battery
while attempting to start the vehicle.
If this does not work, the vehicle
{ Warning rundown.
ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator
needs service. Turning off the vehicle while Light): This mode is for driving and
If the vehicle must be shut off in an moving may cause loss of power starting. With the ignition off, and
emergency: assist in the brake and steering the brake pedal applied, pressing
systems and disable the airbags. the button once will place the
1. Brake using a firm and steady While driving, only shut the
pressure. Do not pump the ignition system in ON/RUN/START.
vehicle off in an emergency. Once engine cranking begins,
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring release the button. Engine cranking
increased brake pedal force. If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, will continue until the engine starts.
and must be shut off while driving, See Starting the Engine on
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). page 9-24. The ignition will then
This can be done while the press and hold the ENGINE START/
STOP button for longer than remain in ON/RUN.
vehicle is moving. After shifting
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the two seconds, or press twice in Service Only Mode
brakes and steer the vehicle to a five seconds.
This power mode is available for
safe location. ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber service and diagnostics, and to
3. Come to a complete stop, shift Indicator Light): This mode allows verify the proper operation of the
to P (Park), and turn the ignition some electrical accessories to be malfunction indicator lamp as may
to OFF. On vehicles with an used when the engine is off. be required for emission inspection
automatic transmission, the shift With the ignition off, pressing the purposes. With the vehicle off, and
lever must be in P (Park) to turn button one time without the brake the brake pedal not applied,
the ignition switch to the OFF pedal applied will place the ignition pressing and holding the button for
position. system in ACC/ACCESSORY. more than five seconds will place
the vehicle in Service Only Mode.
The instruments and audio systems When the low fuel warning lamp
will operate as they do in ON/RUN, { Caution is on and the FUEL LEVEL LOW
but the vehicle will not be able to be message is displayed in the
driven. The engine will not start in If you add electrical parts or Driver Information Center (DIC),
Service Only Mode. Press the accessories, you could change hold the ignition switch in the
button again to turn the vehicle off. the way the engine operates. Any START position to continue
resulting damage would not be engine cranking.
Starting the Engine covered by the vehicle warranty.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or

See Add-On Electrical Equipment
on page 9-89.
{ Caution
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
Cranking the engine for long
in any other position. To restart the
Starting Procedure (Key periods of time, by returning the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only. Access) ignition to the START position
immediately after cranking has
1. With your foot off the accelerator ended, can overheat and damage
{ Caution pedal, turn the ignition key to the cranking motor, and drain the
START. When the engine starts, battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the let go of the key. The idle speed
vehicle is moving. If you do, you between each try, to let the
will go down as the engine gets
could damage the transmission. cranking motor cool down.
warm. Do not race the engine
Shift to P (Park) only when the immediately after starting it.
vehicle is stopped. Operate the engine and 2. If the engine does not start after
transmission gently to allow the five to 10 seconds, especially
oil to warm up and lubricate all in very cold weather (below
moving parts. 18 C or 0 F), it could be
flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator Starting Procedure (Keyless

pedal all the way to the floor and Access) { Caution
holding it there while holding the
key in START for up to 1. With the Keyless Access Cranking the engine for long
15 seconds. Wait at least system, the RKE transmitter periods of time, by returning the
15 seconds between each try, to must be in the vehicle. Press the ignition to the START position
allow the cranking motor to cool ENGINE START/STOP button immediately after cranking has
down. When the engine starts, with the brake pedal applied. ended, can overheat and damage
let go of the key and accelerator. When the engine begins the cranking motor, and drain the
If the vehicle starts briefly but cranking, let go of the button. battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
then stops again, do the same The idle speed will go down as between each try, to let the
thing. This clears the extra the engine gets warm. Do not cranking motor cool down.
gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately
race the engine immediately after starting it. 2. If the engine does not start after
after starting it. Operate the
If the RKE transmitter is not in five to 10 seconds, especially in
engine and transmission gently
the vehicle, if there is very cold weather (below 18 C
until the oil warms up and
interference, or the RKE battery or 0 F), it could be flooded with
lubricates all moving parts.
is low, the Driver Information too much gasoline. Try pushing
Center (DIC) will display a the accelerator pedal all the way
message. See Key and Lock to the floor and holding it there
Messages on page 5-39. as you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button, for up to a
maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each
try, to allow the cranking motor
to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the button, and
the accelerator. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops To Use the Engine Coolant

again, do the same thing. This Heater Warning (Continued)
clears the extra gasoline from
the engine. Do not race the 1. Turn off the engine. by a ground fault detection
engine immediately after starting function. An ungrounded
2. Open the hood and unwrap the
it. Operate the engine and outlet could cause an electric
electrical cord. The cord is by
transmission gently until the oil shock.
the left front fender, next to the
warms up and lubricates all . Use a weatherproof,
engine compartment fuse block.
moving parts. heavy-duty, 15 amp-rated
Check the heater cord for
extension cord if needed.
damage. If it is damaged, do not
Engine Heater use it. See your dealer for a
Failure to use the
recommended extension cord
The engine coolant heater can replacement. Inspect the cord for
in good operating condition,
provide easier starting and better damage yearly.
or using a damaged heater or
fuel economy during engine 3. Plug the cord into a normal, extension cord, could make it
warm-up in cold weather conditions grounded 110-volt AC outlet. overheat and cause a fire,
at or below 18 C (0 F). Vehicles property damage, electric
with an engine heater should be
plugged in at least four hours before { Warning shock, and injury.
. Do not operate the vehicle
starting. There may be an internal Improper use of the heater cord
thermostat in the plug end of the with the heater cord
or an extension cord can damage permanently attached to the
cord, which will prevent engine
the cord and may result in
coolant heater operation at (Continued)
overheating and fire.
temperatures above 18 C (0 F).
. Plug the cord into a
three-prong electrical utility
receptacle that is protected
(Continued)
The length of time the heater should door is opened. The radio continues
Warning (Continued) remain plugged in depends on to work for up to 10 minutes or until
several factors. Ask a dealer in the the driver door is opened.
vehicle. Possible heater cord area where you will be parking the
and thermostat damage could
occur.
vehicle for the best advice on this. Shifting Into Park
. While in use, do not let the Retained Accessory { Warning
heater cord touch vehicle
parts or sharp edges. Never
Power (RAP)
It can be dangerous to get out of
close the hood on the The following vehicle accessories the vehicle if the shift lever is not
heater cord. can be used for up to 10 minutes
fully in P (Park) with the parking
. after the engine is turned off:
Before starting the vehicle, brake firmly set. The vehicle can
unplug the cord, reattach the . Audio System roll. If you have left the engine
cover to the plug, and . Power Windows running, the vehicle can move
securely fasten the cord. suddenly. You or others could be
Keep the cord away from any . OnStar System (if equipped) injured. To be sure the vehicle will
moving parts. . Sunroof (if equipped) not move, even when you are on
. Accessory Power Outlets. The fairly level ground, use the steps
4. Before starting the engine, be console and center seat outlets that follow. If the vehicle has a
sure to unplug and store the are RAP powered. four-wheel drive transfer case
cord as it was before to keep it with a N (Neutral) position, and
away from moving engine parts. These features work when the key the transfer case is in N (Neutral),
If you do not, it could be is in ON/RUN or ACC/
the vehicle will be free to roll,
damaged. ACCESSORY. Once the key is
even if the shift lever is in
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
the windows and sunroof continue P (Park). Be sure the transfer
to work up to 10 minutes until any (Continued)
Leaving the Vehicle with the If you have to leave the vehicle with
Warning (Continued) Engine Running the engine running, be sure the
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
case is in a drive gear. If towing a parking brake is firmly set before
trailer, see Driving Characteristics { Warning you leave it. After you move the shift
and Towing Tips on page 9-74. lever into P (Park), hold the regular
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running. brake pedal down. Then, see if you
1. Hold the brake pedal down, then The vehicle could move suddenly can move the shift lever away from
set the parking brake. if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) without first pulling it toward
you. If you can, it means that the
See Parking Brake on P (Park) with the parking brake
shift lever was not fully locked into
page 9-42. firmly set.
P (Park).
2. Move the shift lever into the If you have four-wheel drive and
P (Park) position by pulling the the transfer case is in N (Neutral), Torque Lock
shift lever toward you and the vehicle will be free to roll, If you are parking on a hill and you
moving it up as far as it will go. even if the shift lever is in do not shift the transmission into
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a P (Park). So be sure the transfer P (Park) properly, the weight of
drive gear not in N (Neutral). case is in a drive gear not in the vehicle may put too much force
N (Neutral). on the parking pawl in the
4. Turn the ignition key to transmission. You may find it difficult
LOCK/OFF. And, if you leave the vehicle with to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
the engine running, it could This is called torque lock. To
5. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle overheat and even catch fire. You prevent torque lock, set the parking
with the ignition key in your or others could be injured. Do not brake and then shift into P (Park)
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). leave the vehicle with the engine properly before you leave the driver
running unless you have to. seat. To find out how, see Shifting
Into Park on page 9-27.
When you are ready to drive, move The shift lock release is always Parking over Things
the shift lever out of P (Park) before functional except in the case of an
you release the parking brake. uncharged or low voltage (less than
That Burn
If torque lock does occur, you may 9 volt) battery.
need to have another vehicle push If the vehicle has an uncharged
{ Warning
yours a little uphill to take some of battery or a battery with low voltage, Things that can burn could touch
the pressure from the parking pawl try charging or jump starting the hot exhaust parts under the
in the transmission. You will then be battery. See Jump Starting - North vehicle and ignite. Do not park
able to pull the shift lever out of America on page 10-79. over papers, leaves, dry grass,
P (Park). To shift out of P (Park): or other things that can burn.
Shifting out of Park 1. Apply the brake pedal.
This vehicle is equipped with an 2. Move the shift lever to the Active Fuel Management
electronic shift lock release system. desired position.
Vehicles with V8 engines may have
The shift lock release is If you still are unable to shift out of Active Fuel Management. This
designed to: P (Park): system allows the engine to operate
. Prevent ignition key removal 1. Ease the pressure on the shift on either all or half of its cylinders,
unless the shift lever is in lever. depending on the driving conditions.
P (Park). When less power is required, such
2. While holding down the brake
. Prevent movement of the shift pedal, press the shift lever all as cruising at a constant vehicle
lever out of P (Park), unless the the way into P (Park). speed, the system will operate in
ignition is in ON/RUN and the the half cylinder mode, allowing the
3. Move the shift lever to the vehicle to achieve better fuel
regular brake pedal is applied.
desired position. economy. When greater power
If you are still having a problem demands are required, such as
shifting, then have the vehicle accelerating from a stop, passing,
serviced soon.
or merging onto a freeway, the Engine Exhaust

system will maintain full-cylinder Warning (Continued)
operation.
If the vehicle has an Active Fuel
{ Warning . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
Management indicator, see Driver Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
Information Center (DIC) (Base monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
Level) on page 5-29 or Driver seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) can cause unconsciousness and
on page 5-31 for more information If unusual fumes are detected or
even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
on using this display.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Running the Vehicle Automatic increase in the effort to shift out of

P (Park). See Torque Lock under
While Parked Transmission Shifting Into Park on page 9-27.
It is better not to park with the If equipped, there is an electronic
engine running. shift lever position indicator within { Warning
If the vehicle is left with the engine the instrument cluster. This display
running, follow the proper steps to comes on when the ignition key is It is dangerous to get out of the
be sure the vehicle will not move. turned to the ON/RUN position. vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
See Shifting Into Park on page 9-27 in P (Park) with the parking brake
There are several different positions firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
and Engine Exhaust on page 9-30. for the shift lever.
If parking on a hill and pulling a Do not leave the vehicle when the
trailer, see Driving Characteristics engine is running. If you have left
and Towing Tips on page 9-74. the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
See Range Selection Mode under
Manual Mode on page 9-34. move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
P (Park): This position locks the page 9-27 and Driving
rear wheels. It is the best position to Characteristics and Towing Tips
use when starting the engine on page 9-74.
because the vehicle cannot move
easily. When parked on a hill,
especially when the vehicle has a R (Reverse): Use this gear to
heavy load, you might notice an back up.
D (Drive): This position is for

{ Caution { Warning normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the Shifting into a drive gear while the power for passing, and you are:
vehicle is moving forward could engine is running at high speed is
. Going less than about 55 km/h
damage the transmission. The dangerous. Unless your foot is
repairs would not be covered by firmly on the brake pedal, the (35 mph), push the accelerator
the vehicle warranty. Shift to vehicle could move very rapidly. pedal about halfway down.
R (Reverse) only after the vehicle You could lose control and hit . Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
is stopped. people or objects. Do not shift more, push the accelerator all
into a drive gear while the engine the way down.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to is running at high speed. By doing this, the vehicle shifts
get out of snow, ice, or sand without down to the next gear and has
damaging the transmission, see If more power.
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-13. { Caution Use D (Drive) and Tow/Haul Mode
N (Neutral): In this position, the when towing a trailer, carrying a
engine does not connect with the Shifting out of P (Park) or heavy load, driving on steep hills,
wheels. To restart when you are N (Neutral) with the engine or driving off-road. Shift the
already moving, use N (Neutral) running at high speed may transmission to a lower gear
only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the damage the transmission. The selection if the transmission shifts
vehicle is being towed. repairs would not be covered by too often.
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the Downshifting the transmission in
engine is not running at high slippery road conditions could result
speed when shifting the vehicle. in skidding. See Skidding under
Loss of Control on page 9-5.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization vehicle is being used, such as with
feature that adjusts the transmission a heavy load or when the Caution (Continued)
shifting to the current driving temperature changes. During this
conditions in order to reduce rapid adaptive shift control process, may damage the transmission.
upshifts and downshifts. This shift shifting might feel different as the The repair will not be covered by
stabilization feature is designed to transmission determines the best the vehicle warranty. If you are
determine, before making an settings. stuck, do not spin the tires. When
upshift, if the engine is able to stopping on a hill, use the brakes
When temperatures are very cold, to hold the vehicle in place.
maintain vehicle speed by analyzing the transmission's gear shifting
things such as vehicle speed, could be delayed providing more
throttle position, and vehicle load. stable shifts until the engine warms Normal Mode Grade Braking
If the shift stabilization feature up. Shifts could be more noticeable
determines that a current vehicle If equipped with a gasoline engine
with a cold transmission. This
speed cannot be maintained, the and an automatic transmission,
difference in shifting is normal.
transmission does not upshift and Normal Mode Grade Braking is
instead holds the current gear. M (Manual Mode): This position enabled when the vehicle is started,
In some cases, this could appear to allows selection of a range of gears but is not enabled in Range
be a delayed shift, however the appropriate for current driving Selection Mode. It assists in
transmission is operating normally. conditions. If equipped, see Range maintaining desired vehicle speeds
Selection Mode under Manual when driving on downhill grades by
The transmission uses adaptive Mode on page 9-34. using the engine and transmission
shift controls. The adaptive shift
to slow the vehicle. The first time
control process continually
compares key shift parameters to { Caution the system engages for each
ignition key cycle, a DIC message
pre-programmed ideal shifts stored
Spinning the tires or holding the will be displayed. See Transmission
in the transmissions computer. The
vehicle in one place on a hill Messages on page 5-44.
transmission constantly makes
adjustments to improve vehicle using only the accelerator pedal
performance according to how the (Continued)
To disable or enable Normal Mode while driving downhill or towing a cannot be used until the plus/minus
Grade Braking within the current trailer by letting you select a desired button on the shift lever is used to
ignition key cycle, press and hold range of gears. change to the range.
the Tow/Haul button for To use this feature: In vehicles with gasoline engines,
five seconds. When the button is when the shift lever is moved from
released, the requested mode 1. Move the shift lever to
M (Manual Mode). D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), a
change is made. A DIC message downshift may occur. The gear that
displays. See Transmission 2. Press the plus/minus buttons on the transmission is operating in
Messages on page 5-44. the shift lever to select the when the shift lever is moved from
For other forms of grade braking, desired range of gears for D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode)
see Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-35 current driving conditions. determines if a downshift occurs.
and Cruise Control on page 9-48. When the shift lever is moved from See the following chart.
D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), a
Manual Mode number displays next to the M,
indicating the current transmission
Range Selection Mode range.
This number is the highest gear that
the transmission will command while
operating in M (Manual Mode).
All gears below that number are
available. As driving conditions
change, the transmission can
automatically shift to lower gears.
If equipped, Range Selection Mode For example, when 5 (Fifth) is
helps control the vehicle's selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)
transmission and vehicle speed gears are automatically shifted by
the transmission, but 6 (Sixth)
Gear before shifting from Tow/Haul Mode

6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode)
Range after shifting from
M4 M4 M3 M2 M2 M1
D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode)
Grade Braking is not available when Low Traction Mode

Range Selection Mode is active.
Low Traction Mode assists in
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-35.
vehicle acceleration when road
While using Range Selection Mode, conditions are slippery, such as with
cruise control and the Tow/Haul ice or snow. While the vehicle is at a
Mode can be used. stop, select M2 using Range
Selection Mode. This will limit
{ Caution torque to the wheels and help to
prevent the tires from spinning.
The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts the
transmission shift pattern to reduce
Spinning the tires or holding the shift cycling. This provides
vehicle in one place on a hill increased performance, vehicle
using only the accelerator pedal control, and enhanced transmission
may damage the transmission. and engine cooling when driving
The repair will not be covered by down steep hills or mountain
the vehicle warranty. If you are grades, towing, or hauling heavy
stuck, do not spin the tires. When loads.
stopping on a hill, use the brakes The selector button is on the end of
to hold the vehicle in place. the shift lever. Turn the Tow/Haul
Mode on and off by pressing the
button. When the Tow/Haul Mode is To disable or enable Tow/Haul Drive Systems
enabled, a light on the instrument Grade Braking within the current
cluster will come on. ignition key cycle, press and hold
the Tow/Haul button for Four-Wheel Drive
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
page 5-26 and Hill and Mountain five seconds. When the button is If equipped, four-wheel drive
Roads on page 9-11. released, the requested mode engages the front axle for extra
change is made. A DIC message is traction. Read the appropriate
Also see Tow/Haul Mode under displayed. See Transmission section for transfer case operation
Towing Equipment on page 9-82. Messages on page 5-44. before using.
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking See Towing Equipment on
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking is
page 9-82. { Caution
only enabled while the Tow/Haul For other forms of grade braking, Do not drive on clean, dry
Mode is selected and the vehicle is see Automatic Transmission on
not in the Range Selection Mode. page 9-31 and Cruise Control on pavement in 4 m and 4 n (if
See Tow/Haul Mode listed page 9-48. equipped) for an extended period
previously and Manual Mode on of time. These conditions may
page 9-34. Tow/Haul Mode Grade cause premature wear on the
Braking assists in maintaining vehicles powertrain.
desired vehicle speeds when driving
on downhill grades by using the Driving on clean, dry pavement in
engine and transmission to slow the four-wheel drive may:
vehicle.
. Cause a vibration to be felt in
the steering system.
. Cause tires to wear faster.
. Make the transfer case harder to
shift, and cause it to run noisier.
Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction ignition is turned on and one will
{ Warning Control and StabiliTrak off. See stay on. If the lights display
Traction Control/Electronic Stability momentarily when the ignition is in
Shifting the transfer case to ON/RUN, but none stay on, the
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle Control on page 9-44.
knob may have been turned while
to roll even if the transmission is Two Speed Automatic the vehicle was off. To see the
in P (Park). You or someone else Transfer Case indicator, turn the knob to another
could be seriously injured. Be position so that it matches the
sure to set the parking brake actual transfer case setting. If no
before placing the transfer case in lights display, take the vehicle to
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on your dealer for service. An indicator
page 9-42. light flashes while shifting the
transfer case and remains
illuminated when the shift is
complete.
{ Caution If the transfer case cannot make a
Extended high-speed operation in requested shift, it will return to the
last chosen setting. Turn the knob
4 n may damage or shorten the
back to the previous transfer case
life of the drivetrain. setting to see the indicator.
Use the transfer case knob next to The settings are:
Engagement noise and bump when the steering wheel to shift into and
N (Neutral): Use only when the
shifting between 4 n and 4 m or from out of four-wheel drive.
vehicle needs to be towed. See
N (Neutral), with the engine running, Indicator lights display which setting Recreational Vehicle Towing on
is normal. the transfer case is in. N (Neutral) is page 10-83 or Towing the Vehicle
indicated on the knob. The indicator on page 10-83.
lights will display briefly when the
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Use Shifting into 4 n will turn Traction To shift into 4 n:
for driving on most streets and Control and StabiliTrak off. See 1. The ignition must be in ON/RUN
highways. The front axle is not Traction Control/Electronic Stability and the vehicle must be stopped
engaged. This setting provides the Control on page 9-44. or moving less than 5 km/h
best fuel economy. (3 mph) with the transmission in
Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel N (Neutral). It is best for the
Drive): Use when road surface Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTO vehicle to be moving
traction conditions are variable. position at any speed, except from 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).
When driving in AUTO, the front 4 n. The indicator light will flash
axle is engaged, and the vehicle's 2. Turn the knob to 4 n. Wait for the
while shifting and will remain on
power is sent to the front and rear 4 n indicator light to stop flashing
when the shift is completed.
wheels automatically based on before shifting the transmission
driving conditions. This setting Shifting Into 2 m into gear.
provides slightly lower fuel economy
than 2 m. Turn the knob to 2 m at any speed, { Caution
except when shifting from 4 n. The
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use indicator light will flash while shifting Shifting the transmission into gear
this position when extra traction is and will remain on when the shift is before the requested mode
needed, such as when driving on completed. indicator light has stopped
snowy or icy roads, when flashing could damage the
off-roading, or when plowing snow. Shifting Into 4 n transfer case.
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This When 4 n is engaged, keep vehicle
setting engages the front axle and speed below 72 km/h (45 mph). If the transmission is in gear and/or
delivers extra torque. Choose 4 n moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),
when driving off-road in deep sand, the 4 n indicator light will flash for
deep mud, or deep snow, and while 30 seconds and not complete the
climbing or descending steep hills. shift. After 30 seconds the transfer
case will shift to 4 m. Turn the knob 4. Shift the transmission to

to 4 m to display the indicator. With
{ Caution N (Neutral).
the vehicle moving less than 5 km/h Shifting the transmission into gear 5. Shift the transfer case to 2 m.
(3 mph), and the transmission in before the requested mode
N (Neutral), attempt the shift again. 6. Turn the transfer case knob
indicator light has stopped clockwise to N (Neutral) until it
flashing could damage the stops and hold it there until the
Shifting Out of 4 n transfer case. N (Neutral) light starts blinking.
To shift: This will take at least
1. The vehicle must be stopped or If the transmission is in gear and/or 10 seconds. Then slowly release
moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph) moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the dial to the 4 n position. The
with the transmission in the 4 m, AUTO, or 2 m indicator light N (Neutral) light will come on
N (Neutral) and the ignition in will flash for 30 seconds but will not when the transfer case shift to
ON/RUN. It is best for the complete the shift. With the vehicle N (Neutral) is complete.
vehicle to be moving moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph),
1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). 7. With the engine running, verify
and the transmission in N (Neutral), that the transfer case is in
2. Turn the knob to 4 m, AUTO, or attempt the shift again. N (Neutral) by shifting the
2 m. Wait for the 4 m, AUTO, or Shifting Into N (Neutral) transmission to R (Reverse),
then shift the transmission to
2 m indicator light to stop flashing To shift: D (Drive). There should be no
before shifting the transmission 1. Park the vehicle on a level movement of the vehicle while
into gear. surface. shifting the transmission.
2. Set the parking brake and press 8. Turn the engine off, and the
and hold the brake pedal. See ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
Parking Brake on page 9-42.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the
ignition to ON/RUN.
9. Place the transmission shift Single Speed Automatic indicator, turn the knob to another
lever in P (Park). See Transfer Case position so that it matches the
Recreational Vehicle Towing on actual transfer case setting. If no
page 10-83. lights display, take the vehicle to
10. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. your dealer for service. An indicator
light flashes while shifting the
Shifting Out of N (Neutral) transfer case and remains
To shift: illuminated when the shift is
complete.
1. Set the parking brake and apply
the brake pedal. If the transfer case cannot make a
requested shift, it will return to the
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with last chosen setting. Turn the knob
the engine off. back to the previous transfer case
3. Shift the transmission to setting to see the indicator.
N (Neutral). The settings are:
4. Turn the transfer case knob to Use the transfer case knob next to
the steering wheel to shift into and 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Use
the desired setting.
out of four-wheel drive. for driving on most streets and
After the transfer case has highways. The front axle is not
shifted out of N (Neutral), the Indicator lights display which setting engaged. This setting provides the
N (Neutral) light will go out. the transfer case is in. The indicator best fuel economy.
lights will display briefly when the
5. Release the parking brake. ignition is turned on and one will AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel
6. Start the engine and shift the stay on. If the lights display Drive): Use when road surface
transmission to the desired gear. momentarily when the ignition is in traction conditions are variable.
ON/RUN, but none stay on, the When driving in AUTO, the front
knob may have been turned while axle is engaged, and the vehicle's
the vehicle was off. To see the power is sent to the front and rear
wheels automatically based on
driving conditions. This setting Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it
provides slightly lower fuel economy becomes necessary to slam on the
than 2 m. brakes and continue braking to
Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use System (ABS) computer senses the wheels are
this position when extra traction is slowing down. If one of the wheels
This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
needed, such as when driving on is about to stop rolling, the computer
electronic braking system that helps
snowy or icy roads, when will separately work the brakes at
prevent a braking skid.
off-roading, or when plowing snow. each wheel.
When the vehicle begins to drive
Shifting Into 4 m or AUTO ABS can change the brake pressure
away, ABS checks itself.
to each wheel, as required, faster
A momentary motor or clicking noise
Turn the knob to the 4 m or AUTO might be heard while this test is
than any driver could. This can help
position. This can be done at any you steer around the obstacle while
going on, and it might even be
speed. The indicator light will flash braking hard.
noticed that the brake pedal moves
while shifting. It will remain on when a little. This is normal. As the brakes are applied, the
the shift is completed. computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
Shifting Into 2 m braking pressure accordingly.
Turn the knob to the 2 m position. Remember: ABS does not change
This can be done at any speed. the time needed to get a foot up to
The indicator light will flash while the brake pedal or always decrease
shifting. It will remain on when the stopping distance. If you get too
shift is completed. If there is a problem with ABS, this close to the vehicle in front of you,
warning light stays on. See Antilock there will not be enough time to
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light apply the brakes if that vehicle
on page 5-25.
suddenly slows or stops. Always Parking Brake

leave enough room up ahead to { Caution
stop, even with ABS.
Driving with the parking brake on
Using ABS can overheat the brake system
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold and cause premature wear or
the brake pedal down firmly and let damage to brake system parts.
ABS work. You may hear the ABS Make sure that the parking brake
pump or motor operating and feel is fully released and the brake
the brake pedal pulsate. This is warning light is off before driving.
normal.
Braking in Emergencies To release the parking brake, hold
the regular brake pedal down, then
ABS allows you to steer and brake push down momentarily on the
at the same time. In many parking brake pedal until you feel
emergencies, steering can help Set the parking brake by holding the
the pedal release. Slowly pull your
more than even the very best regular brake pedal down, then
foot up off the parking brake pedal.
braking. pushing down the parking brake
If the parking brake is not released
pedal.
when you begin to drive, the brake
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will flash and a
system warning light will come on. chime will sound warning you that
See Brake System Warning Light on the parking brake is still on.
page 5-24.
If you are towing a trailer and are
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9-74.
Brake Assist Hill Start Assist (HSA) It will not activate if the vehicle is in
a drive gear and facing downhill or if
The Brake Assist feature is Vehicles with StabiliTrak have an the vehicle is facing uphill and in
designed to assist the driver in HSA feature, which may be useful R (Reverse). There may be
stopping or decreasing vehicle when the vehicle is stopped on a situations on minor hills (less than
speed in emergency driving grade. This feature is designed to 5% grade) with a loaded vehicle or
conditions. This feature uses the prevent the vehicle from rolling, while pulling a trailer where HSA
stability system hydraulic brake either forward or rearward, during may activate.
control module to supplement the vehicle drive off. After the driver
power brake system under completely stops and holds the
conditions where the driver has vehicle in a complete standstill on a
quickly and forcefully applied the grade, HSA will be automatically
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly activated. During the transition
stop or slow down the vehicle. The period between when the driver
stability system hydraulic brake releases the brake pedal and starts
control module increases brake to accelerate to drive off on a grade,
pressure at each corner of the HSA holds the braking pressure for
vehicle until the ABS activates. a maximum of two seconds to
Minor brake pedal pulsation or ensure that there is no rolling. The
pedal movement during this time is brakes will automatically release
normal and the driver should when the accelerator pedal is
continue to apply the brake pedal as applied within the two-second
the driving situation dictates. window. If the vehicle is equipped
The Brake Assist feature will with the Integrated Trailer Brake
automatically disengage when the Control (ITBC) system, HSA may
brake pedal is released or brake also apply the trailer brakes.
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Ride Control Systems vehicle wheel brakes to assist the

driver in keeping the vehicle on the
See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on
page 9-13 and Turning the
intended path. Trailer Sway Control Systems Off and On later in this
Traction Control/ (TSC) is also on automatically when section.
Electronic Stability the vehicle is started. See Trailer When the transfer case is in
Control Sway Control (TSC) on page 9-88. Four-Wheel Drive Low, the stability
If cruise control is being used and system is automatically disabled,
System Operation traction control or StabiliTrak begins the StabiliTrak OFF light comes on,
The vehicle has a Traction Control to limit wheel spin, cruise control will and the appropriate message will
System (TCS) and StabiliTrak, an disengage. Cruise control may be appear on the DIC. Both traction
electronic stability control system. turned back on when road control and StabiliTrak are
These systems help limit wheel spin conditions allow. automatically disabled in this
and assist the driver in maintaining Both systems come on condition.
control, especially on slippery road automatically when the vehicle is
conditions. started and begins to move. The
TCS activates if it senses that any systems may be heard or felt while
of the drive wheels are spinning or they are operating or while
beginning to lose traction. When this performing diagnostic checks. This
happens, TCS applies the brakes to is normal and does not mean there
the spinning wheels and reduces is a problem with the vehicle.
engine power to limit wheel spin. The indicator light for both systems
It is recommended to leave both
is in the instrument cluster. This
StabiliTrak activates when the systems on for normal driving
light will:
vehicle senses a difference between conditions, but it may be necessary
the intended path and the direction to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets . Flash when TCS is limiting
the vehicle is actually traveling. stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. wheel spin.
StabiliTrak selectively applies . Flash when StabiliTrak is
braking pressure to any one of the activated.

. Turn on and stay on when either Turning the Systems Off press and release the g button. The
system is not working. and On traction off light i displayed in the
If either system fails to turn on or to instrument cluster will turn off.
activate, a message displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), and If TCS is limiting wheel spin when
d comes on and stays on to the g button is pressed, the system
indicate that the system is inactive will not turn off until the wheels stop
and is not assisting the driver in spinning.
maintaining control. The vehicle is
safe to drive, but driving should be To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,
The button for TCS and StabiliTrak press and hold the g button until
adjusted accordingly. is on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel. the traction off light i and the
If d comes on and stays on:
StabiliTrak OFF light g come on
1. Stop the vehicle.
{ Caution and stay on in the instrument
cluster, then release. The
2. Turn the engine off and wait
15 seconds. Do not repeatedly brake or appropriate message will display in
accelerate heavily when TCS is the DIC. See Ride Control System
3. Start the engine.
off. The vehicle driveline could be Messages on page 5-42.
Drive the vehicle. If d comes on damaged. To turn TCS and StabiliTrak on
and stays on, the vehicle may need again, press and release the g
more time to diagnose the problem. To turn off only TCS, press and
If the condition persists, see your button. The traction off light i and
dealer. release the g button. The traction the StabiliTrak OFF light g in the
off light i displays in the instrument instrument cluster turn off.
cluster. The appropriate message
will display in the DIC. See Ride
Control System Messages on
page 5-42. To turn TCS on again,
StabiliTrak will automatically turn on Press 5 to enable or disable HDC. HDC will remain enabled between
if the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h Vehicle speed must be below 22 and 60 km/h (14 and 37 mph);
(35 mph). Traction control will 50 km/h (31 mph). however vehicle speed cannot be
remain off. set or maintained in this range.
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway It will automatically disable if the
Control (TSC) feature and a Hill vehicle speed is above 80 km/h
Start Assist (HSA) feature. See (50 mph) or above 60 km/h
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) on (37 mph) for at least 30 seconds. 5
page 9-88 or Hill Start Assist (HSA) must be pressed again to
on page 9-43. re-enable HDC.
Adding accessories can affect the The HDC light displays on the When enabled, if the vehicle is at a
vehicle performance. See instrument cluster when enabled. speed above 22 km/h (14 mph) and
Accessories and Modifications on HDC can maintain vehicle speeds less than 60 km/h (37 mph), a DIC
page 10-3. between 3 and 22 km/h (2 and message will display.
14 mph) on an incline greater than
Hill Descent or equal to a 10% grade. A blinking Magnetic Ride Control
Control (HDC) HDC light indicates the system is This vehicle may have a semi-active
actively applying the brakes to damping system called Magnetic
If equipped, HDC can be used when maintain vehicle speed. Ride Control. With this feature,
driving downhill. It sets and
When HDC is activated, the initial improved vehicle ride and handling
maintains vehicle speed while
descending a very steep incline in a HDC speed is set to the current is provided under a variety of
forward or reverse gear. driving speed. It can be increased or passenger and loading conditions.
decreased by applying the Magnetic Ride Control is fully
The HDC switch is to the left of the accelerator or brake pedal. This
instrument cluster. automatic and uses a computer
adjusted speed becomes the new controller to continuously monitor
set speed. vehicle speed, wheel to body
position, lift/dive, and steering
position of the vehicle. The Automatic Level Control You may hear the air compressor
controller then sends signals to operating when the height is being
each shock absorber to The Automatic Level Control (ALC) adjusted.
independently adjust the damping rear suspension is available on
light-duty vehicles and comes as a If a weight-distributing hitch is being
level to provide the optimum used, it is recommended to allow
vehicle ride. part of the Magnetic Ride Control
suspension, if equipped. ALC may the shocks to inflate, thereby
Magnetic Ride Control also interacts also be available as a stand alone leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting
with the Tow/Haul Mode that, when feature. the hitch.
activated, will provide additional
control of the shock absorbers. This This type of level control is fully
additional control results in better automatic and will provide a better
ride and handling characteristics leveled riding position as well as
when the vehicle is loaded or towing better handling under a variety of
a trailer. See Tow/Haul Mode passenger and loading conditions.
under Towing Equipment on An air compressor connected to the
page 9-82. rear shocks will raise or lower the
rear of the vehicle to maintain
Locking Rear Axle proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can turned to ON/RUN and will
give more traction on snow, mud, automatically adjust vehicle height
ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a thereafter. The system may exhaust
standard axle most of the time, but (lower vehicle height) for up to
when traction is low, this feature will 10 minutes after the ignition key has
allow the rear wheel with the most been turned off.
traction to move the vehicle.
Cruise Control For an explanation of how cruise

control interacts with the Range
Selection Mode, Tow/Haul Mode,
{ Warning and Grade Braking systems. See
Grade Braking under Tow/Haul
Cruise control can be dangerous Mode on page 9-35.
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. Do not use If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and the
cruise control on winding roads or system begins to limit wheel spin,
in heavy traffic. cruise control will automatically
disengage. See Traction Control/
Cruise control can be dangerous Electronic Stability Control on
on slippery roads. On such roads, page 9-44. If a collision alert occurs
fast changes in tire traction can when cruise control is activated,
cause excessive wheel slip, and cruise control is disengaged. See 5 (On/Off): Press to turn the
you could lose control. Do not use Forward Collision Alert (FCA) system on or off. A white indicator
cruise control on slippery roads. System on page 9-61. When road comes on in the instrument cluster
conditions allow the cruise control to when cruise is turned on.
be safely used again, it can be SET (Set/Coast): Press briefly to
With cruise control, a speed of turned back on.
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can set the speed and activate cruise
be maintained without keeping your control. If cruise control is already
foot on the accelerator. Cruise active, use to decrease vehicle
control does not work at speeds speed.
below about 40 km/h (25 mph). +RES (Resume/Accelerate): If
If the brakes are applied, the cruise there is a set speed in memory,
control disengages. press to resume that speed or press
and hold to accelerate. If cruise 4. Remove foot from the Increasing Speed While Using
control is already active, use to accelerator. Cruise Control
increase vehicle speed. The cruise control indicator on the If the cruise control system is
* (Cancel): Press to disengage instrument cluster turns green after already activated:
cruise control without erasing the cruise control has been set to the . Press and hold the +RES button
set speed from memory. desired speed. See Instrument on the steering wheel until the
Cluster on page 5-12. vehicle accelerates to the
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed desired speed, then release it.
If 5 is on when not in use, the SET
or +RES control could get pressed If the cruise control is set at a . To increase vehicle speed in
and go into cruise when not desired. desired speed and then the brakes small increments, briefly press
are applied or * is pressed, the +RES. For each press, the
Keep the cruise 5 button off when vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
cruise is not being used. cruise control is disengaged without
erasing the set speed from memory. (1 mph) faster.
The cruise control light on the The speedometer reading can be
instrument cluster will come on Once the vehicle speed reaches
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, displayed in either English or metric
green after the cruise control has units. See Instrument Cluster on
been set to the desired speed. briefly press the +RES button. The
vehicle returns to the previous set page 5-12. The increment value
1. Press 5 to turn the cruise speed. used depends on the units
displayed.
system on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release SET. The
desired set speed briefly
appears in the instrument
cluster.
Reducing Speed While Using override cruise control, briefly button for five seconds. A DIC
Cruise Control pressing the SET button will result message displays. See
If the cruise control system is in cruise control set to the current Transmission Messages on
already activated: vehicle speed. page 5-44.
. Press and hold the SET button Using Cruise Control on Hills For other forms of Grade Braking,
until the desired lower speed is see Automatic Transmission on
How well the cruise control works page 9-31 andTow/Haul Mode on
reached, then release it. on hills depends on the vehicle page 9-35.
. To slow down in small speed, the load, and the steepness
increments, briefly press SET. of the hills. When going up steep Ending Cruise Control
For each press, the vehicle goes hills, pressing the accelerator pedal There are four ways to end cruise
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. may be necessary to maintain control:
vehicle speed. When going
The speedometer reading can be downhill, Cruise Grade Braking . Step lightly on the brake pedal.
displayed in either English or metric helps maintain the driver selected
units. See Instrument Cluster on speed.
. Press *.
page 5-12. The increment value . Shift the transmission to
used depends on the units Cruise Grade Braking is enabled
when the vehicle is started and N (Neutral).
displayed.
cruise control is active. It is not . To turn off cruise control,
Passing Another Vehicle While enabled in Range Selection Mode. press 5.
Using Cruise Control It assists in maintaining driver
Use the accelerator pedal to selected speed when driving on Erasing Speed Memory
increase the vehicle speed. When downhill grades by using the engine The cruise control set speed is
you take your foot off the pedal, the and transmission to slow the
erased from memory when the 5
vehicle will slow down to the vehicle.
button is pressed, or if the ignition is
previous set cruise speed. While To disable and enable Cruise Grade turned off.
pressing the accelerator pedal or Braking for the current ignition key
shortly following the release to cycle, press and hold the Tow/Haul
Adaptive Cruise Control conditions allow ACC to be safely

used, the ACC can be turned { Warning
If equipped with Adaptive Cruise back on.
Control (ACC), it allows the driver to ACC will not detect or brake for
select the cruise control set speed ACC will not engage if the TCS or children, pedestrians, animals,
and following gap. Read this entire electronic stability control system is or other objects.
section before using this system. disabled.
Do not use ACC when:
The following gap is the following
time between your vehicle and a { Warning . On winding and hilly roads or
vehicle detected directly ahead in when the sensors are
your path, moving in the same ACC has limited braking ability blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
direction. If no vehicle is detected in and may not have time to slow The system may not detect a
your path, ACC works like regular the vehicle down enough to avoid vehicle ahead. Keep the
cruise control. ACC uses a radar a collision with another vehicle entire front of the vehicle
sensor. See Radio Frequency you are following. This can occur clean.
Statement on page 13-12. when vehicles suddenly slow or . Visibility is low, such as in
If a vehicle is detected in your path, stop ahead, or enter your lane. fog, rain, or snow conditions.
ACC can apply acceleration or Also see Alerting the Driver in ACC performance is limited
limited, moderate braking to this section. Complete attention is under these conditions.
maintain the selected following gap. always required while driving and . On slippery roads where fast
To disengage ACC, apply the brake. you should be ready to take changes in tire traction can
If ACC is controlling your vehicle action and apply the brakes. See cause excessive wheel slip.
speed when the traction control Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
system (TCS) or electronic stability
control system activates, the ACC
may automatically disengage. See
Traction Control/Electronic Stability
Control on page 9-44. When road
* (Cancel): Press to disengage 3. Press and release the SET

ACC without erasing the selected control on the steering wheel.
set speed. 4. Remove foot from the
3 (Follow Distance Gap): Press accelerator.
to select a following gap time (or After ACC is set, it may immediately
distance) setting for ACC of Far, apply the brakes if a vehicle ahead
Medium, or Near. is detected closer than the selected
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control following gap.
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, the cruise on/off control could
get pressed and cruise control could
become active when not desired.
5 (On/Off): Press to turn the Keep the cruise control off when
system on or off. The indicator turns cruise is not being used.
white on the instrument cluster
when ACC is turned on. Select the set speed desired for The ACC indicator displays on the
cruise. This is the vehicle speed Driver Information Center (DIC) in
SET (Set/Coast): Press briefly to when no vehicle is detected in the instrument cluster. When ACC is
set the speed and activate ACC. its path. active, the indicator turns green.
If cruise control is already active,
use to decrease vehicle speed. ACC will not set or resume at a Be mindful of speed limits,
speed less than 25 km/h (16 mph). surrounding traffic speeds, and
+RES (Resume/Accelerate):
To set ACC: weather conditions when selecting
Press briefly to resume the previous
the set speed.
set speed or hold to accelerate. 1. Press 5.
If ACC is already active, use to
increase vehicle speed. 2. Get up to the desired speed.
Resuming a Set Speed

. Press and hold +RES until the Reducing Speed While ACC is at a
desired set speed appears on Set Speed
If the ACC is set at a desired speed the display, then release it.
and then the brakes are applied, If ACC is already activated, do one
ACC is disengaged without erasing
. To increase vehicle speed in of the following:
the set speed from memory. small increments, briefly press
+RES. For each press, the
. Use the brake to get to the
To begin using ACC again, press vehicle goes to the next 1 km/h desired lower speed. Press
+RES on the steering wheel. The (1 mph) faster mark on the SET and release the
vehicle returns to the previous set speedometer. accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed. will now cruise at the lower
When it is determined that there is speed.
Increasing Speed While ACC is at no vehicle ahead or the vehicle
a Set Speed ahead is beyond the selected
. Press and hold SET until the
following gap, then the vehicle desired lower speed is reached,
If ACC is already activated, do one then release it.
of the following: speed will increase to the set speed.
The speedometer reading can be
. To decrease the vehicle speed in
. Use the accelerator to get to the small increments, briefly press
higher speed. Press SET . displayed in either English or metric
units. See Instrument Cluster on SET. For each press, the
Release the control and the vehicle speed goes to the next
accelerator pedal. The vehicle page 5-12. The increment value
used depends on the units 1 km/h (1 mph) slower mark on
will now cruise at the higher the speedometer.
speed. displayed.
The speedometer reading can be
When the accelerator pedal is displayed in either English or metric
pressed, ACC will not brake units. See Instrument Cluster on
because it is overridden. page 5-12. The increment value
A warning message will appear used depends on the units
on the Driver Information Center displayed.
(DIC). See Cruise Control
Messages on page 5-36.
Selecting the Follow Distance Gap range of selectable gaps may not be times. See Collision/Detection
When a slower moving vehicle is appropriate for all drivers and Systems under Vehicle
detected ahead within the selected driving conditions. Personalization on page 5-47.
following gap, ACC will adjust the Changing the gap setting See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.
vehicle's speed and attempt to automatically changes the alert
maintain the follow distance gap timing sensitivity (Far, Medium, Approaching and Following a
Vehicle
selected. or Near) for the Forward Collision
Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward
Press 3 on the steering wheel to Collision Alert (FCA) System on
adjust the following gap. When page 9-61.
pressed, the current gap setting
displays briefly on the instrument Alerting the Driver
cluster. Subsequent presses cycle
the 3 button through three
settings: Far, Medium, or Near. The The vehicle ahead symbol is in the
gap setting will be maintained until it instrument cluster.
is changed. The vehicle ahead symbol only
Since each gap setting corresponds displays when a vehicle is detected
to a following time (Far, Medium, in your vehicles path moving in the
or Near), the following distance will If ACC is engaged, driver action same direction.
vary based on vehicle speed. The may be required when ACC cannot
apply sufficient braking because of If this symbol is not displaying, ACC
faster the vehicle speed, the further will not respond to or brake to
back your vehicle will follow a approaching a vehicle too rapidly.
vehicles ahead.
vehicle detected ahead. Consider When this condition occurs, six red
traffic and weather conditions when lights will flash on the windshield, ACC automatically slows the vehicle
selecting the following gap. The and either eight beeps will sound down and adjusts vehicle speed to
from the front, or both sides of the follow the vehicle in front at the
Safety Alert Seat will pulse five selected follow gap. The vehicle
speed increases or decreases to A message will appear on the DIC

follow the vehicle in front of you, but Warning (Continued) indicating that cruise is disengaging.
will not exceed the set speed. It may The ACC active symbol will not be
apply limited braking, if necessary. when using ACC. Your complete
attention is always required while displayed when ACC is no longer
When braking is active, the brake active.
lights will come on. The automatic driving and you should be ready
braking may feel or sound different to take action and apply the ACC Override
than if the brakes were applied brakes.
If using the accelerator pedal while
manually. This is normal. ACC is active, a warning message
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving ACC Automatically Disengages in the DIC will indicate that
Objects ACC may automatically disengage automatic braking will not occur.
and you will need to manually apply See Vehicle Messages on
{ Warning the brakes to slow the vehicle when: page 5-34. ACC will resume
operation when the accelerator
. Your vehicle speed goes below pedal is not being pressed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
the minimum speed of 16 km/h
may not detect and react to (10 mph).
stopped or slow-moving vehicles { Warning
ahead of you. For example, the
. The sensors are blocked.
system may not brake for a The ACC will not automatically
. The Traction Control System
vehicle it has never detected (TCS) or electronic stability apply the brakes if your foot is
moving. This can occur in control system has activated or resting on the accelerator pedal.
stop-and-go traffic or when a been disabled. You could crash into a vehicle
vehicle suddenly appears due to ahead of you.
. No traffic or other objects are
a vehicle ahead changing lanes. being detected.
Your vehicle may not stop and
could cause a crash. Use caution
. There is a fault in the system.
(Continued)
Curves in the Road

Warning (Continued)
{ Warning attention in curves and be ready
On curves, ACC may not detect a to use the brakes if necessary.
vehicle ahead in your lane. You Select an appropriate speed while
could be startled if the vehicle driving in curves.
accelerates up to the set speed,
especially when following a ACC may operate differently in a
vehicle exiting or entering exit sharp curve. It may reduce the ACC may detect a vehicle that is
ramps. You could lose control of vehicle speed if the curve is too not in your lane and apply the
the vehicle or crash. Do not use sharp. brakes.
ACC while driving on an entrance ACC may occasionally provide an
or exit ramp. Always be ready to alert and/or braking that is
use the brakes if necessary. considered unnecessary. It could
respond to vehicles in different
lanes, signs, guardrails, and other
stationary objects when entering or
{ Warning exiting a curve. This is normal
operation. The vehicle does not
On curves, ACC may respond to need service.
a vehicle in another lane, or may
not have time to react to a vehicle When following a vehicle and
in your lane. You could crash into entering a curve, ACC may not
a vehicle ahead of you, or lose detect the vehicle ahead and
control of your vehicle. Give extra accelerate to the set speed. When
(Continued) this happens, the vehicle ahead
symbol will not appear.
Other Vehicle Lane Changes Do not use ACC when driving on Cleaning the Sensing System
steep hills or when towing a trailer. The radar sensor on the front of the
ACC will not detect a vehicle in the vehicle can become blocked by
lane while driving on steep hills. The snow, ice, dirt, or mud. This area
driver will often need to take over needs to be cleaned for ACC to
acceleration and braking on steep operate properly.
hills, especially when towing a
trailer. If the brakes are applied, the For cleaning instructions, see
ACC disengages. Washing the Vehicle under
Disengaging ACC
System operation may also be
ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead There are three ways to limited under snow, heavy rain,
until it is completely in the lane. The disengage ACC: or road spray conditions.
brakes may need to be manually . Step lightly on the brake pedal.
applied.
. Press *.
Do Not Use ACC on Hills and
When Towing a Trailer . Press 5.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory if 5 is pressed
or if the ignition is turned off.
Driver Assistance Warning (Continued)

Audible or Safety Alert Seat
Some driver assistance features
Systems alert the driver of obstacles by
This vehicle may have features that Under many conditions, these beeping. To change the volume of
work together to help avoid crashes systems will not: the warning chime, see Comfort
or reduce crash damage while . Detect children, pedestrians, and Convenience under Vehicle
driving, backing, and parking. Read bicyclists, or animals. Personalization on page 5-47.
this entire section before using If equipped with the Safety Alert
these systems. . Detect vehicles or objects
outside the area monitored by Seat, the driver seat cushion may
the system. provide a vibrating pulse alert
{ Warning instead of beeping. To change this,
. Work at all driving speeds. see Collision/Detection Systems
Do not rely on the Driver under Vehicle Personalization on
. Warn you or provide you with
Assistance Systems. These page 5-47.
enough time to avoid a crash.
systems do not replace the need
for paying attention and driving . Work under poor visibility or Assistance Systems for
safely. You may not hear or feel bad weather conditions.
alerts or warnings provided by
Parking or Backing
. Work if the detection sensor
these systems. Failure to use is not cleaned or is covered If equipped, the Rear Vision Camera
proper care when driving may by ice, snow, mud, or dirt. (RVC), Rear Parking Assist (RPA),
result in injury, death, or vehicle Front Parking Assist (FPA), and
Complete attention is always Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) may
damage. See Defensive Driving
required while driving, and you help the driver park or avoid objects.
on page 9-3.
should be ready to take action Always check around the vehicle
(Continued) and apply the brakes and/or steer when parking or backing.
the vehicle to avoid crashes.
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) 1. View Displayed by the

When the vehicle is shifted into Camera { Warning
R (Reverse), the RVC displays an The camera(s) do not display
image of the area behind the vehicle children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
in the center stack display. The crossing traffic, animals, or any
previous screen displays when the other object outside of the
vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) cameras field of view, below the
after a short delay. To return to the bumper, or under the vehicle.
previous screen sooner, press a
Shown distances may be different
button on the infotainment system,
from actual distances. Do not
shift into P (Park), or reach a vehicle
speed of 8 km/h (5 mph). The rear drive or park the vehicle using
vision camera is above the license 1. View Displayed by the only these camera(s). Always
plate. Camera check behind and around the
2. Corners of the Rear Bumper vehicle before driving. Failure to
use proper care may result in
Displayed images may be farther or injury, death, or vehicle damage.
closer than they appear. The area
displayed is limited and objects that
are close to either corner of the Parking Assist
bumper or under the bumper do not With RPA, and if equipped with FPA,
display. as the vehicle moves at speeds of
A warning triangle may display on less than 8 km/h (5 mph) the
the RVC screen to show that RPA sensors on the bumpers may detect
has detected an object. This triangle objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind and
changes from amber to red and 1.2 m (4 ft) in front of the vehicle
increases in size the closer the within a zone 25 cm (10 in) high off
object. the ground and below bumper level.
These detection distances may be the front or rear depending on

shorter during warmer or humid object location, or both sides of the
weather. Blocked sensors will not Safety Alert Seat will pulse five
detect objects and can also cause times. Beeps for FPA are higher
false detections. Keep the sensors pitched than for RPA.
clean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and
slush; and clean sensors after a car Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
wash in freezing temperatures. If equipped, when the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse), RCTA
{ Warning displays a red warning triangle with
a left or right pointing arrow on the
The parking assist system does RVC screen to warn of traffic
not detect children, pedestrians, coming from the left or right. This
The instrument cluster may have a system detects objects coming from
bicyclists, animals, or objects parking assist display with bars that
located below the bumper or that up to 20 m (65 ft) from the left or
show distance to object and object right side of the vehicle. When an
are too close or too far from the location information for RPA, and on
vehicle. It is not available at object is detected, either three
some vehicles, FPA. As the object beeps sound from the left or right or
speeds greater than 8 km/h gets closer, more bars light up and three Safety Alert Seat pulses occur
(5 mph). To prevent injury, death, the bars change color from yellow to on the left or right side, depending
or vehicle damage, even with amber to red. on the direction of the detected
parking assist, always check the vehicle.
When an object is first detected in
area around the vehicle and the rear, one beep will be heard
check all mirrors before moving Use caution while backing up when
from the rear, or both sides of the towing a trailer, as the RCTA
forward or backing. Safety Alert Seat will pulse two detection zones that extend out
times. When an object is very close from the back of the vehicle do not
(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear, move further back when a trailer is
or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front), towed.
a continuous beep will sound from
Turning the Features On or Off parking assist to work properly with Forward Collision Alert
a small item attached to the trailer
hitch. Turn off parking assist when
(FCA) System
towing a trailer. If equipped, the FCA system may
To turn the rear parking assist help to avoid or reduce the harm
symbols, guidance lines, or Rear caused by front-end crashes. When
Cross Traffic Alert on or off, see approaching a vehicle ahead too
Rear Camera under Vehicle quickly, FCA provides a red flashing
Personalization on page 5-47 alert on the windshield and rapidly
The X button to the left of the beeps or pulses the driver seat.
steering wheel is used to turn on or FCA also lights an amber visual
off the Front and Rear Parking Assistance Systems for alert if following another vehicle
Assist. The indicator light in the Driving much too closely.
button comes on when the features
are on and turns off when the If equipped, when driving the FCA detects vehicles within a
features have been disabled. vehicle in a forward gear, Forward distance of approximately 60 m
Collision Alert (FCA), Lane (197 ft) and operates at speeds
Front and Rear Parking Assist can Departure Warning (LDW), Side above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the
be turned off, on, or on with towbar Blind Zone Alert (SBZA), Lane vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control
through vehicle personalization. See Change Alert (LCA), and/or the (ACC), it can detect vehicles to
Parking Assist under Vehicle Active Emergency Braking System distances of approximately 110 m
Personalization on page 5-47. If the can help to avoid a crash or reduce (360 ft) and operates at all speeds.
parking assist is turned off through crash damage. See Adaptive Cruise Control on
vehicle personalization, the parking page 9-51.
assist button will be disabled. To
turn the parking assist on again,
select On in the vehicle
personalization menu. The On with
Towbar setting allows for the
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

{ Warning Warning (Continued)
FCA is a warning system and detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA
does not apply the brakes. When sensor is blocked by dirt, snow,
approaching a slower-moving or or ice, or if the windshield is
stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, damaged. It may also not detect a
or when following a vehicle too vehicle on winding or hilly roads,
closely, FCA may not provide a or in conditions that can limit
warning with enough time to help FCA warnings will not occur unless visibility such as fog, rain,
the FCA system detects a vehicle
avoid a crash. FCA does not warn or snow, or if the headlamps or
ahead. When a vehicle is detected,
of pedestrians, animals, signs, windshield are not cleaned or in
the vehicle ahead indicator will
guardrails, bridges, construction display green. Vehicles may not be proper condition. Keep the
barrels, or other objects. Be ready detected on curves, highway exit windshield, headlamps, and FCA
to take action and apply the ramps, or hills, due to poor visibility; sensors clean and in good repair.
brakes. For more information, see or if a vehicle ahead is partially
Defensive Driving on page 9-3. blocked by pedestrians or other Collision Alert
objects. FCA will not detect another
FCA can be disabled with the FCA vehicle ahead until it is completely
steering wheel control, or if your in the driving lane.
vehicle is equipped with Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC), through { Warning
vehicle personalization. See the
Auto Collision Preparation portion FCA does not provide a warning
of Collision/Detection Systems to help avoid a crash, unless it When your vehicle approaches
under Vehicle Personalization on detects a vehicle. FCA may not another detected vehicle too rapidly,
page 5-47. (Continued) the red FCA display will flash on the
windshield. Also, eight rapid
high-pitched beeps will sound from Near, or on some vehicles, Off. The vehicles, or shadows. These alerts
the front, or both sides of the Safety first button press shows the current are normal operation and the
Alert Seat will pulse five times. setting on the DIC. Additional button vehicle does not need service.
When this Collision Alert occurs, the presses will change this setting. The
brake system may prepare for driver chosen setting will remain until it is Cleaning the System
braking to occur more rapidly which changed and will affect the timing of If the FCA system does not seem to
can cause a brief, mild deceleration. both the Collision Alert and the operate properly, cleaning the
Continue to apply the brake pedal Tailgating Alert features. The timing outside of the windshield in front of
as needed. Cruise control may be of both alerts will vary based on the camera sensor behind the
disengaged when the Collision Alert vehicle speed. The faster the rearview mirror, and cleaning the
occurs. vehicle speed, the farther away the front of the vehicle where radar
alert will occur. Consider traffic and sensors are located, may correct
Tailgating Alert weather conditions when selecting the issue.
the alert timing. The range of
For cleaning instructions, see
selectable alert timing may not be
Washing the Vehicle under
appropriate for all drivers and
driving conditions.
System operation may also be
If your vehicle is equipped with
limited under snow, heavy rain,
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
or road spray conditions.
The vehicle-ahead indicator will changing the FCA timing setting
display amber when you are automatically changes the ACC
following a vehicle ahead much too following gap setting (Far, Medium, Active Emergency
closely. or Near). Braking System
Selecting the Alert Timing Unnecessary Alerts If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) it also has the Active
The Collision Alert control is on the FCA may provide unnecessary Emergency Braking System, which
steering wheel. Press [ / 3 to alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles includes Intelligent Brake
in other lanes, objects that are not Assist (IBA) and the Automatic
set the FCA timing to Far, Medium,
Collision Preparation (ACP) System.

These systems can provide a boost Warning (Continued) { Warning
to braking or automatically brake the
vehicle to help avoid or lessen the flow of traffic. If this occurs, take ACP is an emergency crash
severity of crashes when driving in a your foot off the brake pedal and preparation feature and is not
forward gear. then apply the brakes as needed. designed to avoid crashes. Do
not rely on ACP to brake the
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) vehicle.
Automatic Collision
IBA may activate when the brake Preparation (ACP) System ACP may not:
pedal is applied quickly by providing
a boost to braking based on the When driving in a forward gear . Respond to stopped vehicles,
speed of approach and distance to above 9 km/h (5 mph), ACP may pedestrians, or animals.
a vehicle ahead. help reduce crash damage by . Detect a vehicle ahead on
applying the brakes. It has a winding or hilly roads.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or detection range of approximately
pedal movement during this time is 60 m (197 ft). This front automatic
. Detect a stopped or
normal and the brake pedal should braking can only occur if a vehicle is slow-moving vehicle or other
continue to be applied as needed. detected. This is shown by the FCA object ahead.
IBA will automatically disengage vehicle ahead indicator being lit. . Detect a vehicle when
only when the brake pedal is See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) weather limits visibility, such
released. System on page 9-61. as in fog, rain, or snow. In
these situations, ACP sensor
{ Warning performance is limited.
IBA may increase vehicle braking (Continued)
in situations when it may not be
necessary. You could block the
(Continued)
Automatic Braking may slow the

Warning (Continued) vehicle to a complete stop to try to { Warning
avoid a potential crash. The vehicle
Complete attention is always will only hold at a stop briefly. A firm Using the Automatic Collision
required while driving, and you press of the accelerator pedal will Preparation System while towing
should be ready to take action also release Automatic Braking. a trailer could cause you to lose
and apply the brakes and/or steer control of the vehicle and crash.
the vehicle to avoid crashes. Turn the system off when towing
{ Warning a trailer.
Brake Preparation Automatic Braking may
automatically brake the vehicle Side Blind Zone
When quickly approaching a vehicle
suddenly in situations where it is
ahead, Brake Preparation reduces
unexpected and undesired. Alert (SBZA)
brake response time by having the
brake system prepared for driver It could respond to a turning If equipped, the SBZA system is a
braking to occur more rapidly. vehicle ahead, guardrails, signs, lane-changing aid that assists
and other non-moving objects. To drivers with avoiding crashes that
Automatic Braking override Automatic Braking, firmly occur with moving vehicles in the
If ACP detects it is about to crash press the accelerator pedal, if it is side blind zone (or spot) areas.
with the vehicle you are following safe to do so. When the vehicle is in a forward
that is moving or has come to a gear, the left or right side mirror
stop, and the brakes have not been display will light up if a moving
Automatic Braking can be disabled vehicle is detected in that blind
applied, it may automatically brake or reduced through vehicle
hard. This can help to reduce crash zone. If the turn signal is activated
personalization. See the Auto and a vehicle is also detected on
damage and it may even help to Collision Preparation portion of
avoid some very low speed crashes. the same side, the display will flash
Collision/Detection Systems under as an extra warning not to change
Vehicle Personalization on lanes. Since this system is part of
page 5-47.
the Lane Change Alert system, read approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
the entire Lane Change Alert Warning (Continued) and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. The
section before using this feature. Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
changing lanes may result in warning area starts at approximately
injury, death, or vehicle damage.
Lane Change Alert (LCA) Before making a lane change,
the middle of the vehicle and goes
back 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are also
If equipped, the LCA system is a always check mirrors, glance over warned of vehicles rapidly
lane-changing aid that assists your shoulder, and use the turn approaching from up to 70 m (230 ft)
drivers with avoiding lane change signals. behind the vehicle.
crashes that occur with moving
vehicles in the side blind zone (or How the System Works
spot) areas or with vehicles rapidly The LCA symbol lights up in the
approaching these areas from side mirrors when the system
behind. The LCA warning display
detects a moving vehicle in the next
will light up in the corresponding
lane over that is in the side blind
outside side mirror and will flash if zone or rapidly approaching that
the turn signal is on. zone from behind. A lit LCA symbol
indicates it may be unsafe to
{ Warning change lanes. Before making a lane
change, check the LCA display,
LCA does not alert the driver to check mirrors, glance over your
1. SBZA Detection Zone
vehicles outside of the system shoulder, and use the turn signals.
2. LCA Detection Zone
detection zones, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. It may not LCA Detection Zones
provide alerts when changing The LCA sensor covers a zone of
lanes under all driving conditions. approximately one lane over from
Failure to use proper care when both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m
(Continued) (11 ft). The height of the zone is
page 5-47. If LCA is disabled by the with the detection of vehicles. This
driver, the LCA mirror displays will is normal system operation; the
not light up. vehicle does not need service.
When the System Does Not LCA may not always alert the driver
Seem to Work Properly to vehicles in the next lane over,
especially in wet conditions or when
Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror The LCA system requires some driving on sharp curves. The system
Display Display driving for the system to calibrate to does not need to be serviced.
maximum performance. This The system may light up due to
When the vehicle is started, both calibration may occur more quickly if guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and
outside mirror LCA displays will the vehicle is driving on a straight other non-moving objects. This is
briefly come on to indicate the highway road with traffic and normal system operation; the
system is operating. When the roadside objects (e.g., guardrails, vehicle does not need service.
vehicle is in a forward gear, the left barriers).
or right side mirror display will light LCA may not operate when the LCA
up if a moving vehicle is detected in LCA displays may not come on sensors in the left or right corners of
the next lane over in that blind zone when passing a vehicle quickly, for the rear bumper are covered with
or rapidly approaching that zone. a stopped vehicle, or when towing a mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or in
If the turn signal is activated in the trailer. The LCA detection zones heavy rainstorms. For cleaning
same direction as a detected that extend back from the side of instructions, see "Washing the
vehicle, this display will flash as an the vehicle do not move further back Vehicle" under Exterior Care on
extra warning not to change lanes. when a trailer is towed. Use caution page 10-88. If the DIC still displays
while changing lanes when towing a the system unavailable message
LCA can be disabled through trailer. LCA may alert to objects after cleaning both sides of the
vehicle personalization using the attached to the vehicle, such as a vehicle toward the rear corners of
Side Blind Zone Alert option. See trailer, bicycle, or object extending the vehicle, see your dealer.
Collision/Detection Systems under out to either side of the vehicle.
Vehicle Personalization on Attached objects may also interfere
If the LCA displays do not light up

when vehicles are in the side blind { Warning Warning (Continued)
zone or rapidly approaching this
zone and the system is clean, the The LDW system does not steer marking. Always keep your
system may need service. Take the the vehicle. The LDW system attention on the road and
vehicle to your dealer. may not: maintain proper vehicle position
. Provide enough time to avoid within the lane, or vehicle
When LCA is disabled for any damage, injury, or death could
reason other than the driver turning a crash.
occur. Always keep the
it off, the Side Blind Zone Alert On . Detect lane markings under windshield, headlamps, and
option will not be available on the poor weather or visibility camera sensors clean and in
personalization menu. conditions. This can occur if good repair. Do not use LDW in
the windshield or headlamps
Radio Frequency Information bad weather conditions.
are blocked by dirt, snow,
See Radio Frequency Statement on or ice; if they are not in
page 13-12. proper condition; or if the sun How the System Works
shines directly into the
The LDW camera sensor is on the
Lane Departure camera.
windshield ahead of the rearview
Warning (LDW) . Detect road edges. mirror.
If equipped, LDW may help avoid . Detect lanes on winding or To turn LDW on and off, press @ to
crashes due to unintentional lane hilly roads. the left of the steering wheel. The
departures. It may provide an alert if If LDW only detects lane control indicator will light when LDW
the vehicle is crossing a lane is on.
markings on one side of the road,
without using a turn signal in that
it will only warn you when
direction. LDW uses a camera
sensor to detect the lane markings departing the lane on the side
at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or where it has detected a lane
greater. (Continued)
When the System Does Not Fuel

Seem to Work Properly
Use of the recommended fuel is an
The system may not detect lanes as important part of the proper
well when there are: maintenance of this vehicle. When
. Close vehicles ahead. driving in the U.S. and Canada, to
help keep the engine clean and
When LDW is on, @ is green if . Sudden lighting changes, such
maintain optimum vehicle
LDW is available to warn of a lane as when driving through tunnels.
performance, we recommend using
departure. If the vehicle crosses a . Banked roads. TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.
detected lane marking without using See www.toptiergas.com for a list of
If the LDW system is not functioning
the turn signal in that direction, @ TOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.
properly when lane markings are
changes to amber and flashes. clearly visible, cleaning the
Additionally, there will be three windshield may help.
beeps, or the driver seat will pulse
three times, on the right or left, LDW alerts may occur due to tar
depending on the lane departure marks, shadows, cracks in the road,
direction. temporary or construction lane
markings, or other road
imperfections. This is normal system
operation; the vehicle does not need
service. Turn LDW off if these
conditions continue.
If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap, available in some cities. If these The malfunction indicator lamp may
E85 or FlexFuel can be used in the gasolines comply with the turn on. If this occurs, see your
vehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel on previously described specification, dealer for service.
page 9-71. then they are acceptable to use.
Use regular unleaded gasoline However, E85 (85% ethanol) and California Fuel
other fuels containing more than
meeting ASTM specification D4814
15% ethanol must be used only in
Requirements
with a posted octane rating of 87 or
FlexFuel vehicles. If the vehicle is certified to meet
higher. Do not use gasoline with an
California Emissions Standards, it is
octane rating below 87, as it may
cause engine damage and will lower { Caution designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
fuel economy.
Do not use fuel containing the underhood emission control
Use of Seasonal Fuels methanol. It can corrode metal label. If this fuel is not available in
Use summer and winter fuels in the parts in the fuel system and also states adopting California Emissions
appropriate season. The fuels damage plastic and rubber parts. Standards, the vehicle will operate
industry automatically modifies the That damage would not be satisfactorily on fuels meeting
fuel for the appropriate season. covered under the vehicle federal specifications, but emission
If fuel is left in the vehicle tank for warranty. control system performance might
long periods of time, driving or be affected. The malfunction
starting could be affected. Drive the indicator lamp could turn on and the
Some gasolines, mainly high octane vehicle may not pass a smog-check
vehicle until the fuel is at one-half
racing gasolines, can contain an test. See Malfunction Indicator
tank or less, then refuel with the
octane-enhancing additive called Lamp on page 5-22. If this occurs,
current seasonal fuel.
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese return to your authorized dealer for
Prohibited Fuels tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use diagnosis. If it is determined that the
gasolines and/or fuel additives with condition is caused by the type of
Gasolines containing oxygenates
MMT as they can reduce spark plug fuel used, repairs may not be
such as ethers and ethanol, as well
life and affect emission control covered by the vehicle warranty.
as reformulated gasolines, are
system performance.
Fuels in Foreign gasoline additive recommended by The starting characteristics of E85

General Motors. It is available at or FlexFuel make it unsuitable for
Countries your dealer. use when temperatures fall below
If planning to drive in countries Do not use additives with E85 or 18 C (0 F). Use gasoline or add
outside the U.S. or Canada, the FlexFuel. gasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel.
proper fuel might be hard to find. Because E85 or FlexFuel has less
Check regional auto club or fuel
retail brand websites for availability
E85 or FlexFuel energy per liter (gallon) than
gasoline, the vehicle will need to be
in the country where driving. Never Vehicles with fuel caps marked as refilled more often. See Filling the
use leaded gasoline, fuel containing E85 or FlexFuel can use either Tank on page 9-72.
methanol, manganese, or any other unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
fuel not recommended. Costly containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
repairs caused by use of improper All other vehicles should use only { Caution
fuel would not be covered by the the unleaded gasoline as described
Some additives are not
vehicle warranty. in Fuel on page 9-69.
compatible with E85 or FlexFuel
The use of E85 or FlexFuel is and can harm the vehicle's fuel
Fuel Additives encouraged when the vehicle is system. Do not add anything to
To keep fuel systems clean, TOP designed to use it. E85 or FlexFuel E85 or FlexFuel. Damage caused
TIER Detergent Gasoline is is made from renewable sources. by additives would not be covered
recommended. See Fuel on Many fuel stations will not have an by the vehicle warranty.
page 9-69. 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is available. Those stations that do
not available, one bottle of Fuel have E85 should have a label
System Treatment PLUS added to indicating the FlexFuel ethanol
the fuel tank at every engine oil content. Do not use the fuel if the
change can help. Fuel System ethanol content is greater than 85%.
Treatment PLUS is the only
The fuel cap is behind a hinged fuel

{ Caution Warning (Continued) door on the driver side of the
vehicle. If the vehicle has E85 fuel
Do not use fuel containing . Keep sparks, flames, and capability, the fuel cap will be yellow
methanol. It can corrode metal smoking materials away and state that E85 or gasoline can
parts in the fuel system and also from fuel. be used. See E85 or FlexFuel on
damage plastic and rubber parts. . Do not leave the fuel pump page 9-71.
That damage would not be unattended.
covered under the vehicle . Do not use a cell phone while
warranty.
refueling.
. Do not reenter the vehicle
Filling the Tank while pumping fuel.
. Keep children away from the
{ Warning fuel pump and never let
children pump fuel.
Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn
violently and can cause injury or . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
death. cap is opened too quickly.
This spray can happen if the
. To help avoid injuries to you tank is nearly full, and is
and others, read and follow more likely in hot weather. To open the fuel door, push and
all the instructions on the fuel Open the fuel cap slowly and release the rearward center edge of
pump island. wait for any hiss noise to the door.
. Turn off the engine when stop, then unscrew the cap all To remove the fuel cap, turn it
refueling. the way. slowly counterclockwise. The fuel
(Continued) cap has a spring in it; if the cap is
released too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered more effort to turn the fuel cap on
fuel cap from the hook on the the last turn as you tighten it. Make { Caution
fuel door. sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if If a new fuel cap is needed, be
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not sure to get the right type of cap
top off or overfill the tank and wait a the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would from your dealer. The wrong type
few seconds after you have finished of fuel cap may not fit properly,
pumping before removing the allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction may cause the malfunction
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted indicator lamp to light, and could
surfaces as soon as possible. See Indicator Lamp on page 5-22.
damage the fuel tank and
Exterior Care on page 10-88. The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message
emissions system. See
displays if the fuel cap is not
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
{ Warning properly installed.
page 5-22.
Overfilling the fuel tank by more { Warning
than three clicks of a standard fill
nozzle may cause: If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
. Vehicle performance issues,
including engine stalling and nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
damage to the fuel system. shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
. Fuel spills. Leave the area immediately.
. Potential fuel fires.
When replacing the fuel cap, insert

the tether in its hole before
tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap
clockwise until it clicks. It will require
Filling a Portable Fuel Warning (Continued) Trailer Towing

Container
General Towing
. Place the nozzle inside the fill
{ Warning opening of the container Information
Filling a portable fuel container before dispensing fuel, and Only use towing equipment that has
while it is in the vehicle can cause keep it in contact with the fill been designed for the vehicle.
fuel vapors that can ignite either opening until filling is Contact your dealer or trailering
by static electricity or other complete. dealer for assistance with preparing
means. You or others could be the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read
. Fill the container no more the entire section before towing a
badly burned and the vehicle than 95% full to allow for trailer.
could be damaged. Always: expansion.
For towing a disabled vehicle, see
. Use approved fuel . Do not smoke, light matches, Towing the Vehicle on page 10-83.
containers. or use lighters while For towing the vehicle behind
. Remove the container from pumping fuel. another vehicle such as a motor
the vehicle, trunk, or pickup . Avoid using cell phones or home, see Recreational Vehicle
bed before filling. other electronic devices. Towing on page 10-83.
. Place the container on the
ground. Driving Characteristics
(Continued) and Towing Tips
Driving with a Trailer
When towing a trailer:
. Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply to
trailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during the Towing a trailer requires a certain
first 800 km (500 mi) to prevent { Warning amount of experience. The
damage to the engine, axle, combination you are driving is
or other parts. When towing a trailer, exhaust longer and not as responsive as the
gases may collect at the rear of vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
. Then during the first 800 km
the vehicle and enter if the the handling and braking of the rig
(500 mi) of trailer towing, do not
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most before setting out for the open road.
do not make starts at full throttle. window is open.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). When towing a trailer: parts and attachments, safety
Shift the transmission to a lower . Do not drive with the liftgate, chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
gear if the transmission shifts trunk/hatch, or rear-most tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has
too often under heavy loads and/ window open. electric brakes, start the
or hilly conditions. combination moving and then apply
. Fully open the air outlets on the trailer brake controller by hand
. Do not use Adaptive Cruise or under the instrument to be sure the brakes work.
Control when towing. panel.
During the trip, check occasionally
. Turn off Park Assist when . Also adjust the climate to be sure that the load is secure
towing. control system to a setting and the lamps and any trailer
. The Automatic Collision that brings in only outside air. brakes still work.
Preparation System should be See Climate Control
set to Off when towing. See Systems in the Index. Following Distance
Active Emergency Braking For more information about Stay at least twice as far behind the
System on page 9-63. Carbon Monoxide, see Engine vehicle ahead as you would when
Exhaust on page 9-30. driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Passing Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift

Caution (Continued) the transmission to a lower gear if
More passing distance is needed
the transmission shifts too often
when towing a trailer. The The vehicle could be damaged. under heavy loads and/or hilly
combination will not accelerate as Avoid making very sharp turns conditions.
quickly and is longer so it is while trailering.
necessary to go much farther When towing, use the Tow/Haul
beyond the passed vehicle before Mode to prevent damage to the
returning to the lane. When turning with a trailer, make engine or transmission. See Tow/
wider turns than normal. Do this so Haul Mode on page 9-35.
Backing Up the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, When towing at high altitude on
Hold the bottom of the steering steep uphill grades, consider the
wheel with one hand. To move the or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in following: Engine coolant will boil at
trailer to the left, move that hand to a lower temperature than at normal
the left. To move the trailer to the advance.
altitudes. If the engine is turned off
right, move your hand to the right. If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn immediately after towing at high
Always back up slowly and, out, the arrows on the instrument altitude on steep uphill grades, the
if possible, have someone cluster will still flash for turns. It is vehicle may show signs similar to
guide you. important to check occasionally to engine overheating. To avoid this,
be sure the trailer bulbs are still let the engine run while parked,
Making Turns working. preferably on level ground, with the
transmission in P (Park) for a few
{ Caution Driving on Grades
minutes before turning the engine
Reduce speed and shift to a lower off. If the overheat warning comes
Making very sharp turns while gear before starting down a long or on, see Engine Overheating on
trailering could cause the trailer to steep downgrade. If the page 10-19.
come in contact with the vehicle. transmission is not shifted down, the
(Continued) brakes might get hot and no longer
work well.
Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then lubricant, belts, cooling system, and
apply the parking brake and shift brake system. It is a good idea to
{ Warning into P (Park). inspect these before and during
the trip.
5. Release the brake pedal.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with Check periodically to see that all
the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
dangerous. If something goes 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
wrong, the rig could start to move.
2. Start the engine. Trailer Towing
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be 3. Shift into a gear. Do not tow a trailer during break-in.
damaged. When possible, always See New Vehicle Break-In on
4. Release the parking brake. page 9-19.
park the rig on a flat surface.
5. Let up on the brake pedal. Before towing a trailer, see
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is "Hands-Free Operation" under
If parking the rig on a hill: Liftgate on page 2-18.
clear of the chocks.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
7. Stop and have someone pick up
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
the wheels into the curb if facing and store the chocks. { Warning
downhill or into traffic if facing Maintenance when Trailer The driver can lose control when
uphill. Towing pulling a trailer if the correct
2. Have someone place chocks equipment is not used or the
The vehicle needs service more
under the trailer wheels. vehicle is not driven properly. For
often when pulling a trailer. See
example, if the trailer is too
3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-3. Things that are heavy, the brakes may not work
place, release the regular brakes
until the chocks absorb the load. especially important in trailer well or even at all. The driver
operation are automatic and passengers could be
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle (Continued)
To identify the trailering capacity of Weight of the Trailer

Warning (Continued) the vehicle, read the information in
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Weight of the Trailer following.
seriously injured. The vehicle may It depends on how the rig is used.
also be damaged; the resulting Trailering is different than just
Speed, altitude, road grades,
repairs would not be covered by driving the vehicle by itself.
outside temperature, and how much
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer Trailering means changes in
the vehicle is used to pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section handling, acceleration, braking,
are all important. It can depend on
have been followed. Ask your durability, and fuel economy.
any special equipment on the
Successful, safe trailering takes
dealer for advice and information vehicle, and the amount of tongue
correct equipment, and it has to be
about towing a trailer with the weight the vehicle can carry. See
used properly.
vehicle. Weight of the Trailer Tongue later
The following information has many in this section.
time-tested, important trailering tips
Trailer Weight Rating (TWR) is
and safety rules. Many of these are
{ Caution important for your safety and that of
calculated assuming the tow vehicle
has only the driver and all required
your passengers. So please read
Pulling a trailer improperly can trailering equipment. Weight of
this section carefully before pulling
damage the vehicle and result in additional optional equipment,
a trailer.
costly repairs not covered by the passengers, and cargo in the tow
vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer vehicle must be subtracted from the
correctly, follow the advice in this trailer weight rating.
section and see your dealer for Use the following chart to determine
important information about how much the vehicle can weigh,
towing a trailer with the vehicle. based upon the vehicle model and
options.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

1500 Series 2WD Short Wheelbase
5.3L V8 3.08 2 994 kg (6,600 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 3 901 kg (8,600 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
1500 Series 2WD Long Wheelbase
5.3L V8 3.08 2 812 kg (6,200 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 3 720 kg (8,200 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
1500 Series 4WD Short Wheelbase
5.3L V8 3.08 2 903 kg (6,400 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 3 810 kg (8,400 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
1500 Series 4WD Long Wheelbase
5.3L V8 3.08 2 722 kg (6,000 lb) 5 443 kg (12,000 lb)
5.3L V8 3.42 3 629 kg (8,000 lb) 6 350 kg (14,000 lb)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for trailering information or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer is
very important because it is also
part of the vehicle weight. The
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and
the people who will be riding in the
vehicle as well as trailer tongue
weight. Vehicle options, equipment,
passengers, and cargo in the
vehicle reduce the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry, Trailer tongue weight (1) should be
which will also reduce the trailer 10 % to 15 % of the loaded trailer
weight the vehicle can tow. See weight (2) up to the maximums for
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-14 vehicle series and hitch type.
for more information about the
vehicle's maximum load capacity.
Maximum Tongue Make sure not to exceed the GVWR

Vehicle Series Hitch Type Weight limit for the vehicle, or the RGAWR,
with the tow vehicle and trailer fully
1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lb) loaded for the trip including the
1500 Weight Distributing 453 kg (1,000 lb) weight of the trailer tongue. If using
a weight-distributing hitch, make
sure not to exceed the RGAWR
before applying the weight
Do not exceed the maximum proper. If they are not, adjustments distribution spring bars.
allowable tongue weight for the might be made by moving some
vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch items around in the trailer. Weight of the Trailering
extension that will position the hitch If a cargo carrier is used in the Combination
ball closest to the vehicle. This will trailer hitch receiver, choose a
help reduce the effect of trailer It is important that the combination
carrier that positions the load as of the tow vehicle and trailer does
tongue weight on the rear axle. close to the vehicle as possible. not exceed any of its weight
Trailer rating may be limited by the Make sure the total weight, ratings GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
vehicle's ability to carry tongue including the carrier, is no more than Trailer Weight Rating, or Tongue
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause half of the maximum allowable Weight. The only way to be sure it is
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR tongue weight for the vehicle or not exceeding any of these ratings
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or 227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less. is to weigh the tow vehicle and
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle trailer combination, fully loaded for
Weight Rating). See Total Weight Total Weight on the Vehicle's
the trip, getting individual weights
on the Vehicle's Tires following. Tires for each of these items.
After loading the trailer, weigh the Be sure the vehicle's tires are
trailer and then the tongue, inflated to the inflation pressures
separately, to see if the weights are found on the Certification label on
the center pillar or see Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-14.
Towing Equipment Weight-Distributing Hitch the trailer to help prevent the tongue
Adjustment from contacting the road if it
Hitches becomes separated from the hitch.
The correct hitch equipment helps Instructions about safety chains
maintain combination control. Most may be provided by the hitch
small-to-medium trailers can be manufacturer or by the trailer
towed with a weight-carrying hitch manufacturer. If the trailer being
which simply features a coupler towed weighs up to 2 271 kg
latched to the hitch ball. Larger (5,000 lb) with a factory-installed
trailers may require a step bumper, safety chains may be
weight-distributing hitch that uses attached to the attaching points on
spring bars to distribute the trailer the bumper, otherwise, safety
tongue weight among the two chains should be attached to holes
vehicle and trailer axles. See on the trailer hitch platform. Always
Weight of the Trailer Tongue in leave just enough slack so the
Trailer Towing on page 9-77 for combination can turn. Never allow
rating limits with various hitch types. 1. Body to Ground Distance safety chains to drag on the ground.
2. Front of Vehicle
Consider using sway controls with Trailer Brakes
any trailer. Ask a trailering When using a weight-distributing
hitch, the spring bars should be A loaded trailer that weighs more
professional about sway controls or than 900 kg (2,000 lb) needs to have
refer to the trailer manufacturer's adjusted so the distance (1) is the
same after coupling the trailer to the its own brake system that is
recommendations and instructions. adequate for the weight of the
tow vehicle and adjusting the hitch.
trailer. Be sure to read and follow
Safety Chains the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted, and
Always attach chains between the
maintained properly.
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of
Since the vehicle is equipped with This will boost the vehicle system Tow/Haul Mode
StabiliTrak, the trailer brakes cannot voltage and properly charge the
tap into the vehicle's hydraulic battery. If the trailer is too light for
system. Tow/Haul mode, turn on the
headlamps as a second way to
Trailer Wiring Harness boost the vehicle system and
The seven-pin trailer connector is charge the battery.
mounted in the bumper. This
connector can be plugged into a Electric Brake Control Wiring
seven-pin universal heavy-duty Provisions
trailer connector available through These wiring provisions are
your dealer. included with the vehicle as part of
The seven-wire harness contains the trailer wiring package. These
the following trailer circuits: provisions are for an electric brake
controller.
. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal Pressing this button at the end of
The harness should be installed by the shift lever turns on and off the
. Green/Violet: Right Stop/Turn your dealer or a qualified service Tow/Haul Mode.
Signal center.
. Brown: Taillamps
. White: Ground
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps
. Red/Green: Battery Feed
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
This indicator light on the instrument
If charging a remote (non-vehicle) cluster comes on when the Tow/
battery, press the Tow/Haul mode Haul Mode is on.
button at the end of the shift lever.
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul This symbol is on the Trailer Brake
when pulling a heavy trailer or a when lightly loaded or with no trailer Control Panel on vehicles with an
large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul at all will not cause damage. ITBC system. The power output to
Mode on page 9-35. However, there is no benefit to the the trailer brakes is based on the
Tow/Haul is designed to be most selection of Tow/Haul when the amount of brake pressure being
effective when the vehicle and vehicle is unloaded. Such a applied by the vehicles brake
trailer combined weight is at least selection when unloaded may result system, and on the type of trailer
75 percent of the vehicle's Gross in unpleasant engine and brakes detected. This available
Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). transmission driving characteristics power output to the trailer brakes
See Weight of the Trailer under and reduced fuel economy. Tow/ can be adjusted to a wide range of
Trailer Towing on page 9-77. Tow/ Haul is recommended only when trailering situations.
Haul is most useful under the pulling a heavy trailer or a large or The ITBC system is integrated with
following driving conditions: heavy load. the vehicles brake, antilock brake,
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a Integrated Trailer Brake and StabiliTrak systems. In trailering
large or heavy load through Control System conditions that cause the vehicles
rolling terrain. antilock brake or StabiliTrak
systems to activate, power sent to
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a the trailer's brakes will be
large or heavy load in automatically adjusted to minimize
stop-and-go traffic. trailer wheel lock-up. This does not
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a imply that the trailer has StabiliTrak.
large or heavy load in busy If the vehicles brake, antilock brake,
parking lots where improved low The vehicle may have an Integrated or StabiliTrak systems are not
speed control of the vehicle is Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system functioning properly, the ITBC
desired. for use with electric trailer brakes or system may not be fully functional
most electric-over-hydraulic trailer or may not function at all. Make sure
brakes.
all of these systems are fully Trailer Brake Control Panel along with the Trailer Brake Display
operational to ensure full Page on the DIC to adjust and
functionality of the ITBC system. display power output to the trailer
The ITBC system is powered brakes.
through the vehicle's electrical Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
system. Turning the ignition off will
also turn off the ITBC system. The The ITBC system displays
ITBC system is fully functional only messages in the Driver Information
when the ignition is in ON/RUN. Center (DIC).
The display page indicates Trailer
{ Warning Gain setting, power output to the
trailer brakes, trailer connection, and
Connecting a trailer that has an system operational status.
air brake system may result in To display the Trailer Brake Display
reduced or complete loss of trailer 1. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Page do any of the following:
braking. There may be an Lever . Scroll through the DIC menu
increase in stopping distance or 2. Trailer Gain Adjustment pages.
trailer instability which could Buttons
. Press a Trailer Gain button.
result in personal injury or The ITBC system has a control
damage to the vehicle, trailer, If the Trailer Brake Display Page
panel on the instrument panel to the is not currently displayed, press
or other property. Use the ITBC left of the steering column. The
system only with electric or a Trailer Gain button to recall the
control panel allows adjustment to current Trailer Gain setting.
electric over hydraulic trailer the amount of output, referred to as
brakes. Each press and release of the
Trailer Gain, available to the trailer gain buttons will then change the
brakes and allows manual Trailer Gain setting.
application of the trailer brakes. The
Trailer Brake Control Panel is used

. Activate the Manual Trailer . A trailer with electric brakes has The trailer's and the vehicle's brake
Brake apply lever. become disconnected (a lamps will come on when either
TRAILER GAIN: This setting can be CHECK TRAILER WIRING vehicle brakes or manual trailer
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either message will also display on brakes are applied.
a trailer connected or disconnected. the DIC).
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
To adjust the Trailer Gain, press one . There is a fault present in the
of the Trailer Gain adjustment wiring to the trailer brakes (a Trailer Gain should be set for a
buttons. Press and hold a gain CHECK TRAILER WIRING specific trailering condition and must
button to continuously adjust the message will also display on be adjusted any time vehicle
Trailer Gain. To turn the output to the DIC). loading, trailer loading, or road
the trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gain surface conditions change.
. The ITBC system is not working
setting to 0.0 (zero). due to a fault (a SERVICE
TRAILER OUTPUT: Displays any TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM { Warning
time a trailer with electric brakes is message will also display in
Trailer brakes that are
connected. Output to the trailer the DIC).
over-gained or under-gained may
brakes is based on the amount of
vehicle braking present and relative Manual Trailer Brake Apply not stop the vehicle and the trailer
to the Trailer Gain setting. Output is The Manual Trailer Brake Apply as intended and can result in a
displayed from 0 to 100% for each Lever is used to apply the trailers crash. Always follow the
gain setting. electric brakes independent of the instructions to set the Trailer Gain
vehicles brakes. Sliding the lever to for the proper trailer stopping
The Trailer Output will indicate - - - performance.
- - - on the Trailer Brake Display the left will apply only the trailer
Page whenever the following occur: brakes. Use this lever to adjust
Trailer Gain to properly adjust the
. No trailer is connected. power output to the trailer brakes.
. A trailer without electric brakes
is connected (no DIC message
displayed).
Use the following to adjust Trailer 3. Readjust Trailer Gain any time CHECK TRAILER WIRING: This
Gain for each towing condition: vehicle loading, trailer loading, message will display if:
1. Drive the vehicle with the trailer or road surface conditions . The ITBC system first
attached on a level road surface change or if trailer wheel lock-up determines connection to a
representative of the towing is noticed at any time while trailer with electric brakes and
condition and free of traffic at towing. then the trailer harness becomes
about 32 to 40 km/h (20 to Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages disconnected from the vehicle.
25 mph) and fully apply the If the disconnect occurs while
Manual Trailer Brake apply lever. In addition to displaying TRAILER
GAIN and OUTPUT through the the vehicle is stationary, this
Adjusting Trailer Gain at speeds DIC, trailer connection and ITBC message will automatically turn
lower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to system status are displayed on off in about 30 seconds. This
25 mph) may result in an the DIC. message will also turn off if it is
incorrect gain setting. acknowledged or if the trailer
TRAILER CONNECTED: This harness is reconnected.
2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, using the message will briefly display when a
Trailer Gain adjustment buttons, trailer with electric brakes is first If the disconnect occurs while
to just below the point of trailer connected to the vehicle. This the vehicle is moving, this
wheel lock-up, indicated by message will automatically turn off message will continue until the
trailer wheel squeal or tire in about 10 seconds. This message ignition is turned off. This
smoke when a trailer wheel can be acknowledged before it message will also turn off if it is
locks. automatically turns off. acknowledged or if the trailer
Trailer wheel lock-up may not harness is reconnected.
occur if towing a heavily loaded . There is an electrical fault in the
trailer. In this case, adjust the wiring to the trailer brakes. This
Trailer Gain to the highest message will continue as long
allowable setting for the towing as there is an electrical fault in
condition.
the trailer wiring. This message continues over multiple ignition Trailer Sway
will also turn off if it is cycles, there is a problem with the
acknowledged. ITBC system. Have the vehicle
Control (TSC)
To determine if the electrical fault is serviced. Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a
on the vehicle side or trailer side of If either the CHECK TRAILER TSC feature. Trailer sway is
the trailer wiring harness WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER unintended side-to-side motion of a
connection: BRAKE SYSTEM message displays trailer while being towed. If the
while driving, the ITBC system may vehicle is towing a trailer and the
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring TSC detects that sway is increasing,
harness from the vehicle. not be fully functional or may not
function at all. When traffic the vehicle brakes are selectively
2. Turn the ignition off. conditions allow, carefully pull the applied at each wheel, to help
vehicle over to the side of the road reduce excessive trailer sway.
3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the If the vehicle is equipped with the
ignition back to RUN. and turn the ignition off. Check the
wiring connection to the trailer and Integrated Trailer Brake Control
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING turn the ignition back on. If either of (ITBC) system, and the trailer has
message reappears, the these messages continues, either the electric actuated brake system,
electrical fault is on the the vehicle or trailer needs service. StabiliTrak may also apply the trailer
vehicle side. brakes.
A GM dealer may be able to
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING diagnose and repair problems with If TSC is enabled, the Traction
message only reappears when the trailer. However, any diagnosis Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak
connecting the trailer wiring and repair of the trailer is not warning light will flash on the
harness to the vehicle, the covered under the vehicle warranty. instrument cluster. Vehicle speed
electrical fault is on the Contact your trailer dealer for must be reduced. If trailer sway
trailer side. assistance with trailer repairs and continues, StabiliTrak can reduce
trailer warranty information. engine torque to help slow the
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE
vehicle. See Traction Control/
SYSTEM: This message will display
Electronic Stability Control on
when there is a problem with the
page 9-44.
ITBC system. If this message
{ Warning Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
Even if the vehicle is equipped
Add-Ons vehicle is not operating.
with TSC, trailer sway could result The vehicle has an airbag system.
in loss of control and the vehicle
Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything
could crash. If excessive trailer Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see
sway is detected, slow down to a Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
safe speed. Check the trailer and { Caution Vehicle on page 3-41 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
vehicle to help correct possible
Some electrical equipment can Vehicle on page 3-42.
causes. These could include an
improperly or overloaded trailer, damage the vehicle or cause
unrestrained cargo, improper components to not work and
trailer hitch configuration, would not be covered by the
excessive vehicle-trailer speed, vehicle warranty. Always check
or improperly inflated or incorrect with your dealer before adding
vehicle or trailer tires. See Towing electrical equipment.
Equipment on page 9-82 for
trailer ratings and hitch setup
recommendations.
Adding non-dealer accessories can

affect the vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10-3.
2 NOTES
Vehicle Care 10-1
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Vehicle Care Battery - North America . . . . 10-24
Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . 10-32
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
General Information Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-34
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-27 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-35
California Proposition Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-28
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Automatic Transmission Shift Electrical System
California Perchlorate Lock Control Function Electrical System
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Accessories and Ignition Transmission Lock Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Engine Compartment Fuse
Park Brake and P (Park) Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Vehicle Checks Instrument Panel Fuse
Doing Your Own Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29
Wiper Blade Block (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-30 (Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Engine Compartment Rear Compartment Fuse
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Headlamp Aiming Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Wheels and Tires
Automatic Transmission Bulb Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 High Intensity Discharge Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10-2 Vehicle Care
Tire Terminology and Jump Starting General Information

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Jump Starting - North
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 For service and parts needs, visit
Tire Pressure for High-Speed your dealer. You will receive
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Towing the Vehicle genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tire Pressure Monitor Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-83 and supported service people.
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Genuine GM parts have one of
Tire Pressure Monitor these marks:
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Appearance Care
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
When It Is Time for New
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-66
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 California Proposition
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-78 65 Warning
WARNING: Most motor vehicles,
including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State
Vehicle Care 10-3
of California to cause cancer and Accessories and GM Accessories are designed to

birth defects or other reproductive complement and function with other
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts
Modifications systems on the vehicle. See your
and systems, many fluids, and Adding non-dealer accessories or dealer to accessorize the vehicle
some component wear by-products making modifications to the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories
contain and/or emit these can affect vehicle performance and installed by a dealer technician.
chemicals. safety, including such things as Also, see Adding Equipment to the
See Battery - North America on airbags, braking, stability, ride and Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 10-24 and Jump Starting - handling, emissions systems, page 3-42.
North America on page 10-79. aerodynamics, durability, and
electronic systems like antilock
brakes, traction control, and stability
California Perchlorate control. These accessories or
Materials Requirements modifications could even cause
Certain types of automotive malfunction or damage not covered
applications, such as airbag by the vehicle warranty.
initiators, safety belt pretensioners, Damage to vehicle components
and lithium batteries contained in resulting from modifications or the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, installation or use of non-GM
may contain perchlorate materials. certified parts, including control
Special handling may be necessary. module or software modifications, is
For additional information, see not covered under the terms of the
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ vehicle warranty and may affect
perchlorate. remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service Keep a record with all parts receipts
work, use the proper service and list the mileage and the date of
manual. It tells you much more any service work performed. See
Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle Maintenance Records on
Service Work than this manual can. To order the page 11-14.
proper service manual, see Service
{ Warning Publications Ordering Information
on page 13-11.
{ Caution
It can be dangerous to work on This vehicle has an airbag system. Even small amounts of
your vehicle if you do not have Before attempting to do your own contamination can cause damage
the proper knowledge, service service work, see Servicing the to vehicle systems. Do not allow
manual, tools, or parts. Always Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on contaminants to contact the fluids,
follow owner manual procedures page 3-41. reservoir caps, or dipsticks.
and consult the service manual
for your vehicle before doing any
service work.
Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood Before closing the hood, be sure all

the filler caps are on properly. Then
To open the hood: bring the hood from full open to
within 15 cm (6 in) from the closed
position, pause, and push the front
center of the hood with a swift, firm
motion to fully close the hood.
1. Pull the handle with this symbol

on it. It is inside the vehicle
under the steering wheel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle to
find the secondary hood release.
The handle is under the front
edge of the hood near the
center. Push the handle to the
right and at the same time raise
the hood.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview

Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump 9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See

. Check the engine oil level
Starting - North America on Checking Engine Oil under regularly and maintain the
page 10-79. Engine Oil on page 10-7. proper oil level. See Checking
Engine Oil and When to Add
2. Battery - North America on 10. Windshield Washer Fluid Engine Oil in this section.
page 10-24. Reservoir. See Adding Washer
Fluid under Washer Fluid on
. Change the engine oil at the
3. Coolant Surge Tank and appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Pressure Cap. See Cooling page 10-21.
Life System on page 10-10.
System on page 10-15. 11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
Brake Fluid on page 10-23.
. Always dispose of engine oil
4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on properly. See What to Do with
page 10-14. 12. Engine Compartment Fuse Used Oil in this section.
5. Automatic Transmission Block on page 10-36.
Dipstick. See How to Check
Checking Engine Oil
Automatic Transmission Fluid Engine Oil If equipped, the ENGINE OIL LOW
under Automatic Transmission To ensure proper engine ADD OIL message displays when
Fluid on page 10-11. performance and long life, careful the engine oil level may be too low.
6. Remote Negative () Location attention must be paid to engine oil. See Engine Oil Messages on
(Out of View). See Jump Starting Following these simple, but page 5-38. Check the oil level
- North America on page 10-79. important steps will help protect before filling to the recommended
your investment: level. If the oil is not low and this
7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of message remains on, see your
View). See Cooling System on . Always use engine oil approved dealer.
page 10-15. to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See It is also a good idea to check the
8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See When Selecting the Right Engine Oil engine oil level at each fuel fill. In
to Add Engine Oil under Engine in this section. order to get an accurate reading,
Oil on page 10-7. the vehicle must be on level ground.
10-8 Vehicle Care
The engine oil dipstick handle is a When to Add Engine Oil

loop. See Engine Compartment Caution (Continued)
Overview on page 10-6 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick. have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e., the engine
Obtaining an accurate oil level has so much oil that the oil level
reading is essential: gets above the cross-hatched
1. If the engine has been running area that shows the proper
recently, turn off the engine and operating range, the engine could
allow several minutes for the oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched be damaged. You should drain
to drain back into the oil pan. area at the tip of the dipstick, add out the excess oil or limit driving
Checking the oil level too soon 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil of the vehicle and seek a service
after engine shutoff will not and then recheck the level. See professional to remove the
provide an accurate oil level Selecting the Right Engine Oil in excess amount of oil.
reading. this section for an explanation of
what kind of oil to use. For engine
See Engine Compartment Overview
{ Warning oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on on page 10-6 for the location of the
The engine oil dipstick handle page 12-2. engine oil fill cap.
may be hot; it could burn you. Add enough oil to put the level
Use a towel or glove to touch the { Caution somewhere in the proper operating
dipstick handle. range. Push the dipstick all the way
Do not add too much oil. Oil back in when through.
levels above or below the
2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it acceptable operating range
with a clean paper towel or cloth, shown on the dipstick are harmful
then push it back in all the way. to the engine. If you find that you
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level. (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-9
Selecting the Right Engine Oil Engine Oil Additives/Engine

Selecting the right engine oil
{ Caution Oil Flushes
depends on both the proper oil Failure to use the recommended Do not add anything to the oil. The
specification and viscosity grade. engine oil can result in engine recommended oils meeting the
See Recommended Fluids and damage not covered by the dexos1 specification are all that is
Lubricants on page 11-11. vehicle warranty. Check with your needed for good performance and
dealer or service provider on engine protection.
Specification
whether the oil is approved to the Engine oil system flushes are not
Ask for and use engine oils that dexos1 specification. recommended and could cause
meet the dexos1 specification.
engine damage not covered by the
Engine oils that have been vehicle warranty.
Viscosity Grade
approved by GM as meeting the
dexos1 specification are marked Use SAE 0W-20 viscosity grade What to Do with Used Oil
with the dexos1 approved logo. See engine oil. Used engine oil contains certain
www.gmdexos.com. When selecting an oil of the elements that can be unhealthy for
appropriate viscosity grade, always your skin and could even cause
select an oil of the correct cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
specification. See Specification your skin for very long. Clean your
earlier in this section for more skin and nails with soap and water,
information. or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
10-10 Vehicle Care
from the filter before disposal. Never Messages on page 5-38. Change How to Reset the Engine Oil
dispose of oil by putting it in the the oil as soon as possible within Life System
trash or pouring it on the ground, the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is
into sewers, or into streams or possible that, if driving under the Reset the system whenever the
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking best conditions, the oil life system engine oil is changed so that the
it to a place that collects used oil. might indicate that an oil change is system can calculate the next
not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil change. Always reset the
engine oil life to 100% after every oil
Engine Oil Life System engine oil and filter must be
change. It will not reset itself. To
changed at least once a year and,
When to Change Engine Oil at this time, the system must be reset the engine oil life system:
This vehicle has a computer system reset. For vehicles without the 1. Display the OIL LIFE
that indicates when to change the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON REMAINING on the DIC. If the
engine oil and filter. This is based message, an oil change is needed vehicle does not have DIC
on a combination of factors which when the OIL LIFE REMAINING buttons, the vehicle must be in
include engine revolutions, engine percentage is near 0%. Your dealer P (Park) to access this display.
temperature, and miles driven. has trained service people who will See Driver Information Center
Based on driving conditions, the perform this work and reset the (DIC) (Base Level) on page 5-29
mileage at which an oil change is system. It is also important to check or Driver Information Center
indicated can vary considerably. For the oil regularly over the course of (DIC) (Uplevel) on page 5-31.
the oil life system to work properly, an oil drain interval and keep it at
the proper level. 2. Press and hold V, or the trip
the system must be reset every time
odometer reset stem if the
the oil is changed. If the system is ever reset vehicle does not have DIC
On some vehicles, when the system accidentally, the oil must be buttons, for several seconds.
has calculated that oil life has been changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) The oil life will change to 100%.
diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE since the last oil change.
OIL SOON message comes on to Remember to reset the oil life
indicate that an oil change is system whenever the oil is changed.
necessary. See Engine Oil
Vehicle Care 10-11
The oil life system can also be reset Automatic Transmission Caution (Continued)
as follows:
Fluid
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with automatic transmission fluid listed
the engine off. When to Check and Change in Recommended Fluids and
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal
Automatic Transmission Fluid Lubricants on page 11-11.
slowly three times within It is usually not necessary to check
five seconds. the transmission fluid level. The only Change the fluid and filter at the
reason for fluid loss is a scheduled maintenance intervals
3. Display the OIL LIFE
transmission leak or overheated listed in Maintenance Schedule on
REMAINING on the DIC. If the
transmission. If a small leak is page 11-3. Be sure to use the
display shows 100%, the system
suspected, then use the following transmission fluid listed in
is reset.
checking procedures to check the Recommended Fluids and
If the vehicle has a CHANGE fluid level. However, if there is a Lubricants on page 11-11.
ENGINE OIL SOON message and it large leak, then it may be necessary
comes back on when the vehicle is to have the vehicle towed to a How to Check Automatic
started and/or the OIL LIFE dealer service department and have Transmission Fluid
REMAINING is near 0%, the engine it repaired before driving the vehicle
oil life system has not been reset.
Repeat the procedure.
further.
{ Caution
{ Caution Too much or too little fluid can
damage the transmission. Too
Use of the incorrect automatic much can mean that some of the
transmission fluid may damage fluid could come out and fall on
the vehicle, and the damage may hot engine parts or exhaust
not be covered by the vehicle system parts, starting a fire. Too
warranty. Always use the little fluid could cause the
10-12 Vehicle Care
Information Center (DIC). See Use this cold check procedure to

Caution (Continued) Driver Information Center (DIC) check fluid level when the
(Base Level) on page 5-29 or transmission temperature is
transmission to overheat. Be sure Driver Information Center (DIC) between 27C and 32C (80F and
to get an accurate reading if (Uplevel) on page 5-31. 90F).
checking the transmission fluid.
6. Using the transmission fluid
temperature reading, determine
Before checking the fluid level, and perform the appropriate
prepare the vehicle: check procedure. If the
1. Start the engine and park the transmission fluid temperature
vehicle on a level surface. Keep reading is not within the required
the engine running. temperature ranges, allow the
vehicle to cool, or operate the 1. Locate the transmission dipstick
2. Apply the parking brake and vehicle until the appropriate at the rear of the engine
place the shift lever in P (Park). transmission fluid temperature is compartment, on the passenger
3. With your foot on the brake reached. side of the vehicle.
pedal, move the shift lever See Engine Compartment
Cold Check Procedure
through each gear range, Overview on page 10-6.
pausing for about three seconds Use this procedure only as a
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out
in each range. Then, move the reference to determine if the
the dipstick and wipe it with a
shift lever back to P (Park). transmission has enough fluid to be
clean rag or paper towel.
operated safely until a hot check
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 3. Install the dipstick by pushing it
procedure can be made. The hot
800 rpm) for at least one minute. back in all the way; wait
check procedure is the most
Slowly release the brake pedal. three seconds, and then pull it
accurate method to check the fluid
5. Keep the engine running and level. Perform the hot check back out again.
check the transmission fluid procedure at the first opportunity.
temperature on the Driver
Vehicle Care 10-13
4. Check both sides of the dipstick 7. If the fluid level is in the 1. Locate the transmission dipstick
and read the lower level. Repeat acceptable range, push the at the rear of the engine
the check procedure to verify the dipstick back in all the way, then compartment, on the passenger
reading. flip the handle down to lock the side of the vehicle.
dipstick in place. See Engine Compartment
Hot Check Procedure Overview on page 10-6.
Use this procedure to check the 2. Flip the handle up, then pull out
transmission fluid level when the the dipstick and wipe it with a
transmission fluid temperature is clean rag or paper towel.
between 71C and 93C (160F and 3. Install the dipstick by pushing it
200F). back in all the way; wait
5. If the fluid level is below the
COLD check band, add only The hot check is the most accurate three seconds, and then pull it
enough fluid as necessary to method to check the fluid level. The back out again.
bring the level into the COLD hot check should be performed at 4. Check both sides of the dipstick
band. It does not take much the first opportunity in order to verify and read the lower level. Repeat
fluid, generally less than 0.5 L the cold check. The fluid level rises the check procedure to verify the
(1 pt). Do not overfill. as fluid temperature increases, so it reading.
is important to ensure the
6. Perform a hot check at the first transmission temperature is
opportunity after the within range.
transmission reaches a normal
operating temperature between
71C to 93C (160F to 200F).
10-14 Vehicle Care
5. Safe operating level is within the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter remains covered with dirt, a new
HOT cross hatch band on the filter is required. Never use
dipstick. If the fluid level is not See Engine Compartment Overview compressed air to clean the filter.
within the HOT band, and the on page 10-6 for the location of the
transmission temperature is engine air cleaner/filter. Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/
between 71C and 93C (160F Filter
When to Inspect the Engine Air
and 200F), add or drain fluid as
Cleaner/Filter
necessary to bring the level into
the HOT band. If the fluid level is Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
low, add only enough fluid to scheduled maintenance intervals
bring the level into the HOT and replace it at the first oil change
band. It does not take much after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
fluid, generally less than 0.5 L interval. See Maintenance Schedule
(1 pt). Do not overfill. on page 11-3. If driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each
6. If the fluid level is in the
engine oil change.
acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then How to Inspect the Engine Air
flip the handle down to lock the Cleaner/Filter
dipstick in place.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, 1. Screws (4)
Consistency of Readings remove the engine air cleaner/filter 2. Electrical Connector
Always check the fluid level at least from the vehicle by following 3. Air Duct Clamp
twice using the procedure described Steps 1-8. When the engine air
cleaner/filter is removed, lightly 1. Locate the air cleaner/filter
previously. Consistency (repeatable assembly. See Engine
readings) is important to maintaining shake it to release loose dust and
dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter Compartment Overview on
proper fluid level. If readings are still page 10-6.
inconsistent, contact the dealer.
Vehicle Care 10-15
2. Disconnect the outlet duct by

loosening the air duct clamp (3). { Warning
3. Disconnect the electrical Operating the engine with the air
connector (2) and the connector cleaner/filter off can cause you or
harness from the cover. others to be burned. The air
4. Remove the four screws (1) on cleaner not only cleans the air; it
top of the cover of the housing helps to stop flames if the engine
and lift up the cover. backfires. Use caution when
5. Remove the engine air cleaner/ working on the engine and do not
filter from the housing. Take care drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
to dislodge as little dirt as
possible.
1. Coolant Surge Tank
6. Clean the engine air cleaner/ { Caution 2. Coolant Surge Tank
filter sealing surfaces and the Pressure Cap
housing. If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt 3. Engine Electric
can easily get into the engine, Cooling Fan(s)
7. Inspect or replace the engine air
which could damage it. Always
cleaner/filter.
have the air cleaner/filter in place
8. Reverse Steps 2-4 to reinstall when you are driving.
{ Warning
the filter cover housing. An electric engine cooling fan can
Cooling System start even when the engine is not
running. To avoid injury, always
The cooling system allows the keep hands, clothing, and tools
engine to maintain the correct away from any engine
working temperature. cooling fan.
10-16 Vehicle Care
What to Use
{ Warning Caution (Continued)
Heater and radiator hoses, and vehicle warranty. Always use { Warning
other engine parts, can be very DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
Adding only plain water or some
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, in the vehicle.
other liquid to the cooling system
you can be burned.
can be dangerous. Plain water
Do not run the engine if there is a Engine Coolant and other liquids, can boil before
leak. If you run the engine, it the proper coolant mixture will.
could lose all coolant. That could The cooling system in the vehicle is
The coolant warning system is set
cause an engine fire, and you filled with DEX-COOL engine
for the proper coolant mixture.
coolant. This coolant is designed to
could be burned. Get any leak With plain water or the wrong
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
fixed before you drive the vehicle. mixture, the engine could get too
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first. hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
The following explains the cooling could catch fire and you or others
{ Caution system and how to check and add could be burned. Use a 50/
coolant when it is low. If there is a
Using coolant other than 50 mixture of clean, drinkable
problem with engine overheating,
DEX-COOL can cause water and DEX-COOL coolant.
see Engine Overheating on
premature engine, heater core, page 10-19.
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant could require
changing sooner. Any repairs
would not be covered by the
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-17
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Checking Coolant

drinkable water and DEX-COOL Caution (Continued)
The coolant surge tank is in the
coolant. If using this mixture,
mixture can freeze and crack engine compartment on the
nothing else needs to be added.
engine cooling parts. The repairs passenger side of the vehicle. See
This mixture:
would not be covered by the Engine Compartment Overview on
. Gives freezing protection down vehicle warranty. Use only the page 10-6.
to 37C (34F), outside proper mixture of engine coolant The vehicle must be on a level
temperature. for the cooling system. See surface when checking the coolant
. Gives boiling protection up to Recommended Fluids and level.
129C (265F), engine Lubricants on page 11-11. Check to see if coolant is visible in
temperature.
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
. Protects against rust and Never dispose of engine coolant by inside the coolant surge tank is
corrosion. putting it in the trash, or by pouring boiling, wait until it cools down. The
. Will not damage aluminum parts. it on the ground, or into sewers, coolant level should be at or above
streams, or bodies of water. the FULL COLD mark. If it is not,
. Helps keep the proper engine Have the coolant changed by an there may be a leak in the cooling
temperature. authorized service center, familiar system.
with legal requirements regarding If coolant is visible but the coolant
{ Caution used coolant disposal. This will help level is not at or above the FULL
protect the environment and your COLD mark, see How to Add
If improper coolant mixture, health. Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank,
inhibitors, or additives are used in
following.
the vehicle cooling system, the
engine could overheat and be
damaged. Too much water in the
(Continued)
10-18 Vehicle Care
{ Caution
This vehicle has a specific
coolant fill procedure. Failure to
follow this procedure could cause
the engine to overheat and be 1. Remove the coolant surge tank
severely damaged. pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no
{ Warning longer hot.
How to Add Coolant to the Steam and scalding liquids from a Turn the pressure cap slowly
Coolant Surge Tank hot cooling system can blow out counterclockwise about one full
and burn you badly. Never turn turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for
{ Warning the cap when the cooling system,
including the surge tank pressure
that to stop. A hiss means there
is still some pressure left.
You can be burned if you spill cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling 2. Keep turning the pressure cap
coolant on hot engine parts. system and surge tank pressure slowly, and remove it.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol cap to cool.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
and it will burn if the engine parts the proper mixture to the FULL
are hot enough. Do not spill If no coolant is visible in the surge COLD mark.
coolant on a hot engine. tank, add coolant.
Vehicle Care 10-19
4. With the coolant surge tank In addition, there are ENGINE

pressure cap off, start the { Caution OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,
engine and let it run until the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
engine coolant temperature If the pressure cap is not tightly ENGINE, and ENGINE POWER IS
gauge indicates approximately installed, coolant loss and REDUCED messages in the Driver
90C (195F). possible engine damage may Information Center (DIC). See
occur. Be sure the cap is properly Engine Cooling System Messages
By this time, the coolant level and tightly secured.
inside the coolant surge tank on page 5-37 and Engine Power
may be lower. If the level is Messages on page 5-38.
lower, add more of the proper Engine Overheating If the decision is made not to lift the
mixture to the coolant surge tank hood when this warning appears,
until the level reaches the FULL get service help right away.
COLD mark.
{ Caution
If the decision is made to lift the
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly. Running the engine without hood, make sure the vehicle is
coolant may cause damage or a parked on a level surface.
6. Verify coolant level after the
fire. Vehicle damage would not be
engine is shut off and the Check to see if the engine cooling
coolant is cold. If necessary, covered by the vehicle warranty. fan(s) are running. If the engine is
repeat coolant fill procedure overheating, the fans should be
Steps 16. The vehicle has several indicators running. If they are not, do not
to warn of engine overheating. continue to run the engine, and
have the vehicle serviced.
There is a coolant temperature
gauge in the vehicle's instrument
cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 5-18.
10-20 Vehicle Care
If Steam is Coming from the If No Steam is Coming from 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
Engine Compartment the Engine Compartment temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP necessary.
{ Warning ENGINE or the ENGINE
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE 3. When it is safe to do so, pull off
Steam from an overheated engine message, along with a low coolant the road, shift to P (Park) or
can burn you badly, even if you condition, can indicate a serious N (Neutral), and let the
just open the hood. Stay away problem. engine idle.
from the engine if you see or hear If the temperature overheat gauge is
steam coming from it. Just turn it If there is an engine overheat
warning, but no steam is seen or no longer in the overheat zone or an
off and get everyone away from overheat warning no longer
heard, the problem may not be too
the vehicle until it cools down. displays, the vehicle can be driven.
serious. Sometimes the engine can
Wait until there is no sign of get a little too hot when the vehicle: Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
steam or coolant before you open for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
the hood.
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day. vehicle distance from the vehicle in
If you keep driving when the
. Stops after high-speed driving. front. If the warning does not come
engine is overheated, the liquids back on, continue to drive normally
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
and have the cooling system
in it can catch fire. You or others . Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing checked for proper fill and function.
could be badly burned. Stop the on page 9-77.
engine if it overheats, and get out If the warning continues, pull over,
of the vehicle until the engine If the ENGINE OVERHEATED stop, and park the vehicle
is cool. STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE right away.
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
If there is still no sign of steam and
message appears with no sign of
the vehicle is equipped with an
steam, try this for a minute or so:
engine driven cooling fan, push
1. Turn the air conditioning off. down the accelerator until the
engine speed is about twice as fast
Vehicle Care 10-21
as normal idle speed for at least The fans will change to low speed displays, washer fluid will need to
five minutes while the vehicle is when additional cooling is no longer be added to the windshield washer
parked. If the warning is still there, required. fluid reservoir.
turn off the engine and get everyone The electric engine cooling fans
out of the vehicle until it cools down. may run after the engine has been
If there is no sign of steam, idle the turned. off. This is normal and no
engine for five minutes while service is required.
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it Washer Fluid
cools down.
What to Use Open the cap with the washer
Engine Fan When windshield washer fluid needs symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
to be added, be sure to read the the tank is full. See Engine
If the vehicle has electric cooling Compartment Overview on
fans, the fans may be heard manufacturer's instructions before
use. Use a fluid that has sufficient page 10-6 for reservoir location.
spinning at low speed during most
everyday driving. The fans may turn protection against freezing in an
off if no cooling is required. Under area where the temperature may fall { Caution
heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, below freezing. . Do not use washer fluid that
high outside temperatures, Adding Washer Fluid contains any type of water
or operation of the air conditioning repellent coating. This can
system, the fans may change to The vehicle has a low washer fluid
message on the DIC that comes on cause the wiper blades to
high speed and an increase in fan chatter or skip.
noise may be heard. This is normal when the washer fluid is low.
and indicates that the cooling The message is displayed for (Continued)
system is functioning properly. 15 seconds at the start of each
ignition cycle. When the WASHER
FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message
10-22 Vehicle Care
Caution (Continued)
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
Disc brake pads have built-in wear brakes are first applied or lightly
. Do not use engine coolant indicators that make a high-pitched applied. This does not mean
(antifreeze) in the windshield warning sound when the brake pads something is wrong with the brakes.
washer. It can damage the are worn and new pads are needed.
windshield washer system The sound can come and go or be Properly torqued wheel nuts are
and paint. heard all the time when the vehicle necessary to help prevent brake
is moving, except when applying the pulsation. When tires are rotated,
. Do not mix water with inspect brake pads for wear and
ready-to-use washer fluid. brake pedal firmly.
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
Water can cause the solution proper sequence to torque
to freeze and damage the { Warning specifications. See Capacities and
washer fluid tank and other Specifications on page 12-2.
parts of the washer system. The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will Brake pads should be replaced as
. When using concentrated complete sets.
not work well. That could lead to
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer instructions for a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel
adding water. warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced. See your dealer if the brake pedal
. Fill the washer fluid tank only does not return to normal height,
three-quarters full when it is or if there is a rapid increase in
very cold. This allows for fluid pedal travel. This could be a sign
expansion if freezing occurs, { Caution that brake service may be required.
which could damage the tank
if it is completely full. Continuing to drive with worn-out Replacing Brake System Parts
brake pads could result in costly Always replace brake system parts
brake repair. with new, approved replacement
parts. If this is not done, the brakes
may not work properly. The braking
Vehicle Care 10-23
performance expected can change

. A fluid leak in the brake When the brake fluid falls to a low
in many other ways if the wrong hydraulic system. Have the level, the brake warning light comes
replacement brake parts are brake hydraulic system fixed. on. See Brake System Warning
installed or parts are improperly With a leak, the brakes will not Light on page 5-24.
installed. work well.
Brake fluid absorbs water over time.
Always clean the brake fluid Replace brake fluid at the specified
Brake Fluid reservoir cap and the area around intervals to prevent increased
the cap before removing it. stopping distance. See Maintenance
Do not top off the brake fluid. Schedule on page 11-3.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. Checking Brake Fluid
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the
when new brake linings are brake fluid reservoir. See Engine
installed. Add or remove fluid, as Compartment Overview on
The brake master cylinder reservoir necessary, only when work is done page 10-6.
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See on the brake hydraulic system.
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10-6 for the location of the
reservoir.
{ Warning
There are only two reasons why the If too much brake fluid is added, it
brake fluid level in the reservoir may can spill on the engine and burn,
go down: if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
. Normal brake lining wear. When
the vehicle could be damaged.
new linings are installed, the
Add brake fluid only when work is
fluid level goes back up.
done on the brake hydraulic
system.
10-24 Vehicle Care
Refer to the replacement number

{ Warning shown on the original battery label
when a new battery is needed. See
The wrong or contaminated brake Engine Compartment Overview on
fluid could result in damage to the page 10-6 for battery location.
brake system. This could result in
the loss of braking leading to a
possible injury. Always use the
{ Warning
proper brake fluid. WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead
{ Caution compounds, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
The fluid level should be above
MIN. If it is not, have the brake If brake fluid is spilled on the cancer and birth defects or other
hydraulic system checked to see if vehicle's painted surfaces, the reproductive harm. Batteries also
there is a leak. paint finish can be damaged. contain other chemicals known to
Immediately wash off any painted the State of California to cause
After work is done on the brake
surface. cancer. WASH HANDS AFTER
hydraulic system, make sure the
level is above MIN but not over the HANDLING. See California
MAX mark. Proposition 65 Warning on
Battery - North America page 10-2.
What to Add The original equipment battery is
Use only GM approved DOT 3 maintenance free. Do not remove
brake fluid from a clean, sealed the cap and do not add fluid.
container. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11-11.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Vehicle Storage Four-Wheel Drive To get an accurate reading, the

vehicle should be on a level
{ Warning Transfer Case surface.
When to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of
Batteries have acid that can burn the fill plug (1) hole, located on the
you and gas that can explode. Refer to Maintenance Schedule on
transfer case, some lubricant will
You can be badly hurt if you are page 11-3 to determine when to
need to be added. Add enough
not careful. See Jump Starting - check the lubricant.
lubricant to raise the level to the
North America on page 10-79 for How to Check Lubricant bottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Use
tips on working around a battery care not to overtighten the plug.
without getting hurt.
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to Maintenance Schedule on
Infrequent Usage: Remove the page 11-3 to determine how often to
black, negative () cable from the change the lubricant.
battery to keep the battery from
running down. What to Use
Extended Storage: Remove the Refer to Recommended Fluids and
black, negative () cable from the Lubricants on page 11-11 to
battery or use a battery trickle determine what kind of lubricant
charger. to use.
Automatic Transfer Case
1. Fill Plug
2. Drain Plug
10-26 Vehicle Care
Front Axle 1. Fill Plug heard. A fluid loss could indicate a

2. Drain Plug problem. Have it inspected and
When to Check and Change repaired.
Lubricant
. When the differential is cold, add
enough lubricant to raise the All axle assemblies are filled by
It is not necessary to regularly level from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm volume of fluid during production.
check front axle fluid unless a leak (1/8 in) below the fill They are not filled to reach a certain
is suspected, or an unusual noise is plug (1) hole. level. When checking the fluid level
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a on any axle, variations in the
problem. Have it inspected and
. When the differential is at
readings can be caused by factory
repaired. operating temperature (warm),
fill differences between the minimum
add enough lubricant to raise the
How to Check Lubricant and the maximum fluid volume.
level to the bottom of the fill
Also, if a vehicle has just been
To get an accurate reading, the plug (1) hole.
driven before checking the fluid
vehicle should be on a level What to Use level, it may appear lower than
surface. normal because fluid has traveled
Refer to Recommended Fluids and
out along the axle tubes and has
Lubricants on page 11-11 to
not drained back to the sump area.
determine what kind of lubricant
Therefore, a reading taken
to use.
five minutes after the vehicle has
been driven will appear to have a
Rear Axle lower fluid level than a vehicle that
When to Check Lubricant has been stationary for an hour or
two. The rear axle assembly must
It is not necessary to regularly be supported on a flat, level surface
check rear axle fluid unless a leak is to get a true reading.
suspected or an unusual noise is
Vehicle Care 10-27
How to Check Lubricant Noise Control System 2. The use of the vehicle after such
device or element of design has
To get an accurate reading, the The following information relates to been removed or rendered
vehicle should be on a level compliance with federal noise inoperative by any person.
surface. emission standards for vehicles with
a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Among those acts presumed to
(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg constitute tampering are the acts
(10,000 lb). The noise control listed below.
system warranty is given in your Insulation:
warranty manual.
Removal of the noise shields or any
These standards apply only to underhood insulation.
vehicles sold in the United States.
Engine:
Federal law prohibits the following
acts or the causing thereof: Removal or rendering engine speed
governor, if the vehicle has one,
1. The removal or rendering inoperative so as to allow engine
inoperative by any person, speed to exceed manufacturer
other than for purposes of specifications.
The proper level is 1.0 mm to maintenance, repair or
19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in) below replacement, of any device or Fan and Drive:
the bottom of the fill hole, located on element of design incorporated . Removal of fan clutch, if the
the rear axle. Add only enough fluid into any new vehicle for the vehicle has one, or rendering
to reach the proper level. purpose of noise control, prior to clutch inoperative.
its sale or delivery to the ultimate
What to Use . Removal of the fan shroud, if the
purchaser or while it is in use; or
Refer to Recommended Fluids and vehicle has one.
Lubricants on page 11-11 to
determine what kind of lubricant
to use.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Air Intake: 2. Apply both the parking brake 1. Before starting this check, be
. Removal of the air cleaner and the regular brake. sure there is enough room
silencer. Do not use the accelerator around the vehicle. It should be
pedal, and be ready to turn off parked on a level surface.
. Modification of the air cleaner.
the engine immediately if it 2. Apply the parking brake. Be
Exhaust: starts. ready to apply the regular brake
. Removal of the muffler and/or 3. Try to start the engine in each immediately if the vehicle begins
resonator. gear. The vehicle should start to move.
. Removal of the exhaust pipes only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). 3. With the engine off, turn the
and exhaust pipe clamps. If the vehicle starts in any other ignition on, but do not start the
position, contact your dealer for engine. Without applying the
service. regular brake, try to move the
Starter Switch Check shift lever out of P (Park) with
Automatic Transmission normal effort. If the shift lever
{ Warning Shift Lock Control moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer for service.
When you are doing this Function Check
inspection, the vehicle could Ignition Transmission
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
{ Warning Lock Check
injured. When you are doing this If equipped with a key type ignition,
inspection, the vehicle could while parked and with the parking
move suddenly. If the vehicle brake set, try to turn the ignition to
1. Before starting this check, be
moves, you or others could be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
sure there is enough room
injured. position.
around the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-29

. The ignition should turn to Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Front Wiper Blade
LOCK/OFF only when the shift vehicle facing downhill. Keeping Replacement
lever is in P (Park). your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake. To replace the wiper blade
. The ignition key should come assembly:
out only in LOCK/OFF. . To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine 1. Pull the windshield wiper
Contact your dealer if service is assembly away from the
required. running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot windshield.
Park Brake and P (Park) pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Mechanism Check held by the parking brake only.
. To check the P (Park)
{ Warning mechanism's holding ability:
When you are doing this check, With the engine running, shift to
the vehicle could begin to move. P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
You or others could be injured
regular brake.
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front Contact your dealer if service is
of the vehicle in case it begins to required.
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle Wiper Blade Replacement 2. Lift up on the latch in the middle
begin to move. Windshield wiper blades should be of the wiper blade where the
inspected for wear or cracking. wiper arm attaches.
For the proper type and size, see
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11-13.
10-30 Vehicle Care
3. With the latch open, pull the Headlamp Aiming

wiper blade down toward the
windshield far enough to release Headlamp aim has been preset and
it from the J-hooked end of the should need no further adjustment.
wiper arm. If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,
4. Remove the wiper blade. the headlamp aim may be affected.
If adjustment to the headlamps is
Allowing the wiper blade arm to
necessary, see your dealer.
touch the windshield when no
wiper blade is installed could 2. Push the release lever (2) to
damage the windshield. Any disengage the hook and push
damage that occurs would not the wiper arm (1) out of the
be covered by the vehicle blade assembly (3).
warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade arm to touch the 3. Push the new blade assembly
windshield. securely in the wiper arm hook
until the release lever clicks into
5. Reverse Steps 13 for wiper place.
blade replacement.
4. Return the wiper arm and blade
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement assembly to the rest position on
To replace the rear wiper blade: the glass.
1. Pull the wiper blade assembly Glass Replacement
away from the backglass.
If the windshield or front side glass
The rear wiper blade will not lock must be replaced, see your dealer
in a vertical position so care
to determine the correct
should be used when pulling it replacement glass.
away from the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-31
Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge Headlamps

For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10-35. { Warning
For any bulb-changing procedure The high intensity discharge
not listed in this section, contact lighting system operates at a very
your dealer.
high voltage. If you try to service
any of the system components,
Halogen Bulbs you could be seriously injured.
Have your dealer or a qualified
{ Warning technician service them.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you After an HID headlamp bulb has Driver Side
drop or scratch the bulb. You or been replaced, the beam might be a
slightly different shade than it was 1. Low-Beam Headlamp
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions originally. This is normal. 2. High-Beam Headlamp
on the bulb package. 3. Turn Signal Lamp
LED Lighting
See your dealer for passenger side
This vehicle has several LED lamps. replacement.
For replacement of any LED lighting
assembly, contact your dealer. Headlamp
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10-5
10-32 Vehicle Care
2. Remove the headlamp bulb To replace the front fog lamp bulb: 6. Reinstall the new bulb socket
assembly cover by turning it 1. Locate the fog lamp under the into the headlamp assembly and
counterclockwise. front bumper. turn it clockwise to secure.
3. Turn the bulb socket 2. Disconnect the electrical
counterclockwise to remove it Taillamps, Turn Signal,
connector from the fog lamp bulb
from the headlamp assembly assembly by pressing the Stoplamps, and Back-Up
and pull it straight out. connector release. Lamps
4. Unplug the electrical connector 3. Turn the bulb counter clockwise
from the old bulb by releasing to remove it from the housing.
the clip on the bulb socket.
Fog Lamps Front Turn Signal Lamps

1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10-5
2. Reach in and access the bulb
socket from inside the engine
compartment.
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly
and pull it straight out. 1. Back-up Lamp
2. Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of the socket bulb The taillamp on this vehicle is an
socket. LED. For replacement, contact your
dealer.
5. Replace it with a new bulb.
Vehicle Care 10-33
To replace one of these bulbs: 6. Pull the bulb straight out from
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate the socket.
on page 2-18. 7. Press a new bulb into the
socket, insert it into the taillamp
assembly, and turn the bulb
socket clockwise until it clicks.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly
and tighten the screws.
9. Reinstall the taillamp cover by
snapping it into place.
3. Remove the two screws from the

taillamp assembly.
4. Pull the taillamp assembly
straight back to remove.
2. Remove the taillamp closeout 5. Turn the bulb socket
cover from the lamp assembly counterclockwise to remove it
by pulling rearward from the top from the taillamp assembly.
and bottom at the same time to
unfasten the snap tabs.
10-34 Vehicle Care
License Plate Lamp To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the lamp assembly (3)
toward the center of the vehicle.
2. Pull the lamp assembly down to
remove.
3. Turn the bulb socket (1)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the lamp assembly (3).
4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of
the bulb socket (1).
5. Push the replacement bulb
1. Bulb Socket straight into the bulb socket and
Passenger Side Shown, Driver 2. Bulb turn the bulb socket clockwise to
Side Similar 3. Lamp Assembly install it into the lamp assembly.
6. Push the lamp assembly back
into position until the release tab
locks into place.
Vehicle Care 10-35
Replacement Bulbs Electrical System Headlamp Wiring

Exterior Lamp Bulb An electrical overload may cause
Number Electrical System the lamps to go on and off, or in
Overload some cases to remain off. Have the
Back-up Lamp 921 headlamp wiring checked right away
Fog Lamp PSX26W The vehicle has fuses to protect if the lamps go on and off or
against an electrical system remain off.
Front Turn WY21W overload. Fuses also protect power
Signal Lamp devices in the vehicle. Windshield Wipers
High-Beam 9005 LL Replace a bad fuse with a new one If the wiper motor overheats due to
Headlamp (Base of the identical size and rating. heavy snow or ice, the windshield
and Uplevel) wipers will stop until the motor cools
If there is a problem on the road and and will then restart.
Low-Beam H11 LL a fuse needs to be replaced, there
Headlamp (Base) are some spare fuses and a fuse Although the circuit is protected
puller in the Instrument Panel Fuse from electrical overload, overload
License W5W due to heavy snow or ice may
Block. The same amperage fuse
Plate Lamp cause wiper linkage damage.
can also be borrowed. Choose
Stoplamp/Turn 7440 LL and some feature of the vehicle that is Always clear ice and heavy snow
Signal Lamp WY21W not needed to use and replace it as from the windshield before using the
soon as possible. windshield wipers.
For replacement bulbs not listed If the overload is caused by an
here, contact your dealer. electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Fuses Engine Compartment

Fuse Block
{ Caution
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by The engine compartment fuse block Spilling liquid on any electrical
fuses. This greatly reduces the is in the engine compartment, on component on the vehicle may
chance of fires caused by electrical the driver side of the vehicle. damage it. Always keep the
problems. covers on any electrical
Look at the silver-colored band component.
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure A fuse puller is available in the left
you replace a bad fuse with a new instrument panel fuse block.
one of the identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.
Lift the cover to access the fuse

block.
Vehicle Care 10-37

10-38 Vehicle Care
Item Usage Item Usage Item Usage

1 Electric running 24 Real time 41 Trailer park lamps
boards dampening 42 Right parking
2 Antilock brake 25 Fuel pump power lamps
system pump module 43 Left parking lamps
3 Interior BEC LT1 26 Spare/Battery 44 Upfitter 3
4 MBS passenger regulated voltage
control 45 Automatic level
5 Suspension control run, crank
leveling 28 Upfitter 2
47 Upfitter 4
compressor 29 Upfitter 2 relay
48 Upfitter 4 relay
6 4WD transfer case 30 Wiper
electronic control 49 Reverse lamps
31 TIM
10 Electric parking 51 Parking lamp relay
34 Back-up lamps
brake 59 Euro trailer
35 Antilock brake
13 Interior BEC LT2 system valve 60 Air conditioning
14 Rear BEC 1 control
36 Trailer brakes
17 MBS driver 63 Upfitter 1
37 Upfitter 3 relay
21 ALC exhaust 67 Trailer battery
39 Trailer stop, turn
solenoid right 69 RC upfitter 3 and 4
23 Integrated chassis 40 Trailer stop,
control module turn left
Vehicle Care 10-39
Item Usage Item Usage Item Usage

70 VBAT upfitter 90 Oxygen sensor B 104 Starter
3 and 4 91 Throttle control 107 Aero shutter
72 Upfitter 1 relay 92 Engine control 109 Police upfitter
74 Engine control module relay 112 Starter relay
module ignition 93 Horn 114 Front windshield
75 Miscellaneous 94 Fog lamps washer
ignition spare
95 High-beam 115 Rear window
76 Transmission headlamps washer
ignition
100 Oxygen sensor A 116 Cooling fan left
77 RC upfitter 1 and 2
101 Engine control 121 Right HID
78 VBAT upfitter module headlamp
1 and 2
102 Engine control 122 Left HID headlamp
83 Euro trailer RC module/ 123 Cooling fan right
84 Run, crank relay Transmission
87 Engine control module
88 Injector A odd 103 Auxiliary interior

heater
89 Injector B even
10-40 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel Fuse

Block (Left)
The left instrument panel fuse block

access door is on the driver side
edge of the instrument panel.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse
block.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays,
and features shown.
Vehicle Care 10-41
Number Usage Number Usage Number Usage

1 Not used 16 Discrete logic ignition 27 Data link connector/
2 Not used sensor Driver seat module
3 Not used 17 VPM 28 Passive entry/Passive

18 Mirror window module start/Heater,
4 Accessory power ventilation and air
outlet 1 19 Body control module 1 conditioning battery
5 Retained accessory 20 Front bolster (if 29 Content theft
power/Accessory equipped)
30 Not used
6 APO/BATT 21 Not used
31 Not used
7 Universal garage door 22 Not used
opener/Inside rear 32 Not used
23 Not used
view mirror 33 SEO/Automatic level
24 Heater, ventilation and control
8 SEO retained air conditioning
accessory power ignition/Heater, 34 Park enable electric
9 Not used ventilation and air adjustable pedal (if
conditioning auxiliary equipped)
10 Body control module 3
25 Instrument cluster 35 Not used
ignition/Sensing 36 Miscellaneous R/C
12 Steering wheel diagnostic module
controls backlighting 37 Heated steering wheel
ignition
13 Not used 38 Steering column lock
26 Tilt column/SEO, tilt 2 (if equipped)
14 Not used column lock 1/SEO
15 Not used
10-42 Vehicle Care
Number Usage Number Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

39 Instrument cluster 50 Accessory power Block (Right)
battery outlet 2
40 Not used 51 Not used
41 Not used 52 Retained accessory
42 Euro trailer (if power/Accessory
equipped) relay
43 Left doors 53 Run, crank relay
44 Driver power seat 54 Not used
45 Not used 55 Not used
46 Right heated, 56 Not used

cooled seat
47 Left heated, The right instrument panel fuse
cooled seat block access door is on the
48 Not used passenger side edge of the
instrument panel.
49 Not used
Pull off the cover to access the fuse
block.
Vehicle Care 10-43
Number Usage
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 Accessory power
outlet 4
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Glove box
9 Not used
10 Not used
11 Not used
12 Steering wheel
controls
14 Not used
15 Not used
16 Not used
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, 17 Not used
and features shown.
10-44 Vehicle Care
Number Usage Number Usage Number Usage

18 Not used 33 Not used 50 Accessory power
19 Body control module 4 34 Not used outlet 3
20 Rear seat 35 Not used 51 Not used

entertainment 36 SEO B2 52 Retained accessory
21 Sunroof power/Accessory
37 SEO relay
22 Not used 38 Body control module 2 53 Not used
23 Not used 39 A/C Inverter 54 Not used
24 Not used 40 Not used 55 Not used
25 Not used 41 Not used 56 Not used
26 Info/Airbag 42 Not used
27 Spare/RF WDW 43 Not used
RN SW
44 Right door window
28 Obstacle motor
detection/USB
45 Front blower
29 Radio
30 Not used
31 Not used
48 Amplifier
32 Not used
49 Right front seat
Vehicle Care 10-45
Rear Compartment Fuse ISO Mini Usage

Block Relays
1 Rear defogger
Micro Usage
Fuses
2 Heated second row
seat left
3 Heated second row
seat right
4 Heated mirrors
5 Liftgate
6 Glass breakage
The rear compartment fuse block is 7 Liftglass
behind the access panel on the left
side of the compartment. 8 Liftgate module logic
Pull the panel out by grabbing the 9 Rear wiper
finger access slot at the rear edge. 10 Rear heater,
ventilation and air
conditioning blower
11 Second row seat
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and 19 Rear fog lamp (if
features shown. equipped)
10-46 Vehicle Care
M-Type Usage Wheels and Tires Warning (Continued)

Fuses
12 Liftgate module Tires and a serious crash. See
13 Third row seat Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on
high-quality tires made by a page 9-14.
14 Rear accessory power
outlet leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose
the warranty manual for the same danger as
15 Rear defogger
information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The
warranty and where to get resulting crash could
Ultra Usage cause serious injury.
service. For additional
Micro
Relays information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently
manufacturer. to maintain the
16 Liftgate recommended pressure.
Micro Usage
{ Warning Tire pressure should be
checked when the tires
Relays . Poorly maintained and are cold.
17 Liftglass improperly used tires are
dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more
18 Rear fog lamp (if likely to be cut, punctured,
equipped) . Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
19 Heated mirrors cause overheating as a impact such as when
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout tires at the recommended
(Continued) pressure.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-47
See Tire Pressure for traction or performance as winter

Warning (Continued) High-Speed Operation on tires on snow or ice-covered roads.
page 10-55 for inflation pressure See Winter Tires on page 10-47.
. Worn or old tires can
cause a crash. If the adjustment for high-speed
driving. Winter Tires
tread is badly worn,
replace them. This vehicle was not originally
All-Season Tires equipped with winter tires. Winter
. Replace any tires that tires are designed for increased
This vehicle may come with
have been damaged by traction on snow and ice-covered
all-season tires. These tires are
impacts with potholes, designed to provide good overall
roads. Consider installing winter
curbs, etc. tires on the vehicle if frequent
performance on most road surfaces
driving on ice or snow covered
. Improperly repaired tires and weather conditions. Original
roads is expected. See your dealer
can cause a crash. equipment tires designed to GM's
for details regarding winter tire
Only the dealer or an specific tire performance criteria
availability and proper tire selection.
have a TPC specification code
authorized tire service molded onto the sidewall. Original
Also, see Buying New Tires on
center should repair, page 10-62.
equipment all-season tires can be
replace, dismount, and identified by the last two characters With winter tires, there may be
mount the tires. of this TPC code, which will decreased dry road traction,
. Do not spin the tires in be MS. increased road noise, and shorter
tread life. After changing to winter
excess of 56 km/h Consider installing winter tires on
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
(35 mph) on slippery the vehicle if frequent driving on
handling and braking.
surfaces such as snow, snow or ice-covered roads is
mud, ice, etc. Excessive expected. All-season tires provide If using winter tires:
spinning may cause the adequate performance for most . Use tires of the same brand and
winter driving conditions, but they tread type on all four wheel
tires to explode. may not offer the same level of positions.
10-48 Vehicle Care

. Use only radial ply tires of the The tread pattern on these tires may
same size, load range, and { Caution wear more quickly than other tires.
speed rating as the original Consider rotating the tires more
equipment tires. Low-profile tires are more frequently than at 12 000 km
susceptible to damage from road (7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wear
Winter tires with the same speed
hazards or curb impact than is noted when the tires are
rating as the original equipment tires
may not be available for H, V, W, Y, standard profile tires. Tire and/or inspected. See Tire Inspection on
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter wheel assembly damage can page 10-60.
tires with a lower speed rating are occur when coming into contact
chosen, never exceed the tire's with road hazards like potholes, Tire Sidewall Labeling
maximum speed capability. or sharp edged objects, or when
sliding into a curb. The warranty Useful information about a tire is
does not cover this type of molded into the sidewall. The
Low-Profile Tires example shows a typical
damage. Keep tires set to the
If the vehicle has P275/55R20 or correct inflation pressure and passenger vehicle tire sidewall.
P285/45R22 size tires, they are when possible, avoid contact with
classified as touring tires and curbs, potholes, and other road
are designed for on road use. hazards.
The low-profile, wide tread
design is not recommended for
off-road driving. See Off-Road All-Terrain Tires
Driving on page 9-5, for This vehicle may have all-terrain
additional information. tires. These tires provide good
performance on most road surfaces,
weather conditions, and for off-road
driving. See Off-Road Driving on
page 9-5.
Vehicle Care 10-49
criteria have a TPC specification (4) Tire Identification Number

code molded onto the sidewall. (TIN): The letters and numbers
GM's TPC specifications meet or following the DOT code are the
exceed all federal safety Tire Identification Number (TIN).
guidelines. The TIN shows the
(3) DOT (Department of manufacturer and plant code,
Transportation): The tire size, and date the tire was
Department of Transportation manufactured. The TIN is
(DOT) code indicates that the molded onto both sides of the
tire is in compliance with the tire, although only one side may
U.S. Department of have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire Transportation Motor Vehicle (5) Tire Ply Material : The type
(1) Tire Size: The tire size code Safety Standards. of cord and number of plies in
is a combination of letters and DOT Tire Date of the sidewall and under the tread.
numbers used to define a Manufacture: The last four (6) Uniform Tire Quality
particular tire's width, height, digits of the TIN indicate the tire Grading (UTQG): Tire
aspect ratio, construction type, manufactured date. The first two manufacturers are required to
and service description. See the digits represent the week grade tires based on three
Tire Size illustration later in this (01-52) and the last two digits, performance factors: treadwear,
section for more detail. the year. For example, the third traction, and temperature
(2) TPC Spec (Tire week of the year 2010 would resistance. For more
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date information, see Uniform Tire
Specification): Original of 0310. Quality Grading on page 10-64.
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
10-50 Vehicle Care
(7) Maximum Cold Inflation would mean that the tire's

Load Limit: Maximum load that sidewall is 75 percent as high as
can be carried and the it is wide.
maximum pressure needed to (4) Construction Code: A letter
support that load. For code is used to indicate the type
information on recommended of ply construction in the tire.
tire pressure see Tire Pressure Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
The letter R means radial ply
on page 10-53 and Vehicle Load (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: construction; the letter D means
Limits on page 9-14. The United States version of a diagonal or bias ply
(8) Temporary Use Only: Only metric tire sizing system. The construction; and the letter B
use a temporary spare tire until letter P as the first character in means belted-bias ply
the road tire is repaired and the tire size means a passenger construction.
replaced. This spare tire should vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire (5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
not be driven on over 112 km/h the wheel in inches.
(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph) and Rim Association.
when pulling a trailer, with the (2) Tire Width: The three-digit (6) Service Description: These
proper inflation pressure. See number indicates the tire section characters represent the load
Full-Size Spare Tire on width in millimeters from index and speed rating of the
page 10-78. sidewall to sidewall. tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit is certified to carry. The speed
Tire Designations number that indicates the tire rating is the maximum speed a
Tire Size height-to-width measurements. tire is certified to carry a load.
The example shows a typical For example, if the tire size
passenger vehicle tire size. aspect ratio is 75, as shown in
item C of the tire illustration, it
Vehicle Care 10-51
Tire Terminology and Bead: The tire bead contains DOT Markings: A code molded
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel into the sidewall of a tire
cords that hold the tire onto signifying that the tire is in
Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. compliance with the U.S.
air inside the tire pressing Department of Transportation
outward on each square inch of Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
the tire. Air pressure is Standards. The DOT code
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of includes the Tire Identification
or psi (pounds per square inch). Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
the tread.
Accessory Weight: The designator which can also
combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The identify the tire manufacturer,
accessories. Some examples of amount of air pressure in a tire, production plant, brand, and
optional accessories are measured in kPa (kilopascal) date of production.
automatic transmission, power or psi (pounds per square inch)
before a tire has built up heat GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
windows, power seats, and air Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
conditioning. from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10-53. on page 9-14.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
of a tire's height to its width. Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and Rating for the front axle. See
Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the Vehicle Load Limits on
cords between the plies and the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, page 9-14.
tread. Cords may be made from and coolant, but without GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
steel or other reinforcing passengers and cargo. Rating for the rear axle. See
materials. Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-14.
10-52 Vehicle Care
Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A

The side of an asymmetrical tire Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
that must always face outward weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and
when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight. Recommended Inflation
unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire used on light duty trucks and is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown
some multipurpose passenger 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load on the tire placard. See Tire
vehicles. Limits on page 9-14. Pressure on page 10-53 and
Occupant Distribution : Vehicle Load Limits on
Load Index: An assigned page 9-14.
number ranging from 1 to 279 Designated seating positions.
that corresponds to the load Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
carrying capacity of a tire. side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at
Maximum Inflation Pressure: 90 degrees to the centerline of
The maximum air pressure to outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread.
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire
molded onto the sidewall. white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads
manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated.
Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is
load rating for a tire at the Sidewall: The portion of a tire
higher or deeper than the same between the tread and the bead.
maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall
pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Vehicle Care 10-53
Speed Rating: An determined by tire See Tire and Loading

alphanumeric code assigned to manufacturers using Information Label under Vehicle
a tire indicating the maximum government testing procedures. Load Limits on page 9-14.
speed at which a tire can The ratings are molded into the
operate. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Pressure
Traction: The friction between Tire Quality Grading on Tires need the correct amount of
the tire and the road surface. page 10-64. air pressure to operate
The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The effectively.
Tread: The portion of a tire that number of designated seating
comes into contact with positions multiplied by { Caution
the road. 68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load Neither tire underinflation nor
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Limits on page 9-14. overinflation is good.
bands, sometimes called wear Underinflated tires, or tires
bars, that show across the tread Vehicle Maximum Load on the that do not have enough air,
of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/ Tire: Load on an individual tire can result in:
16 in) of tread remains. See due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and . Tire overloading and
When It Is Time for New Tires overheating which could
on page 10-61. cargo weight.
lead to a blowout.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a . Premature or
Grading Standards): A tire
vehicle showing the vehicle irregular wear.
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a capacity weight and the original . Poor handling.
tire's traction, temperature, and equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure.
. Reduced fuel economy.
treadwear. Ratings are (Continued)
10-54 Vehicle Care
example of the Tire and Loading the vehicle has not been driven
Caution (Continued) Information label, see Vehicle for at least three hours or no
Overinflated tires, or tires that Load Limits on page 9-14. How more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
have too much air, can the vehicle is loaded affects Remove the valve cap from the
result in: vehicle handling and ride tire valve stem. Press the tire
comfort. Never load the vehicle gauge firmly onto the valve to
. Unusual wear. with more weight than it was get a pressure measurement.
. Poor handling. designed to carry. If the cold tire inflation pressure
. Rough ride. When to Check matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
. Needless damage from Check the tires once a month
Loading Information label, no
road hazards. or more.
further adjustment is necessary.
Do not forget the spare tire, If the inflation pressure is low,
The Tire and Loading if the vehicle has one. See add air until the recommended
Information label on the vehicle Full-Size Spare Tire on pressure is reached. If the
indicates the original equipment page 10-78 for additional inflation pressure is high, press
tires and the correct cold tire information. on the metal stem in the center
inflation pressures. The of the tire valve to release air.
recommended pressure is the How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type Re-check the tire pressure with
minimum air pressure needed to
gauge to check tire pressure. the tire gauge.
support the vehicle's maximum
load carrying capacity. Proper tire inflation cannot be Put the valve caps back on the
determined by looking at the tire. valve stems to keep out dirt and
For additional information
Check the tire inflation pressure moisture and prevent leaks. Use
regarding how much weight the
when the tires are cold, meaning only valve caps designed for the
vehicle can carry, and an
vehicle by GM. TPMS sensors
Vehicle Care 10-55
could be damaged and would the air pressure in your tires and
not be covered by the vehicle Warning (Continued) transmit tire pressure readings to a
warranty. receiver located in the vehicle.
excellent condition, and are set to
the correct cold tire inflation Each tire, including the spare (if
Tire Pressure for pressure for the vehicle load. provided), should be checked
High-Speed Operation monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
When driving the vehicle at speeds by the vehicle manufacturer on the
{ Warning of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, set vehicle placard or tire inflation
the cold inflation pressure to 20 kPa pressure label. (If your vehicle has
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (3 psi) above the recommended tire tires of a different size than the size
(100 mph) or higher, puts pressure shown on the Tire and indicated on the vehicle placard or
additional strain on tires. Loading Information label. Return tire inflation pressure label, you
Sustained high-speed driving the tires to the recommended cold should determine the proper tire
causes excessive heat buildup tire inflation pressure when inflation pressure for those tires.)
and can cause sudden tire failure. high-speed driving has ended. See
This could cause a crash, and Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-14 As an added safety feature, your
you or others could be killed. and Tire Pressure on page 10-53. vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
Some high-speed rated tires
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
require inflation pressure Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more
adjustment for high-speed System of your tires is significantly
operation. When speed limits and under-inflated.
road conditions allow the vehicle The Tire Pressure Monitor System
to be driven at high speeds, make (TPMS) uses radio and sensor Accordingly, when the low tire
technology to check tire pressure pressure telltale illuminates, you
sure the tires are rated for
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor should stop and check your tires as
high-speed operation, are in
soon as possible, and inflate them
(Continued) to the proper pressure. Driving on a
10-56 Vehicle Care
significantly under-inflated tire When the malfunction indicator is condition exists. TPMS sensors are
causes the tire to overheat and can illuminated, the system may not be mounted onto each tire and wheel
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation able to detect or signal low tire assembly, excluding the spare tire
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire pressure as intended. TPMS and wheel assembly. The TPMS
tread life, and may affect the malfunctions may occur for a variety sensors monitor the air pressure in
vehicle's handling and stopping of reasons, including the installation the tires and transmit the tire
ability. of replacement or alternate tires or pressure readings to a receiver
Please note that the TPMS is wheels on the vehicle that prevent located in the vehicle.
not a substitute for proper tire the TPMS from functioning properly.
maintenance, and it is the driver's Always check the TPMS malfunction
responsibility to maintain correct tire telltale after replacing one or more
pressure, even if under-inflation has tires or wheels on your vehicle to
not reached the level to trigger ensure that the replacement or
illumination of the TPMS low tire alternate tires and wheels allow the
pressure telltale. TPMS to continue to function
properly. When a low tire pressure condition
Your vehicle has also been
See Tire Pressure Monitor is detected, the TPMS illuminates
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
Operation on page 10-56. the low tire pressure warning light
indicator to indicate when the
located on the instrument cluster.
system is not operating properly. See Radio Frequency Statement on
If the warning light comes on, stop
The TPMS malfunction indicator is page 13-12.
as soon as possible and inflate the
combined with the low tire pressure
tires to the recommended pressure
telltale. When the system detects a Tire Pressure Monitor shown on the Tire and Loading
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
Operation Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-14.
remain continuously illuminated. This vehicle may have a Tire
This sequence will continue upon Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). A message to check the pressure in
subsequent vehicle start-ups as The TPMS is designed to warn the a specific tire displays in the Driver
long as the malfunction exists. driver when a low tire pressure Information Center (DIC). The low
Vehicle Care 10-57
tire pressure warning light and the of the Tire and Loading Information TPMS Malfunction Light and
DIC warning message come on at label and its location. Also see Tire Message
each ignition cycle until the tires are Pressure on page 10-53.
inflated to the correct inflation The TPMS will not function properly
The TPMS can warn about a if one or more of the TPMS sensors
pressure. If the vehicle has DIC low tire pressure condition but it
buttons, tire pressure levels can be are missing or inoperable. When the
does not replace normal tire system detects a malfunction, the
viewed. For additional information maintenance. See Tire Inspection
and details about the DIC operation low tire pressure warning light
on page 10-60, Tire Rotation on flashes for about one minute and
and displays, see Driver Information page 10-60 and Tires on
Center (DIC) (Base Level) on then stays on for the remainder of
page 10-46. the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
page 5-29 or Driver Information
Center (DIC) (Uplevel) on page 5-31 message also displays. The
and Tire Messages on page 5-44. { Caution malfunction light and DIC warning
message come on at each ignition
The low tire pressure warning light Tire sealant materials are not all cycle until the problem is corrected.
may come on in cool weather when the same. A non-approved tire Some of the conditions that can
the vehicle is first started, and then sealant could damage the TPMS cause these to come on are:
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This sensors. TPMS sensor damage
could be an early indicator that the
. One of the road tires has been
caused by using an incorrect tire replaced with the spare tire.
air pressure is getting low and sealant is not covered by the
needs to be inflated to the proper The spare tire does not have a
vehicle warranty. Always use only TPMS sensor. The malfunction
pressure.
the GM approved tire sealant light and the DIC message
A Tire and Loading Information label available through your dealer or should go off after the road tire
shows the size of the original included in the vehicle. is replaced and the sensor
equipment tires and the correct matching process is performed
inflation pressure for the tires when successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
they are cold. See Vehicle Load Matching Process" later in this
Limits on page 9-14, for an example section.
10-58 Vehicle Care

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
process was not done or not being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire,
completed successfully after wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger
rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear.
malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to
message should go off after If the TPMS is not functioning purchase a relearn tool. A TPMS
successfully completing the properly, it cannot detect or signal a relearn tool can also be purchased.
sensor matching process. low tire condition. See your dealer See Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor
See "TPMS Sensor Matching for service if the TPMS malfunction Activation Tool at
Process" later in this section. light and DIC message come on www.gmtoolsandequipment.com or
. One or more TPMS sensors are and stay on. call 1-800-GM TOOLS
missing or damaged. The (1-800-468-6657).
malfunction light and the DIC TPMS Sensor Matching
There are two minutes to match the
message should go off when the Process first tire/wheel position, and
TPMS sensors are installed and Each TPMS sensor has a unique five minutes overall to match all four
the sensor matching process is identification code. The identification tire/wheel positions. If it takes
performed successfully. See code needs to be matched to a new longer, the matching process stops
your dealer for service. tire/wheel position after rotating the and must be restarted.
. Replacement tires or wheels do vehicles tires or replacing one or
The TPMS sensor matching
not match the original equipment more of the TPMS sensors. Also,
process is:
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels the TPMS sensor matching process
other than those recommended should be performed after replacing 1. Set the parking brake.
could prevent the TPMS from a spare tire with a road tire 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
functioning properly. See Buying containing the TPMS sensor. the engine off or place the
New Tires on page 10-62. The malfunction light and the DIC vehicle power mode in ON/RUN/
message should go off at the next START.
ignition cycle. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions,
Vehicle Care 10-59
3. Uplevel DIC Only: Make sure the 5. If the vehicle has an uplevel 8. Proceed to the passenger side
Tire Pressure info page option is DIC, press and hold the V (Set/ front tire, and repeat the
turned on. The info pages on the Reset) button located in the procedure in Step 7.
DIC can be turned on and off center of the DIC controls. 9. Proceed to the passenger side
through the Settings menu. See rear tire, and repeat the
Driver Information Center (DIC) If the vehicle has a base level
DIC, press and hold the trip procedure in Step 7.
(Base Level) on page 5-29 or
Driver Information Center (DIC) odometer reset stem for about 10. Proceed to the driver side rear
(Uplevel) on page 5-31. five seconds. A message asking tire, and repeat the procedure
if the process should begin in Step 7. The horn sounds two
4. If the vehicle has an uplevel should appear. Select yes and times to indicate the sensor
DIC, use the DIC controls on the press the trip odometer reset identification code has been
right side of the steering wheel stem to confirm the selection. matched to the driver side rear
to scroll to the Tire Pressure tire, and the TPMS sensor
screen under the DIC info page. The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode matching process is no longer
If the vehicle has a base level and the TIRE LEARNING active. The TIRE LEARNING
DIC, use the trip odometer reset ACTIVE message displays on ACTIVE message on the DIC
stem to scroll to the Tire the DIC screen. display screen goes off.
Pressure screen. 11. Turn the ignition switch to
6. Start with the driver side
front tire. LOCK/OFF.
7. Place the relearn tool against 12. Set all four tires to the
the tire sidewall, near the valve recommended air pressure
stem. Then press the button to level as indicated on the Tire
activate the TPMS sensor. and Loading Information label.
A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.
10-60 Vehicle Care
Tire Inspection
. The tire has a puncture, cut, See When It Is Time for New
or other damage that cannot Tires on page 10-61 and Wheel
We recommend that the tires, be repaired well because of Replacement on page 10-66.
including the spare tire, if the the size or location of the
vehicle has one, be inspected damage.
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month. Tire Rotation
Replace the tire if: Tires should be rotated every
. The indicators at three or 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
more places around the tire Maintenance Schedule on
can be seen. page 11-3.
. There is cord or fabric Tires are rotated to achieve a
showing through the tire's uniform wear for all tires. The
rubber. first rotation is the most
important.
. The tread or sidewall is Use this rotation pattern when
cracked, cut, or snagged Anytime unusual wear is rotating the tires.
deep enough to show cord or noticed, rotate the tires as soon
fabric. as possible, check for proper tire Do not include the spare tire in
inflation pressure, and check for the tire rotation.
. The tire has a bump, bulge, damaged tires or wheels. If the
or split. Adjust the front and rear tires to
unusual wear continues after the the recommended inflation
rotation, check the wheel pressure on the Tire and
alignment. Loading Information label after
the tires have been rotated.
Vehicle Care 10-61
See Tire Pressure on

page 10-53 and Vehicle Load Warning (Continued)
Limits on page 9-14. towel can be used; however, use
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor a scraper or wire brush later to
System. See Tire Pressure remove all rust or dirt.
Monitor Operation on
page 10-56. Lightly coat the center of the
Check that all wheel nuts are wheel hub with wheel bearing
properly tightened. See Wheel grease after a wheel change or
Nut Torque under Capacities tire rotation to prevent corrosion
and Specifications on or rust build-up. Do not get
page 12-2. grease on the flat wheel Treadwear indicators are one way to
mounting surface or on the tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
{ Warning wheel nuts or bolts.
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. Some
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the When It Is Time for New commercial truck tires may not have
parts to which it is fastened, can Tires treadwear indicators. See Tire
make wheel nuts become loose Inspection on page 10-60 and Tire
after time. The wheel could come Factors, such as maintenance,
temperatures, driving speeds, Rotation on page 10-60 for
off and cause an accident. When additional information.
changing a wheel, remove any vehicle loading, and road conditions
affect the wear rate of the tires. The rubber in tires ages over time.
rust or dirt from places where the
This also applies to the spare tire,
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
never used. Multiple factors
(Continued) including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
10-62 Vehicle Care
maintenance affect how fast aging driving. When storing a vehicle for number is molded onto the tire's
takes place. GM recommends that at least a month, remove the tires or sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires, including the spare if raise the vehicle to reduce the tires have an all-season tread
equipped, be replaced after six weight from the tires. design, the TPC Spec number
years, regardless of tread wear. The
will be followed by MS for mud
tire manufacture date is the last four Buying New Tires and snow. See Tire Sidewall
digits of the DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN) which is molded into GM has developed and matched Labeling on page 10-48 for
one side of the tire sidewall. The specific tires for the vehicle. The additional information.
first two digits represent the week original equipment tires installed GM recommends replacing worn
(01-52) and the last two digits, the were designed to meet General tires in complete sets of four.
year. For example, the third week of Motors Tire Performance Criteria
the year 2010 would have a
Uniform tread depth on all tires
Specification (TPC Spec) will help to maintain the
four-digit DOT date of 0310. system rating. When performance of the vehicle.
Vehicle Storage replacement tires are needed, Braking and handling
GM strongly recommends performance may be adversely
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
buying tires with the same TPC affected if all the tires are not
a vehicle that will be stored for at Spec rating. replaced at the same time.
least a month in a cool, dry, clean GM's exclusive TPC Spec If proper rotation and
area away from direct sunlight to system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
slow aging. This area should be free critical specifications that impact all four tires should wear out at
of grease, gasoline, or other the overall performance of the about the same time. See Tire
substances that can deteriorate
vehicle, including brake system Rotation on page 10-60 for
rubber.
performance, ride and handling, information on proper tire
Parking for an extended period can traction control, and tire rotation. However, if it is
cause flat spots on the tires that pressure monitoring
may result in vibrations while
performance. GM's TPC Spec
Vehicle Care 10-63
necessary to replace only one

axle set of worn tires, place the Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
new tires on the rear axle. This vehicle may have a suddenly and cause a crash.
different size spare than the Use only radial-ply tires with
{ Warning road tires originally installed the wheels on the vehicle.
Tires could explode during on the vehicle. When new, the
improper service. Attempting vehicle included a spare tire Winter tires with the same speed
to mount or dismount a tire and wheel assembly with a rating as the original equipment
could cause injury or death. similar overall diameter as the tires may not be available for H,
Only your dealer or authorized road tires and wheels, so it is V, W, Y and ZR speed rated
tire service center should all right to drive on it. The tires. Never exceed the winter
mount or dismount the tires. spare tire was developed for tires maximum speed capability
use on this vehicle and will not when using winter tires with a
affect vehicle handling. lower speed rating.
{ Warning If the vehicle tires must be
replaced with a tire that does not
Mixing tires of different sizes, { Warning have a TPC Spec number, make
brands, or types may cause sure they are the same size,
loss of control of the vehicle, Using bias-ply tires on the
vehicle may cause the wheel load range, speed rating, and
resulting in a crash or other construction (radial) as the
vehicle damage. Use the rim flanges to develop cracks
after many miles of driving. original tires.
correct size, brand, and type
A tire and/or wheel could fail Vehicles that have a tire
of tires on all wheels.
(Continued) pressure monitoring system
(Continued) could give an inaccurate
10-64 Vehicle Care
low-pressure warning if non-TPC or All-Wheel Drive, the performance Uniform Tire Quality
Spec rated tires are installed. of these systems can also be
affected.
Grading
See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10-55. The following information relates
The Tire and Loading
{ Warning to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Information label indicates the If different sized wheels are used, Traffic Safety Administration
original equipment tires on the there may not be an acceptable (NHTSA), which grades tires by
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits level of performance and safety if treadwear, traction, and
on page 9-14 for the label tires not recommended for those
temperature performance. This
location and more information wheels are selected. This
applies only to vehicles sold in
about the Tire and Loading increases the chance of a crash
and serious injury. Only use GM
the United States. The grades
Information label. are molded on the sidewalls of
specific wheel and tire systems
developed for the vehicle, and most passenger car tires. The
Different Size Tires and Uniform Tire Quality Grading
have them properly installed by a
Wheels GM certified technician. (UTQG) system does not apply
If wheels or tires are installed that to deep tread, winter tires,
are a different size than the original compact spare tires, tires with
See Buying New Tires on
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
page 10-62 and Accessories and
nominal rim diameters of
performance, including its braking, 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
Modifications on page 10-3.
ride and handling characteristics, or to some limited-production
stability, and resistance to rollover tires.
may be affected. If the vehicle has
electronic systems such as antilock While the tires available on
brakes, rollover airbags, traction General Motors passenger cars
control, electronic stability control, and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
Vehicle Care 10-65
must also conform to federal one-half (1) times as well on tests, and does not include
safety requirements and the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
additional General Motors Tire graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
Performance Criteria (TPC) performance of tires depends characteristics.
standards. upon the actual conditions of
Temperature
Quality grades can be found their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A
where applicable on the tire
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C,
sidewall between tread shoulder
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance
and maximum section width. For
differences in road to the generation of heat and its
example:
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
Treadwear 200 Traction AA tested under controlled
Temperature A Traction conditions on a specified indoor
All Passenger Car Tires Must The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Conform to Federal Safety highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
Requirements In Addition To and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
These Grades. the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead
Treadwear controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade
The treadwear grade is a specified government test C corresponds to a level of
comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and performance which all
wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet
under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety
specified government test Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and
course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction performance on the laboratory
10-66 Vehicle Care
test wheel than the minimum vibrating when driving on a smooth

required by law. Warning: The road, the tires and wheels may need { Warning
temperature grade for this tire is to be rebalanced. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis. Using the wrong replacement
established for a tire that is wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
properly inflated and not nuts can be dangerous. It could
overloaded. Excessive speed, Wheel Replacement
affect the braking and handling of
underinflation, or excessive Replace any wheel that is bent, the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
loading, either separately or in cracked, or badly rusted or and cause loss of control, causing
combination, can cause heat corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming a crash. Always use the correct
buildup and possible tire failure. loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
wheel nuts should be replaced. nuts for replacement.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Some aluminum wheels can be
Balance repaired. See your dealer if any of
The tires and wheels were aligned these conditions exist. { Caution
and balanced at the factory to Your dealer will know the kind of
provide the longest tire life and best The wrong wheel can also cause
wheel that is needed.
overall performance. Adjustments to problems with bearing life, brake
Each new wheel should have the cooling, speedometer or
wheel alignment and tire balancing
same load-carrying capacity, odometer calibration, headlamp
are not necessary on a regular
diameter, width, offset, and be aim, bumper height, vehicle
basis. Consider an alignment check
mounted the same way as the one it ground clearance, and tire or tire
if there is unusual tire wear or the
replaces. chain clearance to the body and
vehicle is significantly pulling to one
side or the other. Some slight pull to Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel chassis.
the left or right, depending on the nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
crown of the road and/or other road System (TPMS) sensors with new
surface variations such as troughs GM original equipment parts.
or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is
Vehicle Care 10-67
Used Replacement Wheels

Warning (Continued) { Caution
{ Warning suspension, or other vehicle If the vehicle has P255/70R17 or
parts. The area damaged by the P265/70R17 size tires, use tire
Replacing a wheel with a used
tire chains could cause loss of chains only where legal and only
one is dangerous. How it has
control and a crash. when necessary. Use chains that
been used or how far it has been
Use another type of traction are the proper size for the tires.
driven may be unknown. It could
device only if its manufacturer Install them on the rear tires only.
fail suddenly and cause a crash.
recommends it for the vehicle's Do not use chains on the front
When replacing wheels, use a
tire size combination and road tires. Tighten them as tightly as
new GM original equipment
conditions. Follow that possible with the ends securely
wheel.
manufacturer's instructions. To fastened. Drive slowly and follow
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow the chain manufacturer's
Tire Chains and readjust or remove the instructions. If the chains contact
traction device if it is contacting the vehicle, stop and retighten
{ Warning the vehicle. Do not spin the them. If the contact continues,
slow down until it stops. Driving
wheels.
If the vehicle has 265/65R18, too fast or spinning the wheels
P265/65R18, P275/55R20, If traction devices are used, install with chains on will damage the
or P285/45R22 size tires, do not them on the rear tires. vehicle.
use tire chains. There is not
enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
(Continued)
10-68 Vehicle Care
If a Tire Goes Flat

{ Warning Warning (Continued)
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause changing a flat tire. If it is used for
are maintained properly. If air goes permanent damage to the tire. anything else, you or others could
out of a tire, it is much more likely to Re-inflating a tire after it has be badly injured or killed if the
leak out slowly. But if there ever is a been driven on while severely vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
blowout, here are a few tips about underinflated or flat may cause a is provided with the vehicle, only
what to expect and what to do: blowout and a serious crash. use it for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle that has been driven on while If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
toward that side. Take your foot off severely underinflated or flat. and wheel damage by driving slowly
the accelerator pedal and grip the Have your dealer or an authorized to a level place, well off the road,
steering wheel firmly. Steer to tire service center repair or if possible. Turn on the hazard
maintain lane position, and then replace the flat tire as soon as warning flashers. See Hazard
gently brake to a stop, well off the possible. Warning Flashers on page 6-4.
road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a { Warning
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction as
{ Warning Changing a tire can be
used in a skid. Stop pressing the Lifting a vehicle and getting under dangerous. The vehicle can slip
accelerator pedal and steer to it to do maintenance or repairs is off the jack and roll over or fall
straighten the vehicle. It may be dangerous without the causing injury or death. Find a
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake appropriate safety equipment and level place to change the tire.
to a stop, well off the road, training. If a jack is provided with (Continued)
if possible.
the vehicle, it is designed only for
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-69
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2), Removing the Spare Tire and
Warning (Continued) use the following example as a Tools
guide to assist in the placement of
To help prevent the vehicle from the wheel blocks (1), if equipped. The equipment needed to change a
moving: flat tire is stored in the rear of the
vehicle, on the driver side, behind a
1. Set the parking brake firmly. door in the trim panel.
2. Put the shift lever in
P (Park).
3. For vehicles with
four-wheel-drive with a
N (Neutral) transfer case
position, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive
gear not in N (Neutral). 1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)
4. Turn off the engine and do 2. Flat Tire
not restart while the vehicle The following information explains
is raised. how to use the jack and change
5. Do not allow passengers to a tire.
remain in the vehicle. 1. Jack Knob
6. Place wheel blocks,
Tire Changing 2. Wing Nut Retaining the
if equipped, on both sides of Before changing a flat tire, see Wheel Blocks
the tire at the opposite Hands-Free Operation under 3. Wing Nut Retaining the
corner of the tire being Liftgate on page 2-18. Tool Bag
changed.
10-70 Vehicle Care
4. Turn the jack knob (1) 5. Wheel Wrench

counterclockwise to release the To access the spare tire, refer to the
jack and wheel blocks from the following graphics and instructions:
bracket.
5. Turn the wing nut retaining the
wheel blocks (2)
counterclockwise to remove the
wheel blocks and the wheel
block retainer.
Use the following tools:
1. Pull to open the trim panel door.

The third row driver side seat
may need to be folded to access
the trim panel door.
2. Lift the acoustic pad to access 1. Hoist Assembly
the jack and tools. 2. Hoist Shaft
3. Hoist Shaft Access
3. Turn the wing nut retaining the
Cover/Hole
tool bag (3) counterclockwise to
remove it. 4. Jack Handle Extensions
5. Wheel Wrench
Pull the tool bag toward the front 6. Spare Tire Lock
of the vehicle and lift the rear 1. Jack 7. Hoist End of Extension Tool
portion of the bag upward to 2. Wheel Blocks 8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
remove it.
3. Jack Handle 9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem
4. Jack Handle Extensions Pointed Down)
Vehicle Care 10-71
10. Tire/Wheel Retainer

11. Hoist Cable
1. Open the hoist shaft access
door (3) on the bumper to
access the spare tire lock (6).
3. Assemble the two jack handle 4. Insert the open end of the
extensions (4) and wheel extension (7) through the hole in
wrench (5), as shown. the rear bumper (8) (hoist shaft
If equipped with a hitch cover, access hole).
turn the hitch cover retainers Be sure the hoist end of the
counterclockwise and pull the extension (7) connects to the
cover downward to remove it hoist shaft. The ribbed square
before removing the hoist shaft end of the extension is used to
access door. lower the spare tire.
2. To remove the spare tire lock 5. Turn the wheel wrench
(6), insert the ignition key, turn it counterclockwise to lower the
clockwise and then pull it spare tire to the ground.
straight out. Continue to turn the wheel
10-72 Vehicle Care
wrench until the spare tire can Removing the Flat Tire and
be pulled out from under the Installing the Spare Tire
vehicle.
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10-68 for more
information.
7. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle

with some slack in the cable to
access the tire/wheel retainer.
Tilt the retainer and pull it and
the cable and spring through the
center of the wheel.
Once the retainer is separated
6. Use the wheel wrench hook to from the guide pin, tilt the 2. If the vehicle has a center cap
pull the hoist cable closer to retainer and pull it through the that covers the wheel fasteners,
assist in reaching the spare tire. center of the wheel along with place the chisel end of the wheel
the cable and latch. wrench in the slot on the wheel
8. Put the spare tire near the and gently pry the cap out.
flat tire. If the wheel has a bolt-on hub
cap, loosen the plastic nut caps
by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise.
Vehicle Care 10-73
The plastic nut caps will be Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is
retained in the hub cap after it is on a front tire of the vehicle, use
removed from the wheel. the jack handle and only one
jack handle extension. Attach
the wheel wrench to the jack
handle extension. Attach the
jack handle to the jack. Position
the jack on the frame behind the
flat tire where the frame sections
Jacking Locations (Overall View) overlap. Turn the wheel wrench
4. Position the jack under the clockwise to raise the vehicle.
vehicle, as shown. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough
room for the spare tire to clear
the ground.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen

all the wheel nuts. Turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise
to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not
remove the wheel nuts yet.
Left Front Shown, Right Front

Similar
Rear Position
10-74 Vehicle Care
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is

on a rear tire of the vehicle, use { Warning
the jack handle (2) and both jack
handle extensions (3). Attach the Raising the vehicle with the jack
wheel wrench (4) to the jack improperly positioned can
handle extensions (3). Attach the damage the vehicle and even
jack handle (2) to the jack (1). make the vehicle fall. To help
Use the jacking pad (5) provided avoid personal injury and vehicle
on the rear axle. Turn the wheel damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
wrench (4) clockwise to raise the head into the proper location
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far before raising the vehicle.
enough off the ground so there
is enough room for the spare tire
to clear the ground. 7. Remove any rust or dirt from the
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces,
and spare wheel.
{ Warning
Getting under a vehicle when it is { Warning
lifted on a jack is dangerous.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
If the vehicle slips off the jack,
parts to which it is fastened, can
you could be badly injured or
make wheel nuts become loose
killed. Never get under a vehicle
after time. The wheel could come
when it is supported only by
off and cause an accident. When
a jack.
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
5. Remove all of the wheel nuts. wheel attaches to the vehicle.
6. Take off the flat tire. (Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-75
10. Turn the wheel wrench

Warning (Continued) counterclockwise to lower the { Warning
vehicle. Lower the jack
In an emergency, a cloth or a completely. Wheel nuts that are improperly or
paper towel can be used; incorrectly tightened can cause
however, use a scraper or wire the wheels to become loose or
brush later to remove all rust come off. The wheel nuts should
or dirt. be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
8. Put the wheel nuts back on with after replacing. Follow the torque
the rounded end of the nuts specification supplied by the
toward the wheel after mounting aftermarket manufacturer when
the spare tire. using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
{ Warning Specifications on page 12-2 for
original equipment wheel nut
Never use oil or grease on bolts torque specifications.
or nuts because the nuts might 11. Tighten the nuts firmly in a
come loose. The vehicle's wheel crisscross sequence as shown
could fall off, causing a crash. by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise.
{ Caution
9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Improperly tightened wheel nuts
Then use the wheel wrench to can lead to brake pulsation and
tighten the nuts until the wheel is rotor damage. To avoid expensive
held against the hub. brake repairs, evenly tighten the
wheel nuts in the proper
(Continued)
10-76 Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

Caution (Continued) and Tools { Caution
sequence and to the proper The tire hoist can be damaged if
torque specification. See { Warning there is no tension on the cable
Capacities and Specifications on when using it. To have the
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
page 12-2 for the wheel nut necessary tension, the spare or
equipment in the passenger
torque specification. road tire and wheel assembly
compartment of the vehicle could
must be installed on the tire hoist
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
When reinstalling the regular wheel to use it.
collision, loose equipment could
and tire, also reinstall either the strike someone. Store all these in
center cap or the bolt-on hub cap, the proper place. Store the tire under the rear of the
depending on which one the vehicle in the spare tire carrier.
vehicle has. Refer to the following graphics and
. For center caps, line up the tab instructions to help you:
on the center cap with the slot in { Caution
the wheel. The cap only goes in
Storing an aluminum wheel with a
one way. Place the cap on the
flat tire under your vehicle for an
wheel and press until it snaps
into place. extended period of time or with
the valve stem pointing up can
. For bolt-on hub caps, line up the damage the wheel. Always stow
plastic nut caps with the wheel the wheel with the valve stem
nuts and tighten clockwise by pointing down and have the
hand to get them started. Then wheel/tire repaired as soon as
tighten with the wheel wrench possible.
until snug.
Vehicle Care 10-77
1. Hoist Assembly
2. Hoist Shaft
3. Hoist Shaft Access
Cover/Hole
4. Jack Handle Extensions
5. Wheel Wrench
6. Spare Tire Lock
7. Hoist End of Extension Tool
8. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
9. Spare Tire (Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
10. Tire/Wheel Retainer
11. Hoist Cable 3. Assemble the two jack handle 4. Insert the open end of the
extensions (4) and wheel extension (7) through the hole in
1. Put the tire (9) on the ground at wrench (5), as shown. the rear bumper (8) (hoist shaft
the rear of the vehicle with the access hole).
valve stem pointed down, and to
the rear. 5. Raise the tire part way upward.
Make sure the retainer is seated
2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle. in the wheel opening.
Separate the tire/wheel retainer
from the guide pin. Pull the pin 6. Raise the tire fully against the
through the center of the wheel. underside of the vehicle by
Tilt the retainer down through turning the wheel wrench
the center wheel opening. clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. The
Make sure the retainer is fully cable cannot be overtightened.
seated across the underside of
the wheel.
10-78 Vehicle Care
To store the tools, do the following: Full-Size Spare Tire

1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, If this vehicle came with a full-size
jack handle, and jack handle spare tire, it was fully inflated when
extensions) to the tool bag. new, however, it can lose air over
2. Assemble the wheel blocks and time. Check the inflation pressure
jack together with the wing nut. regularly. See Tire Pressure on
page 10-53 and Vehicle Load Limits
3. Position the jack and wheel on page 9-14. For instructions on
blocks in the driver side trim how to remove, install, or store a
panel over the wheelhouse.
spare tire, see Tire Changing on
4. Turn the jack knob clockwise page 10-69.
until the jack is secured tight in
7. Make sure the tire is stored If equipped with a temporary use
the mounting bracket. Be sure to
securely. Push, pull, and then try full-size spare tire, it is indicated on
position the holes in the base of
to turn the tire. If the tire moves, the tire sidewall. See Tire Sidewall
the jack onto the pin in the
use the wheel wrench to tighten Labeling on page 10-48. This spare
mounting bracket.
the cable. tire should not be driven on over
5. Use the retaining bracket to 112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock. fasten the tool bag on the stud (55 mph) when pulling a trailer, at
9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access and turn the wing nut clockwise the proper inflation pressure. Repair
cover. to secure. and replace the road tire as soon as
6. Close the trim panel door. it is convenient, and stow the spare
If equipped, reinstall the hitch tire for future use.
cover and turn the retainers
clockwise.
Vehicle Care 10-79
After installing the spare tire on the Jump Starting

{ Caution vehicle, stop as soon as possible
and check that the spare tire is
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive correctly inflated. Jump Starting - North
and a different size spare tire is America
installed, do not drive in Have the damaged or flat road tire
four-wheel drive until the flat tire repaired or replaced and installed For more information about the
is repaired and/or replaced. The back onto the vehicle as soon as vehicle battery, see Battery - North
vehicle could be damaged and possible so the spare tire will be America on page 10-24.
available in case it is needed again.
the repairs would not be covered If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)
by the warranty. Never use Do not mix tires and wheels of has run down, you may want to use
four-wheel drive when a different different sizes, because they will not another vehicle and some jumper
size spare tire is installed on the fit. Keep your spare tire and its cables to start your vehicle. Be sure
vehicle. wheel together. If the vehicle has a to use the following steps to do it
spare tire that does not match the safely.
original road tires and wheels in size
The vehicle may have a different
size spare tire than the road tires
and type, do not include the spare in
the tire rotation.
{ Warning
originally installed on the vehicle. WARNING: Battery posts,
This spare tire was developed for terminals, and related
use on this vehicle, so it is all right
accessories contain lead and lead
to drive on it. If the vehicle has
compounds, chemicals known to
four-wheel drive and a different size
spare tire is installed, drive only in the State of California to cause
two-wheel drive. cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Batteries also
contain other chemicals known to
(Continued)
10-80 Vehicle Care
reduce electrical resistance. This

Warning (Continued) { Caution is located on the passenger
side, in the rear of the engine
the State of California to cause Ignoring these steps could result compartment.
cancer. WASH HANDS AFTER in costly damage to the vehicle
HANDLING. See California that would not be covered by the 3. Get the vehicles close enough
Proposition 65 Warning on vehicle warranty. Trying to start so the jumper cables can reach,
page 10-2. the vehicle by pushing or pulling it but be sure the vehicles are not
will not work, and it could damage touching each other. If they are,
it could cause an unwanted
the vehicle.
ground connection. You would
{ Warning 1. Check the other vehicle. It must
not be able to start your vehicle,
and the bad grounding could
Batteries can hurt you. They can have a 12-volt battery with a damage the electrical systems.
be dangerous because: negative ground system.
To avoid the possibility of the
. They contain acid that can vehicles rolling, set the parking
burn you. { Caution brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
. They contain gas that can If the other vehicle does not have procedure. Put the automatic
explode or ignite. a 12-volt system with a negative transmission in P (Park) or a
. They contain enough ground, both vehicles can be manual transmission in Neutral
electricity to burn you. damaged. Only use a vehicle that before setting the parking brake.
has a 12-volt system with a For vehicles with
If you do not follow these steps
negative ground for jump starting. four-wheel-drive with a
exactly, some or all of these
N (Neutral) transfer case
things can hurt you.
2. If the vehicle is equipped with position, be sure the transfer
dual batteries, using the battery case is in a drive gear not
that is closer to the starter will N (Neutral).
Vehicle Care 10-81
5. Open the hood on the other

{ Caution vehicle and locate the { Warning
positive (+) and negative ()
If any accessories are left on or terminal locations on that Using a match near a battery can
plugged in during the jump vehicle. cause battery gas to explode.
starting procedure, they could be People have been hurt doing this,
damaged. The repairs would not The positive (+) terminal is under and some have been blinded.
be covered by the vehicle a red plastic cover at the positive Use a flashlight if you need
warranty. Whenever possible, turn battery post. To uncover the more light.
positive (+) terminal, open the
off or unplug all accessories on Battery fluid contains acid that
red plastic cover.
either vehicle when jump starting. can burn you. Do not get it on
For more information on the
location of the remote you. If you accidentally get it in
4. Turn off the ignition on both positive (+) and remote negative your eyes or on your skin, flush
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary () terminals, see Engine the place with water and get
accessories plugged into the Compartment Overview on medical help immediately.
accessory power outlets. Turn page 10-6.
off the radio and all the lamps
that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both { Warning { Warning
batteries. And it could save the
An electric fan can start up even Fans or other moving engine
radio!
when the engine is not running parts can injure you badly. Keep
and can injure you. Keep hands, your hands away from moving
clothing, and tools away from any parts once the engine is running.
underhood electric fan.
10-82 Vehicle Care
6. Check that the jumper cables do 9. Connect the black negative ()

not have loose or missing cable to the negative () terminal
insulation. If they do, you could of the good battery. Use a
get a shock. The vehicles could remote negative () terminal if
be damaged too. the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, Do not let the other end touch
here are some basic things you anything until the next step.
should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Negative ()
will go to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part or to a remote 7. Connect the red positive (+)
negative () terminal if the cable to the positive (+) terminal
vehicle has one. of the vehicle with the dead
battery.
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative () or you will get a 8. Do not let the other end touch
short that would damage the metal. Connect it to the
battery and maybe other parts positive (+) terminal of the good
too. And do not connect the battery. Use a remote
negative () cable to the positive (+) terminal if the 10. Connect the other end of the
negative () terminal on the vehicle has one. negative () cable to the metal
dead battery because this can bracket that is bolted to the
cause sparks. engine and supports the
resonator, on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
Vehicle Care 10-83
11. Start the vehicle with the good Towing the Vehicle Dolly towing is towing the vehicle
battery and run the engine for a with two wheels on the ground and
while. two wheels on a dolly.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had
{ Caution Follow the tow vehicle
the dead battery. If it will not Incorrectly towing a disabled manufacturers instructions. See
start after a few tries, it vehicle may cause damage. The your dealer or trailering professional
probably needs service. damage would not be covered by for additional advice and equipment
the vehicle warranty. recommendations.
{ Caution
If the jumper cables are Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed
{ Caution
connected or removed in the car carrier. A wheel lift tow truck Use of a shield mounted in front
wrong order, electrical shorting could damage the vehicle. of the vehicle grille could restrict
may occur and damage the Consult your dealer or a airflow and cause damage to the
vehicle. The repairs would not be professional towing service if the transmission. The repairs would
covered by the vehicle warranty. disabled vehicle must be towed. not be covered by the vehicle
Always connect and remove the warranty. If using a shield, only
jumper cables in the correct order, Recreational Vehicle use one that attaches to the
making sure that the cables do Towing towing vehicle.
not touch each other or other
metal. Recreational vehicle towing means
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle, such as a motor home.
Jumper Cable Removal The two most common types of
Reverse the sequence exactly when recreational vehicle towing are
removing the jumper cables. dinghy and dolly towing. Dinghy
towing is towing the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
10-84 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not

be towed with all four wheels on the { Warning
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles ground.
Shifting a four-wheel-drive
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles vehicle's transfer case into
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
to roll even if the transmission is
in P (Park). You or others could
be injured. Set the parking brake
before shifting the transfer case
to N (Neutral).
To dinghy tow:
1. Position the vehicle being towed
behind the tow vehicle, facing
forward and on a level surface.
{ Caution 2. Securely attach the vehicle
Only dinghy tow four-wheel-drive being towed to the tow vehicle.
If the two-wheel-drive vehicle is vehicles with a two-speed transfer
towed with all four wheels on the case that have an N (Neutral) and a 3. Apply the parking brake and
ground, the drivetrain 4 n setting. start the engine.
components could be damaged. If equipped with an Electric
The repairs would not be covered Parking Brake (EPB), the
by the vehicle warranty. parking brake cannot be applied
and the tires must be chocked.
Vehicle Care 10-85
4. Shift the transfer case to 8. Disconnect the negative battery vehicle, and manually lock the
N (Neutral). See Shifting into cable at the battery and secure doors. Access the vehicle as if
N (Neutral) under Four-Wheel the nut and bolt. Cover the it has a dead RKE transmitter
Drive on page 9-36. Check that negative battery post with a battery, by using the key in the
the vehicle is in N (Neutral) by non-conductive material to door lock.
shifting the transmission to prevent any contact with the
R (Reverse) and then to negative battery terminal. Disconnecting the Towed Vehicle
D (Drive). There should be no 9. Shift the transmission to Before disconnecting the towed
movement of the vehicle while P (Park). vehicle:
shifting. 1. Park on a level surface.
5. Shift the transmission into
D (Drive). Turn the engine off.
{ Caution 2. Set the parking brake, then shift
the transmission to P (Park).
Then shift the transmission into If the steering column is locked,
P (Park). vehicle damage may occur. 3. Connect the battery.
6. Wait for at least 10 seconds, 4. Apply the brake pedal.
then restart the engine. 10. Move the steering wheel to 5. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
7. Shift the transmission to make sure the steering column the engine off. Shift the transfer
D (Drive), then turn the engine is unlocked. case out of N (Neutral) to 2 m.
off again. 11. With a foot on the brake pedal, See Shifting out of N (Neutral)
release the parking brake. under Four-Wheel Drive on
{ Caution 12. Keep the ignition key in the
page 9-36. See your dealer if the
transfer case cannot be shifted
Failure to disconnect the negative towed vehicle in ACC/
out of N (Neutral).
ACCESSORY to prevent the
battery cable or to have it contact
the terminals can cause damage
steering column from locking. 6. Check that the vehicle is in 2 m
If equipped with Keyless by shifting the transmission to
to the vehicle. Access, keep the RKE R (Reverse) and then to
transmitter outside of the
10-86 Vehicle Care
D (Drive). There should be Dolly Towing Front Towing

movement of the vehicle while (Front Wheels Off the Ground) { Caution
shifting.
Towing a four-wheel-drive vehicle
7. Shift the transmission to with all four wheels on the
P (Park) and turn off the ignition. ground, or even with only two of
8. Disconnect the vehicle from the its wheels on the ground, will
tow vehicle. damage drivetrain components.
9. Release the parking brake. Do not tow a four-wheel-drive
vehicle with any of its wheels on
10. Reset any lost presets. the ground.
The outside temperature
display will default to 0 C This vehicle should not be towed
(32 F) but will reset with with the rear wheels on the ground.
normal usage.
{ Caution
If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is
towed with the rear wheels on the
ground, the transmission could be
damaged. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Never tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the
ground.
Vehicle Care 10-87
Dolly Towing Rear Towing This vehicle should not be towed 3. Firmly set the parking brake.
(Rear Wheels Off the Ground) with any wheels on the ground. See Parking Brake on
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles page 9-42.
Dolly Towing Rear Towing
(Rear Wheels Off the Ground) 4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
following the manufacturer's
instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to
ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
{ Caution
Towing a four-wheel-drive vehicle To dolly tow the vehicle from
with all four wheels on the the rear:
ground, or even with only two of
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
its wheels on the ground, will
vehicle following the dolly
damage drivetrain components. manufacturer's instructions.
Do not tow a four-wheel-drive
vehicle with any of its wheels on 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the
the ground. dolly.
10-88 Vehicle Care
Appearance Care Caution (Continued)

washed. This could cause damage
that would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Exterior Care products can be obtained from
your dealer. Follow all If using an automatic car wash,
Locks manufacturer directions regarding follow the car wash instructions. The
Locks are lubricated at the factory. correct product usage, necessary windshield wiper and rear window
Use a de-icing agent only when safety precautions, and wiper, if equipped, must be off.
absolutely necessary, and have the appropriate disposal of any Remove any accessories that may
locks greased after using. See be damaged or interfere with the car
vehicle care product.
Recommended Fluids and wash equipment.
Lubricants on page 11-11. Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
Washing the Vehicle { Caution cleaning agents completely. If they
To preserve the vehicle's finish, are allowed to dry on the surface,
wash it often and out of direct Avoid using high-pressure they could stain.
sunlight. washes closer than 30 cm (12 in)
to the surface of the vehicle. Use Dry the finish with a soft, clean
of power washers exceeding chamois or an all-cotton towel to
{ Caution 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
Do not use petroleum-based, in damage or removal of paint
acidic, or abrasive cleaning and decals. Finish Care
agents as they can damage the Application of aftermarket clearcoat
vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic The e symbol is on any sealant/wax materials is not
parts. If damage occurs, it would underhood compartment electrical recommended. If painted surfaces
not be covered by the vehicle center that should not be power are damaged, see your dealer to
warranty. Approved cleaning have the damage assessed and
(Continued) repaired. Foreign materials such as
Vehicle Care 10-89
calcium chloride and other salts, ice The bright metal moldings on the
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree Caution (Continued) vehicle are aluminum or stainless
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from steel. To prevent damage always
industrial chimneys, etc., can may damage it. Use only follow these cleaning instructions:
damage the vehicle's finish if they non-abrasive waxes and polishes
. Be sure the molding is cool to
remain on painted surfaces. Wash that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the the touch before applying any
the vehicle as soon as possible. cleaning solution.
If necessary, use non-abrasive vehicle.
cleaners that are marked safe for . Use a cleaning solution
painted surfaces to remove foreign approved for aluminum or
To keep the paint finish looking new,
matter. keep the vehicle garaged or stainless steel. Some cleaners
covered whenever possible. are highly acidic or contain
Occasional hand waxing or mild alkaline substances and can
polishing should be done to remove Protecting Exterior Bright Metal damage the moldings.
residue from the paint finish. See Moldings
your dealer for approved cleaning . Always dilute a concentrated
products. cleaner according to the
Do not apply waxes or polishes to
{ Caution manufacturers instructions.
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, Failure to clean and protect the
. Do not use chrome cleaners.
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint bright metal moldings can result . Do not use cleaners that are not
as damage can occur. in a hazy white finish or pitting. intended for automotive use.
This damage would not be . Use a nonabrasive wax on the
{ Caution covered by the vehicle warranty. vehicle after washing to protect
Machine compounding or and extend the molding finish.
aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
(Continued)
10-90 Vehicle Care
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

. Aftermarket appearance caps or Windshield and Wiper Blades
Lenses, Emblems, Decals, and covers while the lamps are
illuminated, due to excessive Clean the outside of the windshield
Stripes heat generated. with glass cleaner.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps, lenses,
{ Caution cloth or paper towel soaked with
windshield washer fluid or a mild
emblems, decals, and stripes. Failure to clean lamps properly detergent. Wash the windshield
Follow instructions under "Washing can cause damage to the lamp thoroughly when cleaning the
the Vehicle" previously in this cover that would not be covered blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
section. by the vehicle warranty. a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
Lamp covers are made of plastic, treatments may cause wiper
and some have a UV protective streaking.
coating. Do not clean or wipe them
when dry. { Caution Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged. Damage can be
Do not use any of the following on Using wax on low gloss black caused by extreme dusty
lamp covers: finish stripes can increase the conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,
gloss level and create a snow, and ice.
. Abrasive or caustic agents.
non-uniform finish. Clean low Weatherstrips
. Washer fluids and other cleaning gloss stripes with soap and
agents in higher concentrations water only. Apply Dielectric silicone grease on
than suggested by the weatherstrips to make them last
manufacturer. longer, seal better, and not stick or
. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, Air Intakes squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at
or other harsh cleaners. Clear debris from the air intakes, least once a year. Hot, dry climates
between the hood and windshield, may require more frequent
. Ice scrapers or other hard items. application. Black marks from
when washing the vehicle.
rubber material on painted surfaces
Vehicle Care 10-91
can be removed by rubbing with a

clean cloth. See Recommended { Caution Caution (Continued)
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11-11. Chrome wheels and other chrome automatic car wash that uses
trim may be damaged if the silicone carbide tire cleaning
Tires vehicle is not washed after driving brushes. Damage could occur
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to on roads that have been sprayed and the repairs would not be
clean the tires. with magnesium, calcium, covered by the vehicle warranty.
or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for
{ Caution conditions such as ice and dust.
Brake System
Using petroleum-based tire Always wash the chrome with Visually inspect brake lines and
dressing products on the vehicle soap and water after exposure. hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
may damage the paint finish and/
disc brake pads for wear and rotors
or tires. When applying a tire
for surface condition. Inspect drum
dressing, always wipe off any
overspray from all painted
{ Caution brake linings/shoes for wear or
cracks. Inspect other brake parts,
surfaces on the vehicle. To avoid surface damage, do not including drums, wheel cylinders,
use strong soaps, chemicals, calipers, parking brake, master
Wheels and Trim Aluminum abrasive polishes, cleaners, cylinder, brake fluid reservoir,
or Chrome brushes, or cleaners that vacuum pipes, electric vacuum
contain acid on aluminum or pump including bracket and vent
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild chrome-plated wheels. Use only hose, if equipped.
soap and water to clean the wheels. approved cleaners. Also, never
After rinsing thoroughly with clean drive a vehicle with aluminum or
water, dry with a soft, clean towel. chrome-plated wheels through an
A wax may then be applied.
(Continued)
10-92 Vehicle Care
Steering, Suspension, and with power running boards, extend

Chassis Components { Caution them and then use a high pressure
wash to clean all joints and gaps.
Visually inspect steering, Lubrication of applicable steering/
suspension, and chassis suspension points should not be Sheet Metal Damage
components for damaged, loose, done unless the temperature is If the vehicle is damaged and
or missing parts or signs of wear at 12 C (10 F) or higher, requires sheet metal repair or
least once a year. or damage could result. replacement, make sure the body
Inspect power steering for proper repair shop applies anti-corrosion
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, Body Component Lubrication material to parts repaired or
chafing, etc. replaced to restore corrosion
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, protection.
Visually check constant velocity joint hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steel
boots and axle seals for leaks. fuel door hinge and power assist Original manufacturer replacement
For 1500 Series vehicles, at least step hinges, unless the components parts will provide the corrosion
every other oil change lubricate the are plastic. Applying silicone grease protection while maintaining the
outer tie rod ends. on weatherstrips with a clean cloth vehicle warranty.
will make them last longer, seal Finish Damage
Control arm ball joints on
better, and not stick or squeak.
1500 Series vehicles are Quickly repair minor chips and
maintenance-free. Underbody Maintenance scratches with touch-up materials
At least twice a year, spring and fall, available from your dealer to avoid
use plain water to flush any corrosion. Larger areas of finish
corrosive materials from the damage can be corrected in your
underbody. Take care to thoroughly dealer's body and paint shop.
clean any areas where mud and
other debris can collect. If equipped
Vehicle Care 10-93
Chemical Paint Spotting Your dealer may have products for

. Never use a brush with stiff
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners bristles.
Airborne pollutants can fall upon
specifically designed for the . Never rub any surface
and attack painted vehicle surfaces
surfaces being cleaned to prevent aggressively or with excessive
causing blotchy, ring-shaped
permanent damage. Apply all pressure.
discolorations, and small, irregular
cleaners directly to the cleaning
dark spots etched into the paint . Do not use laundry detergents or
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
surface. See Finish Care dishwashing soaps with
on any switches or controls.
previously in this section. degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
Cleaners should be removed
quickly. Never allow cleaners to use approximately 20 drops per
Interior Care remain on the surface being 3.8 L (1 gal) of water.
cleaned for extended periods A concentrated soap solution will
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, leave a residue that creates
regularly clean the vehicle's interior. of time.
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
Immediately remove any soils. Note Cleaners may contain solvents that use solutions that contain strong
that newspapers or dark garments can become concentrated in the or caustic soap.
that can transfer color to home interior. Before using cleaners, read
furnishings can also permanently and adhere to all safety instructions
. Do not heavily saturate the
transfer color to the vehicle's on the label. While cleaning the upholstery when cleaning.
interior. interior, maintain adequate . Do not use solvents or cleaners
Use a soft bristle brush to remove ventilation by opening the doors and containing solvents.
dust from knobs and crevices on the windows.
instrument cluster. Using a mild
Interior Glass
To prevent damage, do not clean
soap solution, immediately remove the interior using the following To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect cleaners or techniques: dampened with water. Wipe droplets
repellent from all interior surfaces or left behind with a clean dry cloth.
permanent damage may result.
. Never use a razor or any other Commercial glass cleaners may be
sharp object to remove a soil used, if necessary, after cleaning
from any interior surface. the interior glass with plain water.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the

{ Caution Start by vacuuming the surface
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to
To prevent scratching, never use using a soft brush attachment. If a
a clean area frequently to
abrasive cleaners on automotive rotating brush attachment is being
prevent forcing the soil in to the
glass. Abrasive cleaners or used during vacuuming, only use it
fabric.
aggressive cleaning may damage on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
the rear window defogger. gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no
following techniques: longer any color transfer from
Cleaning the windshield with water the soil to the cleaning cloth.
during the first three to six months
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
of ownership will reduce tendency towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely
to fog. more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap
solution followed only by plain
. For solid soils, remove as much
Speaker Covers water.
as possible prior to vacuuming.
Vacuum around a speaker cover If the soil is not completely
To clean:
gently, so that the speaker will not removed, it may be necessary to
be damaged. Clean spots with just 1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
water and mild soap. colorfast cloth with water. cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
Microfiber cloth is recommended hidden area for colorfastness before
Coated Moldings to prevent lint transfer to the using a commercial upholstery
Coated moldings should be cleaned. fabric or carpet. cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
2. Remove excess moisture by formation occurs, clean the entire
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a fabric or carpet.
sponge or soft lint-free cloth gently wringing until water does
dampened with water. not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
. When heavily soiled, use warm excess moisture.
soapy water.
Vehicle Care 10-95
Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces Instrument Panel, Leather,

and Vehicle Information and Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Caution (Continued)
Radio Displays Low Gloss Paint Surfaces and solvents can permanently change
For vehicles with high gloss Natural Open Pore Wood the appearance and feel of
surfaces or vehicle displays, use a Surfaces leather or soft trim, and are not
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. Use a soft microfiber cloth recommended.
Before wiping the surface with the dampened with water to remove
microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle dust and loose dirt. For a more Do not use cleaners that increase
brush to remove dirt that could thorough cleaning, use a soft gloss, especially on the instrument
scratch the surface. Then use the microfiber cloth dampened with a panel. Reflected glare can decrease
microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to mild soap solution. visibility through the windshield
clean. Never use window cleaners
under certain conditions.
or solvents. Periodically hand wash
the microfiber cloth separately,
{ Caution
using mild soap. Do not use bleach Soaking or saturating leather, { Caution
or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly especially perforated leather, as
and air dry before next use. Use of air fresheners may cause
well as other interior surfaces, permanent damage to plastics
may cause permanent damage. and painted surfaces. If an air
{ Caution Wipe excess moisture from these freshener comes in contact with
surfaces after cleaning and allow any plastic or painted surface in
Do not attach a device with a
them to dry naturally. Never use the vehicle, blot immediately and
suction cup to the display. This
heat, steam, or spot removers. clean with a soft cloth dampened
may cause damage and would
Do not use cleaners that contain with a mild soap solution.
not be covered by the vehicle
silicone or wax-based products. Damage caused by air fresheners
warranty.
Cleaners containing these would not be covered by the
(Continued) vehicle warranty.
10-96 Vehicle Care

. Do not use a floor mat if the
Cargo Cover and Floor Mats vehicle is not equipped with a
Convenience Net
floor mat retainer on the driver
Wash with warm water and mild { Warning side floor.
detergent. Do not use chlorine
bleach. Rinse with cold water, and If a floor mat is the wrong size or . Use the floor mat with the
then dry completely. is not properly installed, it can correct side up. Do not turn
interfere with the pedals. it over.
Care of Safety Belts Interference with the pedals can . Do not place anything on top of
Keep belts clean and dry. cause unintended acceleration the driver side floor mat.
and/or increased stopping . Use only a single floor mat on
{ Warning distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
the driver side.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. mat does not interfere with the
. Do not place one floor mat on
It may severely weaken them. In pedals. top of another.
a crash, they might not be able to Removing and Replacing the
provide adequate protection. Use the following guidelines for Floor Mats
Clean safety belts only with mild proper floor mat usage:
soap and lukewarm water. Pull up on the rear of the driver side
. The original equipment floor floor mat to unlock each retainer
mats were designed for your and remove.
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the pedals. Always
check that the floor mats do not
interfere with the pedals.
Vehicle Care 10-97
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat

retainer openings over the carpet
retainers and snapping into position.
Make sure the floor mat is properly
secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the pedals.
10-98 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Maintenance Schedule
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance. It may
{ Caution
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of Damage caused by improper
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the maintenance can lead to costly
Special Application Services responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application repairs and may not be covered
all required maintenance performed. by the vehicle warranty.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Your dealer has trained technicians Maintenance intervals, checks,
Additional Maintenance who can perform required inspections, recommended fluids,
and Care maintenance using genuine and lubricants are important to
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have keep the vehicle in good working
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 up-to-date tools and equipment for condition.
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids, dealers have extended evening and
Lubricants, and Parts Saturday hours, courtesy The Tire Rotation and Required
Recommended Fluids and transportation, and online Services are the responsibility of the
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 scheduling to assist with service vehicle owner. It is recommended to
Maintenance Replacement needs. have your dealer perform these
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Your dealer recognizes the Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records importance of providing keep the vehicle in good working
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14 competitively priced maintenance condition, improves fuel economy,
and repair services. With trained and reduces vehicle emissions.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use The Additional Required Services -

vehicles, maintenance needs vary. Severe are for vehicles that are: { Warning
There may need to be more . Mainly driven in heavy city traffic
frequent checks and services. The Performing maintenance work can
in hot weather. be dangerous and can cause
Additional Required Services -
Normal are for vehicles that: . Mainly driven in hilly or serious injury. Perform
mountainous terrain. maintenance work only if the
. Carry passengers and cargo required information, proper tools,
within recommended limits on . Frequently towing a trailer.
and equipment are available.
the Tire and Loading Information . Used for high speed or If they are not, see your dealer to
label. See Vehicle Load Limits competitive driving. have a trained technician do the
on page 9-14.
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery work. See Doing Your Own
. Are driven on reasonable road service. Service Work on page 10-4.
surfaces within legal driving
limits. Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
. Use the recommended fuel. See Required Services - Severe chart.
Fuel on page 9-69.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services - Normal chart.

. Check engine coolant level. See
Maintenance for up to a year. The engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once Engine Coolant on page 10-16.
Schedule a year and the oil life system must . Check windshield washer fluid
be reset. Your trained dealer level. See Washer Fluid on
Owner Checks and Services technician can perform this work. page 10-21.
At Each Fuel Stop If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
. Visually inspect windshield wiper
. Check the engine oil level. See within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the blades for wear, cracking,
Engine Oil on page 10-7. last service. Reset the oil life or contamination. See Exterior
system when the oil is changed. Care on page 10-88. Replace
Once a Month worn or damaged wiper blades.
See Engine Oil Life System on
. Check the tire inflation page 10-10. See Wiper Blade Replacement
pressures. See Tire Pressure on on page 10-29.
page 10-53. Tire Rotation and Required . Check tire inflation pressures.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See Services Every 12 000 km/ See Tire Pressure on
Tire Inspection on page 10-60. 7,500 mi page 10-53.
. Check the windshield washer Rotate the tires, if recommended for . Inspect tire wear. See Tire
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on the vehicle, and perform the Inspection on page 10-60.
page 10-21. following services. See Tire .
Rotation on page 10-60. Visually check for fluid leaks.
Engine Oil Change . Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
. Check engine oil level and oil
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL life percentage. If needed, See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
SOON message displays, have the change engine oil and filter, and page 10-14.
engine oil and filter changed within reset oil life system. See Engine . Inspect brake system. See
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven Oil on page 10-7 and Engine Oil Exterior Care on page 10-88.
under the best conditions, the Life System on page 10-10.
engine oil life system may not
indicate the need for vehicle service

. Visually inspect steering, . Check automatic transmission . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
suspension, and chassis shift lock control function. See if equipped. See Sunroof on
components for damaged, loose, Automatic Transmission Shift page 2-34.
or missing parts or signs of wear Lock Control Function Check on . Verify spare tire key lock
at least once a year. See page 10-28. operation and lubricate as
Exterior Care on page 10-88. . Check ignition transmission lock. needed. See Tire Changing on
Lubricate the suspension and See Ignition Transmission Lock page 10-69.
steering components at least Check on page 10-28.
every other oil change (if
equipped with grease fittings). . Check parking brake and
automatic transmission park
. Check restraint system mechanism. See Park Brake and
components. See Safety System P (Park) Mechanism Check on
Check on page 3-29. page 10-29.
. Visually inspect fuel system for . Check accelerator pedal for
damage or leaks. damage, high effort, or binding.
. Visually inspect exhaust system Replace if needed.
and nearby heat shields for . Visually inspect gas strut for
loose or damaged parts. signs of wear, cracks, or other
. Lubricate body components. See damage. Check the hold open
Exterior Care on page 10-88. ability of the strut. See your
. Check starter switch. See Starter dealer if service is required.
Switch Check on page 10-28.
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
4WD. (4)
@
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @ @ @
Footnotes Maintenance traffic, poor air quality, areas with Service location can help you
Schedule Additional Required high dust levels or are sensitive to determine when it is the right time to
Services - Normal environmental allergens. Filter replace your filter.
(1) Or every two years, whichever replacement may also be needed if (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
comes first. More frequent you notice reduced airflow, windows and hoses for proper hook-up,
replacement may be needed if the fogging up, or odors. Your local GM routing, and condition.
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
(3) Or every four years, whichever

comes first. If driving in dusty
conditions, inspect the filter at each
oil change or more often as needed.
(4) Do not directly power wash the
transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the
seals and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.
(5) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10-15.
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. Inspect for fraying,
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.
(7) Or every three years, whichever
comes first.
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
4WD. (4)
@ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @ @ @
Footnotes Maintenance vehicle is driven in areas with heavy fogging up, or odors. Your local GM
Schedule Additional Required traffic, poor air quality, areas with Service location can help you
Services - Severe high dust levels or are sensitive to determine when it is the right time to
(1) Or every two years, whichever environmental allergens. Filter replace your filter.
comes first. More frequent replacement may also be needed if
replacement may be needed if the you notice reduced airflow, windows
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines Special Application Additional
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition. Services Maintenance and Care
(3) Or every four years, whichever . Severe Commercial Use Your vehicle is an important
comes first. If driving in dusty Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis investment and caring for it properly
conditions, inspect the filter at each components every 5 000 km/ may help to avoid future costly
oil change or more often as needed. 3,000 mi. repairs. To maintain vehicle
(4) Do not directly power wash the . Have underbody flushing service performance, additional
transfer case output seals. High performed. See "Underbody maintenance services may be
pressure water can overcome the Maintenance" in Exterior Care required.
seals and contaminate the transfer on page 10-88. It is recommended that your dealer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will perform these services their
decrease the life of the transfer trained dealer technicians know
case and should be replaced. your vehicle best. Your dealer can
(5) Or every five years, whichever also perform a thorough
comes first. See Cooling System on assessment with a multi-point
page 10-15. inspection to recommend when your
vehicle may need attention.
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. Inspect for fraying, The following list is intended to
excessive cracking, or damage; explain the services and conditions
replace, if needed. to look for that may indicate
services are required.
(7) Or every three years, whichever
comes first.
Battery
. Signs of brake wear may include With a multi-point inspection, your
chirping, grinding, or squealing dealer can inspect the hoses and
The 12-volt battery supplies power noises, or difficulty stopping.
to start the engine and operate any advise if replacement is needed.
additional electrical accessories.
. Trained dealer technicians have Lamps
access to tools and equipment
. To avoid break-down or failure to to inspect the brakes and Properly working headlamps,
start the vehicle, maintain a recommend quality parts taillamps, and brake lamps are
battery with full cranking power. engineered for the vehicle. important to see and be seen on
. Trained dealer technicians have the road.
Fluids
the diagnostic equipment to test . Signs that the headlamps need
the battery and ensure that the Proper fluid levels and approved attention include dimming, failure
connections and cables are fluids protect the vehicles systems to light, cracking, or damage.
corrosion-free. and components. See The brake lamps need to be
Recommended Fluids and checked periodically to ensure
Belts Lubricants on page 11-11 for GM that they light when braking.
. Belts may need replacing if they approved fluids.
squeak or show signs of
. With a multi-point inspection,
. Engine oil and windshield your dealer can check the lamps
cracking or splitting. washer fluid levels should be and note any concerns.
. Trained dealer technicians have checked at every fuel fill.
access to tools and equipment Shocks and Struts
. Instrument cluster lights may
to inspect the belts and come on to indicate that fluids Shocks and struts help aid in control
recommend adjustment or may be low and need to be for a smoother ride.
replacement when necessary. filled. . Signs of wear may include
Brakes Hoses steering wheel vibration, bounce/
Brakes stop the vehicle and are sway while braking, longer
Hoses transport fluids and should stopping distance, or uneven
crucial to safe driving. be regularly inspected to ensure tire wear.
that there are no cracks or leaks.

. As part of the multi-point vehicle operation at all speeds. Windshield
inspection, trained dealer Your dealer sells and services
technicians can visually inspect For safety, appearance, and the
name brand tires. best viewing, keep the windshield
the shocks and struts for signs
of leaking, blown seals, Vehicle Care clean and clear.
or damage, and can advise To help keep the vehicle looking like . Signs of damage include
when service is needed. new, vehicle care products are scratches, cracks, and chips.
Tires available from your dealer. For . Trained dealer technicians can
information on how to clean and inspect the windshield and
Tires need to be properly inflated, protect the vehicles interior and recommend proper replacement
rotated, and balanced. Maintaining exterior, see Interior Care on if needed.
the tires can save money and fuel, page 10-93 and Exterior Care on
and can reduce the risk of tire page 10-88. Wiper Blades
failure.
Wheel Alignment Wiper blades need to be cleaned
. Signs that the tires need to be and kept in good condition to
replaced include three or more Wheel alignment is critical for provide a clear view.
visible treadwear indicators; cord ensuring that the tires deliver
optimal wear and performance.
. Signs of wear include streaking,
or fabric showing through the
skipping across the windshield,
rubber; cracks or cuts in the . Signs that the alignment may and worn or split rubber.
tread or sidewall; or a bulge or need to be adjusted include
split in the tire. pulling, improper vehicle
. Trained dealer technicians can
handling, or unusual tire wear. check the wiper blades and
. Trained dealer technicians can
replace them when needed.
inspect and recommend the right . Your dealer has the required
tires. Your dealer can also equipment to ensure proper
provide tire/wheel balancing wheel alignment.
services to ensure smooth
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE
viscosity grade. Look for the dexos1 approved logo for GM approved
engine oil. See Engine Oil on page 10-7.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-16.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in
Canada 19299819).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Front Axle (Four-Wheel Drive) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, in
Canada 89021678).
Rear Axle SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, in
Canada 19300458).
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Propshaft Spline or Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 19257121, in
One-Piece Propshaft Spline Canada 19257122).
(Two-Wheel Drive with Auto. Trans.)
Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Power Assist Steps, and Outer Canada 10953474).
Tailgate Handle Pivot Points
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in
Canada 10953437).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22845992 A3181C
Oil Filter 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 22808781 CF188
Spark Plugs 12622441 41-114
Wiper Blades
Driver Side 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331
Passenger Side 55 cm (21.7 in) 22756331
Rear 33 cm (13.0 in) 22956295
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See Engine Specifications
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-11 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System 16.5 L 17.4 qt
Engine Oil with Filter 7.6 L 8.0 qt
Fuel Tank
Short Wheelbase 98.4 L 26.0 gal
Long Wheelbase 119.2 L 31.5 gal
Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap
5.3L V8 C 0.951.10mm
(0.0370.043 in)
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing

Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-8 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
Radio Frequency or parts manager, contact the owner
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-12 of your dealership or the general
Radio Frequency manager.
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 3033 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 600
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program Arlington, VA 22201
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an http://www.bbb.org/council/
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered programs-services/
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business dispute-handling-and-resolution/
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive bbb-auto-line
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle This program is available in all
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may 50 states and the District of
be required to resort to this informal Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
. Dealership name and location. vehicle age, mileage, and other
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the factors. General Motors reserves
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
the right to change eligibility over courts in most jurisdictions Customer Assistance
limitations and/or discontinue its because it is informal, quick, and
participation in this program. free of charge.
Offices
STEP THREE Canadian For further information concerning Chevrolet encourages customers to
Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor call the toll-free number for
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), assistance. However, if a customer
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care the letter should be addressed to:
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), United States and Puerto Rico
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French),
participation in a no-charge or write to: Chevrolet Motor Division
Mediation/Arbitration Program. Chevrolet Customer
The Mediation/Arbitration Program Assistance Center
General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration P.O. Box 33170
General Motors of Canada Limited Detroit, MI 48232-5170
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005
factory-related vehicle service www.Chevrolet.com
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 1-800-222-1020
the review of the facts involved by 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied Telephone Devices (TTYs))
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification Roadside Assistance:
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). 1-800-243-8872
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time From U.S. Virgin Islands:
you file your complaint to the final 1-800-496-9994
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
Canada Assistance Center. Any TTY user in D : Select a preferred dealer and
the U.S. can communicate with view locations, maps, phone
General Motors of Canada Limited
Chevrolet by dialing: numbers, and hours.
Customer Care Centre,
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. r : Track your vehicles warranty
1908 Colonel Sam Drive information.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca Online Owner Center J: View active recalls by Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). See
1-800-263-3777 (English) Online Owner Experience Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
1-800-263-7854 (French) (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com on page 12-1.
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
The Chevrolet online owner H: View GM Card, SiriusXM
experience allows interaction with Satellite radio, and OnStar account
Roadside Assistance:
Chevrolet and keeps important information (if equipped).
1-800-268-6800
vehicle-specific information in
one place.
F : Chat with online help
Overseas representatives.
Please contact the local General Membership Benefits See my.chevrolet.com to register
Motors Business Unit. E: Download owner manuals and your vehicle.
view vehicle-specific how-to videos.
Customer Assistance for Chevrolet Owner Centre
G: View maintenance schedules, (Canada) chevroletowner.ca
Text Telephone (TTY) alerts, and OnStar Vehicle
Users Diagnostic Information. Schedule Visit the Chevrolet Owner Centre:
service appointments. . Chat live with online help
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired I: View and print dealer-recorded representatives.
and who use Text Telephones service records and self-recorded . Locate owner resources such as
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY service records. lease-end, financing, and
equipment available at its Customer warranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles, For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
quizzes, tips, and multimedia offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
galleries organized into the When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Featured Articles and Auto Care have the following information
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Sections. ready:
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Download owner manuals. 1-800-833-9935. . Your name, home address, and
home telephone number.
. Find the General Motors of Canada also has
a Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.ca . Telephone number of your
Chevrolet-recommended
maintenance services. or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) location.
for details. TTY users call . Location of the vehicle.
GM Mobility 1-800-263-3830.
. Model, year, color, and license
Reimbursement Program Roadside Assistance plate number of the vehicle.
Program . Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call delivery date of the vehicle.
1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone
(TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)
. Description of the problem.
For Canadian-purchased vehicles, Coverage
call 1-800-268-6800. Services are provided up to 5 years/
This program is available to Service is available 24 hours a day, 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
qualified applicants for cost 365 days a year. comes first.
reimbursement of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment In the U.S., anyone driving the
required for the vehicle, such as vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
hand controls or a wheelchair/ person driving the vehicle without
scooter lift for the vehicle. permission from the owner is not
covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of

. Emergency Tow from a Public rental car, or a vehicle being
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Road or Highway: Tow to the delivered back to the customer,
General Motors North America and nearest Chevrolet dealer for up to 805km (500mi).
Chevrolet reserve the right to make warranty service, or if the vehicle
any changes or discontinue the was in a crash and cannot be Services Not Included in
Roadside Assistance program at driven. Assistance is not given Roadside Assistance
any time without notification. when the vehicle is stuck in the . Impound towing caused by
sand, mud, or snow. violation of any laws.
General Motors North America and
Chevrolet reserve the right to limit
. Flat Tire Change: Service to . Legal fines.
services or payment to an owner or change a flat tire with the spare
. Mounting, dismounting,
driver if they decide the claims are tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
made too often, or the same type of must be in good condition and or changing of snow tires,
claim is made many times. properly inflated. It is the owner's chains, or other traction devices.
responsibility for the repair or Service is not provided if a vehicle
Services Provided replacement of the tire if it is not is in an area that is not accessible
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: covered by the warranty. to the service vehicle or is not a
Delivery of enough fuel for the . Battery Jump Start: Service to regularly traveled or maintained
vehicle to get to the nearest jump start a dead battery. public road, which includes ice and
service station. winter roads. Off-road use is not
. Trip Interruption Benefits and covered.
. Lock-Out Service: Service to Assistance: If your trip is
unlock the vehicle if you are interrupted due to a warranty Services Specific to
locked out. A remote unlock may event, incidental expenses may Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
be available if you have OnStar. be reimbursed within the
For security reasons, the driver Powertrain warranty period.
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
must present identification Items considered are reasonable is up to 7 liters. Diesel fuel
before this service is given. and customary hotel, meals, delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
parts and labor for repairs not Courtesy Transportation
covered by the warranty are the
. owner responsibility.
Program
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over To enhance your ownership
150 kilometers from where your Scheduling Service experience, we and our participating
trip was started to qualify. Appointments dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
General Motors of Transportation, a customer support
Canada Limited requires When the vehicle requires warranty program for vehicles with the
pre-authorization, original service, contact your dealer and Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
detailed receipts, and a copy of request an appointment. By Coverage period in Canada),
the repair orders. Once scheduling a service appointment extended powertrain, and/or
authorization has been received, and advising the service consultant hybrid-specific warranties in both
the Roadside Assistance advisor of your transportation needs, your the U.S. and Canada.
will help to make arrangements dealer can help minimize your
Several Courtesy Transportation
and explain how to receive inconvenience.
options are available to assist in
payment. If the vehicle cannot be scheduled reducing inconvenience when
. Alternative Service: If into the service department warranty repairs are required.
assistance cannot be provided immediately, keep driving it until it
Courtesy Transportation is not a
right away, the Roadside can be scheduled for service,
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Assistance advisor may give unless, of course, the problem is
Warranty. A separate booklet
permission to get local safety related. If it is, please call
entitled Limited Warranty and
emergency road service. You will your dealership, let them know this,
Owner Assistance Information
receive payment, up to $100, and ask for instructions.
furnished with each new vehicle
after sending the original receipt If your dealer requests you to bring provides detailed warranty coverage
to Roadside Assistance. the vehicle for service, you are information.
Mechanical failures may be urged to do so as early in the work
covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for
same-day repair.
Transportation Options and be supported by original Additional Program

receipts. See your dealer for Information
Warranty service can generally be
information.
completed while you wait. However, All program options, such as shuttle
if you are unable to do so, your Courtesy Rental Vehicle service, may not be available at
dealer may offer the following every dealer. Contact your dealer
For an overnight warranty repair, the
transportation options: for specific availability.
dealer may provide an available
Shuttle Service courtesy rental vehicle or provide for General Motors reserves the right to
reimbursement of a rental vehicle. unilaterally modify, change,
This includes one-way or round-trip
Reimbursement is limited and must or discontinue Courtesy
shuttle service within reasonable
be supported by original receipts as Transportation at any time and to
time and distance parameters of
well as a signed and completed resolve all questions of claim
your dealer's area.
rental agreement and meet state/ eligibility pursuant to the terms and
Public Transportation or Fuel provincial, local, and rental vehicle conditions described herein at its
Reimbursement provider requirements. sole discretion.
Requirements vary and may include
If overnight warranty repairs are
needed, and public transportation is
minimum age requirements, Collision Damage Repair
insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
used, the expense must be If the vehicle is involved in a
Additional fees such as fuel usage
supported by original receipts and collision and it is damaged, have the
charges, taxes, levies, usage fees,
within the maximum amount allowed damage repaired by a qualified
excessive mileage, or rental usage
by GM for shuttle service. If U.S. technician using the proper
beyond the completion of the repair
customers arrange their own equipment and quality replacement
are also your responsibility.
transportation, limited parts. Poorly performed collision
reimbursement for reasonable fuel It may not be possible to provide a repairs diminish the vehicle resale
expenses may be available. Claim like vehicle as a courtesy rental. value, and safety performance can
amounts should reflect actual costs be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any center that has GM-trained
related failures are not covered by technicians and comparable
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
that warranty. equipment.
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the Aftermarket collision parts are also Insuring the Vehicle
parts with which the vehicle was available. These are made by
originally built. Genuine GM companies other than GM and may Protect your investment in the GM
Collision parts are the best choice to not have been tested for the vehicle. vehicle with comprehensive and
ensure that the vehicle's designed As a result, these parts may fit collision insurance coverage. There
appearance, durability, and safety poorly, exhibit premature durability/ are significant differences in the
are preserved. The use of Genuine corrosion problems, and may not quality of coverage afforded by
GM parts can help maintain the GM perform properly in subsequent various insurance policy terms.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. collisions. Aftermarket parts are not Many insurance policies provide
covered by the GM New Vehicle reduced protection to the GM
Recycled original equipment parts vehicle by limiting compensation for
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
may also be used for repair. These damage repairs through the use of
failure related to such parts is not
parts are typically removed from aftermarket collision parts. Some
covered by that warranty.
vehicles that were total losses in insurance companies will not
prior crashes. In most cases, the Repair Facility specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts being recycled are from When purchasing insurance, we
undamaged sections of the vehicle. GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that recommend that you ensure that the
A recycled original equipment GM vehicle will be repaired with GM
part may be an acceptable choice to meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your dealer original equipment collision parts.
maintain the vehicle's originally If such insurance coverage is not
designed appearance and safety may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and available from your current
performance; however, the history of insurance carrier, consider switching
these parts is not known. Such parts state-of-the-art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair to another insurance carrier.
are not covered by the GM New
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment In the event that the vehicle requires
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
Genuine Manufacturer replacement .
that you take an active role in its
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
you may be charged at the end of repair facility of choice, take the
the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year.
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
leave the scene of a crash until all
. Insurance company and policy recycled parts will not be covered by
matters have been taken care of.
number. the GM vehicle warranty.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
officer. Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
to police and other parties involved See Collision Parts earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
in the crash. section. the repair professional, and insist on
For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Roadside Assistance Program on Will You See after an Airbag if the vehicle is leased, you may be
page 13-5. Inflates? on page 3-36. obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance General Motors cars and trucks. Current and Past Models
company is paying for the repairs, Each bulletin contains instructions
Technical Service Bulletins and
you are not obligated to accept a to assist in the diagnosis and
Manuals are available for current
repair valuation based on that service of the vehicle.
and past model GM vehicles.
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no Owner Information ORDER TOLL FREE:
contractual limits with that company. Owner publications are written 1-800-551-4123 Monday Friday
In such cases, you can have control specifically for owners and intended 8:00 AM 6:00 PM Eastern Time
of the repair and parts choices as to provide basic operational For Credit Card Orders Only
long as the cost stays within information about the vehicle. (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
reasonable limits. The Owner Manual includes the Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Maintenance Schedule for all
Service Publications models. Or write to:
Ordering Information In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Helm, Incorporated
Owner Manual, and Warranty Attention: Customer Service
(US and Canada Only) 47911 Halyard Drive
Manual.
Service Manuals Plymouth, MI 48170
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $40.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Prices are subject to change without
and repair information on the shipping fees. notice and without incurring
engines, transmission, axle, obligation. Allow ample time for
Without Pouch: Owner Manual only. delivery.
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc. RETAIL SELL PRICE: All listed prices are quoted in
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and U.S. funds. Make checks payable
Service Bulletins shipping fees. in U.S. funds.
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
Radio Frequency Radio Frequency Reporting Safety

Identification (RFID) Statement Defects
RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that Reporting Safety Defects
pressure monitoring and ignition complies with Part 15/Part 18 of
system security, as well as in the Federal Communications
to the United States
connection with conveniences such Commission (FCC) rules and with Government
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Industry Canada Standards If you believe that your vehicle
transmitters for remote door locking/ RSS-GEN/210/216/220/251/310,
has a defect which could cause
unlocking and starting, and ICES001.
in-vehicle transmitters for garage a crash or could cause injury or
Operation is subject to the following death, you should immediately
door openers. RFID technology in two conditions:
GM vehicles does not use or record inform the National Highway
personal information or link with any 1. The device may not cause Traffic Safety Administration
other GM system containing harmful interference. (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
personal information. 2. The device must accept any General Motors.
interference received, including If NHTSA receives similar
interference that may cause complaints, it may open an
undesired operation of the
investigation, and if it finds that
device.
a safety defect exists in a group
Changes or modifications to any of of vehicles, it may order a recall
these systems by other than an and remedy campaign.
authorized service facility could void
However, NHTSA cannot
authorization to use this equipment.
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects
the Vehicle Safety Hotline to the Canadian to General Motors
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
http://www.safercar.gov; or If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
write to: believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors.
defect, notify Transport Canada Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA immediately, and notify General
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Chevrolet Motor Division
Motors of Canada Limited.
Washington, D.C. 20590 Chevrolet Customer
Call Transport Canada at
Assistance Center
You can also obtain other 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170
information about motor Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170
vehicle safety from Road Safety Branch
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
http://www.safercar.gov. 80 rue Noel
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a
better understanding of the
Recording and This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur.
Privacy main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near Note: EDR data are recorded by
The vehicle has a number of your vehicle only if a non-trivial
computers that record information crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road crash situation occurs; no data are
about the vehicles performance and recorded by the EDR under normal
how it is driven. For example, the obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicles driving conditions and no personal
vehicle uses computer modules to data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
monitor and control engine and systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to crash location) are recorded.
transmission performance, to However, other parties, such as law
monitor the conditions for airbag vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, enforcement, could combine the
deployment and deploy them in a EDR data with the type of
crash, and, if equipped, to provide typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to personally identifying data routinely
antilock braking to help the driver acquired during a crash
control the vehicle. These modules record such data as:
investigation.
may store data to help the dealer . How various systems in your
technician service the vehicle. vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR,
Some modules may also store data special equipment is required, and
about how the vehicle is operated,
. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
such as rate of fuel consumption or passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle
average speed. These modules may buckled/fastened; manufacturer, other parties, such as
retain personal preferences, such as . How far (if at all) the driver was law enforcement, that have the
radio presets, seat positions, and depressing the accelerator and/ special equipment, can read the
temperature settings. or brake pedal; and, information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
GM will not access these data or OnStar Infotainment System

share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or, If the vehicle is equipped with If the vehicle is equipped with a
if the vehicle is leased, with the OnStar and has an active navigation system as part of the
consent of the lessee; in response subscription, additional data may be infotainment system, use of the
to an official request by police or collected through the OnStar system may result in the storage of
similar government office; as part of system. This includes information destinations, addresses, telephone
GM's defense of litigation through about the vehicles operation; numbers, and other trip information.
the discovery process; or, as collisions involving the vehicle; the See the infotainment manual for
required by law. Data that GM use of the vehicle and its features; information on stored data and for
collects or receives may also be and, in certain situations, the deletion instructions.
used for GM research needs or may location and approximate GPS
be made available to others for speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
research purposes, where a need is OnStar Terms and Conditions and
shown and the data is not tied to a Privacy Statement on the OnStar
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. website.
See OnStar Additional Information
on page 14-6.
2 NOTES
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview vehicle, including location

information. See OnStars Terms
and Conditions and Privacy
Statement for more details
OnStar Overview
including system limitations at
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
OnStar Services www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 The OnStar system status light is
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 next to the OnStar buttons. If the
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 = Voice Command Button status light is:
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Q Blue OnStar Button
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
. Solid Green: System is on.
> Emergency Button . Flashing Green: On a call.
OnStar Additional Information
OnStar Additional This vehicle may be equipped with a . Red: Indicates a problem.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live OnStar . Off: System is off. Press Q
Advisor for Emergency, Security, twice to speak with an OnStar
Navigation, Connection, and Advisor.
Diagnostic Services. OnStar
services may require a paid Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
subscription. OnStar requires the (1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
vehicle battery and electrical Advisor.
system, cellular service, and GPS
satellite signals to be available and
operating. OnStar acts as a link to
existing public emergency service
providers. OnStar may collect
information about you and your
14-2 OnStar
. Receive On-Demand
Press = to: Diagnostics for a check of the OnStar Services
. Make a call, end a call, vehicles key operating systems.
or answer an incoming call. . Receive Roadside Assistance.
Emergency
. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling With Automatic Crash Response,
. Manage WiFi Settings (if
voice commands. the OnStar system can
equipped).
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn automatically connect to an OnStar
Navigation voice commands. Press > to get a priority connection Emergency Advisor. The built-in
Requires a specific OnStar to an OnStar Emergency Advisor system can automatically connect to
subscription plan. available 24/7 to: help in certain crashes.
. Obtain the WiFi network name,
. Get help for an emergency. Press > to connect to an OnStar
or Service Set Identifier or SSID, . Be a Good Samaritan or Emergency Advisor. GPS
and passphrase (if equipped). respond to an AMBER Alert. technology is used to identify the
vehicle location and can provide
Press Q to connect to a live . Get assistance in severe important information to emergency
Advisor to: weather or other crisis and personnel. OnStar Emergency
evacuation routes. Advisors are trained to provide
. Verify account information or
update contact information. assistance and link to existing
public emergency service providers
. Get driving directions. Requires in emergency situations.
a specific OnStar
subscription plan. With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially
trained Crisis Advisors are available
24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to
provide a central point of contact,
assistance, and information if a
crisis occurs.
OnStar 14-3
Security 4. Follow the voice-guided 2. Say Repeat. System responds

commands. with the last direction given, then
OnStar provides services including responds with OnStar ready,
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote Using Voice Commands then a tone.
Ignition Block, and Roadside During a Planned Route
Assistance, if equipped. OnStar can Get My Destination
unlock the vehicle doors remotely, Cancel Route
1. Press =. System responds:
if equipped with automatic door 1. Press =. System responds:
locks, and can help police locate the OnStar ready, then a tone.
OnStar ready, then a tone.
vehicle if it is stolen. Say Cancel route. System 2. Say Get my destination.
responds: Do you want to System responds with the
Navigation cancel directions? address and the distance to the
destination, then responds with
OnStar navigation requires a 2. Say Yes. System responds: OnStar ready, then a tone.
specific OnStar subscription plan. OK, request completed, thank
you, goodbye. Other Navigation Services
Press Q to receive directions or Available from OnStar
have them sent to the vehicle Route Preview
navigation screen, if equipped. OnStar eNav: Subscribers can
Destinations can also be forwarded 1. Press =. System responds: send destinations from
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com. OnStar ready, then a tone. MapQuest.com to the vehicle
2. Say Route preview. System Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
Turn-by-Turn Navigation responds with the next three screen-based navigation system (if
maneuvers. equipped). When ready, the
1. Press Q to connect to a live
directions will be downloaded to
Advisor. Repeat the vehicle.
2. Request directions.
3. Directions are downloaded to OnStar ready, then a tone.
the vehicle.
14-4 OnStar
Destination Download: Press Q, WiFi Connectivity (If Equipped) pressure (if the vehicle is equipped
then request the Advisor to The vehicle has a WiFi hotspot that with the tire pressure monitoring
download directions to the provides a high-speed, wireless system); or activate remote horn
navigation system in the vehicle (if Internet connection to connect and lights. Also remote start the
equipped). After the call ends, press multiple mobile devices (data plan vehicle (if factory equipped) or
the Go button on the navigation required). unlock the doors from anywhere
screen to begin driving directions. with a wireless connection (if
1. To retrieve WiFi hotspot equipped with automatic locks).
If directions are downloaded to the information, press = and select With a required specific OnStar
navigation system, the route can or say WiFi settings. subscription plan, a destination can
only be canceled through the be sent to the vehicle. For OnStar
navigation system. 2. The WiFi settings will display the RemoteLink information and
WiFi network name/SSID, compatibility, see www.onstar.com
Destinations can also be passphrase, and level of
downloaded on the go. For (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
encryption.
information about eNav or OnStar RemoteLink Key Fob
Destination Download, see 3. To change the SSID or
Services
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or passphrase, press Q or call
www.onstar.ca (Canada). 1-888-4-ONSTAR to connect This feature is included for five
with an Advisor. years and allows for remote door
Connections lock/unlock (if equipped with
OnStar RemoteLink Mobile App automatic locks), remote start (if
The required specific Onstar (If Equipped) factory equipped), or activation of
subscription plan includes the horn and lights from anywhere with
Download the OnStar RemoteLink
services that follow to help a wireless signal. Download the app
mobile app to select Apple,
customers stay connected. and start using it any time during the
Android, and BlackBerry or
For coverage maps, see Windows 7 or 8 mobile devices. trial period to get started.
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or From the mobile device, check the
www.onstar.ca (Canada). vehicles fuel level, oil life, or tire
OnStar 14-5
OnStar Hands-Free Calling 3. Say 911 without pausing. 3. Say the entire number without
System responds: 911. pausing. System responds:
This service allows calls to be made
4. Say Call. System responds: Please say the name tag.
and received from the vehicle.
OK, dialing 911. 4. Pick a name tag. System
To Make a Call responds: About to store <name
Retrieve My Number tag>. Does that sound OK?
OnStar ready. 1. Press =. System responds: 5. Say Yes or say No to try
2. Say Call. System responds: OnStar ready. again. System responds: OK,
Call. Please say the name or 2. Say My number. System storing <name tag>.
number to call. responds: Your OnStar Place a Call Using a Stored
3. Say the entire number without Hands-Free Calling number is, Number
pausing, including a 1 and the then says the number.
area code. System responds: 1. Press =. System responds:
End a Call OnStar ready.
OK, calling.
Press =. System responds: Call 2. Say Call <name tag>. System
Calling 911 Emergency ended. responds: OK, calling
1. Press =. System responds: Store a Name Tag for Speed
<name tag>.
OnStar ready, followed by Dialing Verify Minutes and Expiration
a tone.
2. Say Call. System responds: 1. Press =. System responds: Press = and say Minutes then
Call. Please say the name or OnStar ready. Verify to check how many minutes
number to call. 2. Say Store. System responds: remain and their expiration date.
Please say the number you
would like to store.
14-6 OnStar
Diagnostics OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works

OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics can Information Automatic Crash Response,
perform a vehicle check every Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
month. It will check the engine, Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
transmission, antilock brakes, and Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
other major vehicle systems. It also Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
checks the tire pressures, if the eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
vehicle is equipped with the Tire can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
Pressure Monitoring System. If an account information. all OnStar services are available
On-Demand Diagnostics check is everywhere or on all vehicles. For
Selling/Transferring the more information, a full description
needed, press Q, and an Advisor Vehicle of OnStar services, system
can run a check.
Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR immediately limitations, and OnStar terms and
to terminate your OnStar services if conditions:
the vehicle is disposed of, sold, . Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
transferred, or if the lease ends. (1-888-466-7827).
Reactivation for Subsequent . See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
Owners . See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Press Q and follow the prompts to . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible. The Advisor will update
. Press Q to speak with an
vehicle records and explain the Advisor.
OnStar service options available. OnStar services cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
OnStar 14-7
in that area. The wireless service Services for People with OnStar Personal Identification
provider must also have coverage, Disabilities Number (PIN)
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar Advisors provide services to help A PIN is needed to access some of
services. Service involving location subscribers with physical disabilities the OnStar services, like Remote
information about the vehicle cannot and medical conditions. Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
work unless GPS signals are Assistance. The PIN will need to be
Press Q for help with: changed the first time when
available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar . Locating a gas station with an speaking with an Advisor. To
hardware. OnStar services may not attendant to pump gas. change the OnStar PIN, contact an
work if the OnStar equipment is not . Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or
properly installed or it has not been that meets accessibility needs. calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR.
properly maintained. If equipment or
software is added, connected,
. Providing directions to the Warranty
or modified, OnStar services may closest hospital or pharmacy in OnStar equipment may be
not work. Other problems beyond urgent situations. warranted as part of the vehicle
the control of OnStar may prevent TTY Users warranty.
service such as hills, tall buildings,
tunnels, weather, electrical system OnStar has the ability to Languages
design and architecture of the communicate to deaf, The vehicle can be programmed to
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired respond in multiple languages.
crash, or wireless phone network customers while in the vehicle. The
available dealer-installed TTY Press Q and ask for an Advisor.
congestion or jamming. Advisors are available in English,
system can provide in-vehicle
See Radio Frequency Statement on access to all of the OnStar services, Spanish, and French. Available
page 13-12. except Virtual Advisor and OnStar languages may vary by country.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
14-8 OnStar
Potential Issues A temporary loss of GPS can to function properly. These systems
cause loss of the ability to send a may not operate if the battery is
OnStar cannot perform Remote
Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The discharged or disconnected.
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Advisor may give a verbal route or
Assistance after the vehicle has Add-on Electrical Equipment
may ask for a call back after the
been off continuously for five days.
vehicle is driven into an open area. The OnStar system is integrated
After five days, OnStar can contact
Roadside Assistance and a into the electrical architecture of the
Cellular and GPS Antennas vehicle. Do not add any electrical
locksmith to help gain access to
the vehicle. Do not place items over or near the equipment. See Add-On Electrical
antenna to prevent blocking cellular Equipment on page 9-89. Added
Global Positioning and GPS signal reception. Cellular electrical equipment may interfere
System (GPS) reception is required for OnStar to with the operation of the OnStar
send remote signals to the vehicle. system and cause it to not operate.
. Obstruction of the GPS can
occur in a large city with tall Unable to Connect to OnStar Privacy
buildings; in parking garages; Message The complete OnStar Privacy
around airports; in tunnels,
If there is limited cellular coverage Statement may be found at
underpasses; or in an area with
or the cellular network has reached www.onstar.com (U.S.),
very dense trees. If GPS signals
maximum capacity, this message or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
are not available, the OnStar
may come on. Press Q to try the We recommend that you review it.
system should still operate to
call again or try again after driving a If you have any questions, call
call OnStar. However, OnStar
few miles into another cellular area. 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
could have difficulty identifying
the exact location. or press Q to speak with an
Vehicle and Power Issues Advisor. Users of wireless
. In emergency situations, OnStar communications are cautioned that
OnStar services require a vehicle
can use the last stored GPS the privacy of any information sent
electrical system, wireless service,
location to send to emergency via wireless cellular communications
and GPS satellite technologies to be
responders. cannot be assured. Third parties
available and operating for features
OnStar 14-9
may unlawfully intercept or access above copyright notice and this or other dealings in this Software
transmissions and private permission notice appear in all without prior written authorization of
communications without consent. copies. the copyright holder.
OnStar - software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED unzip:
acknowledgements AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR This is version 2005-Feb-10 of
Certain OnStar components include IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT the Info-ZIP copyright and license.
libcurl and unzip software and other LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES The definitive version of this
third party software. Below are the OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS document should be available
notices and licenses associated with FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/
libcurl and unzip and for other AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF license.html indefinitely.
third party software please see THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP.
http://www.lg.com/global/support/ EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR All rights reserved.
opensource/index and COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
https://www.onstar.com/web/portal/ For the purposes of this copyright
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, and license, Info-ZIP is defined as
getdocuments DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, the following set of individuals:
libcurl: WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,
NOTICE OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley,
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris
Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
THE SOFTWARE. Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,
All rights reserved. Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,
Except as contained in this notice, Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,
Permission to use, copy, modify, the name of a copyright holder shall
and distribute this software for any Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,
not be used in advertising or Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,
purpose with or without fee is otherwise to promote the sale, use
hereby granted, provided that the George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,
14-10 OnStar
Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the Pocket UnZip, WiZ or
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception MacZip without the explicit
Rich Wales, Mike White. to this condition is redistribution permission of Info-ZIP. Such
This software is provided as is, of a standard UnZipSFX binary altered versions are further
without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a prohibited from
express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is misrepresentative use of the
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the addresses or of the
incidental, special or consequential normal SFX banner has not Info-ZIP URL(s).
damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or 4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
inability to use this software. disabled. the names Info-ZIP, Zip,
Permission is granted to anyone to 3. Altered versionsincluding, but UnZip, UnZipSFX, WiZ,
use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new Pocket UnZip, Pocket Zip,
including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports and MacZip for its own source
and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces, and binary releases.
freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
restrictions: library versionsmust be plainly
marked as such and must not be
1. Redistributions of source code misrepresented as being the
must retain the above copyright original source. Such altered
notice, definition, disclaimer, and versions also must not be
this list of conditions. misrepresented as being
2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releasesincluding, but
(compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
notice, definition, disclaimer, and Info-ZIP (or any variation
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Accessories and
How Does an Airbag AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Antenna
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Passenger Sensing Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Active Emergency
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Rear Side Window . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Braking System . . . . . . . . 1-24, 9-63
What Makes an Airbag Antilock Brake
Active Fuel Management . . . . . 9-29
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . 9-51
What Will You See after an Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Add-On Electrical
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Appearance Care
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
When Should an Airbag Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Additional Information
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-32 Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Maintenance
Airbags Assistance Program,
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Adding Equipment to the Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Adjustable Throttle and
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42 Assistance Systems for
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-20 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Adjustments
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Assistance Systems for
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Air Filter, Passenger
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Alarm Audio System
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Alert Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Lane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66
Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-65
i-2 INDEX
Automatic Brake C
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Pedal and Adjustable
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
California
Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-24
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Perchlorate Materials
Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Automatic Transmission Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
California
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Proposition
Shift Lock Control Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
65 Warning . . . . . . . 10-2,
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 10-24, 10-79
Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Braking System Capacities and
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Active Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Carbon Monoxide
B Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Battery Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . 10-32 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Card Reader
Voltage and Charging Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 SD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 High Intensity Discharge Cargo
Battery - North (HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
America . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-24, 10-79 License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-34 Cautions, Danger, and
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-29 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Stoplamps, and CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Bluetooth Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-21, 7-25 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
INDEX i-3
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Check Connections Text Telephone (TTY)
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Ignition Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46 Customer Information
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-28 Traction and Electronic Service Publications
Child Restraints Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11
Infants and Young Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Customer Satisfaction
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Lower Anchors and Coolant
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-51 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 D
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44 Engine Temperature Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-8
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60, 3-63 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Danger, Warnings, and
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Child-View Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14
Cleaning Courtesy Transportation Daytime Running
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 Cover Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Climate Control Systems Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Door
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Cruise Control, Active . . . . . . . . . 9-51 Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-8 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Compartments Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
i-4 INDEX
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4 E Engine (cont'd)

Driver Coolant Temperature
E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Teen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Electrical Equipment,
Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-58 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Driver Information Cooling System Messages . . .5-37
Electrical System
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29, 5-31 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Engine Compartment
Driving Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Characteristics and Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Instrument Panel
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-40, 10-42
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Rear Compartment Fuse
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-28 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-11 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Emergency
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-13 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-31
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Engine
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82
Check and Service Engine
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-14 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Dual Automatic Climate Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
INDEX i-5
F Frequency Statement Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Engine Compartment
Fan
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Front Fog Lamp Instrument Panel
Features
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-40, 10-42
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Front Seats Rear Compartment Fuse
Filter,
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Heated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Front Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . 10-32 G
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28 Gauges
FlexFuel
Filling a Portable Fuel Engine Coolant
E85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Fluid
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-28 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Four-Wheel Drive
Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Requirements, California . . . . .9-70 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Warning Lights and
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Forward Collision Alert
(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-36, 10-25
i-6 INDEX
General Information Heated Infants and Young Children,

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Heated and Cooled Front Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Instrument Panel
GM Mobility Reimbursement Heater Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-30
H High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-55 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-11
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4 Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . 9-46 J
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Jack
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Jump Starting - North
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Daytime Running K
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-39
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 I Keyless Entry
High Intensity Discharge Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-20, 9-22 Remote (RKE) System . . . 2-5, 2-8
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Ignition Transmission Lock Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-4
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-29 Indicator
Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
INDEX i-7
L LATCH, Lower Anchors and Lights (cont'd)

Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-48
LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Lamps
Level Control Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Traction Control System
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 (TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Lighting Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Exterior Lamps Off
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Locks
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Lights Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-22
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Antilock Brake System Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-24 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Lane Change Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-28
Lane Departure
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Lane Departure Warning
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 for Children (LATCH
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-26 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
LATCH System
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Replacing Parts after a
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-19
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
i-8 INDEX
M Messages (cont'd) N
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-46 Navigation
Object Detection System . . . . .5-40
Maintenance OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Maintenance and Care Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-27
Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 11-3
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44 O
Recommended Fluids Object Detection System
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-22 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Mirror
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Child-View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Mirrors
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Automatic Dimming
Messages Oil
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Battery Voltage and Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Engine Oil Pressure
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-44
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-37 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-30
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 OnStar
Monitor System, Tire
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
INDEX i-9
OnStar Additional Parking Power (cont'd)

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-27
OnStar Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Brake and P (Park) Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
OnStar Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-29 Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Parking or Backing Pregnancy, Using Safety
OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-58 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Passenger Airbag Status Privacy
OnStar Vehicle Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . 13-14
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Passenger Compartment Air Program
Ordering Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7
Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-37 Proposition
Outlets Perchlorate Materials 65 Warning,
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 California . . . . . . . . . 10-2,
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Personalization 10-24, 10-79
Overview, Infotainment Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Phone R
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-21, 7-25 Radio Frequency
P Port Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Park USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14 Radio Frequency
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27 Power Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Radios
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
i-10 INDEX
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Replacement Parts Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-5 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Rear Seats Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-43 Running the Vehicle While
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Replacing LATCH System Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Rear Side Window Antenna . . . 7-10 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Replacing Safety Belt S
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-29 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Reporting Safety Defects Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-31 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 How to Wear Safety Belts
Recommended Fluids and U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Restraints Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Records Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Retained Accessory Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Recreational Vehicle Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-29
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-27
Reimbursement Program, Ride Control Systems Safety Defects Reporting
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Magnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Remote Keyless Entry Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 2-8 Roads U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Replacement Roadside Assistance Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Roof Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
INDEX i-11
Seats Service (cont'd) Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Maintenance, General Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Publications Ordering Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11 Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Services Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Special Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Steering System Messages . . . . 5-43
Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Steps
Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Shift Lock Control Function Power Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Check, Automatic Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Securing Child Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60, 3-63 Shifting Storage
Security Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Storage Areas
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Side Blind Zone Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65 Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Signals, Turn and Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Accessories and Special Application Services . . . 11-8 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Specifications and Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14 StabiliTrak Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
i-12 INDEX
Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Tires (cont'd)

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-66
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 When It Is Time for New
System Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Active Emergency Braking . . . .9-63 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Forward Collision Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1, 13-15 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Towing
Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-74
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-82
Systems Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-56 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-74
Driver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-83
Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-77
T Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-88
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Taillamps Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Traction
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-55 Control System (TCS)/
Teen Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Theft-Deterrent Terminology and Traction Control/Electronic
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25, 2-26 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Uniform Tire Quality Trademarks and License
Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Wheel Alignment and Tire Trailer
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-88
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-77
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
INDEX i-13
Transmission V W
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Vehicle Warning
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-68
Transportation Program,
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Warning Lights, Gauges,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Identification and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Turn and Lane-Change
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14 Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Turn Signal
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-46 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Wheels
U Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23 Alignment and Tire
Uniform Tire Quality Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-26 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-55 Vehicle Care Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 When It Is Time for New
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55 Vehicle Data Recording Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Updates and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-50
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Vehicle Diagnostics Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
i-14 INDEX
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-29
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

2015 Chevy Tahoe Suburban Owners Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 Chevy Tahoe Suburban Owners Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2k15_ct_tahoe_sub_22953640A.

2015 Chevrolet (With RPO AVF) Tahoe/Suburban

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

2015 Chevrolet (With RPO AVF) Tahoe/Suburban

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart B : Engine Coolant Temperature O : Power

In Brief Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Lane Departure

18. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Initial Drive

2. Slide the seat to the desired

To adjust the power lumbar support,

Second Row Seats

Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status Exterior Mirrors

To adjust power folding mirrors,

Interior Lighting ON: Turns all dome lamps on.

Dome Lamps Reading Lamps

Press m or n next to each reading

Transmission 2. Press the plus/minus buttons on Automatic Transfer Case

Single Speed Transfer Case

MENU: Press to select a menu. Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices

See Bluetooth (Overview) on Overview on page 7-21, Bluetooth

If equipped, some audio controls 2. Volume: Press to increase or

Cruise Control accelerate. If cruise control is

Forward Collision Alert change to amber and flash. In Rear Vision

Universal Remote System Sunroof Vent: From the closed position,

The sunroof also has a sunshade

Replace the vehicle's tires with

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks Warning (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

5. Repeat Steps 24 two more Keys (Keyless Access)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

when Q is pressed again within If enabled through the DIC, the

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

Press and hold 7 for more than

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry when Q is pressed again within

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Programming without a 3. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

To replace the battery: Remote Vehicle Start

3. Remove the battery. Laws in some communities may

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Door Locks Warning (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

Pressing the power lock switch manually overridden by pressing

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Safety Locks Doors Warning (Continued)

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The modes are: The power liftgate may be

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-21

2-22 Keys, Doors, and Windows

To operate, kick your foot straight up liftgate by another method or